Finance





Fitch: First Volcker-Compliant TOB Helps Muni Market Liquidity.

NEW YORK, Jun 17, 2014 (BUSINESS WIRE) — The development of a tender option bond (TOB) structure that complies with the Volcker rule paves the way for tax-exempt money market funds to remain a buyer of municipal bonds. However, this structure does not provide a clear means for bringing outstanding TOBs into compliance. The Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association estimated the TOB market at $80 billion. Fitch rated a new Volcker-compliant TOB structure brought to market by Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith last week.

We expect other banks that participate in the tender-option bond market to utilize similar structures for new TOBs in the second half of the year. For existing TOB trusts, banks may unwind the trusts and create new joint venture trusts or may potentially use a third-party non-banking entity as a sponsor to make those structures compliant.

In a typical TOB structure, the sponsor will deposit a fixed-rate bond or note into a trust that then issues one floating rate certificate (with a tender option) and one residual certificate. Tax-exempt money market funds may buy TOBs as the floating rate certificate’s tender option is often issued by the sponsor, shortening the maturity of the deposited bond.

The Volcker rule, which is expected to be fully implemented by July of 2015, prohibits banks from sponsoring the trust and providing any liquidity, credit, or remarketing services for the floating and residual certificates issued by traditionally structured TOBs.

The new structure establishes a joint venture trust that the liquidity provider, the floating interest holders, and the residual interest holders join. Each joint venture must have 10 or fewer parties. Joint ventures of this size were exempted from the Volcker Rule.

Additional information is available on www.fitchratings.com .

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article, which may include hyperlinks to companies and current ratings, can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com . All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.




MSRB Report: VRDO Market Down Five of Last Six Years.

WASHINGTON — The market for variable rate demand obligations has contracted five of the last six years, the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board said in a report released Wednesday.

VRDOs are long-term securities with short-term interest rates. Interest rates are reset periodically by remarketing agents on behalf of the issuers. The obligations have a tender feature that allows them to be sold at par. After VRDO issuance peaked at almost $120 billion in 2008, it declined in 2009, 2010, 2011, and 2013, the report shows. New issuance of VRDOs in 2013 fell to $13.2 billion, compared to $15.2 billion the previous year. During the first quarter of 2014, issuance totaled $1.49 billion, about 3% less than the amount in the first quarter of 2013.

While new issuance has stabilized in the area of $14 billion annually since 2011, the MSRB said, the overall size of the VRDO market has also shrunk considerably in recent years. It contracted 22% to $222 billion between April 2012 and March 2014, the report showed. VRDO par volume dipped 7% in 2013 from the previous year, while the number of trades declined by 9%.

Matt Fabian, a managing director at Municipal Market Advisors, said the continuous shrinking of the VRDO market is the result of a variety of factors. Investor demand for VRDOs remains very strong, Fabian said, but there isn’t enough supply to go around.

“It is entirely a supply issue,” he said.

VRDO issuers traditionally relied on bond insurance, Fabian said, but the decline of the bond insurance industry led many banks who provided letters of credit for VRDOs to stop doing so. Also, a large number of VRDO issuers were in the healthcare sector, Fabian added, and the uncertainty surrounding that sector generally has led those issuers to reduce the size of their VRDO programs.

Michael Decker, co-head of municipal securities at the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association, said many issuers are going away from VRDOs because of the “costs and complexities” involved in them, such as needing letters of credit and remarketing agents.

“Some issuers might like to find a more simple solution,” Decker said.

Bank direct purchases have largely stepped up to replace VRDOs, but Fabian said that the money market mutual funds that were major investors in VRDOs will continue to need floating-rate options, making the successful emergence of a Volcker Rule-compliant tender option bond structure extremely important. The first such TOB deal was completed late last week.

The MSRB report also details a decline in the market for auction rate securities, which were long-term securities that have variable interest rates that are reset on a short-term basis. No new ARS have been issued since 2008, and the size of the ARS market decreased 31% to $27 billion from April 2012 and March 2014.

The Securities and Exchange Commission and state regulators sued many broker-dealers for misleading investors about the liquidity risks associated with ARS. The ARS market collapsed on a widespread basis in early 2008 after firms that historically supported the auctions but were under no contractual obligation to do so, stopped propping them up. Most of the cases were settled.

BY KYLE GLAZIER
JUN 18, 2014 11:55am ET




Buffett Warning Unheeded as Catastrophe Bond Sales Climb.

Bond buyers are betting more than ever on the mercy of Mother Nature as they seek to boost yields being suppressed by central banks.

Demand for notes linked to insurance against hurricanes and other natural disasters is prompting investors to accept the lowest relative yields in almost a decade for this time of the year, when the Atlantic storm season gets underway. Buyers are speculating that the $22 billion market can continue its streak without an annual loss even as Warren Buffett said last week that Berkshire Hathaway Inc. is avoiding writing hurricane insurance in Florida because premiums have been pushed too low.

Investors who have snapped up $5.76 billion of new catastrophe bonds this year, the fastest pace of issuance ever as measured by data provider Artemis, are being emboldened by weather forecasts and average annual returns of 8.5 percent since 2002. Offerings this year include a record $1.5 billion transaction linked to potential hurricane damage in Florida.

“Wind season looks to be slightly below average in terms of the hurricane outlook and that’s attractive,” John Brynjolfsson, chief investment officer at Irvine, California-based hedge fund Armored Wolf LLC, which oversees about $700 million including the disaster-linked notes, referred to as cat bonds. “Although cat bonds are relatively tight, on a comparative basis they look attractive to capital markets investors.”

Spreads Narrow

Cat bond yields have dropped to about 4.7 percentage points more than benchmark interest rates, the lowest second-quarter level since 2005 and down from 6.57 percentage points a year ago, according to John Seo, managing principal at Fermat Capital Management LLC. The Westport, Connecticut-based firm oversees $4.5 billion, more than 90 percent of which is invested in cat bonds.

“The hurricane does not know the rate that was charged for the hurricane policy, so it’s not going to respond to how much you charge,” Buffett said at the Edison Electric Institute’s annual convention in Las Vegas on June 9. “And if you charge an inadequate premium, you will get creamed over time.”

The National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration predicts only one to two storms will escalate to major hurricanes during this year’s season, which lasts from June through November, compared to a historic average of three major storms. A measure of loss probabilities for cat bonds issued this year averages 1.32 percent, down from an average 1.95 percent for securities sold in 2013, according to Steve Evans, Artemis’s founder.

Reinforcing Models

Catastrophe bonds in the U.S. have returned 22 percent the past two years, about the same gains delivered by junk-rated corporate notes, during a period that included the damage caused by superstorm Sandy that tore through the northeastern U.S. in October 2012.

“Some of the events that kind of captured headlines, such as superstorm Sandy, as devastating and headline-grabbing as they were, did not trigger any losses of note,” Brynjolfsson said. That has helped to “reinforce the integrity of the modeling firms,” he said.

Insurance companies and reinsurers typically sell cat bonds to help cover their most extreme risks, with the proceeds of the issues set aside and paid out in the event of a qualifying disaster. Buyers get a relatively high interest margin for holding the notes and risk forfeiting their entire investment if the securities are triggered before they mature.

Japan Losses

Catastrophe-bond investors haven’t experience major losses on bonds since 2011, when damage caused by the earthquake in Japan that March caused $300 million of losses for securities issued by Muteki Ltd. that helped cover earthquake risks taken on by German reinsurer Munich Re.

The market’s track record through the 2008 financial crisis and natural disasters of recent years is “especially important for the key investors in the sector, which are pension funds, endowments and sovereign wealth funds,” said Michael Millette, global head of structure finance at New York-based Goldman Sachs Group Inc.

Demand has “grown steadily over the past four years,” with most funds typically allocating less than 1 percent of their assets to cat bonds, he said in a telephone interview.

Investors are willing to accept lower yields because they provide returns that aren’t correlated with other asset classes such as equities.

Florida Bonds

“When you factor in that you can’t find anything else that is non-correlating with a decent return, it’s easy to see that cat bonds are still very attractive,” Artemis’s Evans said in a telephone interview from London.

In Florida, where state-run Citizens Property Insurance Corp. issued a record $1.5 billion sale in April, Chief Risk Officer John Rollins said the insurer is seeing an increasingly diverse pool of investors.

The three year floating-rate notes, with a spread of 750 basis points more than borrowing benchmarks was originally marketed for $400 million, and attracted investors including “a pension fund for Scottish miners, a mutual fund backed by Japanese middle class savers, a fund dedicated to managing royal assets,” Rollins said in a telephone interview from Tallahassee.

‘More Mainstream’

Rollins said he saw no indication of “limited demand” even as new issuers are debuting on the market.

The Texas Windstorm Insurance Association announced an offering this month after contemplating the securities for three years, according to General Manager John Polak.

Three years ago, “the terms and conditions associated with cat bonds weren’t quite as attractive and competitive as they are today,” he said in a telephone interview from Austin. Now, cat bonds are “more mainstream” and “most importantly, pricing is at a point where it’s a realistic consideration” for the association.

The offering is expected to grow from the initially marketed $300 million to $400 million, according to Polak.

Italian insurer Assicurazioni Generali SpA (G), based in Trieste, also issued its first cat bond this year, 190 million euros ($256 million) in floating rate notes at a spread of 225 basis point more than the London interbank offered rate, Bloomberg data show. The notes, which mature in 2017, cover damages from European windstorms.

“I think there’s kind a tipping point that has been passed,” Citizens’ Rollins said. “If we have significant weather activity, if we have some bond get triggered, I think there will be recalibration mostly in the area of price, but not in the unwinding of structures. I don’t anticipate that a test of these structures will not be passed.”

By Caroline Chen Jun 17, 2014 9:05 AM PT

To contact the reporter on this story: Caroline Chen in New York at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Shannon D. Harrington at [email protected] Dan Kraut




Sewage-to-Fertilizer Plan Shows No Junk Bonds Stink.

A central Florida facility that would convert sewage into fertilizer is the latest project to tap relentless demand for the riskiest municipal bonds.

The Orange County Industrial Development Authority plans to offer $62 million of unrated debt next week on behalf of a unit of VitAG Corp., which plans facilities that combine biosolids with sulfuric acid and ammonia to produce fertilizer. The federally tax-free securities will finance a plant on a site in Zellwood, Florida, near tourist center Orlando.

The malodorous initiative may still come up roses for high-yield investors who have been inundated with cash for 23 straight weeks, Lipper US Fund Flows data show. The wave has buoyed bonds for industrial-development projects. They’re the riskiest subset of junk-rated munis, accounting for the most defaults in part because of the dependence on a single project.

“This is like the worst of the worst,” yet investors will probably buy it, said Tom Metzold, co-director of munis in Boston at Eaton Vance Management, which oversees about $24 billion in local debt. “When too much money chases too few bonds, deals come to market that have no right coming to market. The risk-reward profile is so out of balance, it’s nuts.”

Outsize Return

Local agencies can issue debt in the $3.7 trillion municipal market on behalf of private companies, whose credit backs the securities.

Speculative-grade industrial-development debt has gained about 14 percent this year, more than double the return for all munis, Barclays Plc data show. The bonds, which carry an average tax-free yield of 6.4 percent, are luring investors as interest rates remain near generational lows.

“We’re aware that municipal-bond investors are looking for yield and the high-yield market has performed well,” said Ed Zughaft, senior vice president of finance for VitAG, which is based in Beech Island, South Carolina. “We’re hopeful that we can take advantage of the timing here. We’ve already received a lot of interest from investors.”

Biosolids, organic materials derived from treating sewage sludge, contain nitrogen nutrients, which are used in fertilizer to replenish soil. The company would follow other commodity-based ventures that have turned to the tax-exempt market in the past 14 months for financing.

Private Equity

The Iowa Finance Authority sold $1.2 billion of junk-rated debt in April 2013 to fund the building of a nitrogen fertilizer plant by Egypt’s Orascom Construction Industries. At the time, it was a record speculative muni offering. In November, a Louisiana public authority issued $140 million of unrated bonds for a German wood-pellet producer. The deal’s tax-exempt portion yielded 10.5 percent.

Private-equity firm KKR & Co. (KKR:US) bought $95 million of taxable debt in the wood-pellet offer. In this month’s Orange County deal, an affiliate of TPG Capital, a Fort Worth, Texas-based private-equity firm with $54.5 billion in assets, will contribute at least $20 million in equity, according to offering documents.

An affiliate of Denham Capital Management LP, a $7.3 billion U.S. private-equity fund focused on energy and mining, will get $1 million from the financing proceeds, offering documents show. Denham owned part of VitAG until last year.

7.5% Yield

Bond documents cited an estimated annual interest rate of 7.5 percent on the debt, which has portions due in 2024 and 2036. For top earners, that equals a 12.4 percent rate on taxable securities. Benchmark 10-year Treasuries yield about 2.6 percent.

“There are some big investors in it,” said Justin Land, who helps manage $3 billion of munis at Naples, Florida-based Wasmer, Schroeder & Co. The company will look at the deal for its high-yield fund. “It can work, though like anything else in project finance, there are a lot of ways it can fail.”

Projects funded with unrated bonds are ramping up to meet the demand for speculative securities, which have grades at least 10 steps below AAA. Unrated bonds fall into the high-yield camp.

Investors next week can also buy debt for a senior-living facility called Rose Villa near Portland, Oregon, Bloomberg data show. The securities don’t have a rating.

By Brian Chappatta and Toluse Olorunnipa June 17, 2014




Tax Increment Financing: Tweaking TIF for the 21st Century.

Tax increment financing (TIF) can be a powerful economic development tool. Under the right circumstances, TIF can generate enough funding to make a real difference. And with the right safeguards in place, TIF encourages government and the private sector to form a partnership based on each other’s strengths.

“Without TIF or other government programs, the only redevelopment will be for the rich, by the rich,” says Stephen B.Friedman, a consultant with decades of TIF experience in Illinois and Wisconsin and a member of ULI’s Public/Private Partnership Council. For neighborhoods in need, he continues, “TIF works because government looks the private sector in the eye and puts the public money where the private sector is also willing to put the private money. You have to have a meeting of the minds about what works for the community and for the developers.”

Built on a foundation of growing tax revenues, TIF is vulnerable to both national and local economic downturns. Indeed, as the Great Recession spread throughout the United States, TIF districts became weak at just the time they were needed most. Moreover, as local governments cut budgets to the bone, the revenue generated in TIF districts came under close examination. In states where both TIF and education spending depend heavily on revenue from property taxes, TIF’s impact on education became a frequent flashpoint for controversy.

“The recession caused the whole development finance industry to take a hard look at what they are doing,” says Toby Rittner, chief executive officer of the Council for Development Finance Agencies (CDFA). At one extreme,

California Governor Jerry Brown in 2011 ended TIF for redevelopment and ordered the special authorities that managed TIF revenues to close. But most cities and states shared the view of TIF held by Minnesota’s legislature, which expanded a diminished TIF program as part of a 2010 jobs bill.

The hard look produced changes. “We discovered that TIF has a lot of depth,” says Rittner. “Coupled with a comprehensive approach to economic development, it can be used for more than just infrastructure and traditional redevelopment activities, and it can leverage other financing tools.”

TIF originated in an act of policy creativity in California in 1952: federal dollars flowing to remedy what was then called urban blight required a local match. In the subsequent decades, every state in the United States except Arizona has experimented with TIF in one form or another—and then in another and another. As the federal dollars dried up in the 1970s and 1980s, TIF nourished redevelopment. TIF has been exported: pilot projects are underway in Scotland and ­England, with versions tailored to their tax regimes.

From the developer’s perspective, TIF is just one of many ways to partner with government to share the costs of development. From the government’s perspective, TIF’s distinctive feature is that it provides a means to access new tax revenues to support the creation of these same new revenues, and more. Public investment increases private property values, which increases property tax revenues. Those new revenues can be leveraged to pay for the improvements that attract the private investment, setting up a virtuous cycle of increasing development that pays for itself and increases the tax base.

In the United States, TIF is governed by state law, but implemented by municipal governments. Although this discussion refers to cities, TIF can also be implemented by county governments, economic development authorities, or other municipal governments.

The following hypothetical example illustrates the components of TIF.

River City’s economic development plan aims to transform the city’s vacant industrial waterfront into a mixed-use district of offices, retail space, and housing lining a linear waterfront park. River City designates a TIF district on the waterfront, with a duration of no more than 15 years. The property tax revenue generated by the district at the time of designation becomes the frozen base revenue. The base revenue continues to flow to government coffers as usual.

The “increment” is any property tax revenue generated above the frozen base. Provided there is a spark to stimulate it, the increment grows over time, generating funding to pay—directly or through borrowing—for public investments in the district. River City can create a spark by working with a private developer on a development proposal. The city issues bonds secured by the forecast increment—the increase in property tax revenue expected from the developer’s proposal—to pay for upfront development costs, whether borne by the developer, the government, or both. At the end of 15 years, the TIF district is dissolved and the increment returns to general tax revenues.

(San Francisco Office of Community Investment and Infrastructure)

Diversity and Complexity

TIF interacts with tax regimes that differ by state. For revenue generation, TIF is most powerful in places with high property taxes. Because states with high property taxes often dedicate those revenues to education, TIF laws that allow access to the school district’s portion of the property tax increment can produce significant revenue. Although many states allow TIF to access retail sales taxes at a district level, sales taxes are relatively weak revenue generators.

Either the public or private sector can take the first step in initiating a TIF district. A community-driven TIF district “means the city is taking a proactive role and making policy decisions about priorities,” says Amanda Rhein, senior director for transit-oriented development at the Metropolitan Atlanta Rapid Transit Authority and a member of ULI’s Public/Private Partnership Council. A developer-driven TIF district, however, relieves the city of the need to court developers with an untested plan. A city’s policy culture may favor one approach, but many cities do both. Developers should expect development negotiations to be more intense if they are the ones initiating TIF discussions.

Today, depending on the state, TIF supports everything from expanding affordable housing to attracting manufacturers to industrial zones, including provisions for job training. In some states, TIF must be used solely for public projects, such as infrastructure; other states allow, and even encourage, TIF in support of private development costs, such as those for rehabilitating existing buildings or subsidizing the interest on loans for new construction.

TIF laws include what is known as a “but for” clause—a way of saying that private sector projects that would happen anyway, without support from the increment, are ineligible for the financing. Though a too-literal interpretation of the “but for” clause can unnecessarily restrict TIF’s economic development uses, “there has to be some way of assuring the public that the city is not just giving money away,” says Rachel Weber, TIF expert and associate professor of urban planning and policy at the University of Illinois at Chicago. “A city should be able to distinguish between ‘what is needed’ versus ‘what would be nice’ to fulfill its economic development goals.”

Cities have options on bearing investment risk. They may use the increment to secure bonds—especially useful for large, upfront development costs. They may also use what is called “pay-as-you-go” financing and expect the developer to secure the credit: the city participates by promising the developer a portion of the increment. Cities may also choose to fund, rather than finance, the endeavor, spending the accrued increment directly on the project.

Developers should not expect 100 percent of the increment to be available. Rittner advises cities to reserve some of the increment to pay administration expenses. Moreover, the amount of need—the financing gap for each project—typically dictates the portion of the increment awarded. In times of scarce private financing, the financing gap may be bigger than the city is able or willing to fill with TIF. Indeed, Rhein notes, “developers often cannot depend on TIF alone; they need to be creative about layering public sector programs—drawing on TIF, but also other tax credit and grant programs.”

Chicago

Shortly after Chicago Mayor Rahm Emanuel took office in 2011, he fulfilled a campaign promise by convening a TIF Reform Task Force. Advising on a program generating $500 million a year from 163 TIF districts comprising about 10 percent of the city’s property tax base and covering 30 percent of its land area, the task force focused on increasing transparency and accountability. Under Illinois law, over the 23-year life of a TIF district, as long as money is flowing into a district, the city can continue to initiate new projects, increasing the importance of an ongoing process for accountability. In addition to recommending aligning TIF with a multiyear economic development plan and capital budget, the task force advocated establishing metrics to monitor performance of the city’s TIF program.

Among the reforms, the city has inaugurated strategic reviews every five years and in July 2013 unveiled the public TIF Portal, a web mapping tool linked to each district and its associated projects. “The city is becoming smarter in how they give their money away and stricter in terms of financial audits and holding recipients accountable to their promises,” says Weber, a member of the task force. “The city has taken more of an investment mind-set to ensure they are not providing a huge windfall to the developer at the public’s expense.”

Political debate continues in Chicago, especially regarding education spending and whether TIF is still appropriate in the city’s central area, now in its second decade of strong development. “The city is a lot more reticent to do downtown projects,” Friedman observes. “The focus now is on the outer neighborhoods.” In addition, Emanuel in November 2013 issued an executive order requiring annual calculation of the “TIF surplus” that can be returned to the original taxing bodies, including Chicago Public Schools.

Atlanta

Atlanta’s TIF program, known as TAD (for tax allocation district) and run by Invest Atlanta, the city’s economic development authority, has also undergone changes. “The lull during the recession allowed us to reevaluate our program, use it to create jobs, and better align it with citywide economic development efforts,” says Rhein, who participated in Invest Atlanta’s strategic review in 2011.

Historically, Atlanta used TAD for gap financing, funding developers through grants that covered 5 to 15 percent of project costs via bonds backed by the increment. After the strategic review, Invest Atlanta expanded its project evaluation criteria to include job creation and business attraction. New types of projects include building retrofits, facade improvements, and streetscape enhancements. An energy efficiency grant program rewards participants in the federal government’s Better Buildings Challenge.

In Georgia, school districts and county governments join a city TAD at their discretion. School districts have opted to join half of Atlanta’s ten TADs. When school districts join, Rhein explains, “they negotiate something such as payments in lieu of taxes or a lump sum out of the bond issuance.”

In recent years, Atlanta has also begun using TAD funding for major infrastructure projects, such as the Atlanta BeltLine transit and economic development plan, and a downtown streetcar.

California

By terminating redevelopment authorities and their TIF powers, Brown sent a signal that the goal of compact, walkable development at infill locations—and needs such as affordable housing—will have to be met in new ways. Ongoing discussions throughout the state focus on how to replace what was lost with a comprehensive tool kit. ULI’s five district councils in California worked together on potential next steps, and in November 2013 released the report After Redevelopment: New Tools and Strategies to Promote Economic Development and Build Sustainable Communities.

“If California is going to continue to lead on sustainable development and meet the state’s growing needs for affordable housing and infrastructure investment, cities and counties require the authority, legal powers, and financing tools to encourage infill development,” explains Libby Seifel, head of the Seifel Consulting and a member of the ULI report’s working group. Although the governor recently announced support for expanding eligible projects in infrastructure financing districts (IFDs), which can use TIF, Seifel fears “that IFDs alone are too narrow and will not generate enough public investment unless leveraged with other funds. As the ULI report states, California needs a comprehensive set of tools to achieve the state’s environmental, housing, and economic goals.”

Best Practices

To get started on considering TIF, developers should learn the state’s TIF law and the city’s policy culture, and “understand the terms of the city’s boilerplate development agreement before initiating a request for participation,” advises Rhein.

Friedman advises developers to remember, as negotiations proceed, that TIF is “not an entitlement, it’s a gap filler. Be prepared for a complex set of negotiations, the expectation that you will open your business practices to scrutiny, and that a variety of public goals and values will be injected into your project.”

Because to foster a true public/private partnership, the CDFA recommends that the best practices of accountability, transparency, and due diligence apply equally to both partners. This is the best way to guarantee that TIF’s virtuous cycle is optimally achieved.

Sarah Jo Peterson is senior director, policy, at ULI.
Urban Land Magazine | Jun. 13, 2014




Moody’s Rates First TOB that Passes Volcker Rule.

Fears that a $75 billion corner of the municipal bond market for Tender Option Bonds would be closed down by the Volcker Rule may have been squashed with a new deal from Bank of America Merrill Lynch. The tiny $8.545 million deal has been structured to comply with Volcker Rule restrictions by using two loopholes in the Investment Company Act of 1940.

BofA’s new Tender Option Bonds (TOB) creation has received Moody’s Aaa/VMIG imprimatur. If regulators approve the new structure, it could be a template to restart the dormant TOB market.

Here is an example of a general TOB structure from Nuveen. The Volcker Rule does not apply to Nuveen, but the TOB structure is roughly equivalent to all muniland issuers.

TOB Structure

Bank of America and its investment arm Merrill Lynch have altered the way the TOB trust (green box in the chart above) is organized to satisfy Volcker Rule restrictions on a bank owning hedge funds or trusts.

Rather than being separate parties in a TOB, Merrill Lynch combined all the deal participants into a joint venture trust between BofA and the investors in the trust. This structure takes advantage of the joint venture exception in the 40 Act. Moody’s says:

Merrill Lynch’s transaction relies on the joint venture exemption from 40 Act registration. Unlike a typical TOB where Merrill Lynch would have acted as the issuer of the TOB trust, in the new structure, Merrill Lynch sold the bonds via a sale agreement to a joint venture trust. The joint venture agreement is between Bank of America, N.A. (A2/ P-1) as trustor and liquidity provider and the floating and inverse floating rate investors (the parties purchasing the interests in the joint venture).

BofA established the joint venture trust and Merrill Lynch sold the underlying bonds (State of Maryland General Obligation Bonds, State and Local Facilities Loan of 2013, First Series B Tax-Exempt Bonds due August 1, 2019 and the Cusip for the TOB is 46641N) into the trust.

The other parties in the joint venture trust will be money market and closed-end funds that buy the cash flow portions of the deal. The new structure limits the number of these outside parties in the trust to take advantage of another 40 Act registration exemption related to the number of parties in a trust (or hedge fund). Moody’s again:

The agreement limits participation to 10 parties. Joint ventures among 10 or fewer participants are exempt from registration under the 40 Act. TOBs structured as joint ventures do not fit the definition of hedge funds included in the Volcker Rule, making it possible for banks to sponsor and invest in them.

Here are the parties in the deal, according to Moody’s:

Liquidity provider and Trustor – Bank of America NA

Trustee – US Bank Trust NA

Venturers (that’s what they call it instead of “investors”) – to be determined but limited to 10

Remarketing agent – Merrill Lynch

This is muniland structured finance at its best. There are many other nuances to the deal that you can find in the Moody’s rating announcement. Stay tuned for reactions from regulators. Moody’s foresees current TOBs possibly altering its legal structure if the new BofA trust structure meets regulator approval.

By Cate Long JUNE 13, 2014




Detroit Reaches Bankruptcy Settlement with Some Bondholders.

DETROIT—The city of Detroit has reached new agreements with its largest municipal union and a separate settlement with a group of bondholders, likely reducing the number of creditors to oppose the city’s bankruptcy plan at a trial scheduled for this summer.

Terms of the settlements weren’t immediately released.

The tentative labor agreements between the city and the American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees Council 25 build on earlier agreements and cover almost all employees represented by the union. But the pacts still need to be ratified by the union’s membership by June 30, according to a statement from federal mediators Friday.

The union also agreed to support a larger debt-cutting plan by the city to make cuts to pension benefits as part of its plan to exit municipal bankruptcy. Those pension cuts, however, will be softened if the pension holders approve a complex plan relying on more than $800 million in outside funding from donors, foundations and the state of Michigan.

Pension holders “simply cannot risk the further serious reduction in pension, pay and job security if the Plan, and our collective bargaining agreements, are not approved,” AFSCME Council 25 President Al Garrett said in a statement, calling on his members to vote for the city’s bankruptcy plan.

The separate bondholders deal was worked out between Detroit’s emergency manager and two principals that either hold or insure the majority of limited-tax general obligation bonds issued by the city, according to a statement on Friday from the federal mediators in the bankruptcy case.

“The settlement recognizes the unique status and niche of LTGOs in the municipal finance market,” the mediators said. “The insurer of the LTGOs has made clear it will honor its insurance commitments on the existing policies.”

Several bondholder groups declined to comment. But one confirmed a deal had been reached.

“Given Detroit’s unique circumstances, Ambac has accepted a settlement with the City for the limited tax general obligation bonds,” the company said Friday. “Ambac’s net par exposure related to Detroit’s limited tax general obligation bonds was $92.7 million as of March 31, 2014. We expect to continue to pay claims of scheduled principal and interest on the bonds insured by Ambac.”

According to the latest version of the city’s debt-cutting plan filed in April, the city of Detroit owed about $547 million in principal and interest on these LTGO bonds.

Compared with unlimited-tax general obligations bonds, these limited-tax bonds aren’t usually backed by a specific tax-revenue stream, prompting the city to argue that it could offer a much lower payout for those bondholders in bankruptcy. But bondholders opposed the cut as unfair, warning it could roil the municipal-bond market in Michigan and potentially drive up borrowing costs for municipalities.

Detroit’s plan to exit bankruptcy—the nation’s largest Chapter 9 case with an estimated $18 billion in long-term obligations—originally called for a different treatment for the city’s bondholders. Unlimited-tax general obligation bondholders who reached an agreement with the city in April are to receive about 74 cents on the dollar in recovery on their claim under the plan. But limited tax general obligation bondholders who were still at odds with the city would only get between 10 to 13 cents on the dollar.

It was unclear on Friday whether the agreement would boost the recovery for these bondholders and by how much.

The mediation team, led by U.S. District Judge Gerald Rosen, added that “with this settlement, only a few remaining, albeit significant, disputes remain” between the city and its creditors. A trial has been scheduled for mid-August on the merits of the city’s debt-cutting plan.

A spokesman for Detroit Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr said he didn’t have an immediate comment about the deal, which mediators said was still being completed.

By MATTHEW DOLAN
Updated June 13, 2014 6:29 p.m. ET

Write to Matthew Dolan at [email protected]




Ballard Spahr: Water Resources Legislation Could Lead to Increase of U.S. Water P3s.

President Obama recently signed into law the Water Resources and Reform Development Act of 2014 (WRRDA). The statute begins to address ways to fund the billions of dollars necessary to update the country’s drinking water systems, dam infrastructure, levees, solid waste, wastewater, inland waterways, and ports. The legislation could lead to more widespread financing of water infrastructure projects through P3s.

Continue Reading.

June 13, 2014

by Brian Walsh, William C. Rhodes, Lee A. Storey, Steve T. Park, and Christopher R. Sullivan




Municipal Issuer Brief - June 9, 2014

Read the Brief.




East Dundee Appeals Wal-Mart TIF Case to State Supreme Court.

East Dundee appealed its dismissed lawsuit against Carpentersville and Wal-Mart to the Illinois Supreme Court this week. The retailer has announced plans to close its East Dundee store, above, and build a supercenter in neighboring Carpentersville.

East Dundee didn’t waste time taking legal action against Carpentersville to stop Wal-Mart’s pending move to the neighboring village.

East Dundee appealed its dismissed case versus the village and Wal-Mart to the Illinois Supreme Court, less than 24 hours after Carpentersville officials reviewed Wal-Mart’s draft application for financial assistance.

Wal-Mart, slated to build a supercenter at Lake Marian Road and Route 25, seeks $4.3 million from a tax increment finance district that encompasses its future location in Carpentersville. If Carpentersville doesn’t come through with the money, Wal-Mart won’t build there, according to the draft application.

East Dundee argues the retailer should not receive funding from a TIF district because the new site is three miles from the East Dundee store, which is also in a TIF district. State law mandates a distance of at least 10 miles to stop communities from poaching businesses from each other.

While the Carpentersville village board isn’t due to vote on Wal-Mart’s redevelopment agreement until late summer, East Dundee would rather strike now, Village President Lael Miller said.

“They may actually start doing some work prior to (Carpentersville’s vote), we don’t know.” Miller said. “We anticipate we’ll move forward with this and we’ll take our chances.”

History isn’t on East Dundee’s side, and the latest appeal marks the village’s fourth attempt at blocking Wal-Mart from leaving.

In February 2013 a judge denied East Dundee’s move for a temporary restraining order and threw out a lawsuit aimed at preventing Wal-Mart from receiving funding from the Carpentersville TIF district.

Six months later, Kane County Judge David Akemann dismissed the lawsuit against the world’s largest retailer and Carpentersville, saying East Dundee had no standing in the case because TIF money had not yet changed hands.

East Dundee appealed that decision in April and the Illinois Appellate Court Second District sided with Akemann when it dismissed the case.

Carpentersville Village President Ed Ritter isn’t concerned about East Dundee’s latest filing and expects Wal-Mart to go on as scheduled.

“We’re very confident that Wal-Mart will be open in Carpentersville before the end of 2016,” Ritter said.

In 2012, Wal-Mart announced it would close its 23-year-old store in East Dundee to build in Carpentersville.

The departure means East Dundee would lose about $850,000 in annual revenues from Wal-Mart. Miller estimates the village has spent about $83,000 in legal fees since the litigation began 17 months ago.

But it made more than $1.2 million from Wal-Mart in the same time frame, he said.

“Yes we did spend money but obviously we made more money in the meantime as well,” Miller said.

By Lenore T. Adkins




NFL Falcons Stadium Bond Fight Taken to Top Georgia Court.

An Atlanta bond issue to help finance a new stadium for the National Football League’s Falcons is being challenged before the Georgia Supreme Court over claims it violates the state’s constitution.

Home Depot Inc. co-founder Arthur Blank, who owns the Falcons, is getting help from the city to build a $1.2 billion football stadium to replace the Georgia Dome, which opened in 1992. The new site’s neighbors, who failed to persuade a state judge to invalidate the city bond issue of as much as $278 million, have appealed that decision to the state’s top court. They argue the city hotel tax to pay for the bonds is unconstitutional.

Superior Court Judge Ural Glanville in Atlanta last month validated the bonds and overruled all objections. Glanville found that the security for the bonds was “sound, feasible and reasonable,” and the stadium project met public purposes guidelines.

The neighbors’ appeal filed June 5, “delays the issuance of the bonds until final resolution” by the Georgia Supreme Court, John Woodham, the objectors’ attorney, said in an e-mail today. This would delay the city of Atlanta’s “public financing component” of the stadium project during that time, he said.

Construction of the stadium will proceed, Douglass Selby, an attorney for the city, said yesterday in a phone interview. While the bonds won’t be issued until the appeal is resolved, the city sought validation of the bonds early to accommodate any objections or appeals, he said.

Although the stadium will be state-owned through the Georgia World Congress Center Authority, the Falcons will operate it and keep stadium revenue under a licensing agreement. Jennifer LeMaster, a spokeswoman for the World Congress Center Authority, didn’t immediately return a call after regular business hours yesterday seeking comment on the case.

The Atlanta Falcons won’t comment on the bond issue because the team isn’t a party to the proceedings, Kim Shreckengost, a spokeswoman for AMB Group LLC, the Falcons’ parent company, said yesterday in an e-mail.

“We do have full confidence that our partners at the city, Invest Atlanta and the GWCCA will appropriately handle these challenges,” she said. “Construction of the new stadium has been under way for several months and we will continue to move forward.”

Neighborhoods Burdened

Neighborhood critics say the city-adopted plan unfairly burdens residents of two predominantly black neighborhoods. A group of community leaders, including three activists and a retired Baptist minister, won a court ruling in February allowing them to intervene in the city’s bond process.

The residents’ legal argument hinged on the claim that extending the city’s hotel tax to repay the bonds unconstitutionally turns a general law, applicable statewide, into one governing a single project. The city said in court filings that the bonds are authorized by state law and the plan’s use of 39 percent of the hotel tax is appropriate.

Glanville found no merit in the objectors’ arguments. Georgia law requires court approval before government general-obligation revenue bonds can be issued.

The case is Georgia v. Atlanta Development Authority, 2014-cv-242035, Superior Court, Fulton County (Atlanta).

By Margaret Cronin Fisk June 11, 2014

To contact the reporter on this story: Margaret Cronin Fisk in Detroit at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Michael Hytha at [email protected] Joe Schneider




Can Kentucky Stop Nonprofits from Abandoning Pension Obligations?

The Kentucky Retirement System is appealing a judge’s decision that allowed one of the employers in its membership to abandon the underfunded system as part of its bankruptcy restructuring.

A federal judge ruled on May 30 that Seven Counties Services, a health services provider, could leave the pension system because it qualified as a nonprofit corporation rather than a government entity.

Citing the 1963 federal Community Health Act, which was designed to begin the privatization of mental health services, the opinion said that Seven Counties was a result of the “metamorphosis from state-run mental health services to a community-based, private non-profit structure.” The ruling could clear the way for other similarly financially strapped institutions across the state to do the same. The state has a total of 13 community mental health centers that could qualify as nonprofits and opt to leave the system.

The retirement system’s board of trustees voted 12-0 on June 11 in a closed-door meeting to appeal the ruling. State lawmakers and Gov. Steve Beshear had publicly urged the board to do so in the weeks before the meeting.

Kentucky has the worst-funded retirement system in the country, holding roughly 23 percent of the money it has promised to pay its current workers and retirees in retirement benefits. That means the state system, not including police and fire employees and teachers, has roughly $8.7 billion in unfunded liabilities, according to the most recent actuarial report. About $91 million of that is attributed to Seven Counties and the retirement system would have to cover that cost if the agency is actually allowed to exit.

Some have said covering that $8.7 billion would drive up what state government employers across the state would have to put in annually to the pension fund to keep it solvent. By some estimates, governments would collectively spend more than 38 percent of their payroll costs next year on retiree payments alone. That’s up from 5.9 percent in 2006.

Jim Carroll, co-founder of the 3,600-member Facebook group Kentucky Government Retirees, said his group is “gratified” that the retirement board has voted to appeal the Seven Counties Services bankruptcy ruling. “As stakeholders, we are pleased that the board had moved to protect the long-term viability of the financially troubled [retirement] fund,” he said in an emailed statement.

But others are more skeptical, saying the state retirement system was already in a “death spiral” before the bankruptcy ruling. Chris Tobe, a Louisville-area pension investment consultant, noted that state employer contributions into the pension fund this year have collectively been only about half of what is actuarially recommended. That means the 23 percent funded ratio will likely sink lower after this year.

“The appeal is a desperate measure to try to prevent any of the other 12 mental health agencies from jumping ship,” Tobe said.

BY LIZ FARMER | JUNE 12, 2014




Washington State’s Pension Lesson.

A new brief from the University of Washington’s Center for Education Data & Research analyses the state’s teacher pension system, which has offered new enrollees a choice between a traditional plan or a hybrid plan since 1996. As other states consider similar changes to traditional pension plans, the paper notes that Washington provides a look into what could happen.

The paper finds that the “state’s financial exposure is significantly lower under the hybrid plan” as its per-teacher pension liability is approximately half as large as under the traditional plan. Interestingly, when given a choice, at least six in 10 teachers (statistics vary by year) choose the hybrid plan, the paper says. This runs counter to claims by traditional pension supporters that the defined benefit plans are more attractive and therefore better for recruiting talent.

Additionally, teachers may obtain more money under the state’s hybrid-plan. “In calculating potential retirement wealth accumulations under [the hybrid plans],” the authors note,”we find that teachers enrolled in Washington’s hybrid plan are likely to have a level of retirement security that is comparable or greater than that provided by the traditional plan.” The paper concludes that Washington State’s experience “suggests that teacher pension systems can be reformed in a way that is attractive to both teachers and states and ensures that significant resources are being set aside for teacher retirements.”




Pittsburgh Rebirth Tainted as Pension Fuels Deficit: Muni Credit.

The fiscal rebound of Pittsburgh, the former steel-city capital that shed a Rust-Belt fate by rebuilding its economy around universities and hospitals, has struck an obstacle that’s bedeviling municipalities nationwide.

Pennsylvania’s second-most-populous city faces an operating deficit next year for the first time since 2005, partly because of higher pension contributions after officials lowered assumptions for the retirement system’s investment returns.

Pittsburgh faces a month-end deadline to approve a plan to plug the shortfall, illustrating how even municipalities that have dodged bankruptcy struggle with pension burdens. The city, which teetered on the brink of insolvency a decade ago, earned its highest rating ever from Standard & Poor’s in February.

“We’ve come a long way; we see the light at the end of the tunnel,” said Michael Lamb, the city’s controller. “We have put more money in pensions than we’re required to, but we’re still not doing enough.”

Lower Target

In December, Pittsburgh decided to lower its pension-return target — adding $8 million to annual costs — to fall in line with national trends, according to consultants hired by the state to oversee the city’s recovery. The average assumed return rate last year for 150 U.S. public plans was 7.66 percent, compared with 8.08 percent in 2001, according to the Center for Retirement Research at Boston College.

More municipalities will lower targets as rating companies factor retirement liabilities into credit assessments, said Howard Cure, head of municipal research in New York at Evercore Wealth Management LLC, which oversees about $5.2 billion.

Pittsburgh has evolved from its industrial past, when plants producing coke used in steel-making would shower parked cars with ash. As manufacturing dwindled amid global competition, residents left. About 306,000 people live in the city at the confluence of the Ohio, Allegheny and Monongahela rivers, compared with about 604,000 in 1960.

By 2003, Pittsburgh was in crisis. It cut about 13 percent of its workforce that year, firing 446 employees, including almost 100 police officers. It also earned the dubious distinction of having the lowest credit rating of any major U.S. city. Pennsylvania officials placed it in the Act 47 program for distressed communities in December 2003, giving the state oversight over its finances and requiring recovery plans.

Turnaround Time

Since then, city officials have turned around Pittsburgh’s finances through steps such as taxing companies’ payrolls and temporarily freezing wages, said Dean Kaplan, a managing director at Public Financial Management Inc., one of the state-appointed consultants.

In a sign of the diversifying economy, U.S. Steel Corp. (X), which has been based in Pittsburgh since 1937, no longer ranks among the top 10 employers. The biggest is the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, and the city is also home to companies such as PNC Financial Services Group (PNC) and H.J. Heinz Co.

In November 2012, the state’s consultants said Pittsburgh was ready to exit the distressed program. Revenue had exceeded operating expenses every year since 2005, although transfers to pay debt and pensions in 2008 and 2010 generated shortfalls approved by the city’s fiscal overseers. State officials rejected the consultants’ recommendation in March, saying legacy costs such as pensions jeopardize the budget.

Deficit Ahead

That caution was borne out in the recovery plan consultants released last month in response to the state’s denial. The city faces a projected $14 million operating deficit in the year beginning in January and may use up its reserves by 2018, the report said.

The city’s change in how it levies real estate taxes curbed revenue, Kaplan said. At the same time, minimum pension contributions will jump to $43 million next year, or 8.6 percent of the general-fund budget, from $31 million, or 6.5 percent of this year’s plan. The swelling costs resulted from adjusting actuarial assumptions to reflect recipients’ longer life expectancy, and from lowering the target investment return on pension assets to 7.5 percent from 8 percent, Kaplan said.

Pay Up

The state’s consultants said the city should pay even more than required amounts over the next five years to sustain its pension system, which serves about 7,500 people and is about 58 percent funded. The average state and local plan had about 72 percent of the money needed to meet retirement obligations last year, the Center for Retirement Research said. In 2010, the city avoided a state takeover of its pensions by dedicating parking revenue through 2041 to the system.

The five-year road map recommends raising real-estate taxes and parking rates. Mayor Bill Peduto, a Democrat, wants to avoid the increases, and to do so, “all options are on the table,” said a spokesman, Tim McNulty, who declined to offer specifics. Officials have planned a public hearing on the consultants’ proposal for June 16, he said.

Kaplan said the city, which last sold municipal bonds in 2012, must also invest in roads and bridges. The consultants’ blueprint calls for selling $50 million of bonds in 2015 and again in 2017 for infrastructure.

Officials “are not going to have a hard time placing it” because of the city’s progress during the past decade, said Dennis Derby, who helps manage munis, including Pittsburgh debt, at Wells Capital Management in Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin.

S&P raised Pittsburgh’s rating in February to A+, its fifth-highest level, citing its diverse economy.

Pittsburgh general-obligation bonds maturing in September 2021 traded June 6 at an average yield of 2.4 percent, the lowest in 14 months and 0.52 percentage point above benchmark munis, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

By Romy Varghese Jun 12, 2014

To contact the reporter on this story: Romy Varghese in Philadelphia at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected] Mark Tannenbaum, Alan Goldstein




New York City Gets Low Yields in First Bond Sale Since Union Deals.

(Reuters) – A scarcity of new paper in the U.S. municipal bond market helped New York City borrow more at lower rates on Wednesday, in its first bond deal since Mayor Bill de Blasio’s multibillion-dollar accord with labor unions in May.

Critics said they expected investors to shy away from the city’s debt because of the new mayor’s liberal, big-ticket policies. But the city suffered no blowback in this sale, at least in part because of technical market factors, including low yields and tight supply.

New York increased the size of the deal to $1.02 billion from a planned $850 million offering of general obligation refunding bonds.

In the longest maturity, 2034, the city was able to borrow at a yield of 3.87 percent – 30 basis points lower than it did in March, when the same maturity sold with a 4.17 percent yield, according to the Mayor’s Office of Management and Budget.

Morgan Stanley was the senior manager on the negotiated deal, which had a two-day retail order period beginning on Monday resulting in about $203 million of retail orders.

The deal priced for institutional investors on Wednesday, when the size of the offering was increased, the OMB said.

Some analysts sounded a note of alarm on the city’s finances and creditworthiness after de Blasio reached an agreement with teachers, who had gone for years without a contract under former Mayor Michael Bloomberg.

De Blasio’s labor deal could cost the city close to $20 billion through 2021, not including healthcare savings, when applied to all city workers. It has helped create budget gaps of $2.2 billion to $3.2 billion from 2016 to 2018, according to the city’s estimates.

(Reporting by Hilary Russ; Editing by Jonathan Oatis)




S&P: What Should the Market Expect from the Rating Process for Catastrophe Bonds?

For the first five months of 2014, Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services rated $3.365 billion of catastrophe bonds (cat bonds). Included in this total is the largest cat bond issued to date, from Everglades Re (please see Everglades Re Ltd., published May 2, 2014, on RatingsDirect). Since 1999, we have rated more than $53 billion of cat bonds. Cat bonds have and continue to attract capital from new investors. Risk spreads continue to decrease as capital inflows increase. U.S. hurricanes remain the dominant exposure as all but $300 million of 2014’s rated issuance covers losses from this peril. For the first time, we rated a cat bond providing indemnified coverage for losses from typhoons in Japan (see Aozora Re Ltd., published May 30, 2014).

Frequently Asked Questions

Which office will rate a transaction and how does that affect the rating?

We have seven analysts in the U.S and U.K. that can be the lead analyst on a cat bond issuance. Typically, the office that rates a transaction will be the same as the office of the insurance company analyst. For example, Swiss Reinsurance Co. has global exposure, but because Swiss Re’s lead company analyst is located in the U.K., a cat bond it sponsored would be rated by a Standard & Poor’s U.K. analyst. This is irrespective of the covered peril. A U.K. or U.S. analyst can rate a bond covering losses from hurricanes in the U.S., earthquakes in Japan, or windstorms in Europe. For bonds sponsored by companies where the company analyst is not located in the U.K. or U.S., the analyst of a cat bond could be in either the U.S. or U.K., depending on availability.

The applicable criteria for this asset class does not differ between offices. In almost all cases, analysts from the U.S. and U.K. will participate in a rating committee for a cat bond. Our goal is to apply the criteria consistently regardless of the office or analyst, achieving a similar outcome in every case.

How long does the rating process take?

The time it takes to rate a cat bond generally ranges from three to five weeks, and much of this time overlaps the marketing period of a transaction. The periods are general ranges but the time frame can be shortened if the issuing parties are familiar with the process. We have had a couple of transactions that needed to be completed in a limited period where the 17g5 website was set up in two or three days, the requisite information was promptly posted, and we were able to complete our review and assign a final rating within two weeks.

The ratings on cat bonds are subject to SEC regulation 17g5. Before we begin the analytical process, an engagement letter must be in place between Standard & Poor’s and the arranger, following which a secure website must be set up to allow for controlled and confidential sharing of documentation between the deal counterparties and the designated rating agency. Only when a sufficient level of documentation is uploaded to the secure website can ratings analysis commence. This process to establish a secure website and have sufficient levels of documentation made available typically takes between two and three weeks. As issuers have become familiarized with the process, the time it takes to establish the website has been decreasing.

The typical process is for the underwriters to announce and market a transaction with a preliminary rating and we will assign a final rating by the closing date.

Once we begin the analytical review, we can typically assign a preliminary rating within two to three weeks. The preliminary rating typically involves review of the insurance risk being transferred via the cat bond. If the cat bond has a unique feature (e.g., the attachment point is based on indemnified losses versus previous issues, has a parametric trigger, or the attachment point was based on industry losses or covers a new peril such as flood), it could take more time for us to assign a preliminary rating.

Because cat bonds are subject to 17g5, all information needs to be posted to the transaction’s website. We will post any queries to the website as well. If there is a delay in posting information or a response, the time it takes to assign a rating could increase.

The review of the transaction documents takes a similar amount of time (two to three weeks), assuming receipt of blacklined (versus a transaction rated by Standard & Poor’s) documents and opinions. The document review is completed with the assistance of Structured Finance analysts to determine if our criteria related to special-purpose vehicles has been met.

Much of the information posted to the 17g5 website for our review is the same as that posted to the investor website.

Please note that all timings are indicative and the actual timing could vary depending on the specific characteristics of each transaction.

What information do you require to rate a natural peril catastrophe bond?

We usually request the following information:

For indemnity deals, we request:

What criteria do you use to rate catastrophe bonds?

The applicable criteria is Rating Natural Peril Catastrophe Bonds: Methodology And Assumptions, which was published Dec. 18, 2013, on RatingsDirect. The article sets forth the analytical process of rating cat bonds. The following is a brief synopsis of the process.

For bonds that have a robust legal structure, our rating is the weak-link (lowest) of three factors (see Assessing Credit Quality By The Weakest Link, published Feb. 13, 2012) subject to ratings caps.

These factors are:

Will Standard & Poor’s rate a deal in which a company uses its own model?

As set forth in our criteria, we would likely not rate a natural catastrophe bond that used a model generated by a ceding company. However, it is possible for us to rate a transaction where the ceding company did its own modeling using a model from either Risk Management Solutions Inc., EQECAT Inc., or AIR Worldwide Corp. However, this would increase the length of our review because we would have to review each adjustment and assumption made by the ceding company that differed from those that would have been used by the modeling firm, and be comfortable that they have the requisite experience to run the model and complete tasks typically performed by the modeling firm.

How does Standard & Poor’s incorporate property catastrophe risk and cat bonds quantitatively in its credit analysis?

Our capital model uses a company’s catastrophe-modeled exposures–the exceedance probability curve. We incorporate a tax-adjusted aggregate one-in-250-year property-line-only probable maximum loss (PML) catastrophe capital charge, net of reinsurance and other forms of mitigants (e.g., catastrophe bonds), and net of reinstatement premiums. The PML should also capture the impact of investments in catastrophe bonds. Unless a rating committee believes there is basis risk inherent in the cat bond, the company will typically receive full credit for reinsurance when determining its one-in-250-year property-line-only PML.

There are two premium adjustments. First, we remove risk charges related to catastrophe premiums (or the catastrophe load) to prevent double-counting catastrophe risk. In the absence of catastrophe loading provided by the (re)insurer, we assume a reduction in premium risk charges based on the company’s risk profile. The second adjustment is to reduce the net aggregate one-in-250-year modeled loss by 70% of the associated net property catastrophe premiums written (to account for a 30% expense ratio). We make this adjustment because the catastrophe losses would typically relate to current premium writings that reduce the impact of the loss.

This charge is also net of any applicable tax relief because tax-paying (re)insurers receive an income tax benefit from catastrophe losses that mitigates the potential capital impact. To tax-adjust the output, we use the company’s effective tax rate. We use the one-in-250-year charge across all rating levels in our capital analysis. In other words, the charge is not scaled for various rating levels. Furthermore, we apply the net aggregate PML property catastrophe charge-based one-in-250-year return period to all rated insurers and reinsurers globally.

Does Standard & Poor’s have to maintain an interactive rating on a cedant?

No. Paragraphs 64-68 of the criteria address this question. Examples of cat bonds we’ve rated but do not have an interactive rating on the cedant are Metrocat Re (Metropolitan Transportation Authority), Embarcadero Re (California Earthquake Authority), and Tar Heel Re (North Carolina Joint Underwriting Association & North Carolina Insurance Underwriting Association).

When does Standard & Poor’s publish its ratings?

We publish a presale article for the preliminary rating and a closing article for the final rating. We publish a presale after a transaction is announced, and publish a closing article after the transaction closes. A rating letter is issued only for a final rating.

Under Standard & Poor’s policies, only a Rating Committee can determine a Credit Rating Action (including a Credit Rating change, affirmation or withdrawal, Rating Outlook change, or CreditWatch action). This commentary and its subject matter have not been the subject of Rating Committee action and should not be interpreted as a change to, or affirmation of, a Credit Rating or Rating Outlook.

Primary Credit Analyst: Gary Martucci, New York (1) 212-438-7217;
[email protected]
Secondary Contact: Maren Josefs, London (44) 20-7176-7050;
[email protected]




A Visit with BlackRock’s Muni Managers.

The New York offices of BlackRock, the giant fund manager, crackle with the energy of money. BlackRock is the largest fund complex in muniland, with over $100 billion in municipal fund assets along with undisclosed amounts of separately-managed accounts that hold municipal bonds.

Peter Hayes leads the BlackRock Municipal Bonds Group. He is also a member of the Americas Fixed Income Executive Team and BlackRock’s Global Operating Committee. Hayes is muniland’s biggest kahuna. When he and his team talk, people listen.

Hayes, BlackRock’s head of municipal credit research Jim Schwartz and head muni strategist Sean Carney hosted reporters for a discussion last week.

Hayes said that muniland was oversold at the end of 2013. Now he is seeing a bigger crossover presence chasing yield. Crossover refers to non-traditional buyers who don’t use the municipal tax exemption.

Tax hikes on high income earners have helped produce steady muni fund inflows since January 15, according to Hayes. BlackRock has also had good growth in separately managed accounts (SMA). Muniland issuance is down 25 percent in 2014. Relative value is lower than the pre-crisis level, and Hayes says we may be in this environment for the duration of 2014. It is the strongest technical environment in some time, says Hayes.

Before its downgrade to junk status, Puerto Rico was 10 percent of high-yield indices. Now it is about 22 percent, says Carney. There is a significant amount of zero coupon bonds that skew the indices. Hayes says that Puerto Rico bought about a year’s liquidity with the March $3.5 general obligation (GOs) offering. If there is a debt moratorium, it will ripple through all the Puerto Rico credits.

All three are uniform in their concerns about state tax revenues. Schwartz is closely watching Puerto Rico, Detroit, the Illinois budget negotiations and Connecticut, which has high debt. Overall in the U.S., state sales tax revenues were up only 1 percent year over year. Personal income taxes were down 0.5 percent, which was anticipated after personal gains were loaded in 2013 due to federal tax changes.

Schwartz believes that Detroit could have mediated COPs outside of bankruptcy and saved $100 million of legal fees. There has been no definitive legal decision on GOs in Detroit. He said the Illinois legislature had some fictitious budget numbers and that the state’s payables would go up from $5 to $10 billion again as a way to manage revenue shortfalls.

Schwartz echoed a statement made by Hayes about Puerto Rico buying time, but not fixing its problems. Puerto Rico now provides too much information and needs to be better organized. PREPA, the electricity monopoly, is the first issue that needs to be addressed. My sense is that Blackrock is keenly interested in buying Puerto Rico bonds when the situation stabilizes, but there are too many unknowns to do so now.

Small rural hospital issuers may have a rough year, says Schwartz. The new healthcare act is drawing revenues away from them. Nevertheless, demand for new bonds is so strong that a recent $60 million Texas hospital deal has $1 billion of orders.

Chapter 9 cases are another variable in muniland that have left a lot of uncertainty about general obligation bonds. You don’t know where you stand until you get in front of a specific judge, says Schwartz. Dealing with different underlying state laws and constitutions makes these situations more complex.

Hayes mentioned taking a recent driving tour of New York City and was astonished at how much residential building was happening and how helpful that will be for the city’s tax base.

Overall, the duration of muniland is down to 15.3 years from 16.3 years in 2013. This is due to shrinking issuance.

BlackRock has been buying MCDX municipal credit default indexes to hedge portfolio risk, but very few single names (credit default swaps that insure against default for a single entity like California or New York City). The MCDX indices have been more liquid since Puerto Rico brought its March GO deal because hedge funds have been more active players in muni credit default swaps.

BlackRock has also been buying in the secondary market where possible. The company changed the mandate of its intermediate municipal mutual fund to allow the purchase of taxable (corporate) bonds. The fund now has about 3 percent corporate bonds.

Hayes said that it is hard to see outflows beginning again unless interest rates go up or investors start taking gains. Muniland has gotten so rich, it is hard to sustain these high-fund inflow levels.

By Cate Long

JUNE 9, 2014




Reed Smith: Show Me The Money: For Water And Transportation Projects, the Question is Always How to Pay.

Two recent important developments in Congress illustrate the opportunities, and limits, in financing infrastructure projects in today’s Washington. First, the House of Representatives and the Senate, by overwhelming margins, agreed to a conference report ironing out the differences on H.R. 3080, the Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014 (“WRRDA”), which pays for navigation, dredging, and flood protection projects throughout the country. The legislation heads to the President’s desk for his expected signature. Second, the Senate Environment and Public Works Committee unanimously approved legislation reauthorizing the nation’s surface transportation program S. 2322, the MAP-21 Reauthorization Act. However, the circumstances behind each bill are not the same: the Harbor Maintenance Trust Fund (“HMTF”), which funds water projects, has a surplus of more than $8 billion. Meanwhile, the Highway Trust Fund (“HTF”), which funds highway and mass transit projects, is almost insolvent. The funding disparities between the two indicate the challenges in providing infrastructure funding in today’s Washington.

$5.4 billion to pay for 34 water projects through Fiscal Year 2019.

According to the Congressional Budget Office, WRRDA authorizes $5.4 billion for water projects, which includes 34 projects, through Fiscal Year 2019. The key, in this era of no congressional earmarking, is that funds must go to water infrastructure projects that have (1) a completed report by the Army Corps that indicates that the project is in the federal interest, and (2) a completed environmental impact statement (section 1005(a)). As we noted previously, the HMTF is supported entirely by user-fees, yet sees half of its revenue diverted from port projects to support the federal government’s activities. Section 2101(b) of WRRDA addresses this by requiring all trust funds to be used for water projects by Fiscal Year 2025, leading to a large supply of funds for water projects.

But what about highways and mass transit?

Compare the relatively easy passage of WRRDA with the reauthorization of the nation’s transportation infrastructure program. Bridge, highway and mass transit projects are financed federally by the HTF, which itself is funded primarily by the 18 cent gasoline tax. Unfortunately, the Department of Transportation estimates the HTF will face a shortfall before the end of this fiscal year: gas tax revenue has fallen, requiring transfers from the general fund (i.e., the United States taxpayer), with the latest being a $9.7 billion transfer shortly after the start of FY 2014. However, the balance has continued to drop. The DOT notes “as of April 25, 2014, the Highway Account cash balance was $8.7 billion,” which will likely require another cash infusion before September 30. The MAP-21 Reauthorization Act would reauthorize surface transportation projects for six years at the baseline level established by the CBO, which is equal to current funding plus inflation. Even that amount is unsustainable, without new funding to the HTF. Nor is it enough to address the nation’s infrastructure deficit, as noted by the American Society of Civil Engineers and others. Before the MAP-21 Reauthorization Act can become law, Congress will have decide whether additional transfers from the general fund are required or whether a long-term funding mechanism is possible.

The likelihood of Congress making any decision on raising revenue seems unlikely, given the pending midterm elections. What is more likely is that Congress, failing to pass any legislation on transportation funding, waits until the 114th Congress convenes in 2014 to start anew.

Last Updated: May 29 2014
Article by Christopher L. Rissetto and Robert Helland
Reed Smith




U.S. Municipal Bond Market Continued to Shrink in Q1 - Fed.

(Reuters) – The amount of outstanding U.S. municipal bonds continued shrinking in the first quarter to $3.661 trillion from $3.671 trillion in the final quarter of 2013, Federal Reserve data released on Thursday showed.

Households, the backbone of the market, held $1.604 trillion bonds in the first quarter, compared to $1.626 trillion the quarter before and $1.676 trillion in the first quarter of 2013.

The Federal Reserve does not seasonally adjust the levels of outstanding debt, but does seasonally adjust the flow of the funds data. That data shows households shed $110.9 billion bonds in the first quarter. Banks, however, acquired $36.2 billion and mutual funds $28.8 billion in the quarter.

(Reporting By Lisa Lambert; Editing by Meredith Mazzilli)




U.S. Housing Finance Agencies Use Alternative Financing To Meet Their Mission

U.S. housing finance agencies (HFAs) have filled a role as financiers of affordable single-family homeownership since the early 1970s. Traditionally, they did this by purchasing loans from lenders using proceeds from tax-exempt municipal bonds they issued. Because the interest rate on the bonds was typically lower than that on taxable debt, HFAs held an advantage over other loan financiers as long as the loan was for a first-time homebuyer and conformed to other qualifications regarding the borrower and the property.

The benefit of tax-exempt financing has disappeared since the financial crisis, to which the Federal Reserve responded in part by keeping market mortgage rates low. Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services surveyed 32 HFAs in September 2013 about their experience with and thoughts on low interest rates. At the time, the rate on a 30-year fixed rate mortgage was 4.57%, according to Freddie Mac. Eighty-one percent of the HFAs responded that higher mortgage rates would be a benefit, but rates have fallen even lower, to 4.14% currently.

(Watch the related CreditMatters TV segment title, “Innovative Single-Family Home Financing And Stable Loan Performance Continue To Shape U.S. Housing Finance Agencies,” dated June 6, 2014.)

HFAs Respond With Various Ways Of Financing Loans

HFAs have adjusted to the new normal of low mortgage rates by financing loans without issuing bonds. Our survey, answered by 33 HFAs, shows that HFAs financed 89% of the dollar amount of loans ($8.1 billion total) that they did in 2008 ($9.2 billion total) despite issuing 61% fewer mortgage revenue bonds (MRBs) in 2013 than in 2008. So, while lower interest rates have hindered HFAs’ ability to meet their objective, the impact hasn’t been as great as one might expect. On the debt side, HFAs financed only $3.3 billion of loans with bonds in 2013 compared with $8.4 billion in 2008.

HFAs filled the gap with various financing techniques, primarily the sale of mortgage-backed securities (MBS) with backing from Ginnie Mae or Fannie Mae. HFAs originate the loans in an MBS sale, but instead of warehousing them for a bond program, they package the loans into MBS and sell them on the “to-be-announced” (TBA) market, which is not limited to tax-exempt investors and avoids the problem of issuing bonds with the possibility of declining mortgage rates before the loans are purchased. The sale price typically includes a premium from buyers looking for a security that provides moderate yield with high credit quality. TBA sales surpassed MRB financing in 2012 and remain the most prevalent form of loan origination, with $3.6 billion in 2013, up from just $214 million in 2008. In six years, MBS sales went from the least-used loan origination method to the most common, increasing by 1,695% in par amount. Other loan-origination techniques that have supplanted MRBs are sales of non-MBS loans, which rose to about $800 million in 2013 compared with $235 million in 2008, and direct purchase loan participations, which increased to more than $400 million in 2013 from $300 million in 2008 but have slipped to fourth position in 2013 compared with second place in 2008.

These trends are in step with the responses from our 2013 survey. Forty-four percent of HFAs reported that they had sold MBS on the TBA market by 2013, and 22% had sold whole loans. Another 16% said they were considering entering the TBA market, and 3% said they might begin to sell whole loans.

MBS sales, in particular, seem to have found a permanent position in HFA loan financing. Once considered a method of last resort, HFAs now see MBS sales as a desirable way to diversify their revenue. Since the sale price comes with a premium paid at purchase, the HFAs receive the benefit of the transaction immediately. This contrasts with bond programs, which provide a steady stream of revenue over many years.

Balance Sheets Have Shrunk, But Equity Has Grown

Alternate loan origination methods have enabled HFAs to recover most of their lost loan production, but because the loans do not remain with the HFAs, the amounts of the individual loans are becoming smaller. Excluding the New York City Housing Development Commission, which does not have a significant single-family program, the average HFA had $3.4 billion in assets and $2.5 billion in loans in 2008. By 2013, HFA assets had decreased to $3 billion and loans had fallen to $2.1 billion; at the same time, HFA equity has increased. The equity-to-asset ratio reached 20.42% in 2012, up significantly from 16.39% in 2008. With the increase in equity, HFA ratings have generally crept upward with 11 upgrades and five downgrades since 2008.

HFAs have proven to be resilient and innovative in addressing affordable housing needs despite an environment that many consider suboptimal for affordable housing lending. Perhaps loan production would be stronger with higher interest rates, but the persistently low rates have caused HFAs to use different methods to stay on course with their mission. The new lending strategies have had the unintended effect of improving HFA credit quality despite their reduced balance sheets. Since Standard and Poor’s projects that interest rates will average less than 5% through 2015, we believe that HFAs will continue to originate loans outside of MRBs. Should prepayments continue on existing loans, causing further redemption of debt, equity ratios will likely strengthen, further supporting a climate that has allowed for the recent positive rating actions on housing finance agencies.

Chart 1  |  Download Chart Data

image

Chart 2  |  Download Chart Data

image

Related Criteria And Research

Related Research

A Survey Of U.S. Housing Finance Agencies Finds Many Would Welcome Higher Interest Rates, Sept. 3, 2013

Primary Credit Analyst: Lawrence R Witte, CFA, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5037;
[email protected]
Secondary Contact: Mikiyon W Alexander, New York (1) 212-438-2083;
[email protected]



Market Shrinking: Bank Holdings Up, MMF Holdings Down.

WASHINGTON — The total amount of outstanding municipal securities and loans in the market dropped .28% to $3.66 trillion in the first quarter this year from the fourth quarter of last year, as bank holdings rose 1.43% and money market fund holdings plummeted 3.86%.

These are the highlights from the Federal Reserve Board’s Flow of Funds report for the first quarter of this year, which was released Thursday.

Outstanding munis in the first quarter of this year decreased to $3.66 trillion from $3.67 trillion at the end of last year and were down 1.9% over a 12 month period.

The decline in outstanding munis has been a trend since the end of 2010, said Michael Decker, managing director and co-head of municipal securities for the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association.

In the fourth quarter of 2008, outstanding munis peaked at about $3.77 trillion, but have dropped 2.9% through the first quarter of this year.

“The market is shrinking, even if a bit more slowly,” said Matt Fabian, a managing director at Municipal Market Advisors. “It makes it less comfortable for buyers because there is more competition.”

As for the reasons why, Decker said, “I think many issuers are still wrestling with a kind of anemic recovery and are fiscally not were they were before the financial crisis began. They’re de-leveraging,” reducing their amount of debt to shore up their finances.

While gross muni bond issuance was strong for part of the period since 2010, that was mostly due to refundings done to take advantage of low interest rates. But new money issuance hasn’t kept pace with redemptions and calls, Decker said.

Fabian agreed and said he has determined that 3.4% or about $105 billion of the current outstanding munis will mature before the end of the year and that new issuance won’t make up for that.

The drop in money market fund holdings and the increase in bank holdings also are trends.

Money market funds fell 3.86% to $296.4 billion in first quarter of this year from $308.3 billion at the end of last year and were down 5.15% from $312.5 billion in the first quarter of 2013.

Decker said there has been a 42% drop in money market fund muni holdings since the end of 2008 when they were $509.5 billion.

“That trend is likely to continue,” he said, adding, “It’s a trend directly related to the rise in bank holdings.”

“Many issuers have shifted at least part of their variable rate and short-term debt from public market products like variable rate demand notes to bank products like floating rate notes or loans with floating rate components,” he said.

VRDNs have liquidity features and can be put back to banks. During the financial crisis, liquidity banks’ ratings were downgraded, many below investment-grade, which caused investors to put bonds back to banks and that triggered penalty rates on the VRDNs for issuers. Also letters of credit and other liquidity products became hard to get and expensive.

While that situation has abated somewhat, issuers have found that issuing floating rate notes or taking floating rate loans from banks can be more cost-effective because they don’t to pay for remarketing agents or liquidity providers, Decker said.

Fabian added, “Low rates are wearing away many investors” from MMFs.

As money market fund muni holdings have plummeted, bank muni holdings have showed gains. Bank holdings rose 1.43% to $433.1 million in the first quarter of this year from $427.0 million at the end of last year. They have jumped 12.73% from $384.2 billion in the first quarter of 2013.

“This is also a very significant trend,” said Decker. “Banks have been getting involved in the municipal market in different ways.”

Not only are they providing fixed rate products to state and local governments, but Decker says he has heard anecdotally that some banks are buying fixed-rate muni bonds with maturities as far as 15 years out.

“It’s an attractive product for them,” he said. Munis have relatively low credit risk and general obligation bonds are particularly attractive under the capital requirements of bank regulators.

Also banks have faced fewer commercial lending opportunities during the recovery because the business sector has not be expanding and, as a result, banks have money to spend, he said.

But Fabian said the increase in bank holdings is the slowest since the first quarter of 2011. “They are not a limitless source of demand,” he said of banks.

BY LYNN HUME
JUN 5, 2014




MSRB to Unveil EMMA Price Discovery Tool.

WASHINGTON — The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board plans to soon unveil a new price discovery tool on EMMA that will allow investors to compare the prices and yields of municipal securities that share the same characteristics.

The tool is designed to improve price transparency for retail investors and others in the municipal market, something regulators have called for.

In its Report on the Municipal Securities Market that was issued in July, 2012, the SEC recommended that the MSRB “promptly pursue enhancements to its EMMA website so that retail investors have better access to pricing and other municipal securities information.”

With the new tool, investors will be able to enter the nine-digit Cusip of any municipal security on the MSRB’s EMMA website and find other munis that have the same maturity dates, interest rates and other features.

Investors will be able to select up to five securities from those results and do a side-by-side comparison of prices and yields. They will also be able to graph up to five securities for a visual representation of trading trends that show the daily high and low prices over a period of time.

In addition, EMMA will show a graphical summary of the daily high and low price for every municipal security on EMMA, with a scatter plot of trade prices over time. The grid display of trade data for individual securities will provide a daily summary of trade prices, yields, principal amounts and other trade information.

These enhancements will be second set of EMMA changes the MSRB has announced this year.

In February, the board unveiled an updated look to the EMMA website, with a focus on improving ease of navigation for investors and other users.

A “pilot” feature was added to the site allowing users to search all state, city, county and other municipal securities issues in a particular site. This “issuer home page” is prominently presented via a map on the site’s landing page. A daily recap feature highlights the most actively-traded securities each day, and provides links to marketwide data.

The board has invited reporters to join a webinar scheduled for June 5 at 1:00 p.m. for a demonstration of the new price discovery tool.

BY LYNN HUME
JUN 3, 2014




Municipal Issuer Brief - June 2, 2014

Read the Brief.




Green Bonds Seen Tripling to $40 Billion on New Entrants.

With more than $16.6 billion issued worldwide this year, 2014 is on track to surpass $40 billion in green bonds as more companies issue the debt to finance clean energy projects, according to a report by Bloomberg New Energy Finance.

That’s only about 1 percent of the total $1.4 trillion U.S. corporate bond market, as asset-backed securities and self-labeled corporate bonds surge, the London-based research company said in a report yesterday.

Green bonds offer a simple method for investors to tap into fixed income markets and finance clean energy, including energy efficiency and sustainable business practices, and have already exceeded the $14 billion issued last year.

A coalition of banks, including Bank of America, JPMorgan Chase & Co., Credit Agricole SA (ACA) and others created a common set of criteria for green bonds in January to act as a catalyst for the development of the market.

By Ehren Goossens Jun 3, 2014

To contact the reporter on this story: Ehren Goossens in New York at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Reed Landberg at [email protected] Will Wade, Robin Saponar




The 7 Deadly Sins of Public Finance.

There’s no sure-fire way to get fiscal policy right. But there are a few simple ways to get it disastrously wrong.

This is part of the ongoing Finance 101 series that breaks down the basics of public finance for public officials.

The temptation of the quick fiscal fix has seduced just about every lawmaker at one time or another. Scraping pennies together to balance the budget? Perhaps skipping a contribution to the public employee pension plan is the best way to get through the year. Can’t afford to pay for building maintenance? Push some of it off into the following year’s liabilities. Governments have been using these and other money-shuffling tricks since balanced budgets and municipal financing were invented. But in the aftermath of the Great Recession, short-sighted gimmicks like these became more common as governments looked for any solution to combat dwindling revenues. Revenue is back up now in most places, but some of the fiscal trickery has hardened into common practice.

“If it happens for a year or two in a down economy, that’s understandable,” says Tom Kozlik, an analyst with the finance firm Janney Montgomery Scott. “In 2009 and 2010, you didn’t want that to be the time you raise taxes. But, as an analyst, if I’m looking at a situation where the same things are happening pre- and post-recession, then it’s a significant problem.”

What follows is Governing’s list of the most tempting financial schemes that can severely weaken a government’s fiscal future when practiced as a matter of course. Although the consequences aren’t necessarily lethal, those that make heavy use of these 7 Sins of Public Finance find that they only succeed in digging deeper financial holes.

1. Balancing the Budget with One-Time Fixes

States and many cities have a legal obligation to balance their budgets each year. But there are all sorts of tricky maneuvers that can place a government in technical compliance with that rule. Shifting payments into the next fiscal year, for example, can instantly take the problem off the current books. But it serves only to make the following year’s budgeting that much more difficult. Borrowing money for operating costs, another common tactic, may be even more dangerous. It adds to the public’s long-term debt without creating any related future public benefit.

Bad Choice
One of the most perilous quick fixes is the practice of taking costs out of one fund and transferring them to another. New York did that in 1992, when it balanced its general fund budget by taking the state’s historic canal system and moving it to the Thruway Authority. The canal system, which includes the Erie Canal, has traditionally been a financial albatross — it costs up to $90 million to run each year but generates only a few million dollars in revenue. The deficiencies are highlighted every time the Thruway raises its tolls, particularly during a stretch in the 2000s when it raised tolls four out of five years to cover the canal system. The problem is that New York never solved the real issue — the canals are simply draining a different fund. “You’re creating the illusion that things are in balance but you haven’t actually changed any of the financial facts,” says Peter Hutchinson, a state and local government consultant for Accenture. “In the case of the Thruway Authority, the issues with the Erie Canal didn’t go away.”

Better Choice
DeKalb County, Ga., was downgraded by rating agencies in 2012 after years of transferring money from one fund to bail out another in an effort to meet operating costs. The result was an overall deficit that never seemed to go away. Finally officials in DeKalb took a painful but responsible step. They raised taxes, cut expenses (including a reduction in staff) and added to cash reserves. The county also imposed new controls on fund transfers. By the 2014 fiscal year, DeKalb had stopped cash-flow borrowing and its credit outlook was raised to positive.

2. Ignoring the Long-Term Consequences of a Deal

Few governments have a long-term financial plan and even fewer have multiyear budgets. Many don’t even require a fiscal analysis of proposed legislation. That’s made it possible for some, facing immediate demands for wage increases, to buy off public employee constituencies by increasing retirement benefits at an unsustainable long-term cost. Other governments have been wooed by the prospect of privatizing assets as a way to get quick cash, a move that some have called the governmental version of an unwise payday loan.

Bad Choice
In 2008, Chicago accepted a one-time fee of a little more than $1 billion in exchange for giving up control of its 36,000 parking meters for 75 years. The public outcry started almost immediately as the new private owners pushed through a substantial increase in parking rates. A report by an inspector general brought in to assess the consequences estimated that the process used to award the deal cost the city $974 million, and that the amount charged to the private purchaser should have been much higher.

Better Choice
Chicago learned a lesson. Five years later, Mayor Rahm Emanuel, elected in 2011, halted a possible deal to privatize Chicago’s Midway International Airport. Citing the problems with the city’s parking deal, he insisted that an airport privatization arrangement share revenue with the city and demanded a Travelers’ Bill of Rights to cap parking costs and food prices. The demands were enough to scare off the potential investors, almost certainly a benefit to the city in the long run.

3. Taking on Too Much

One of the reasons privatizing assets has become alluring to governments is because many of them have been burned by taking on more public investments than they could handle. This frequently involves development projects funded by municipal bonds. If a project’s tax revenues don’t deliver, governments have to pay the difference to bondholders out of their general fund budgets — a promise that becomes an embarrassing burden for some that can ill afford the actual risk. “It’s a question of scale,” says Julie Beglin, vice president of Moody’s Investors Service local government team. “Is the scale affordable for the government if the project doesn’t go well?”

Bad Choice
In 1996, Hamilton County, Ohio, got voters to approve a sales tax increase to help pay for two new Cincinnati sports stadiums by offering them a property tax break. But the stadiums, which cost more than $1 billion, never generated the downtown business that local officials had hoped to see. As the county found the stadium debt financing eating up an increasing share of its budget, it repealed the property tax break, then raised taxes. It sold off a hospital and refinanced the stadium debt. But the annual stadium costs — $30 million in 2008 — keep rising. In 2014, the county is projected to put as much as $50 million toward its two stadiums.

Better Choice
By contrast, the development of a downtown sports arena in Washington, D.C., in the mid-1990s has been heralded as the starting point of a hugely successful revitalization of the center of that city. The arena was privately developed; the city provided the land and infrastructure in what was then a barren and oft-times dangerous part of town. Now the area is home to retail, restaurants and hotels that churn out millions in annual tax revenue. The city is attempting to apply the same concept today with a major league soccer stadium after local officials refused to take on the main responsibility for developing the project.

4. Misapplying a Temporary Windfall

This is the sin that many governments commit when it seems like the good times will never end. Every economic boom is followed by a bust, but elected officials are often tempted to spend money as if that weren’t true, using one-time surpluses in especially good years to cover recurring expenses that they will have to meet in the bad years. When the downturn comes, the money to meet these expenses isn’t there. “State and local officials get into this over and over again,” says Steve Dahl, a consultant for Deloitte. “They make very generous decisions at the top of a bull market run instead of recognizing where they are in the economic cycle.”

Bad Choice
In the early 2000s, California reacted to its booming economy by granting pay raises and increased benefits to public employees, including some benefits that were awarded retroactively. Thanks to that decision and to the stock market crash later in the decade, the state and its localities have seen their entitlement bills multiply. In the first 10 years of this century, the state’s pension contribution mushroomed from $611 million to $3.5 billion. Had pensions been left alone, today’s bills would not be nearly as high.

Better Choice
Meanwhile, in Southern California’s Riverside County, the Eastern Municipal Water District was using its skyrocketing revenues from connection fees during the boom to pay only for one-time expenses. It expanded wastewater treatment plants and water storage facilities, and improved its recycled water program. “So, when everything went bust, their expenses were very affordable as they hadn’t incurred debt,” notes Suzanne Finnegan, chief credit officer of Build America Mutual. “It’s ironic sometimes that when you really need the discipline is when things are going well.”

5. Shortchanging Pension Obligations

The most serious threat to some government pension plans has been a chronic unwillingness by lawmakers to contribute what is necessary to keep the plans fully funded. To be sure, many governments skipped or pared down payments into pension plans during the recession. But some places did that for years prior to the downturn and continue to do it today. The longer they delay, the larger the long-term liability becomes.

Bad Choice
Over the last decade, New Jersey’s public employee pension system has gone from a fully funded enterprise to a roughly $56 billion unfunded liability. The financial crisis certainly played a part. But the situation in New Jersey is worse than in most other places mainly because the state wasn’t making its full pension payments even before the crisis began. In 2011, lawmakers passed a new pension law that legally spared the state a portion of its annual payments into the fund. It also gave New Jersey seven years before it had to start making its full contributions. “In other words,” says Howard Cure, director of bond credit research at Evercore Wealth Management, “rather than continue to fully fund the pension, they used it as an excuse. Now they’re back to the same hole.” This year, in response to that hole, Gov. Chris Christie retroactively changed the pension funding formula to allow the state to contribute $94 million less in order to help balance the 2014 budget. Now, thanks to the formula change, the state is slated to put a total of $900 million less into the fund by the time it’s required to start making its full payments. The likely outcome is that the unfunded liability will continue to grow.

Better Choice
Lexington, Ky., had a similar problem with habitually shortchanging its pension plan. But in 2012, it put together a pension task force made up of city officials and public employee union representatives, guided by an outside financial consulting firm. The result was a new agreement that guarantees Lexington will increase its annual contribution to the pension fund to $20 million from $11 million. In return, employees agreed to an older retirement age and increased paycheck deductions.

6. Making Unrealistic Projections About Rate of Return

Every budget or financial planning document has to start with some assumptions about the rate of interest that will be earned on an invested portfolio. It’s tempting — too tempting sometimes — to stretch those assumptions beyond what sensible economics can justify. Some pension funds still base their total liabilities owed on an expected annual investment return of more than 8 percent, a figure that affects the formula used in figuring out how much governments should contribute each year. “That means they’re targeting a pension funding level that’s lower than what most people might consider prudent,” says Donald Fuerst, a senior pension fellow at the American Academy of Actuaries. Similarly, a budget that expects too much from a volatile revenue stream like the sales tax can be burned in any given year if the economy hits the skids.

Bad Choice
In 2012, Rockland County, N.Y., faced a $40 million budget deficit and was hit with a credit rating downgrade to one step above junk status. In its downgrade action, Standard & Poor’s cited the county’s “vulnerable” management practices based on overly optimistic budgeting. The following year, the county based one-fifth of its revenue returns on sales tax receipts — and expected a 4 percent increase in those returns when consumer spending growth had been far slower. The financial practices prompted the state to step in, demanding that county officials scale back their estimates and develop a realistic financial plan to escape Rockland’s deficit woes, which had mounted to $125 million by 2014.

Better Choice
Many states that assumed at least an 8 percent return on investment from their pension funds have since reduced their expectations. New York state’s public pension funds, for example, lowered their target return rate to 7.5 percent from 8 percent in 2010 (in addition to other changes in actuarial assumptions concerning career duration, salaries and life expectancy). This had the effect of increasing the unfunded liability (and thus, the state’s required contribution) but it was more in line with the fund’s financial realities. Starting this year, pension funds throughout the country will have to follow new accounting rules that include a lower assumed rate of return on their unfunded liabilities.

7. Ignoring Financial Checks and Balances

Don’t lose track of the money you have. It seems like the most obvious advice in the world. But in government finance and fund accounting, where there are many different ways to count the same revenue, weak financial controls can lead to serious dollar losses. Governments can lose track of how much money they actually owe one of their special funds. Or lax internal monitoring can result in poor financial choices not getting flagged until it’s far too late.

Bad Choice
Earlier this year, a legislative audit criticized Idaho Treasurer Ron Crane for acting on investments without the guidance of others. At issue were $31 million worth of mortgage-backed securities that Crane transferred from the Local Government Investment Pool to the state’s Idle Pool in order to protect the credit rating of the local pool. (Both pools are vehicles for storing government cash that isn’t needed immediately.) Later, Crane took $31 million in cash from the Idle Pool and put it back in the local one. The problem cited by the audit was that while the securities had a face value of $31 million, their market value was only $19 million as the move was made during the depths of the recession. The audit concluded that the treasurer’s office overrode internal controls meant to contain financial risks, resulting in inappropriate transfers that cost at least $10 million in “a disproportionate share of investment losses.”

Better Choice
A number of organizations have published best practice guides that help governments limit their vulnerability to financial reporting problems. The Government Finance Officers Association recommends that reporting systems incorporate an antifraud program and that financial managers periodically evaluate internal control procedures to ensure they are still working as envisioned. The Association of Local Government Auditors recommends that, at a minimum, governments have an ethics policy, established performance measures and an audit committee. State governments also cite best practices for their local governments to follow. Vermont, for example, has fact sheets available to localities offering advice on financial management of fixed assets, cash receipts and accounts receivable.

BY LIZ FARMER | JUNE 2014




Record Debt Shrinkage Means Growing Bill for U.S. Roads.

The U.S. municipal-bond market is performing a vanishing act.

While businesses and consumers are borrowing more as the economy revives and the Federal Reserve holds its benchmark interest rate near zero, America’s local governments are doing the opposite. States, cities and public agencies have reduced their debt load by $111 billion since 2010, the biggest decline peak to trough since records began in 1945, according to Fed data released yesterday.

The $3.66 trillion market is on pace to contract for an unprecedented fourth straight year. Localities recovering from the recession that ended five years ago are paying down debt instead of pumping money into aging roads and bridges. The scarcity of bonds has helped fuel the longest rally in munis since 1991.

“There is a retrenchment going on, and I think that’s going to continue,” said Tom Kozlik, director of municipal credit analysis at Philadelphia-based brokerage Janney Montgomery Scott LLC. “One of the last things that an issuer wants to do, if it doesn’t have to, is add fixed costs in terms of debt.”

Municipalities have sold about $106 billion of long-term, fixed-rated bonds this year, a 25 percent decline from the corresponding period of 2013, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

Surprising BlackRock

“The low absolute level of gross issuance has caught the market, including ourselves, a little by surprise,” said Sean Carney, a muni strategist at New York-based BlackRock Inc., which manages $108 billion of local debt.

Issuers from California, the most-populous state, have offered 47 percent fewer bonds this year. The nation’s most-indebted state has focused on spending money raised in previous sales instead of borrowing more, said Tom Dresslar, spokesman for Treasurer Bill Lockyer.

Another reason for the borrowing dip: The state has fewer bonds to refinance after a wave of such deals last year. California has refunded $800 million of debt in 2014, down 72 percent from a year earlier, according to Dresslar. Meanwhile, sales of bonds for new projects have dropped 24 percent.

“We have taken a somewhat more conservative approach for the last couple of years or so,” Dresslar said.

1991 Redux

Even as the menu of muni offerings has diminished, individuals have been chasing the rally in tax-free bonds. Investors added $2.9 billion to muni mutual funds in May, Chris Mauro, a strategist at RBC Capital Markets in New York, wrote in a June 4 research note.

Munis have gained each month this year, the first time that’s occurred since 1991, according to Bank of America Merrill Lynch indexes. The market has earned 6.2 percent in 2014, compared with 5.1 percent for corporate bonds.

The performance is more a sign of dropping supply than surging interest in tax-exempt securities, said Chris Mier, chief muni strategist at Loop Capital Markets in Chicago. The market is dominated by individual investors, who own more than half of local-government debt.

“It’s not that the demand is inordinately high, it’s just that the supply impact is stronger,” said Mier.

2010 Peak

The market began to shrink after the end of the Build America Bonds program, an economic-stimulus measure that began in 2009 and subsidized interest costs of debt that localities sold for infrastructure projects. Issuance under the program tallied $188 billion by the time it lapsed at the end of 2010. Municipal issuance that year totaled $408 billion, the most since at least 2002, Bloomberg data show.

Borrowing has also waned as a result of a political shift among officials forced to cut budgets when tax revenue faltered during the recession that ended in June 2009.

“It is understandable given the pull-forward that had taken place in past years, coupled with post-crisis management styles and general aversion to adding new debt,” BlackRock’s Carney said.

California Governor Jerry Brown, a Democrat, has pledged to chip away at debt used to pay for prior shortfalls, and has moved to save surplus tax money. In Florida, Republican Governor Rick Scott has boasted of cutting $3.6 billion of debt.

Mier, the Loop analyst, said the aversion to borrowing will ebb as municipalities’ finances recover. It wasn’t until a year ago that state tax collections recovered to their 2008 peak, adjusted for inflation, according to the Nelson A. Rockefeller Institute of Government in Albany, New York.

Officials have a ready list of projects to tackle. Areas such as schools, roads, transit and water need about $3.6 trillion of investment by 2020, according to a report last year from the American Society of Civil Engineers.

“The political sentiment will move back in the other direction and you will see more debt issuance again,” Mier said.

By William Selway Jun 5, 2014

To contact the reporter on this story: William Selway in Washington at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected] Mark Tannenbaum, Alan Goldstein




Fitch: Full-Spectrum Funding Needed for U.S. Water Projects.

Fitch Ratings-New York-02 June 2014: The recently passed Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014 (WRRDA) is an important step toward strengthening U.S. water infrastructure. Public sector and private sector participation are important to completing the $630 billion in water and sewer infrastructure needs projected over the long term. However, the ban on the use of tax-exempt bond proceeds for projects receiving Water Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act (WIFIA) support will limit the reach of the program, Fitch Ratings says. Access to the full spectrum of funding options would improve project economics and could enlarge the number of projects under consideration within the WIFIA program.

WRRDA establishes a public-private partnership (PPP) that promotes private investment in much-needed water and wastewater infrastructure. WIFIA, modeled on the successful Transportation Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act (TIFIA) program for surface transportation, provides low-cost loans capped at 49% of a project’s cost. However, TIFIA doesn’t exclude the use of tax-exempt financing.

PPPs provide a useful alternative to advance project delivery for public service needs. Tax-exempt financing enables PPPs to lower the marginal cost of project development. Allowing tax-exempt private activity bonds and other financing tools to be used with WIFIA support would maximize access to diverse funding sources for critical infrastructure development and invite worthy proposals that might not apply for WIFIA under the current prohibition.

For example, the San Diego County Water Authority recently began a desalination project that leans heavily on tax-exempt bond proceeds. The Carlsbad Desalination Plant improves the water authority’s source diversification and drought tolerance. Proceeds for the plant are funded by the California Pollution Control Financing Authority (CPCFA) through a nearly $800 million bond issue of plant and pipeline bonds. Fitch rated the CPCFA’s bond issue ‘BBB-‘ with a Stable Outlook. This important project would not be eligible for WIFIA support due to its use of a tax-exempt financing option.

Contact:

Yvette Dennis
Senior Director
Global Infrastructure and Project Finance Group
+1 212 908-0668
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY

Cherian George
Managing Director
Global Infrastructure and Project Finance Group
+1 212 908-0519

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159

Media Relations: Elizabeth Fogerty, New York, Tel: +1 (212) 908 0526, Email: [email protected].

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com. All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.

ALL FITCH CREDIT RATINGS ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS. PLEASE READ THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS BY FOLLOWING THIS LINK: HTTP://FITCHRATINGS.COM/UNDERSTANDINGCREDITRATINGS. IN ADDITION, RATING DEFINITIONS AND THE TERMS OF USE OF SUCH RATINGS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE AGENCY’S PUBLIC WEBSITE ‘WWW.FITCHRATINGS.COM’. PUBLISHED RATINGS, CRITERIA AND METHODOLOGIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THIS SITE AT ALL TIMES. FITCH’S CODE OF CONDUCT, CONFIDENTIALITY, CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, AFFILIATE FIREWALL, COMPLIANCE AND OTHER RELEVANT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE FROM THE ‘CODE OF CONDUCT’ SECTION OF THIS SITE. FITCH MAY HAVE PROVIDED ANOTHER PERMISSIBLE SERVICE TO THE RATED ENTITY OR ITS RELATED THIRD PARTIES. DETAILS OF THIS SERVICE FOR RATINGS FOR WHICH THE LEAD ANALYST IS BASED IN AN EU-REGISTERED ENTITY CAN BE FOUND ON THE ENTITY SUMMARY PAGE FOR THIS ISSUER ON THE FITCH WEBSITE.




Municipal-Bond Website Gets Makeover to Help Buyers.

Internet-Information Revamp Could Help Retail Investors Navigate the Muni-Bond Market

The Internet storehouse of free municipal-bond data and documents is getting a makeover, adding tools and information for retail investors in a market critiqued for years as opaque and unwieldy.

The website revamp could help retail investors navigate the $3.7 trillion municipal-bond market. Individuals own about 72% of the debt issued by cities, states and other municipalities, either directly or through mutual funds, according to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Many buy the bonds for tax-free income as a way to help fund their retirements. Individual ownership of municipal debt exceeds that of any other financial asset class except for the U.S. stock market, where trades are made mostly on exchanges and where prices are freely available and constantly updated.

One new tool coming this month to the Electronic Municipal Market Access site, known as EMMA, allows investors to compare the trade histories of bonds with similar characteristics, helping to establish comparable prices for securities that don’t change hands often. New features also let users graphically display what others are paying for a security on any given day.

“All of this is part of a long-range plan to bring greater transparency to the market,” said Daniel Heimowitz, chairman of the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board.

In 2012, the MSRB released a plan for improving transparency in the municipal-bond market, which included additions to the EMMA site, which gets about 90,000 unique visitors a month. The site, launched in 2008, stores municipal issuers’ disclosures, documents, trade data and other information.

For the past few years, the SEC has been pressing for the muni-bond market to improve and make it easier for individual buyers to assess their investments.

SEC Commissioner Daniel M. Gallagher praised the EMMA site in a speech last week at the MSRB’s Municipal Securities Regulator Summit in Washington before adding that retail investors still need more help.

“Despite these advances in post-trade price transparency, retail investors continue to face headwinds in the bond markets,” Mr. Gallagher said, adding that “the opacity of the markets, especially given the lack of a centralized collection and continuous dissemination of bid/ask quotes—that is, pretrade price transparency—makes it difficult for retail investors to feel confident that they received the best execution.”

The site will help investors who want some basic information about a bond and what it should cost, said Ron Valinoti, operating manager of Municipal Bond Information Services LLC, a consortium of 11 companies formed to improve municipal-bond valuations and price monitoring. “The little guy doesn’t always know how the muni market works, and the website is set up to help them learn,” Mr. Valinoti said.

Users of the new price-discovery tool can enter the nine-digit alphanumeric code that identifies a given bond and search for securities with recent trades that share its characteristics, such as maturity date, the bond’s source of repayment and interest rate.

Lynnette Kelly, executive director of the MSRB, said those new functions will help widen the view into the market that the website already provides.

By AARON KURILOFF
June 2, 2014 5:50 p.m. ET

Write to Aaron Kuriloff at [email protected]




FT: USAA Sells First Meteor Strike ‘Cat Bonds’

USAA, the US insurer, has sold $130m of catastrophe bonds that allow investors to collect yields of 15 per cent or more by betting on the chances of a meteor strike or volcanic eruption.

The bonds are the first to cater to these two types of natural disasters, but investors nevertheless clamoured to buy the new debt. The size of the deal was increased from a planned $100m, underscoring strong appetite for insurance-linked catastrophe bonds, sales of which are on course to reach record levels this year.

The USAA cat bonds, known as Residential Reinsurance 2014 Ltd Series 2014-I, met “robust” demand from investors, according to people close to the sale.
In addition to providing coverage for a meteor strike and the standalone risk of a volcanic eruption – two firsts for the insurance-linked industry – the USAA bonds also cover so-called “unmodelled” risks of wildfires, severe thunderstorms and blizzards in US states where such disasters are not typically assessed.

“They [USAA] have a number of larger cat bond deals still in effect,” said Steve Evans, owner of Artemis.bm, which collects data on insurance-linked debt. “What they tend to do is use these smaller issues in order to test the market a little bit. Last year they issued some of the riskiest notes ever, this year they’ve chosen to test by including meteor and volcanic eruption risk.”

The USAA sale comes on the back of continued strong demand for cat bonds, which offer investors higher yields as well as returns that are uncorrelated to other types of securities.

Such bonds allow insurers to transfer some of the risk that they will have to pay out billions of dollars in the event of a major natural disaster. While the debt offers juicy returns, investors are at risk of losing their principal if catastrophes such as earthquakes or hurricanes do occur.

The amount of cat bonds and insurance-linked debt sold so far this year has reached $5.5bn, according to Artemis.bm, taking the amount of the debt sold over the past 12 months to a record $9.2bn.

“In recent cat bond deals the majority have priced at the mid or upper-end of pricing guidance, which shows investors have reached a place where they feel they can’t go down any more on pricing,” said Mr Evans.

USAA’s debt deal was divided into two classes of bonds. The size of the riskiest class of the bonds, where investors receive a coupon of 15 per cent in exchange for an expected loss rate of about 11 per cent, was increased from $50m to $80m.

A third of these riskier bonds went to hedge funds while another third went to cat bond funds that specialise in investing in insurance-linked debt, said people familiar with the deal.

Almost two thirds of the $50m second class of the bonds, with a coupon of 3.5 per cent for an expected loss rate of less than 1 per cent, were sold to pension funds and money managers.

USAA declined to comm­ent on the sale, which was run by Goldman Sachs and Swiss Re Capital Markets.

By Tracy Alloway in New York




Nervous About Borrowing, U.S. States and Cities Alter Municipal Bond Landscape.

(Reuters) – U.S. cities and states are leery of borrowing more money despite near-record low interest rates, forcing bond funds to scour for investments and boosting returns on existing debt.

The drought in issuance is also slowing city and state capital projects and threatens to disrupt the summer high season for bond buying.

So far this year, sales are running 25.4 percent below the same period in 2013, according to preliminary Thomson Reuters data. May’s issuance, $22.41 billion of bonds sold in 907 deals, was the lowest for the month in three years and the smallest since January, when only $18.17 billion in bonds came to market.

The paltry pace of issuance has investors competing to get a slice of new deals and in many cases forcing them to bid on lower-quality credits than they would like.

“Many of the new issues that are coming to market are eight to 10 times oversubscribed. So it’s difficult getting bonds,” said Burton Mulford, portfolio manager at Eagle Asset Management, which emphasizes high-grade debt.

Eagle has begun buying more single-A credits, the mid-to-low end of the investment-grade scale. Instead of focusing on deals of at least $75 million, it has been looking at some $35 million and $40 million deals, Mulford said.

Cities and states’ refinancing binge, which was fueled by low interest rates, ended in 2013 as rates rose and retail buyers avoided the municipal market, spooked by bad financial news from Detroit and Puerto Rico. Issuance started falling.

As 2014 dawned, many expected bond sales to drop further, given that governments’ financial managers are gun-shy about taking out debt after the budget crises resulting from the 2007-09 recession. Political leaders facing elections in November, too, may want to appear conservative about borrowing.

Last year’s 0.4 percent growth in municipal bond sales was the smallest in 20 years, and the trend is set to continue “because of the slow and uneven pace of revenue recovery,” according to Moody’s Investors Service.

Most states are not fully utilizing their borrowing capacity and are spending less on infrastructure, which is primarily financed by bonds, the National Association of State Budget Officers said in a report released on Thursday. The growth in debt for infrastructure in almost all states has been “very minor or flat” despite the era of low interest rates, the group found.

Spending austerity and political attitudes, along with lack of federal policy supporting infrastructure spending and higher interest rates, will keep the year’s total bond sales between $250 billion and $275 billion, Janney Capital Markets estimated. Last year’s sales totaled $311.8 billion.

“It’s helping drive prices up and yields down, but demand is pretty strong as well,” J.R. Rieger, head of fixed income at S&P Dow Jones Indices said of the supply shortage. “The muni market started the year relatively cheap compared to Treasuries and corporates… I think investors recognized it.”

The S&P Municipal Bond Index has had a year-to-date return of 6.09 percent. The high-yield index has returned 9.65 percent, more than double its counterpart for U.S. corporate junk bonds.

Yields started 2014 fairly high but have recently fallen. Those on top-rated 10-year bonds began 2014 at 2.79 percent and on highly rated 30-year debt at 4.20 percent on Municipal Market Data’s benchmark scale. By the end of last week, 10-year bonds were at 2.16 percent and 30-years at 3.26 percent.

Meanwhile, yields on A-rated, 10-year bonds were 2.77 percent and on A-rated, 30-year issues were 3.89 percent on Thursday, according to MMD, a Thomson Reuters company.

With $8.6 billion in deals expected to come to market this week, the supply shortage could ease during the summer. Still, investors might be caught scrambling to find places for the cash they receive from bond redemption and coupon payments during the summer “reinvestment season.”

Loop Capital Markets expects the amount of cash coming available in June, July and August to total $151.53 billion, down slightly from $160.74 billion last year.

Loop has revised its forecast for 2014 issuance to $275 billion from the $300 billion it estimated in December. But Loop Managing Director Christopher Mier said the combination of large amounts of cash with short bond supply may not have a predictable impact on the market.

“You can’t just assume this money is coming back, and there’s a particular reason you don’t want to make that assumption this year: there’s been a significant decline in yields and a significant outperformance,” he said. Mier added that investors may opt to buy equities instead.

BY LISA LAMBERT
WASHINGTON Mon Jun 2, 2014 7:04am EDT




Florida Benefits as Yield-Thirsty Investors Line Up for Hurricane Bonds.

In 2008, Florida’s government-run property insurer paid Warren Buffett $224 million to agree to buy its debt if a major storm struck. Six hurricane-free years later, the state is turning investors away.

With hurricane season set to start June 1, municipal securities sold by Florida’s taxpayer-owned property insurers are rallying, and the state boosted a catastrophe-bond sale last month by almost four times, to $1.5 billion.

Florida, typically the nation’s most hurricane-prone state, is benefiting from a thirst for yield as investors seek higher returns with municipal interest rates close to generational lows. The demand is bolstering state-run Citizens Property Insurance Corp. and the Florida Hurricane Catastrophe Fund Finance Corp., which have record cash reserves.

“We haven’t had a hurricane make landfall in eight years,” said Jack Nicholson, who runs the catastrophe fund from Tallahassee. The taxpayer-owned entity provides backup coverage for insurance companies. “I’d rather be lucky than smart any day.”

The last hurricane to strike Florida was Wilma in 2005. If the streak ends this year, the fourth-most-populous state may need to sell bonds for recovery costs. Dwindling issuance in the $3.7 trillion municipal market and investors’ search for yield bodes well for the catastrophe fund, according to Bank of America Corp., JPMorgan Chase & Co. and Wells Fargo & Co.

Andrew’s Legacy

The banks, which underwrite the reinsurer’s bonds, estimated on average that the fund would be able to sell $8.3 billion of debt within a year to meet its obligations after a hurricane. That’s more than twice what the fund would need to borrow if it runs out of cash.

The catastrophe fund was created by the state in 1993, a year after Hurricane Andrew ravaged Miami. The fund, which has about $11 billion in cash, is obligated to pay out as much as $17 billion for this hurricane season.

In 2008, it had $3.6 billion in cash to cover $29 billion in potential liabilities. The U.S. was in the first year of the longest recession since the 1930s and Nicholson wasn’t sure if investors would be willing to finance the gap after a major storm.

Buffett Deal

Florida cut a deal with Buffett’s Berkshire Hathaway Inc., paying the Omaha, Nebraska-based company in exchange for a guarantee that it would buy the state’s bonds if a storm caused more than $16 billion in losses.

Buffett, 83, whose $65.3 billion net worth makes him the world’s third-richest person, didn’t respond to a request for comment sent to an assistant.

The state of about 19.6 million people won’t need special deals to attract investors this year because of pent-up demand for higher-yields, said Michael Schroeder, chief investment officer at Naples, Florida-based Wasmer, Schroeder & Co.

If the catastrophe fund were to issue federally taxable 30- year bonds this year, they’d probably carry interest rates about 2.50 percentage points more than benchmark Treasuries, Bank of America estimated in a May 1 letter. Benchmark Treasuries maturing in 2044 yield about 3.3 percent.

The fund’s bonds, which are exempt from state taxes, are rated Aa3 by Moody’s Investors Service, fourth-highest.

Interest Abounds

“If they had to do a deal today, it would not be a problem,” said Schroeder, whose firm manages about $3.5 billion in munis, including Florida hurricane bonds. “You’d have a significant number of players that would be interested.”

Texas, North Carolina and Louisiana also have systems to provide insurance in high-risk areas. California offers state- run earthquake insurance.

Citizens Property, which offers Florida homeowners direct coverage, is also benefiting from investors’ willingness to take on hurricane-linked risk. The insurer increased the size of its catastrophe bond offering to a record $1.5 billion last month, after initially marketing $400 million, said Jennifer Montero, its chief financial officer in Tallahassee.

“We were oversubscribed,” she said. “There’s so much money that investors don’t know where to put it.”

The taxable three-year bonds priced to yield 7.5 percent, she said.

Risk Appetite

Catastrophe bonds offer higher returns in exchange for risking the loss of principal. If hurricanes or other disasters cause a specified amount of damage, insurers can use the principal to cover recovery expenses. Holders of the Florida bonds face a 1.7 percent chance of losing their entire principal, according to Citizens.

More buyers are willing to take that risk, said Caleb Wong, who helps oversee catastrophe bonds at New York-based OppenheimerFunds Inc., which manages $237 billion.

“The fact that there has been no sizable event in Florida recently, I think that has had some impact in drawing some investors,” he said.

The catastrophe bonds helped Citizens’ balance sheet, which also includes a record $7.6 billion in cash and proceeds of $1.5 billion in munis issued in 2012. Fitch Ratings gave the Citizens debt its fifth-highest grade, pointing in part to the cash stockpile. Citizens, which was created in 2002, is the state’s largest property insurer, with 940,000 policies.

“They’re at the point that they could deal with what they estimate to be a once-in-100-year storm without having to go to the market,” said Karen Krop, a Fitch analyst.

Bond Backing

The catastrophe fund and Citizens repay bonds by levying assessments on owners of homes and cars.

Citizens last sold tax-exempt municipal bonds in June 2012. The catastrophe fund last sold debt in April 2013, raising $2 billion.

Federally taxable bonds issued by the catastrophe fund that mature in July 2020 traded this week with an average yield of 2.66 percent, matching the lowest since their issue last year, data compiled by Bloomberg show. The yield was about 0.9 percentage point above Treasuries, down from about 1.8 percentage points at issue.

Both the fund and Citizens have amassed record cash reserves during the eight-year span without hurricanes. Combined, they have more than $18.5 billion available to pay claims.

1992 Reminder

That may not be enough, as a direct hit to a population center like Miami could cause more than $80 billion of damage, according to state estimates. Andrew in 1992 caused more than $45 billion of damage in the Miami area, adjusting for 2010 prices, National Weather Service records show.

Three to six hurricanes will probably form in the Atlantic this year, the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration predicted May 22. One or two may qualify as major, with winds of 111 miles (179 kilometers) per hour or more. The Atlantic season runs through November.

Florida’s streak of seasons with no hurricanes is a record, according to data from the National Hurricane Center. From 1851 to 2004, 273 hurricanes struck the U.S. mainland, according to the center. Florida was hit more often than any other state, with 110 hurricanes making landfall.

The unpredictability of hurricanes can be a draw, as weather isn’t correlated with financial risks such as recessions, said Schroeder. And with municipal issuance dwindling, buyers may pounce on bonds issued to pay for a destructive hurricane.

Schroeder doesn’t count himself among investors eager for that opportunity, he said from his office along the west coast of Florida.

“It would do a lot of damage,” he said.

By Toluse Olorunnipa | May 30, 2014

–With assistance from Noah Buhayar in New York.




Muni Market Starved for Bonds Gets Most Supply in Three Months.

Localities in the $3.7 trillion municipal market are planning the largest wave of debt sales in almost three months, bucking a trend of diminished borrowing that’s pushed yields to the lowest since June.

States and cities have set $8.6 billion of bond sales over the next 30 days, according to data compiled by Bloomberg. That’s 35 percent above this year’s average, and close to the highest since March, when Puerto Rico issued $3.5 billion of general obligations in the largest muni deal of 2014.

At 2.26 percent, benchmark 10-year muni yields are sinking as demand for tax-exempt securities outpaces the slowest period for bond sales since 2011. Investors have added $2.9 billion to muni mutual funds in the past four weeks, the most in 16 months, Lipper US Fund Flows data show. A wave of maturing and refinanced debt in coming months is poised to add to demand.

“We’re coming into the reinvestment season and there seems to be cash on the sidelines,” said Ken Kollar, a trader with Arbor Research & Trading Inc. in New York. “Supply will be easily absorbed.”

Next week, Phoenix, the Miami-Dade County Expressway Authority, the Chicago Park District and Portland, Oregon, join issuers offering $5.9 billion in debt, compared with almost $5 billion in this holiday-shortened week. Miami-Dade will borrow to upgrade highways and Portland’s debt will help finance a bridge.

Phoenix and the Chicago Park District are refinancing debt. Muni bondholders are set to receive $92 billion from maturing and refunded bonds in the three months through August, Citigroup Inc. estimates. That may exceed issuance by $20 billion.

By Elizabeth Campbell and Brian Chappatta

To contact the reporters on this story: Elizabeth Campbell in New York at [email protected]; Brian Chappatta in New York at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected] Mark Tannenbaum, Alan Goldstein




Moody's: State Debt Survey Shows New Debt Issuance Falls to Lowest Level in 20 Years.

New York, May 22, 2014 — The rate of growth in the outstanding debt issued by the US states in 2013 slowed for a fourth consecutive year and was also the slowest growth in debt for the last 20 years, says Moody’s Investors Service in “2014 State Debt Medians: Appetite for Borrowing Remains Weak.” Moody’s expects state debt levels to continue to show only modest growth in 2014.

“The continued slowdown in the growth of net tax-supported debt primarily reflects a new conservative attitude toward debt among the states,” says Kimberly Lyons, a Moody’s Assistant Vice President and Analyst. “Growing spending pressures coupled with inconsistent revenue growth and uncertainty over future revenue trends have forced states to take a cautious approach when considering the addition of new debt service costs to their budgets.”

The combined 2013 total net-tax support debt (NTSD) for all 50 states increased to $518 billion from $516 billion in 2012, according to Moody’s. Approximately half of all states saw a decline in their NTSD, including some historically large debt issuers such as California.

Total NTSD growth slowed to 0.4%, slightly less than the 1.4% growth rate in 2012. The modest growth rate is well below the 10-year average of 6% growth and considerably lower than the high growth rates of some recent years such as the 9% rate in 2009 and 17% rate in 2004.

The lower borrowing also led to a decline in the median leverage ratios for the states, with NTSD per capita declining to $1,054 from $1,074 in 2012. Additionally, NTSD as a percentage of personal income declined to 2.6% from 2.8%, and NTSD as a percentage of gross state product also fell to 2.4% from 2.5%.

Debt service costs increased by 8% in 2013, up from the 3% increase in 2012. Growth in debt service costs reflects a return to normal debt service schedules after years of artificially low debt service, a result of higher than normal debt refunding for savings in a low interest rate environment, says Moody’s.

Moody’s also found very low levels in variable rate demand debt and privately placed bank loans among states. Variable rate demand debt comprises just $21.6 billion of outstanding state debt (4% of total) and private bank loans just $3.5 billion (0.01%). Moody’s said its review of the private agreements finds similar credit terms to those contained in bank-supported financings for state borrowers in the public market.

Moody’s 2014 state debt medians are based on the rating agency’s analysis of calendar year 2013 debt issuance and fiscal year 2013 debt service. For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access the report at

https://www.moodys.com/viewresearchdoc.aspx?docid=PBM_PBM170895.

Global Credit Research – 22 May 2014

***

NOTE TO JOURNALISTS ONLY: For more information, please call one of our global press information hotlines: New York +1-212-553-0376, London +44-20-7772-5456, Tokyo +813-5408-4110, Hong Kong +852-3758-1350, Sydney +61-2-9270-8141, Mexico City 001-888-779-5833, São Paulo 0800-891-2518, or Buenos Aires 0800-666-3506. You can also email us at [email protected] or visit our web site at www.moodys.com.

Kimberly Lyons
Asst Vice President – Analyst
Public Finance Group
Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
250 Greenwich Street
New York, NY 10007
U.S.A.
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

Timothy F Blake
MD – Public Finance
Public Finance Group
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

Releasing Office:
Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
250 Greenwich Street
New York, NY 10007
U.S.A.
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653




US Muni Treasurers Warn LCR Could Crimp Spending.

Municipal bonds are not highly liquid. To some, that’s stating the obvious, but if US regulators write it into their version of Basel III’s liquidity coverage ratio, state and city treasurers say their financing costs will rise.

It may seem unlikely, but if the residents of Cary in North Carolina notice public verges becoming unkempt, or pilots using Boston’s Logan International Airport start seeing potholes, there could be a single cause – a rule drawn up in Switzerland and implemented by the US Federal Reserve Board.

This rule is the liquidity coverage ratio (LCR). If last October’s Fed draft version is introduced unchanged, bonds issued by US states, cities and towns will not count towards the new liquidity buffers that banks are required to hold. This will reduce the value of the bonds and demand for them will drop, the argument goes. With banks currently holding around 10% of the stock of municipal debt, issuers fear they will have no choice but to pay higher coupons.

“As a muni issuer, we are concerned that if our bonds are not included it will reduce the market for them, increasing the interest we will have to pay, and increasing costs to our citizens and rate payers,” says Town of Cary’s finance director, Karen Mills. “We have service levels in Cary, such as how often we should sweep the streets or mow the medians, and it is a balancing act. If we have higher interest rates then we can’t spend as much on other things.”

We have service levels in Cary – such as how often we should sweep the streets or mow the medians – and it is a balancing act

The LCR is supposed to ensure banks can survive a short-term liquidity squeeze. It forces institutions to hold enough high-quality liquid assets (HQLA) to cover their liabilities over a 30-day period of stress. For an individual bank, the ratio is calculated as its total HQLA divided by the estimated net cash outflows – based on the run-off rates set by regulators. The Fed has proposed banks will need to have an LCR of 80% by the start of 2015, rising by an additional 10% each year until the minimum becomes 100% in 2017.

HQLAs are split into three categories, as in the international version of the LCR, finalised by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in January 2013 (Risk February 2013). Level 1 assets, such as US Treasury debt and other government agency debt that is unconditionally guaranteed by the US government, can be held without limit and not receive a haircut. Level 2a assets, including debt issued by Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, receive a 15% haircut. Level 2b assets, which include investment-grade corporate bonds and stocks in the S&P 500 index, get a 50% haircut (Risk July 2011). Taken together, Level 2 assets can be no more than 40% of the buffer, with 2b assets alone capped at 15% of the total.

“The proposed rule likely would not permit covered bonds and securities issued by public sector entities, such as a state, local authority or other government subdivision below the level of a sovereign (including US states and municipalities), to qualify as HQLA at this time,” the rules say. The Fed argues municipal bonds are not “liquid and readily marketable”, citing low daily trading volumes as one justification.

Critics would like to see more of the Fed’s reasoning. “There was not much in the proposed rule that justified throwing out municipal bonds from the definition of HQLA. There were maybe two sentences and we were hoping they would show more careful consideration,” says Susan Collet, vice-president of government relations at Bond Dealers of America, a trade association representing bond brokers.

So, what was the Fed looking for? In short, assets that can be liquidated quickly in large volumes with little impact on prices. The rules say HQLAs must have a high potential to generate liquidity through sale or secured borrowing in a stressed environment. They also “exhibit low risk and limited price volatility, are traded in high-volume, deep markets with transparent pricing, and are eligible to be pledged at a central bank”, according to the draft US rules. Defenders of municipal bonds argue the market satisfies much of this. On one point there is no debate: research by Citi points out that all US municipal bonds are accepted as collateral by the Fed at a 2–5% haircut, depending on maturity – the same applies to US agency securities. By comparison, the Fed accepts US AAA corporate bonds at a 3–6% haircut and all other investment-grade corporate bonds at 5–8%.

The other points are debatable. On the subject of price volatility, Citi’s research claims that in 2008/2009, only Freddie Mac mortgage loans were subject to less depreciation – about 0.4% – over a 30-day period than AA-rated municipal obligations. This is because the sector, by and large, has robust ratings, its supporters say.

“Our rating has been pretty steady. We had one blip during 9/11, but other than that it has been AA-credit quality, even through the crisis,” says John Pranckevicius, chief financial officer at the Massachusetts Port Authority (Massport).

For the sector as a whole, research from Moody’s Investors Service shows the average rating for investment-grade munis between 1970 and 2012 was AA3. The average rating for investment-grade corporates was roughly Baa1. Municipalities that commented on the proposed LCR tended to be highly rated (see box, Corporates fear jump in commercial paper costs).

“The history of default is so vastly less than on the corporate side,” says George Friedlander, a municipal bond strategist at Citi and author of the bank’s recent research on this issue. “During a financial crisis credit spreads widen out. Sectors with a history of default widen out more. That is a measure of liquidity – it is what spreads try to reflect. On that basis, the fact so many muni credits are vastly higher in average rating and lower in average default experience makes a case for them to be included as a stronger sector.”

The two other main HQLA criteria are trading volume and depth of market. “As a purchaser, we manage a $400 million portfolio, and we try to purchase other North Carolina municipal bonds and have a hard time finding them,” says Town of Cary’s Mills.

This might suggest the secondary market for municipal bonds is illiquid, trading infrequently, and the head of one small private investment firm, says that was certainly the case following the collapse of Lehman Brothes in 2008, when investors had to sell at a discount to exit their positions.

But according to data from the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association (Sifma), which is quoted in numerous municipalities’ comment letters to the Fed, 0.27% of the municipal market’s outstanding par value is turned over every day on average, which is the same as federal agency debt and higher than the 0.19% seen for corporate bonds.

“I think there are US credits in the muni market that are high quality and have high liquidity, and have as much liquidity as some of the other assets the Federal Reserve says it would be acceptable to be holding,” says Richard Ellis, state treasurer for Utah and chairman of the National Association of State Treasurers.

The argument matters because banks are becoming increasingly important as investors. As of September 2013, they held $413 billion of municipal securities and loans, according to the Fed’s flow of funds report – a year-on-year increase of 15.7% and a jump of more than 60% since the end of 2010. In total, roughly 11% of the market is held by banks.

“We have a lot of bonds outstanding, so a lot of folks have them, from big banks to regional players. All we are saying is if we’re not included as HQLAs, then possibly – we don’t know for sure – they could choose different assets to our bonds,” says a debt manager at another small municipality in North Carolina.

Some banks are already threatening to pull back, say state treasurers. Utah’s Ellis says he has spoken to financial advisers at Salt Lake City-headquartered Zions Bank who raised the possibility that the institution may have to cut its holdings. According to the bank’s most recent annual filing, it holds $558 million in held-to-maturity municipal securities with a further $66 million in the available-for-sale category. “Zions has a lot of local debt, with much of it coming from small issuers – some with only a hundred thousand dollars outstanding – and now the bank is asking, ‘What do we do? We have to unload these.’ These are issuers without good market access, so their borrowing costs would be significantly higher,” says Ellis. “Until now, the bank has bought some of these less-liquid bonds into its portfolio because they are assets it is happy to hold and it is supporting the local economy. Now there’s a disincentive for the bank to do that.”

One of those financial advisers is Jon Bronson, managing director at Zions Bank Public Finance, who confirms that if municipal bonds are not HQLAs then the bank will have less reason to hold them. This could affect other local investors, he adds. Bronson helps the bank to sell municipal bonds into the portfolios of several local community banks and sits on the board of one. “Every bank’s response will be different,” he says. “I’m on the board of a bank that buys munis in the secondary market and knowing the Basel III rules are coming – and those assets are currently not deemed HQLA – that little bank’s appetite for munis will probably change.”

There are other impacts too. Municipal debt can no longer be used to offset the potential cash outflows from municipal deposits, and Town of Cary’s Mills says North Carolina-headquartered BB&T declined to bid when the town was renewing a certificate of deposit.

One capital markets vice-president at a large regional bank confirms the new rules are having an impact: “On the periphery, yes, it certainly could have an impact. As far as our firm’s outlook goes, they have asked us to step back.”

State treasurers and municipal issuers worry where this will end up – if banks pull back, the market for municipal debt will shrink, increasing their financing costs. “If interest rates are higher, we will have less capital to maintain assets,” says Massport’s Pranckevicius

Massport maintains runways, terminals, parking garages, hangars, piers and cranes, he adds, and those facilities employ more than 20,000 people.

“We create jobs through our capital programme. With higher interest rates, our costs would be higher, resulting in less dollars around to do the work that needs to get done on our capital assets. It becomes a spiral. You don’t repair assets because costs have increased, so your assets deteriorate. If you could put money to work, and people to work, it would create jobs, and that has a spillover effect into the construction industry. That’s our concern,” he says

Some are less sympathetic, saying municipal issuers are confused about what the LCR is supposed to do. One regulatory specialist at a North American bank points to the default of Detroit last year, and other municipalities shortly before. The municipal market has also been historically reliant on monoline insurance to guarantee its bonds – an issue at the centre of a court battle involving Detroit’s outstanding swaps contracts – suggesting investors are not assured of their credit on its own terms (Risk September 2013).

“The LCR is not about yield or community reinvestment, or getting money to worthy borrowers. It is supposed to be about keeping cash in reserve, or other marketable securities that are high quality and liquid,” he says.

Treasurers reject any comparison to Detroit. “We have a triple-A bond rating from all agencies. To compare us to Detroit is a non-comparison,” says the second North Carolina municipality’s debt manager. In addition, those hoping to change the existing definition are not expecting the blanket inclusion of municipal debt as a Level 1 asset, says Citi’s Friedlander: “The proportion of muni assets that are below-investment grade is very small but no-one is asking that they are included.”

While the fight goes on, municipalities say they are not reflecting the rule’s potential impact in their funding forecasts. Instead, they are hoping amendments will make it into the final version of the LCR, which is expected within weeks.

“These bonds need to be included at Level 2a. Level 2b is already overcrowded with other assets and the restrictions are too tight. But there is a reasonable chance of getting that outcome,” says Friedlander. “The case for this is excellent. I am encouraged because it is so strong.”

Author: Joe Rennison
Source: Risk magazine | 28 May 2014




WSJ: Mom and Pop Investors Return to Municipal Bonds.

Muni Debt Prices Storm Back After Last Year’s Rout

Municipal-bond prices have come roaring back, reversing last year’s rout despite enduring financial challenges facing U.S. cities and states.

The resurgence in the $3.7 trillion market comes as bond buyers attempt to find higher investment returns amid a tumble in U.S. interest rates.

Long coveted by mom-and-pop investors for their tax benefits and relative stability, municipal bonds – debt sold by cities, states and local government-related entities – are benefiting from a broad bond-market rally and a decline in new debt being issued by municipalities that are still trying to tighten their belts.

The municipal-bond market posted its worst year in 2013 in almost two decades, registering losses in the wake of Detroit’s record municipal bankruptcy-protection filing, concerns over hefty pension costs in Illinois and economic worries in Puerto Rico.

Investors have poured $3.1 billion into municipal-bond mutual funds this year, compared with $2.96 billion over the same period in 2013, according to data from Lipper as of Wednesday. The gains mark a shift after investors pulled $39.9 billion from the funds in the last 31 weeks of 2013, the data show.

Yields on municipal debt fell to 2.325% on Wednesday, according to Barclays PLC, their lowest in almost a year. Yields fall when prices rise.

The gains have made the debt a star performer for investors this year, in a twist few predicted. Municipal bonds have returned 5.869% in 2014, reflecting interest payments and price appreciation. That compares with total returns of 5.769% on highly rated corporate bonds, 3.3% for the S&P 500 and 2.982% on U.S. Treasury debt, according to Barclays data.

“I don’t think the need for tax-exempt income ever went away, and there appears to be pent-up demand,” said John Miller, co-head of fixed income at Nuveen Asset Management LLC, which oversees about $90 billion in municipal bonds.

Cities and states aren’t borrowing enough to meet the demand from investors, said Vikram Rai, a fixed-income strategist at Citigroup Inc., which forecasts issuance will fall to $280 billion this year, from $334 billion in 2013. “The primary market supply is very anemic and that’s really driving down yields,” he said.

Many municipal bonds are still considered nearly as safe as Treasurys, because they are backed by the taxing authority of various governments. Their prices typically move in tandem with the U.S. government-debt market, and this year, Treasury bond prices have staged a surprising rally.

The riskiest municipal bonds are rallying the most, though many brokers and investment advisers still are steering retirees and other individual investors away from junk-rated municipal bonds, as their clients are looking for stable income and savings.

These buyers generally “are looking for the safety that muni bonds have and shy away from those municipalities that have lower credit ratings or are in trouble,” said Benjamin Chuckrow, a senior vice president with Wells Fargo Advisors in Saratoga Springs, N.Y.

He warns clients interested in municipal debt that there are two types of risks to consider: whether the issuer is in good financial health and what may happen to the bond’s value between now and when it matures. If interest rates rise before the bond matures, investors who want to sell beforehand could get lower prices.

To be sure, some state and local governments are struggling to mend their finances amid anemic U.S. economic growth. Many have cut their budgets and plugged pension gaps.

Puerto Rico is attempting to recover after its debt was downgraded to junk in February, but the bonds’ prices have risen since the U.S. territory sold $3.5 billion of debt in March. One Puerto Rico general obligation bond traded at 71.5 cents to the dollar this week, up from 63.75 in December. The S&P Municipal Bond Puerto Rico Index has returned 10.6% this year through Wednesday.

In comparison, high-yield municipal bonds have returned 9.33% this year, Barclays said.

Illinois, which has struggled to address its underfunded pension, in February sold $1 billion in general obligation bonds, paying less to borrow than the state did eight months earlier. The new deal came as lawmakers reached an agreement that would close the pension gap by about $100 billion.

“State and local governments were in a severe squeeze following the housing downturn and the deep recession,” said Dean Maki, chief U.S. economist at Barclays. “Now, that is stabilizing.”

Rising federal tax rates also have brought investors back to tax-exempt municipal debt, said George Rusnak, managing director of global fixed income at Wells Fargo Private Bank. “You’re seeing individuals have stronger demand for tax-free income,” he said.

By AARON KURILOFF
Updated May 29, 2014 8:12 p.m. ET




Clean Energy Bond Finance Model: Qualified 501(c)(3) Bonds.

The Clean Energy + Bond Finance Initiative created this recommended financing model factsheet for clean energy development. The Qualified 501(c)(3) model achieves low-cost capital for renewable energy installations at nonprofit facilities.




Groups: 501(c)(3) Bonds a Useful Tool for Financing Clean Energy Projects.

WASHINGTON – Qualified 501(c)(3) bonds are a financing tool that can be used to increase nonprofits’ clean-energy infrastructure and reduce their energy expenditures, the Clean Energy and Bond Finance Initiative said in a recently released paper.

The initiative, known as CE+BFI, was formed by the Council of Development Finance Agencies and the Clean Energy Group.

Qualified 501(c)(3) bonds can finance energy-efficiency or renewable-energy installations for nonprofit facilities. They are issued by state and local government entities, and their proceeds are loaned to nonprofit borrowers. The bonds are repaid by revenues of the nonprofits, and in some cases some of the debt service can be paid from the money the nonprofits save on their utility bills as a result of the clean-energy improvements, according to the paper.

At a webinar Thursday, Jason Rittenberg, CDFA director of research and advisory services, said that his group felt it was important to discuss 501(c)(3) bonds because a lot of the types of clean-energy projects that have been done by state and local governments through bond financing can similarly be done by nonprofits through 501(c)(3) bond financings. He noted there are fewer restrictions for 501(c)(3) bonds than other types of private-activity bonds, and data recently provided to Congress shows that most PABs are 501(c)(3) bonds.

“The flexibility and established investment reputation of this financing tool will encourage the spread of retrofits, installation of renewable energy infrastructure, reduce energy expenditures among donation-dependent nonprofits, and contribute to state and nonprofit clean energy goals,” CE+BFI said in the paper.

Nonprofits who have used 501(c)(3) bonds to finance clean-energy projects include Loyola University in Chicago, which used the bonds to finance facilities with energy saving features and Elmhurst College in Illinois, which used bonds to finance a student housing facility that achieved Leadership in Energy & Environment Design silver certification and a green surface parking lot. World Wildlife Fund also used the bonds to finance construction of its ‘green headquarters’ in Washington D.C.

One benefit to using these bonds for clean-energy projects is that they make marginal projects financially feasible, since bonds offer borrowers low interest rates over long periods of time. Another benefit is that investors are already familiar with 501(c)(3) bonds, so there would be a market for bonds of good quality. And 501(c)(3) bonds are repaid by revenues of the borrower, rather than by public funds as is the case with general obligation bonds, the paper pointed out.

“Bond financing can allow an organization to complete an eligible project sooner, at a larger scale, and with more favorable terms than would be feasible through capital fundraising efforts or other financing tools,” CE+BFI said. “Financing large projects through 501(c)(3) bonds also frees up cash flow in the short term to serve other purposes, providing the borrower greater flexibility in financing its operations.”

There are many potential projects that could be financed with 501(c)(3) bonds, because nonprofit facilities are common across the county and both new and older buildings could benefit from improvements that reduce monthly energy expenditures. Additionally, a single issuance could finance improvements for multiple facilities or nonprofit organizations.

“Whether combining multiple improvements to a single, large facility or pooling retrofit projects among several nonprofit owned facilities, 501(c)(3) bonds can scale clean energy investments to a considerable degree,” CE+BFI said.

The paper notes there are some limitations to using this type of financing. One limitation is that qualified 501(c)(3) bonds offer little cost benefit to smaller projects as a result of the administrative costs of structuring transactions, according to the paper.

Also, nonprofits have to demonstrate that they will be able to use future revenue to pay debt service, the paper said. Private, detailed assessments would need to be conducted to make sure the projects would produce enough cost savings to support repaying the bonds.

Further research should be done to determine whether energy cost savings equal to or greater than monthly debt service would serve as an acceptable credit enhancement, and what the potential is for issuers to collaborate to finance large-scale projects across a wide geographical area, CE+BFI said.

by Naomi Jagoda MAY 29, 2014 4:08pm ET




GASB Proposes Major Improvements for Reporting Health Insurance and Other Retiree Benefits.

The GASB recently voted unanimously to approve two Exposure Drafts proposing significant improvements to financial reporting by state and local governments of other postemployment benefits (OPEB), such as retiree health insurance. The GASB also approved a third Exposure Draft that would establish requirements for pensions and pension plans that are outside the scope of the pension standards the GASB released in 2012.

The most significant effect of the OPEB Exposure Drafts would be to require governments to recognize their net OPEB liabilities on the face of their financial statements – providing all financial statement users with a more comprehensive understanding of these significant OPEB promises than is currently available.

The Exposure Drafts, including instructions on how to submit written comments, are each expected to be available in mid-June on the GASB website.

May 29, 2014

Copyright 2014 Financial Accounting Foundation, All rights reserved.
You are receiving this because you indicated that you would like to be informed about Financial Accounting Foundation and Governmental Accounting Standards Board activities.




China Still Has Work To Do On The Municipal Bond Market.

China has just taken another step down the long road to a domestic municipal bond market. On May 19, 2014, the Ministry of Finance (MOF) expanded a trial that allows selected local and regional governments (LRGs) to tap the bond market. Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services views this as an important step toward establishing a transparent LRG bond market. Such a market is vital to reducing the risks to China’s sovereign creditworthiness stemming from local governments’ use of off-balance-sheet debt. But a municipal bond market similar to those in developed economies and containing the risks of local government financing will need many more important changes, in our view. These include changes to the legal framework and greater restrictions on LRG off-balance-sheet borrowing.

A New Year, Another Municipal Bond Trial

The MOF’s latest move granted increased debt-issuing responsibilities to more LRGs than it did in 2013. In addition to organizing the process of bond issuance, the selected LRGs also take on the responsibility of making interest and principal payments to bondholders. The 2014 trial is extended to the Beijing municipality, Jiangxi province, Ningxia province, and Qingdao City. The LRGs of the six regions included in both the 2013 and 2014 trials are Shanghai municipality, Zhejiang province, Guangdong province, Shenzhen City, Jiangsu province, and Shandong province.

The latest LRG bond trial shows increased emphasis on transparency. A new requirement in the 2014 trial is the need for greater disclosure. The MOF requires the LRGs involved in the trial to publish news relevant to the bond issues–including the government debt situation as well as economic and fiscal developments–on a timely basis. The announcement on the trial also warned against inaccurate or misleading submissions as well as material omissions of information; this could be a reflection of the public’s doubt on the reliability of LRG data.

Still No Full Freedom To Borrow

Despite the latest change, the selected LRGs are still some way from having full freedom to sell bonds. The central government continues to control the LRG bond issuance process in a few ways. Most importantly, the amount of bonds LRGs are allowed to issue are subject to annual quotas assigned by the State Council (the Chinese cabinet). The LRGs are also only allowed to issue fixed-rate bonds with maturities of five, seven, and 10 years in the proportion 4:3:3.

Some investors could inevitably read the significant influence of the central government over this process as implying sovereign support for the LRG bonds. Bonds issued by local governments in the past few years were priced close to central government bonds. Secondary market activities also show LRG bonds trading at lower yields than the highest rated nongovernment bonds. The effort to develop the Chinese municipal bond market can only be considered a success if investors price debts of different LRGs according to their individual credit characteristics rather than the perception that the bonds have central government support.

More Changes Needed To Further Develop Municipal Bond Market

Getting investors to price bonds based on the LRGs’ differentiated credit metrics isn’t easy. Not least because it is difficult for the central government to absolve responsibility if an LRG defaults on its debt in a unitary state. A default by an LRG could also hurt confidence across the sector and affect the financing of other LRGs. Therefore investors will expect the central government to come to the rescue if an LRG comes close to defaulting.

Also, from the experience of other more developed bond markets, our view is new indirect restrictions to ensure fiscal stability may have to be in place before removing direct controls such as annual bond issuance quotas. Otherwise, there is the risk of a sudden uncontrolled growth in LRG debt. Measures to achieve this in other countries include public finance laws or rules that limit annual net bond issuances to a proportion of capital spending and prescribed ceilings on total LRG debt levels. These measures are effective if the government regularly publishes regional economic and fiscal indicators that are generally regarded as reasonably accurate. Changes to laws or rules governing government public finance may have to happen before the municipal bond market in China develops further.

Even a well-developed municipal bond market does not ensure fiscal stability. This objective is likely to be the main impetus for the MOF’s efforts but it requires off-balance-sheet LRG borrowing to be insignificant. Otherwise, allowing LRGs significantly more freedom to sell bonds will simply add to their borrowing capacity. Consequently, it is also likely that the municipal bond market development will not move far ahead unless the MOF is able to reduce LRGs’ access to off-balance-sheet financing.

Under Standard & Poor’s policies, only a Rating Committee can determine a Credit Rating Action (including a Credit Rating change, affirmation or withdrawal, Rating Outlook change, or CreditWatch action). This commentary and its subject matter have not been the subject of Rating Committee action and should not be interpreted as a change to, or affirmation of, a Credit Rating or Rating Outlook.

Primary Credit Analysts: KimEng Tan, Singapore (65) 6239-6350;
[email protected]
Liang Zhong, Hong Kong (852) 2533-3573;
[email protected]

 




S&P: U.S. Not-for-Profit Health Care Sectors 2013 Pension Plan Medians: Time To Exhale?

The U.S. not-for-profit health care sector finally saw an improvement in the funded status of its pension plans in 2013 due to higher discount rates and stronger asset values. The increase is good news for an industry grappling with credit stress brought on by health care reform and other factors. A higher funded status should mean lower statutory minimum contributions to defined-benefit (DB) pension plans over time, although perhaps not immediately.

Read the full report.




S&P: U.S. Infrastructure Funding: How Insurance Companies and the Private Sector Could Bridge the Gap.

The U.S. infrastructure spending gap stands at a whopping $200 billion per year. Traditional funding sources, such as state and local governments, are no longer in a position to help. But Standard & Poor’s believes insurance company pension funds and private sector investment could spur significant funding capacity. In this CreditMatters TV segment, Senior Managing Director Jay Dhru discusses the possibilities.

Watch the video.




High-Yield Issuers Should Seize the Moment.

Investors’ ravenous demand for high-yield municipal bonds has created an optimal environment for lower-rated issuers, analysts say.

High-yield fund flows totaled $408.1 million for the week ending May 22, and have remained positive for all but one week this year, according to Lipper FMI data. High-yield funds reported outflows 69.2% of the time in 2013.

“It’s a good time for high-yield issuers, BBB category all the way down to nonrated,” Adam Buchanan, vice president of institutional sales and trading at Ziegler Capital Markets, said in an interview. “Due to this market environment, we’re telling issuers bring transactions to market.”

Investor’s desire for high-yield bonds increased this year because of the limited amount of deals coming to market. Volume as of April 30 totaled $89.34 billion, compared to $122.72 billion for the same period in 2013, according to The Bond Buyer’s and Ipreo’s data.

The lack of supply has allowed underwriters to price the few bonds that do come to market at relatively low yields.

“Issuers should look at this market and say yields are being driven lower by demand,” Jim Colby, chief municipal strategist at Van Eck Global, said in an interview. “There is an appetite for high-yield it’s a good time to bring deals to market.”

He said that Van Eck is proof of investors’ appetite for high-yield to a certain extent, since it’s attracted flows into its high-yield fund.

Buchanan also pointed to this year’s tightening credit spreads as another example for why it’s an ideal time to bring high-yield issuances to market.

“There has been a lot of chatter about recent yield transactions and how much their spreads have tighten[ed],” Buchanan said. “Higher-rated yield sector borrowers’ spreads have also come in, for example spreads on AA rated healthcare bonds have tightened 20-30 basis points since December of last year.”

Credit spreads between the Municipal Market Data’s benchmark AAA 10-year GO and its 10-year Baa GO has tightened by 29 basis points to 122 basis points from Jan. 2, 2013, to market close on Friday.

“The spread tightening in yield is from a supply and demand imbalance,” Buchanan said. “High-yield supply is down 50%-plus year-over-year, while the overall market supply is down 30%. Additionally, tax-exempt fund inflows are being driven by high yield funds. The supply/demand imbalance is geared towards the high yield sector and it’s creating an excellent environment for yield sector borrowers.”

Despite these favorable market conditions, analysts are not seeing a large or varied amount of high-yield issuers come to market.

“High-yield is now the domain of many Puerto Rico, many securitized tobacco, and many airports,” Colby said. “It’s a real opportunity for other types of issuers.”

Colby said investors want to see as many different types of investors as are able to come to market.

“I think if you’re building a portfolio and the mantra is diversification,” Colby said. “If you’re not forgetting you need to hedge your bet in some intelligent manner, you want [different high-yield] in your portfolio. What you want is broad diversification and in this kind of an asset class where you really need to pay attention to credit, a broad diversification of issuers is something to be desired.”

Michael Schroeder, president and chief investment officer at Wasmer, Schroeder & Co., said in an interview that this is an environment more high-yield issuers should take advantage of.

“A lot of BBB hospitals have not been issuing much in the high-yield department, and we are not seeing that they will be anytime soon,” he said. “Maybe that will change. It is a good time for issuers to be borrowing, people want high-yield.”

Colby said that in addition to hospitals, charter schools and transportation issuers should be borrowing more.

For the buyside there are credit dangers associated with high-yield bonds, analysts warn. High-yield issuers often have low ratings and therefore a greater chance of defaulting than issuers with investment-grade ratings.

Buchanan acknowledged that while high-yield credit conditions have improved, it is still the risk sector of the marketplace.

“Its credit by credit when you get to the high-yield sector, there are certainly well positioned good nonrated credits out there though, there’s no doubt about that,” he said.

Both Buchanan and Colby said that much of the risk associated with high-yield bonds can be avoided if investors do a credit analysis.

“The dangers are always there if you don’t do your credit work, you don’t do your homework,” Colby said. “[Many investors] just react to the apparent opportunity, which is a yield comparison. But investors, whether they are individual or ETF investors have to make sure your deals are properly protective of bondholder rights, and assert the responsibility of issuer to follow through on their commitments.”

Schroeder noted the inherent risks in high-yield sector, and said investors should be careful, especially in the current rich market.

Buchanan does not see anything that will change market conditions to make them less appealing for high-yield issuers in the immediate future.

“There continue to be dovish comments from [Federal Reserve chair Janet Yellen] and uneven economic data, which has given a bid to treasuries,” he said. “Couple that with low supply and fund flows, this is a unique combination.”

The Federal Open Markets Committee Meeting minutes released on Wednesday re-affirmed the Federal Reserve’s stance that it will not look to raise interest rates until housing data and the inflation rate are stronger.

He does acknowledge though that headline risk could disrupt the high-yield rally, and described it as the “one thing” market participants have to watch.

By HILLARY FLYNN
MAY 27, 2014




Groups Want Congress to Overturn Ban on Use of Bonds with WIFIA Program.

DALLAS – Water groups and state and local officials are already urging members of Congress to amend a new federal loan program for infrastructure projects to allow tax-exempt bonds to be used in conjunction with the financial assistance.

The Water Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act, included in the Water Resources Reform and Development Act Congress passed that President Obama is expected to sign this week, provides $350 million of low-cost loans and credit enhancement for ports, inland waterways, and water supply and treatment infrastructure projects in a five-year pilot program.

The bill limits WIFIA’s contribution to no more than 49% of a project’s cost and caps the overall federal share at 80%. Proceeds from tax-exempt municipal and private activity bonds cannot be used, directly or indirectly, for a project receiving WIFIA support.

Proponents of the WIFIA program hail it as an important new finance tool for funding large projects, while opponents say the prohibition of tax-free debt is a fundamental flaw that will lead to increased privatization of public infrastructure.

Conversations have begun with lawmakers on Capitol Hill in an attempt to amend the water bill in the remainder of this session of Congress or in 2015, said Tommy Holmes, legislative director at the American Water Works Association.

“We’ve already starting talking to Congress,” Holmes said. “We’d like to get that 49% cap raised and be able to use tax-exempt bonds as part of the financing.

“It’s going to be very difficult to get that bill amended this quickly, but it is not impossible,” Holmes said. “If we can’t, we’ll take it up again when the new Congress comes in next year.”

The ban on tax-exempt bond financing was part of the WIFIA proposal in the original Senate bill, and was included by the conference committee that reconciled the differences between Senate and House water bills that passed in 2013, Holmes said. The House bill did not contain any WIFIA program.

“It was a budget decision,” he said. “They wanted to avoid a hit on the U.S. Treasury from reduced revenue due additional tax-exempt debt.”

The National League of Cities, also said it was concerned about the ban on using tax-exempt bonds in conjunction with WIFIA assistance. “We vow to continue to work with Congress to improve this important provision in order to maximize its effectiveness for communities, NLC executive director Clarence Anthony said in a release.

The water bill, H.R. 3080, was approved by large margins in both chambers of Congress last week. The new WIFIA program is a significant breakthrough in confronting the water infrastructure, said David LaFrance, chief executive officer at AWWA. A 2012 report from association put the price tag for maintaining and expanding drinking water systems at $1 trillion over the next 25 years, with a similar amount for waste water systems.

“WIFIA will reduce the financing costs of critical infrastructure projects, allowing communities to fix and expand water systems at a lower cost to their customers,” LaFrance said.

However, the 49% limit and the ban on tax-exempt financing are mistakes that lawmakers should correct, LaFrance said.

“WIFIA will be most effective when communities can fund 100% of project costs, and any non-WIFIA share should be allowed to be financed with tax-exempt debt,” LaFrance said.

Saving just two percentage points on a 30-year loan can result in a savings of 25% of total borrowing costs, LaFrance said, which on a large project can amount to millions of dollars that would otherwise be absorbed through customer bills over many years.

Many utilities and communities won’t be able to take advantage of the low-interest WIFIA loans because of the ban on tax-exempt bonds as a funding method, said Diane VanDeHei, executive director of the Association of Metropolitan Water Agencies.

Utilities will have to issue taxable debt that carry higher interest rates than could be achieved with conventional government bonds or attract private investments to complete WIFIA projects, she said.

“The tax-exempt financing restriction was not conceived as a matter of policy, but was necessary to achieve a clean budget score,” VanDeHei said. “AMWA is confident that lawmakers who have consistently supported WIFIA will continue working with us to do so in the months ahead.”

The ban on tax-exempt debt for WIFIA projects is a “raw deal” and “a wolf in sheep’s clothing” for municipal water systems, said Wenonah Hauter, executive director of Food & Water Watch.

“WIFIA is anything but innovative,” she said.

“WIFIA will give low-interest loans primarily to private water corporations, compete with the state revolving funds for federal resources, and place inappropriate pressure on local governments to privatize their drinking water and wastewater systems,” Hauter said.

Water utilities have financed $1.7 trillion of water infrastructure needs over the last decade with tax-exempt bonds, she said.

“Cities and towns will not be able to use tax-exempt bonds to cover the portion of an infrastructure project that WIFIA doesn’t fund,” Hauter said. “This effectively makes WIFIA useless for most municipalities.”

Strengthening federal support of state water revolving loan programs would be more effective than the enacted WIFIA legislation, she said.

Federal funding for local water and sewer systems has dropped 80%, adjusted for inflation, since 1980, Hauter said. The Environmental Protection Agency has estimated that $384 billion is needed over 20 years to maintain deteriorating water systems, she said, but federal assistance over the last 16 years totals only $15 billion.

The ban on tax-exempt bonds for WIFIA opens the door to more public-private partnerships in water projects and more privatization of water suppliers, said Erin Diaz of watchdog group Corporate Accountability International.

“The privatization of water systems around the globe has often resulted in devastating results for the economy and people




Looming Public Pension Crisis Is Bigger Than It Appears.

Summary

  • Public pension plans are vastly underfunded and imperil state and local budgets over the long-term.
  • High credit ratings and optimistic actuarial assumptions mask the full extent of the looming crises.
  • Low yields on long-term municipal bonds reflect hunger for yield and obliviousness to underlying risks.

With 30-Year muni bonds yielding a paltry 3.39% on average (according toBloomberg), investors seem to be assuming both that inflation will remain historically low over that holding period and public pension costs will not imperil state and municipal budgets. In fact, the average muni yield of 3.39% was equivalent to the 30-year treasury yield as of 5/23/2014 despite the fact that the federal government has powerful options available to it to avert default (i.e. seigniorage). Even when factoring in munis’ favorable tax treatment, the effective 30-year muni-Treasury spread is small.

Famed investor Warren Buffett weighed in on public pensions in his 2013 shareholder letter:

“Local and state financial problems are accelerating, in large part because public entities promised pensions they couldn’t afford. Citizens and public officials typically under-appreciated the gigantic financial tapeworm that was born when promises were made that conflicted with a willingness to fund them….During the next decade, you will read a lot of news – bad news – about public pension plans.”

While there has been some public discussion about the looming public pension crisis, most of the conversation has been driven either by special interest groups that sought to deny pensioners the benefits they were promised or public sector unions advocating for their members. The reports produced by the state plans, themselves, use an accounting gimmick (overestimating future investment returns) to understate the amount of the unfunded liability. Using data from data.gov and the Boston College Center for Retirement Research, I estimate that there was at least a $1.1+ TRILLION cumulative unfunded liability in state and local plans, for which data is available, as of the 2010 plan year end (usually June 30, 2010). That represents more than half the entire aggregate annual budgets of all fifty US states. Detailed aggregate, state-by-state, and plan-by-plan data is presented at the bottom of the article.

Surprisingly, aggregate 2012 state-level data shows that most states underperformed all of the relevant benchmark indexes for their plan year periods. 2002-2010 plan-level data shows that not a single plan (out of the 120 analyzed) attained its assumed rate of return over that 9 year period; most were short by a large margin. All but one of the plans showed a funding shortfall as of year-end 2010, using my methodology (that does not give funds credit for returns assumptions that have proven to be wildly optimistic), and, in aggregate, plans had only about two-thirds of the assets required to be fully funded.

At a high level, the implication for muni-bond holders is clear. Many of the states with very high levels of unfunded liabilities sport high credit ratings. While most of the state plans’ actuarial reports assume a 7.5%-8% future rate of return on investments, the 2012 data shows that most pension plans underperformed both the Barclays US Aggregate Bond Index and major stock indexes over the 2012 fiscal year (July 2011 – June 2012)–and posted nowhere near their assumed rates of return. Estimating the individual plans’ annual rate of return between the 2001 fiscal year end and the 2010 fiscal year end (the most recent time period for which the BC data is available for many of the plans) shows that not a single plan (out of 120 for which data was available) achieved its assumed rate of annual return over that period; most underperformed by a considerable margin. While higher market returns in 2011-2013 may have closed some of that gap, the extent to which anticipated returns were overestimated for the 9 year period analyzed is very large.

Individual investors tend to have exposure to municipal bonds by either owning the bonds directly or through a mutual fund. In addition, there are a number of uninsured long-term or high yield muni-bond ETFs:

SPDR Nuveen Barclays Capital Muni Bond (TFI)

Market Vectors AMT-Free Long Municipal Index ETF (MLN)

SPDR Nuveen S&P High Yield Municipal Bond ETF (HYMB)

Market Vectors High-Yield Municipal Bond Index ETF (HYD)

However, taking a bearish position on the muni market is a challenging exercise. Long term puts do not seem to be available for any of the above-listed ETFs. While there is a Markit muni CDS (credit-default-swap) index (MCDX), it does not currently present a trading opportunity for most individual investors. Normal short positions (i.e. in the above-listed ETFs) are inherently risky, because of the unlimited downside exposure, and are not really suitable for most individual investors.

Analysis

The 2012 plan year, for most states, runs from July 2011 – June 2012. Over that period, stock and bond indexes posted returns from 3.14% to 7.48%:

Rate of Benchmark returns for June 2011 – June 2012

Closing Price

30-Jun-11

Closing Price

30-Jun-12

% Change

Source

NASDAQ

2,773.52

2,935.05

5.82%

Yahoo Finance

S&P500

1,320.64

1,362.16

3.14%

Google Finance

Dow Jones

12,414.34

12,880.09

3.75%

Google Finance

Barclays US Aggregate Bond Index

7.48%

Barclays

* Barclays index calculated as product of monthly reported (1+RoR) rates of return over the holding period

Surprisingly, most of the state pensions underperformed every single one of these indexes and Arkansas, Hawaii, and New Jersey even posted negative returns for the 2012 plan year. Below is the estimated (approximate) 2012 fiscal year annual return for the aggregate of each state’s (non-local) plans (as reported by Data.gov), calculated as the value of the investment returns divided by the ending plan balance less the net outflows for the year less the posted returns–and contrasted with the benchmark indexes. The number of plans that underperformed every single one of the indexes is staggering.

Est Rate of

Indexes

State

Return in 2012

Exceeded

Alabama

18.04%

4*

Alaska

1.11%

0

Arizona

1.23%

0

Arkansas

-0.42%

0

California

3.26%

1

Colorado

2.15%

0

Connecticut

3.52%

1

Delaware

4.72%

2

Florida

5.00%

2

Georgia

1.97%

0

Hawaii

-0.18%

0

Idaho

1.55%

0

Illinois

0.83%

0

Indiana

1.02%

0

Iowa

3.48%

1

Kansas

0.96%

0

Kentucky

1.43%

0

Louisiana

0.02%

0

Maine

0.72%

0

Maryland

0.92%

0

Massachusetts

-0.26%

0

Michigan

12.18%

4*

Minnesota

3.09%

0

Mississippi

0.51%

0

Missouri

3.41%

1

Montana

16.35%

4

Nebraska

1.04%

0

Nevada

3.14%

0

New Hampshire

2.29%

0

New Jersey

-1.34%

0

New Mexico

0.35%

0

New York

4.61%

2

North Carolina

7.61%

4

North Dakota

9.13%

4

Ohio

1.30%

0

Oklahoma

1.37%

0

Oregon

1.22%

0

Pennsylvania

2.86%

0

Rhode Island

1.72%

0

South Carolina

0.68%

0

South Dakota

1.81%

0

Tennessee

5.34%

2

Texas

8.11%

4*

Utah

2.65%

0

Vermont

19.53%

4

Virginia

1.76%

0

Washington

1.70%

0

West Virginia

1.61%

0

Wisconsin

1.04%

0

Wyoming

-0.70%

0

* Indicates plan has fiscal year that differs from that used to calculate the index

The Boston College data set has annual data points for 126 individual state and local pension plans between 2010 and 2011. However, there are many missing data points for 2011 and a number of artifacts/outliers that appear to be problematic. Removing those from the data set yields 2001-2002 through 2009-2010 performance data for 120 plans. Analyzing this data (estimating the annual rate of return in year X as the investment return for year X divided by the ending market value of investments in year X-1), alongside each plan’s assumed rate of return demonstrates that, over that time period, every single one of the plans dramatically overestimated their annual rate of return over the time period in question.

Recent Estimated Returns

Estimated Gross %

Estimated rate of

2010 Annual

Relative to Returns Assumption

Return (2002-2010)

return (2002-2010)

Returns Assumption

Alabama ERS

-3.58%

-0.40%

8.00%

Alabama Teachers

0.13%

0.01%

8.00%

Alaska PERS

-9.55%

-1.11%

8.00%

Alaska Teachers

-5.49%

-0.63%

8.00%

Arizona Public Safety Personnel

-3.67%

-0.42%

8.25%

Arizona SRS

12.05%

1.27%

8.00%

Arkansas PERS

11.11%

1.18%

8.00%

Arkansas Teachers

25.98%

2.60%

8.00%

California PERF

15.57%

1.62%

7.75%

California Teachers

7.45%

0.80%

7.75%

Chicago Teachers

9.64%

1.03%

8.00%

City of Austin ERS

41.27%

3.91%

7.75%

Colorado Municipal

39.85%

3.80%

8.00%

Colorado School

31.68%

3.10%

8.00%

Colorado State

28.22%

2.80%

8.00%

Connecticut SERS

-10.58%

-1.23%

8.25%

Connecticut Teachers

45.74%

4.27%

8.50%

Contra Costa County

28.42%

2.82%

7.75%

DC Police & Fire

21.56%

2.19%

7.00%

DC Teachers

22.07%

2.24%

7.00%

Delaware State Employees

18.48%

1.90%

7.50%

Denver Employees

27.03%

2.69%

8.00%

Denver Schools

31.36%

3.08%

8.00%

Duluth Teachers

-6.36%

-0.73%

8.50%

Fairfax County Schools

19.17%

1.97%

7.50%

Florida RS

11.33%

1.20%

7.75%

Georgia ERS

9.56%

1.02%

7.50%

Georgia Teachers

4.57%

0.50%

7.50%

Hawaii ERS

10.39%

1.10%

8.00%

Houston Firefighters

39.48%

3.77%

8.50%

Idaho PERS

19.07%

1.96%

7.25%

Illinois Municipal

46.38%

4.32%

7.50%

Illinois SERS

5.32%

0.58%

7.75%

Illinois Teachers

16.47%

1.71%

8.50%

Illinois Universities

20.43%

2.09%

7.75%

Indiana PERF

40.51%

3.85%

7.00%

Indiana Teachers

7.97%

0.86%

7.00%

Iowa PERS

23.84%

2.40%

7.50%

Kansas PERS

17.36%

1.79%

8.00%

Kentucky County

9.22%

0.98%

7.75%

Kentucky ERS

10.71%

1.14%

7.75%

Kentucky Teachers

-1.35%

-0.15%

8.00%

LA County ERS

-13.83%

-1.64%

5.00%

Louisiana SERS

20.42%

2.09%

8.25%

Louisiana Teachers

8.22%

0.88%

8.25%

Maine Local

39.03%

3.73%

7.25%

Maine State and Teacher

22.25%

2.26%

7.25%

Maryland PERS

14.08%

1.47%

7.75%

Maryland Teachers

14.89%

1.55%

7.75%

Michigan Municipal

43.92%

4.13%

8.00%

Michigan Public Schools

40.87%

3.88%

8.00%

Minneapolis ERF

19.58%

2.01%

6.00%

Minnesota PERF

-16.47%

-1.98%

8.50%

Minnesota State Employees

42.14%

3.98%

8.50%

Minnesota Teachers

-4.94%

-0.56%

8.50%

Mississippi PERS

3.47%

0.38%

8.00%

Missouri DOT and Highway Patrol

31.10%

3.05%

8.00%

Missouri Local

25.22%

2.53%

7.25%

Missouri PEERS

13.35%

1.40%

8.00%

Missouri State Employees

43.95%

4.13%

8.50%

Missouri Teachers

13.03%

1.37%

8.00%

Montana PERS

-3.96%

-0.45%

7.75%

Montana Teachers

-5.37%

-0.61%

7.75%

Nebraska Schools

16.74%

1.73%

8.00%

Nevada Regular Employees

7.13%

0.77%

8.00%

New Hampshire Retirement System

8.43%

0.90%

7.75%

New Jersey PERS

6.49%

0.70%

8.25%

New Jersey Police & Fire

6.87%

0.74%

8.25%

New Jersey Teachers

6.10%

0.66%

8.25%

New Mexico PERF

5.55%

0.60%

7.75%

New Mexico Teachers

14.77%

1.54%

7.75%

New York City ERS

4.76%

0.52%

8.00%

New York City Teachers

4.50%

0.49%

8.00%

New York State Teachers

10.69%

1.14%

8.00%

North Carolina Local Government

57.96%

5.21%

7.25%

North Carolina Teachers and State Employees

55.07%

5.00%

7.25%

North Dakota PERS

16.95%

1.76%

8.00%

North Dakota Teachers

9.97%

1.06%

8.00%

NY State & Local ERS

23.87%

2.41%

8.00%

NY State & Local Police & Fire

23.98%

2.42%

8.00%

Ohio PERS

26.43%

2.64%

8.00%

Ohio Police & Fire

30.85%

3.03%

8.25%

Ohio School Employees

7.59%

0.82%

8.00%

Ohio Teachers

12.21%

1.29%

8.00%

Oklahoma PERS

18.53%

1.91%

7.50%

Oklahoma Teachers

20.88%

2.13%

8.00%

Oregon PERS

27.69%

2.75%

8.00%

Pennsylvania School Employees

18.23%

1.88%

7.75%

Pennsylvania State ERS

57.45%

5.17%

8.00%

Phoenix ERS

5.95%

0.64%

8.00%

Rhode Island ERS

14.12%

1.48%

7.50%

Rhode Island Municipal

14.14%

1.48%

7.50%

San Diego County

32.88%

3.21%

8.00%

San Francisco City & County

20.41%

2.09%

7.66%

South Carolina Police

4.50%

0.49%

8.00%

South Carolina RS

6.63%

0.72%

8.00%

South Dakota PERS

19.90%

2.04%

7.75%

St. Louis School Employees

34.37%

3.34%

8.00%

St. Paul Teachers

37.72%

3.62%

8.50%

Texas County & District

44.55%

4.18%

8.00%

Texas ERS

8.49%

0.91%

8.00%

Texas LECOS

8.39%

0.90%

8.00%

Texas Municipal

21.60%

2.20%

7.00%

Texas Teachers

18.69%

1.92%

8.00%

University of California

2.86%

0.31%

7.50%

Utah Noncontributory

37.43%

3.60%

7.75%

Vermont State Employees

19.09%

1.96%

6.25%

Vermont Teachers

20.55%

2.10%

6.25%

Virginia Retirement System

24.73%

2.49%

7.00%

Washington LEOFF Plan 1

23.80%

2.40%

8.00%

Washington LEOFF Plan 2

25.03%

2.51%

8.00%

Washington PERS 1

23.17%

2.34%

8.00%

Washington PERS 2/3

24.28%

2.44%

8.00%

Washington School Employees Plan 2/3

24.07%

2.43%

8.00%

Washington Teachers Plan 1

23.33%

2.36%

8.00%

Washington Teachers Plan 2/3

24.19%

2.44%

8.00%

West Virginia PERS

37.88%

3.63%

7.50%

West Virginia Teachers

39.35%

3.76%

7.50%

Wisconsin Retirement System

48.69%

4.51%

7.20%

Wyoming Public Employees

23.12%

2.34%

8.00%

* Excludes MA (outlier w/-80%- returns in 2009)

* Excludes TN (missing actuarial data from 2010)

* Excludes plans with missing data

Michigan SERS

Nevada Police Officer and Firefighter

Note that the plans calculate their unfunded liabilities assuming the above (high) rate of returns on their investments and an actuarial methodology called asset smoothing. As a result, they are almost universally arguing that $1 of assets in their plan today actually offsets more than $1 of NPV worth of plan liabilities. To calculate my estimate of their unfunded liabilities, I assume that $1 of assets at their period end market value offsets $1 of NPV of liabilities (no asset smoothing). Below is a plan by plan account of the estimated unfunded liabilities according to my calculations versus each plan’s.

Actuarial vs. Market Value of Assets

Actuarial Assets

Market Value of

Actuarial Liabilities

Liabilities Less

% Shortfall

Market Value of Assets vs. Liabilities

2010 ($1000s)

Assets 2010 ($1000s)

2010 ($1000s)

Assets (at Market)

Alabama ERS

$ 9,739,331

$ 8,176,732

$ 14,284,119

$ 6,107,387

42.76%

Alabama Teachers

$ 20,132,779

$ 17,037,673

$ 28,299,523

$ 11,261,850

39.80%

Alaska PERS

$ 6,469,832

$ 5,391,527

$ 10,371,672

$ 4,980,145

48.02%

Alaska Teachers

$ 3,259,868

$ 2,716,557

$ 6,006,981

$ 3,290,424

54.78%

Arizona Public Safety Personnel

$ 5,591,304

$ 4,585,863

$ 8,255,185

$ 3,669,322

44.45%

Arizona SRS

$ 27,572,000

$ 22,146,960

$ 36,073,000

$ 13,926,040

38.61%

Arkansas PERS

$ 5,409,000

$ 4,728,500

$ 7,304,000

$ 2,575,500

35.26%

Arkansas Teachers

$ 10,845,000

$ 9,883,574

$ 14,702,000

$ 4,818,426

32.77%

California PERF

$ 257,070,000

$ 201,616,074

$ 308,343,000

$ 106,726,926

34.61%

California Teachers

$ 140,291,000

$ 129,768,107

$ 196,315,000

$ 66,546,893

33.90%

Chicago Teachers

$ 10,917,417

$ 8,947,470

$ 16,319,744

$ 7,372,273

45.17%

City of Austin ERS

$ 1,711,600

$ 1,711,577

$ 2,460,700

$ 749,123

30.44%

Colorado Municipal

$ 2,926,045

$ 2,883,504

$ 4,005,566

$ 1,122,062

28.01%

Colorado School

$ 20,321,736

$ 19,870,277

$ 31,339,754

$ 11,469,477

36.60%

Colorado State

$ 12,791,946

$ 12,487,105

$ 20,356,176

$ 7,869,071

38.66%

Connecticut SERS

$ 9,349,605

$ 7,791,337

$ 21,054,197

$ 13,262,860

62.99%

Connecticut Teachers

$ 14,430,200

$ 12,284,330

$ 23,495,900

$ 11,211,570

47.72%

Contra Costa County

$ 5,341,822

$ 5,027,157

$ 6,654,037

$ 1,626,880

24.45%

DC Police & Fire

$ 5,137,409

$ 2,925,742

$ 5,137,409

$ 2,211,667

43.05%

DC Teachers

$ 1,671,184

$ 1,317,470

$ 1,671,184

$ 353,714

21.17%

Delaware State Employees

$ 6,808,957

$ 5,909,159

$ 7,096,326

$ 1,187,167

16.73%

Denver Employees

$ 1,942,870

$ 1,725,680

$ 2,284,760

$ 559,080

24.47%

Denver Schools

$ 2,961,720

$ 2,940,926

$ 3,332,814

$ 391,888

11.76%

Duluth Teachers

$ 255,309

$ 192,403

$ 312,650

$ 120,247

38.46%

Fairfax County Schools

$ 1,822,603

$ 1,607,663

$ 2,384,061

$ 776,398

32.57%

Florida RS

$ 120,929,666

$ 107,179,990

$ 139,652,377

$ 32,472,387

23.25%

Georgia ERS

$ 13,046,193

$ 10,956,296

$ 16,295,352

$ 5,339,056

32.76%

Georgia Teachers

$ 54,529,416

$ 45,925,549

$ 63,592,037

$ 17,666,488

27.78%

Hawaii ERS

$ 11,345,600

$ 9,821,633

$ 18,483,700

$ 8,662,067

46.86%

Houston Firefighters

$ 3,116,848

$ 2,721,637

$ 3,337,473

$ 615,836

18.45%

Idaho PERS

$ 9,632,100

$ 9,599,892

$ 12,187,900

$ 2,588,008

21.23%

Illinois Municipal

$ 24,251,137

$ 25,141,889

$ 29,129,228

$ 3,987,339

13.69%

Illinois SERS

$ 10,961,540

$ 9,201,831

$ 29,309,464

$ 20,107,634

68.60%

Illinois Teachers

$ 37,439,092

$ 31,323,784

$ 77,293,198

$ 45,969,414

59.47%

Illinois Universities

$ 13,966,643

$ 12,121,542

$ 30,120,427

$ 17,998,885

59.76%

Indiana PERF

$ 12,357,199

$ 10,581,319

$ 14,506,052

$ 3,924,733

27.06%

Indiana Teachers

$ 8,804,964

$ 8,140,769

$ 19,896,625

$ 11,755,856

59.08%

Iowa PERS

$ 21,537,459

$ 19,878,080

$ 26,468,420

$ 6,590,340

24.90%

Kansas PERS

$ 13,589,658

$ 11,352,784

$ 21,853,783

$ 10,500,999

48.05%

Kentucky County

$ 7,296,322

$ 6,327,382

$ 11,131,174

$ 4,803,792

43.16%

Kentucky ERS

$ 4,712,945

$ 3,948,108

$ 11,692,945

$ 7,744,837

66.24%

Kentucky Teachers

$ 14,851,330

$ 12,456,619

$ 24,344,316

$ 11,887,697

48.83%

LA County ERS

$ 38,839,392

$ 33,433,888

$ 46,646,838

$ 13,212,950

28.33%

Louisiana SERS

$ 8,512,403

$ 8,064,543

$ 14,764,015

$ 6,699,472

45.38%

Louisiana Teachers

$ 12,868,484

$ 12,021,431

$ 23,674,842

$ 11,653,411

49.22%

Maine Local

$ 2,045,337

$ 1,781,153

$ 2,122,833

$ 341,680

16.10%

Maine State and Teacher

$ 8,369,763

$ 7,288,320

$ 12,676,367

$ 5,388,047

42.50%

Maryland PERS

$ 11,937,944

$ 10,983,303

$ 19,009,788

$ 8,026,485

42.22%

Maryland Teachers

$ 20,908,150

$ 19,256,510

$ 31,963,421

$ 12,706,911

39.75%

Michigan Municipal

$ 6,945,423

$ 5,973,039

$ 9,317,222

$ 3,344,183

35.89%

Michigan Public Schools

$ 43,294,000

$ 35,855,478

$ 60,927,000

$ 25,071,522

41.15%

Minneapolis ERF

$ 844,033

$ 844,033

$ 1,286,151

$ 442,118

34.38%

Minnesota PERF

$ 13,126,993

$ 11,338,582

$ 17,180,956

$ 5,842,374

34.00%

Minnesota State Employees

$ 8,960,391

$ 7,692,531

$ 10,264,071

$ 2,571,540

25.05%

Minnesota Teachers

$ 17,323,146

$ 14,939,540

$ 22,081,634

$ 7,142,094

32.34%

Mississippi PERS

$ 20,143,426

$ 16,788,214

$ 31,399,988

$ 14,611,774

46.53%

Missouri DOT and Highway Patrol

$ 1,375,845

$ 1,312,717

$ 3,258,867

$ 1,946,150

59.72%

Missouri Local

$ 3,592,226

$ 3,695,341

$ 4,432,332

$ 736,991

16.63%

Missouri PEERS

$ 2,892,411

$ 2,404,425

$ 3,658,713

$ 1,254,288

34.28%

Missouri State Employees

$ 7,923,377

$ 6,727,623

$ 9,853,155

$ 3,125,532

31.72%

Missouri Teachers

$ 28,931,331

$ 23,755,741

$ 37,233,602

$ 13,477,861

36.20%

Montana PERS

$ 3,889,890

$ 3,315,906

$ 5,241,819

$ 1,925,913

36.74%

Montana Teachers

$ 2,956,583

$ 2,521,446

$ 4,518,168

$ 1,996,722

44.19%

Nebraska Schools

$ 7,040,909

$ 5,940,537

$ 8,542,119

$ 2,601,582

30.46%

Nevada Regular Employees

$ 19,665,764

$ 16,604,769

$ 27,616,270

$ 11,011,501

39.87%

New Hampshire Retirement System

$ 5,233,838

$ 4,847,852

$ 8,953,932

$ 4,106,080

45.86%

New Jersey PERS

$ 28,734,593

$ 24,332,712

$ 41,347,836

$ 17,015,124

41.15%

New Jersey Police & Fire

$ 22,558,521

$ 19,844,138

$ 29,274,359

$ 9,430,222

32.21%

New Jersey Teachers

$ 33,265,327

$ 25,892,496

$ 49,543,348

$ 23,650,852

47.74%

New Mexico PERF

$ 12,243,713

$ 10,016,491

$ 15,601,461

$ 5,584,970

35.80%

New Mexico Teachers

$ 9,431,300

$ 8,232,523

$ 14,353,500

$ 6,120,977

42.64%

New York City ERS

$ 42,556,400

$ 35,383,794

$ 42,556,400

$ 7,172,606

16.85%

New York City Teachers

$ 31,135,400

$ 26,398,410

$ 31,135,400

$ 4,736,990

15.21%

New York State Teachers

$ 105,302,082

$ 76,844,937

$ 105,302,082

$ 28,457,145

27.02%

North Carolina Local Government

$ 18,570,514

$ 15,795,385

$ 18,646,430

$ 2,851,045

15.29%

North Carolina Teachers and State Employees

$ 57,102,198

$ 48,773,836

$ 59,876,066

$ 11,102,230

18.54%

North Dakota PERS

$ 1,621,723

$ 1,474,185

$ 2,208,386

$ 734,201

33.25%

North Dakota Teachers

$ 1,841,960

$ 1,437,950

$ 2,637,165

$ 1,199,215

45.47%

NY State & Local ERS

$ 158,159,164

$ 114,057,641

$ 158,159,164

$ 44,101,523

27.88%

NY State & Local Police & Fire

$ 28,605,772

$ 20,194,091

$ 28,605,772

$ 8,411,681

29.41%

Ohio PERS

$ 60,599,000

$ 63,515,006

$ 79,630,000

$ 16,114,994

20.24%

Ohio Police & Fire

$ 10,681,012

$ 10,075,500

$ 15,384,437

$ 5,308,937

34.51%

Ohio School Employees

$ 10,787,000

$ 8,953,363

$ 14,855,000

$ 5,901,637

39.73%

Ohio Teachers

$ 55,946,259

$ 54,140,413

$ 94,720,669

$ 40,580,256

42.84%

Oklahoma PERS

$ 6,348,416

$ 5,774,379

$ 9,622,628

$ 3,848,249

39.99%

Oklahoma Teachers

$ 9,566,700

$ 8,351,966

$ 19,980,600

$ 11,628,634

58.20%

Oregon PERS

$ 51,583,600

$ 47,685,015

$ 59,329,500

$ 11,644,485

19.63%

Pennsylvania School Employees

$ 59,306,848

$ 45,598,475

$ 79,005,428

$ 33,406,953

42.28%

Pennsylvania State ERS

$ 29,443,945

$ 25,886,102

$ 39,179,594

$ 13,293,492

33.93%

Phoenix ERS

$ 1,868,093

$ 1,535,174

$ 2,697,288

$ 1,162,114

43.08%

Rhode Island ERS

$ 6,405,209

$ 5,487,924

$ 13,238,855

$ 7,750,931

58.55%

Rhode Island Municipal

$ 1,196,385

$ 1,000,481

$ 1,626,621

$ 626,140

38.49%

San Diego County

$ 8,433,310

$ 6,868,944

$ 9,999,161

$ 3,130,217

31.30%

San Francisco City & County

$ 16,069,058

$ 13,136,786

$ 17,643,394

$ 4,506,608

25.54%

South Carolina Police

$ 3,612,700

$ 2,851,474

$ 4,850,457

$ 1,998,983

41.21%

South Carolina RS

$ 25,400,331

$ 19,681,137

$ 38,774,029

$ 19,092,892

49.24%

South Dakota PERS

$ 7,119,875

$ 6,496,635

$ 7,393,251

$ 896,616

12.13%

St. Louis School Employees

$ 944,357

$ 937,594

$ 1,066,271

$ 128,677

12.07%

St. Paul Teachers

$ 1,001,444

$ 815,307

$ 1,471,630

$ 656,323

44.60%

Texas County & District

$ 17,808,600

$ 17,729,760

$ 19,931,200

$ 2,201,440

11.05%

Texas ERS

$ 23,628,567

$ 19,580,610

$ 27,668,876

$ 8,088,266

29.23%

Texas LECOS

$ 802,897

$ 668,353

$ 930,747

$ 262,394

28.19%

Texas Municipal

$ 16,986,000

$ 17,992,494

$ 20,481,500

$ 2,489,006

12.15%

Texas Teachers

$ 111,293,000

$ 95,688,405

$ 134,191,000

$ 38,502,595

28.69%

University of California

$ 41,195,318

$ 34,574,454

$ 47,504,309

$ 12,929,855

27.22%

Utah Noncontributory

$ 16,895,039

$ 15,802,205

$ 20,544,827

$ 4,742,622

23.08%

Vermont State Employees

$ 1,265,404

$ 1,169,845

$ 1,559,324

$ 389,479

24.98%

Vermont Teachers

$ 1,410,368

$ 1,305,250

$ 2,122,191

$ 816,941

38.50%

Virginia Retirement System

$ 52,729,000

$ 44,645,816

$ 72,801,000

$ 28,155,184

38.67%

Washington LEOFF Plan 1

$ 5,560,900

$ 4,586,358

$ 4,393,300

$ (193,058)

-4.39%

Washington LEOFF Plan 2

$ 7,927,000

$ 5,081,657

$ 7,927,000

$ 2,845,343

35.89%

Washington PERS 1

$ 9,293,000

$ 7,626,486

$ 12,538,100

$ 4,911,614

39.17%

Washington PERS 2/3

$ 25,978,000

$ 16,368,663

$ 25,978,000

$ 9,609,337

36.99%

Washington School Employees Plan 2/3

$ 3,459,000

$ 2,237,385

$ 3,459,000

$ 1,221,615

35.32%

Washington Teachers Plan 1

$ 7,791,300

$ 6,404,061

$ 9,201,300

$ 2,797,239

30.40%

Washington Teachers Plan 2/3

$ 9,106,000

$ 5,547,281

$ 9,106,000

$ 3,558,719

39.08%

West Virginia PERS

$ 3,974,609

$ 3,866,588

$ 5,325,830

$ 1,459,242

27.40%

West Virginia Teachers

$ 4,143,540

$ 4,143,540

$ 8,904,312

$ 4,760,772

53.47%

Wisconsin Retirement System

$ 80,626,900

$ 75,872,072

$ 80,758,800

$ 4,886,728

6.05%

Wyoming Public Employees

$ 5,799,531

$ 5,495,337

$ 6,855,643

$ 1,360,306

19.84%

Total

$2,629,875,887

$ 2,231,596,280

$ 3,375,676,773

$ 1,144,080,493

33.89%

Overstatement of

Assets

$ 398,279,607

Estimated Unfunded Obligations

$ 1,144,080,493

In total, my calculations show over a $1.1 trillion unfunded liability in the 120 state and local plans excluding any unfunded liabilities in additional local plans within each state for which data is unavailable (the plans excluded from the plan-level analysis: MA, TN, etc. would increase this aggregate shortfall if included). While investment returns are likely to be higher in the 2012-2014 fiscal years, closing some of this gap, it would be imprudent to assume that the strong performance of the underlying investment indexes continues at that elevated rate.

Policymakers at the state and local levels will be forced to make difficult trade-offs in the years ahead. $1.1 trillion is more than half of the aggregate total state budgets for the most recent fiscal years for whichdata is available (5/25/2014). It is a very big number, and no amount of unreasonable assumptions or whitewashing will make it go away on its own. Retirees, future retirees, taxpayers, and municipal bond holders all deserve better than the uncertain future presented by the status quo. The political cost of taking action is high but the ultimate financial cost of inaction will be far higher.

If you are holding muni bonds (either directly or indirectly) in your search for yield, you should consider the specific risks of the state or municipality, and its unfunded obligations, in the context of your investment.

NOTE: The full excel workbook containing the raw data, and my calculations, is available upon request. If you make use of any of the data in this article, please cite the following sources:

1) Lenny Grover’s article on Seeking Alpha

2) Data.gov

3) Boston College Center for Retirement Research

May. 27, 2014 10:08 AM ET  

 




Toll Road Bonds Offer Rare Value In Pricey Muni Market – Citi.

Citi says the municipal-bond market looks rich and that it doesn’t see good things ahead for munis for the remainder of this year, with possibly one exception: the toll road sector. Citi’s muni strategy troika of Vikram Rai, Mikhail Foux and George Friedlander foresee a time soon, likely next year, “when the need for infrastructure investment overwhelms fiscal restraint,” and they expect a slew of new bond issuance to support municipal infrastructure needs. Citi says new projects in the toll-road sector already seem to be picking up, and sees investor opportunities ahead. From Citi today:

Toll road projects serving large metropolitan areas with high wealth levels and a diverse geographic and economic base (for instance, projects in the New York tri-state area and San Francisco Bay area) are typically blessed with relatively strong inelastic demand for their services and also possess strong independent rate setting ability. Thus, these highly rated issues have traded more like essential service revenue bonds and have richened fairly drastically with the rest of the high grade municipal sector. While there is no doubt that these bonds aren’t exactly suitable for investors looking for yield pick-up, we still consider them cheap vs. high grade bonds in essential service categories such as gas, power and electric utilities. These bonds also offer strong defensive play against a darkening of the municipal credit landscape.

But, for investors looking for yield pick-up while willing to slide down the credit spectrum, we would encourage exploring newly issued BBB/BB rated toll road bonds. While evaluating these new issues, we prefer projects which offer essentiality i.e. there is no threat from other toll free options which could force new toll roads to compete for business based on toll charges.

May 27, 2014, 12:01 P.M. ET
By Michael Aneiro




The Outlook on Pay for Success / Social Impact Bonds.

Pay for Success is an approach to funding social service programs designed to improve outcomes and ultimately reduce the costs of addressing these issues. In a Pay for Success contract, private investors provide funding for preventative or interventional services up-front, and government reimburses these investors with a return on their investment, only if results are achieved.

In doing so, private investors take on the initial risk, governments pay based on outcomes, and cost-saving programs with demonstrated effectiveness gain access to new and additional funding sources. Pay for Success projects are underway in several states in the U.S., including California.

The Housing California conference, an annual conference held in April with more than 1,000 participants involved in housing, included an informative session on the outlook on Pay for Success, or Social Impact Bonds, with LeSar Development Consultants, Corporation for Supportive Housing, Third Sector Capital Partners, Santa Clara County, and California State Assemblymember Toni Atkins’ office.

The audience, a mix of affordable housing developers, local government staff, and lenders, were receptive to Pay for Success, interested in learning how it could be applied to their programs, particularly around affordable housing.

Some of the key highlights of the panel looking at the outlook for Pay for Success included:

Change the Nomenclature to Gain More Understanding and Support – move away from the misnomer “social impact bond” to nomenclature that more accurately describes the tool –“Pay for Success” or “Pay for Performance”. Santa Clara County’s COO Gary Graves shared that upon hearing about “Social Impact Bonds”, he was skeptical, as the notion of floating a bond was unappealing. Once understanding that Pay for Success actually does not involve bond financing, but rather contracts that are paid upon outcomes being reached, and learning more, Mr. Graves became a proponent of the idea and Santa Clara County has a Pay for Success program under development.

Counties Are Key Partners, Along with Cross-Sector Community Partners – Pay for Success programs that are currently emerging in California have Counties serving as the public agencies that pay upon successful outcomes being reached, and a broad cross-sector of the community collaborating. In Santa Clara County, the County was spurred to action by the community, who advocated for the County to adopt a Pay for Success program. Community partners and the County worked in collaboration to complete a landscape analysis process to determine which services could fit into a Pay for Success model. Now, the County is issuing a Request for Proposals to select a lead agency for the program.

Homelessness, Workforce Development, Recidivism, Frequent Health Users, Supportive Housing, and Child Welfare are emerging areas where Pay for Success programs are being developed. Santa Clara County’s landscape analysis identified homelessness and acute mental health treatment as two areas where services could fit into a Pay for Success model. One success outcome measure will be keeping a homeless family housed for at least a year.

In Minnesota and Massachusetts, PFS projects are focused on supportive housing. Minnesota also has a workforce development PFS program underway. In Los Angeles, the PFS model is used by Just In Reach provides housing, workforce, and substance abuse services to homeless inmates to reduce recidivism. Success outcome measures include reducing bed days in incarceration.

Challenges remain for this burgeoning field. Some of the most significant challenges are:

Some of these challenges are being overcome by communities and local government seeing the benefits of a Pay for Success model and forging ahead despite the drawback. In Santa Clara County’s case, the County had difficulty identifying cashable savings from their acute mental health treatment Pay for Success program, because while they anticipated wait times at local emergency rooms would decrease, they did not anticipate it would equate to cash savings. Despite this, strong community support of paying for verifiable outcomes convinced County Supervisors and the County to move forward with the program. Another obstacle Santa Clara County is facing is a lack of provider capacity, so they have agreed to invest $1,000,000 upfront toward capacity-building for homeless providers and community-based organizations in preparation for program ramp-up, all with the goal of bolstering homeless health care. With community and political will, the Pay for Success challenges are being overcome.

For more information about Pay For Success, read the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco’s Community Development Investment Review – Pay For Success Financing (Volume 9, Issue 1, 2013).

MAY 23, 2014
By Leilani Barnett.

Leilani Barnett is Regional Manager of Community Development with the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco, covering California’s Central Valley.

 

 




Mayer Brown: New US Water Infrastructure Legislation Passed Today: Will WIFIA Repeat The Success Of TIFIA?

The US Department of Transportation’s TIFIA (Transportation Finance & Innovation Act) credit support program is by far the most successful federal program providing financial support for surface transportation public-private partnerships (P3). Few major P3 transportation projects in recent years would have been possible, and few P3s in the pipeline will go forward, without TIFIA assistance. Now, Congress has set out to try to repeat the success of TIFIA with a similar program—just substituting a “W” for the “T” in the acronym—to support major water infrastructure projects.

The new WIFIA (Water Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act) program is part of the Water Resources Reform and Development Act (WRRDA) that passed the House on May 21 and the Senate on May 22, and is expected to be signed by the President shortly.

WRRDA authorizes funding for the construction and repair of waterway and port projects across the United States. It also allows Congress to authorize the Army Corps of Engineers to spearhead the development, maintenance and support of vital US port and waterways infrastructure, as well as supporting targeted flood protection and environmental restoration needs.

Consciously building on the increased use of public-private partnerships for the financing, construction and operation of major surface transportation infrastructure, WRRDA encourages P3s for development of major water infrastructure projects. Specifically, the legislation establishes WIFIA in order to provide credit assistance for drinking water, wastewater and water resources infrastructure projects. WIFIA is designed to leverage federal funds by attracting substantial private or other non-federal investments to promote increased development of critical water infrastructure and to help speed construction of local projects.

WIFIA is very closely modeled on the USDOT TIFIA program and has many similar elements, including interest rate (tied to long-term Treasury rates) and maximum maturity (35 years); maximum percentage of eligible project cost that can be financed (generally 49 percent, although in contrast in TIFIA program, WIFIA legislation provides that up to 25 percent of each year’s financing assistance can be made be available for loans exceeding 49 percent of project cost); deferral of loan repayment for up to five years after substantial completion; credit rating requirements; and non-subordination/ “springing parity lien” in the event of bankruptcy.

Also consistent with the initial authorization of TIFIA program, WIFIA is established as a five-year “pilot” program, with the Comptroller General directed to report to Congress prior to the end of this period on status of program implementation and with recommendations for improvements, continuation authorization or termination.

The most significant difference between TIFIA and WIFIA is in the level of authorized spending. Authorized spending for the WIFIA program starts at $20 million in the first year and increases to $50 million in the fifth year. If “scored” for federal budget purposes similar to the scoring for the TIFIA program, this would provide for approximately $200 million in financing in the first year, increasing to approximately $500 million in the fifth year. That compares to TIFIA’s current funding level under MAP-21 legislation of $1 billion (which allows credit support of for loans of approximately $10 billion). By way of further comparison, the first year (1999) appropriation for the TIFIA program was $80 million. Given that the nation’s water infrastructure needs are, by most estimates, even larger in total than its transportation needs, this is clearly a “pilot” program—with a very small “p.”

WRRDA directs the Army Corps of Engineers and the Environmental Protection Agency to implement and manage the WIFIA program. The Army Corps of Engineers is authorized to carry out projects for flood damage reduction, environmental restoration, coastal or inland harbor navigation improvement, and inland and intracoastal waterways navigation improvement. The Environmental Protection Agency is authorized to carry out projects that are eligible for assistance under the Federal Water Pollution Control Act or the Safe Drinking Water Act in addition to projects that enhance energy efficiency or that repair, rehabilitate or replace public water systems or publicly owned treatment works. Amounts appropriated for WIFIA financing assistance are allocated jointly to the Corps of Engineers and the EPA, possibly with subsequent implementing regulations to clarify the specific amounts to be made available to each agency.

Given USDOT’s successful implementation and management of the TIFIA program, supporters of P3 can hope the Corps of Engineers and EPA learn from USDOT’s experience with the TIFIA program and build on established and now well-understood policies and program guidelines.

WRRDA has one other notable provision supporting the use of P3 approaches to water infrastructure projects. It establishes a Water Infrastructure Public-Private Partnership Program, authorizing the Corps of Engineers to enter into agreements with state and local governments and private entities to finance construction of at least 15 water resources development projects, including coastal harbor improvement, channel improvement, inland navigation, flood damage reduction, aquatic ecosystem restoration and hurricane and storm damage reduction.

To identify these projects, the Corps of Engineers must consider the extent to which the project is significant to the US economy, leverages federal investment by encouraging non-federal contributions to the project, employs innovative project delivery and cost-savings methods, has received federal funds in the past and experienced delays or missed scheduled deadlines, has unobligated Corps of Engineers funding balances and has not received federal funding for recapitalization and modernization since the project was authorized. The Corps of Engineers must then, in consultation with the non-federal applicant, develop a detailed project management plan.

To qualify for participation in the Water Infrastructure Public-Private Partnership Program, each project must also have specific Congressional authorization provided by subsequently enacted legislation. Projects qualifying for the Public-Private Partnership Program will benefit from potential waiver from or modification of applicable federal regulations as well as technical assistance from the Corps of Engineers.

As an initial project that might be implemented under this new Public-Private Partnership Program, Alaska Congressman Don Young is expected shortly to introduce House Resolution 4668 designed to promote a P3 framework for the privately financed development of a major new port facility in Alaska’s Seward Peninsula.

The final version of WRRDA does not change the existing requirements for issuance of private activity bonds (PABS) for water infrastructure projects. During the multi-year consideration of this legislation, various stakeholder groups advocated in particular for eliminating the state volume cap on water and wastewater infrastructure PABS and instead providing that they be treated in the same manner as PABS for airports, ports and certain solid waste disposal projects. This change would have allowed local communities to more effectively leverage the municipal capital markets and, in combination with other finance mechanisms, was estimated would have leveraged an additional $2 billion to $6 billion annually in private investment in water infrastructure projects.

WRRDA is further evidence of the strong and bipartisan support in Congress for the use of P3 structures for major US infrastructure projects. The next question will be how far and how fast states and localities, and the federal government itself, will partner with the private sector to take advantage of these new incentives.

Originally published on 22 May 2014

Last Updated: May 23 2014
Article by John R. Schmidt, David Narefsky, Joseph Seliga, George K. Miller and Natalie Veltman
Mayer Brown

Visit us at mayerbrown.com

Mayer Brown is a global legal services provider comprising legal practices that are separate entities (the “Mayer Brown Practices”). The Mayer Brown Practices are: Mayer Brown LLP and Mayer Brown Europe – Brussels LLP, both limited liability partnerships established in Illinois USA; Mayer Brown International LLP, a limited liability partnership incorporated in England and Wales (authorized and regulated by the Solicitors Regulation Authority and registered in England and Wales number OC 303359); Mayer Brown, a SELAS established in France; Mayer Brown JSM, a Hong Kong partnership and its associated entities in Asia; and Tauil & Chequer Advogados, a Brazilian law partnership with which Mayer Brown is associated. “Mayer Brown” and the Mayer Brown logo are the trademarks of the Mayer Brown Practices in their respective jurisdictions.

© Copyright 2014. The Mayer Brown Practices. All rights reserved.

This Mayer Brown article provides information and comments on legal issues and developments of interest. The foregoing is not a comprehensive treatment of the subject matter covered and is not intended to provide legal advice. Readers should seek specific legal advice before taking any action with respect to the matters discussed herein.

 




Waller: Municipal Debtors: "Cram Down" of Special Revenue Debt.

Municipal financing differs in a number of significant ways from traditional commercial financing. Therefore, while chapter 9 of title 11 of the United States Code (the “Bankruptcy Code”) incorporates many provisions applicable in cases under chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code, including section 1129(b), a/k/a the “cram down” section, it also contains its own provisions with respect to the confirmation of a plan of adjustment – i.e., sections 943 and 944 of the Bankruptcy Code. See 11 U.S.C. § 901(a) (incorporating sections of the Bankruptcy Code). When considering the differences between cram down scenarios in cases under chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code and cases under chapter 9 of the Bankruptcy Code, one must consider the prevalence of special revenue financing by municipal debtors and the protections that are built into chapter 9 of the Bankruptcy Code.

I. CAN SPECIAL REVENUE DEBT BE IMPAIRED?

A. Special Revenue Financing

Our system of federalism grants state governments the independence and the freedom (with the consent of their citizens) to authorize local governmental bodies to finance various governmental functions and necessary improvements through the issuance of municipal bonds. Municipalities issue their own debt obligations either based on their full faith and credit (general obligation bonds) or based upon the revenues to be collected by the municipality from the financed improvement (revenue bonds). Local government borrowing differs in a fundamental way from either individual or corporate borrowing. The municipal borrower is an entity having special characteristics that differ from those of private actors. See Joel A. Mintz et al., Fundamentals of Municipal Finance 45 (2010). The local government exists solely to provide governmental services; it does not exist for profit-making purposes. Id. Due to the public benefit of financed projects, like water and sewer systems, municipalities are limited in the actions they can take with these assets, including certain restrictions on the right to mortgage or transfer the property, or to allow foreclosure or possession of the property by a secured creditor in the event of default.1 Further, limitations exist due to the state’s interest in protecting the credit of the state and insuring that municipalities do not harm the state’s credit by undertaking obligations which cannot be repaid.

As municipalities have grown, so has their need for financing. Protecting the integrity of municipal financing is essential to the continued confidence of the municipal bond markets. Thus, municipalities have traditionally made every effort to honor their public debt obligations.

i. Protections for Special Revenue Creditors

Unlike general obligation bonds, which are backed by the full faith and credit of the issuer and, therefore, rely on the assessment and collection of taxes for repayment, revenue bonds do not increase the tax burden of the citizens. They are non-recourse obligations repaid solely from the revenues (and other specified pledged funds) generated by the project that is being financed, such as a sewer or water system, toll road, toll bridge, tunnel, or the like. Consequently, in many jurisdictions, revenue bonds may be issued without voter approval or other procedures often required for the issuance of general obligation bonds. See Fundamentals of Municipal Finance, at 3-4.

To entice the public to purchase revenue bonds in particular, states have enacted statutory provisions designed to promote this type of financing. Since repayment of the revenue bonds are limited to the stream of income from the financed public projects, states authorize the issuing municipality to irrevocably pledge (or set aside) the revenue stream (or net revenue stream) for the benefit of the revenue bondholders. Typically, the pledge includes the creation of a first lien on the revenue stream. Some states even provide that the pledged revenue streams are held in trust for the benefit of the special revenue creditors. For example, Alabama recognizes that pledged revenues “shall constitute a trust fund or funds which shall be impressed with a lien in favor of holders of the warrants to the payment of which such pledged funds are pledged” and that the pledged revenues are “irrevocably pledged for the payment of the principal and interest on such warrants as provided in Section 11-28-3.” Ala. Code §§ 11-28-2, 11-28-3.

Other protections that are authorized by state law and that are often contained in revenue bond documents are covenants in which the issuer pledges: (a) to issue all bonds necessary to finance the project; (b) to complete project construction expeditiously; (c) to maintain specified amounts of reserve funds; (d) to fix, establish, and collect appropriate fees, rates, tolls, or user charges; and (e) to restrict the investment of bond proceeds. Fundamentals of Municipal Finance, at 3-4. In addition, where revenue bonds are issued to finance a series of projects undertaken by the same issuer, the municipality that issued them will usually pledge not to issue any additional bonds that are secured by the same revenue stream, unless current revenues are sufficient to cover a specified percentage of both current and future debt service on both outstanding bonds and the new bonds. Id. Once entered into, the revenue bond covenants may not be modified or abandoned by the municipality. Id.2

Since bondholders are unable to take ownership of certain public assets, municipalities will often transfer certain control rights to bondholders to provide the holders with a meaningful remedy in the event of nonpayment. One such remedy is the right to the appointment of a receiver to oversee the particular project in question, and, if appropriate, raise rates sufficient to pay the special revenue debt issued to finance the project.

The states and their municipalities have designed these financing structures to guaranty that the revenue stream relied upon by special revenue bondholders will be protected and not impaired. These statutory provisions protect not only bondholders but also protect the overall credit of the state and all of its municipalities. See Fundamentals of Municipal Finance, at 4. As will be discussed in more detail below, given the prevalence of this type of financing, and with it being particular to municipal debtors, Congress, in amending chapter 9 of the Bankruptcy Code in 1988, intended to protect and preserve the bargain made between the municipal debtors, as issuers, and the holders of special revenue debt.

B. Chapter 9 And A Brief History Of Municipal Bankruptcy Legislation3

Chapter 9 of the Bankruptcy Code is the sole chapter under which a municipality may seek bankruptcy relief. Chapter 9 has evolved since it was first enacted in 1934. Prior to 1988, chapter 9 lumped all of a municipality’s debt into one pot and did not distinguish between general obligation bonds and special revenue bonds. In 1988, Congress approved a series of amendments (the “1988 Amendments”) aimed at distinguishing between the two types of bonds. The intent of Congress in enacting the 1988 Amendments was to ensure that state laws protecting special revenue financing were honored in a chapter 9 proceeding and the rights of special revenue creditors would receive additional protections not granted prior to the 1988 Amendments. See S. Rep. No. 100-506, at 13 (1988) (the “Senate Report”). Specifically, the 1988 Amendments sought to ensure that special revenue bondholders would have unimpaired rights to the project revenues pledged to them.

The ultimate intent of Congress in enacting the 1988 Amendments was to provide assurances to the capital markets that special revenues essential to municipal financing remain unimpaired in the event of a Chapter 9 filing. The Senate Report for the 1988 Amendments noted that “[r]easonable assurance of timely payment is essential to the orderly marketing of municipal bonds and notes and continued municipal financing.” Id. at 21. The Senate Report further noted that:

To eliminate the confusion and to confirm various state laws and constitutional provisions regarding the rights of bondholders to receive the revenues pledged to them in payment of debt obligations of a municipality, a new section is provided in the amendment to ensure that revenue bondholders receive the benefit of their bargain with the municipal issuer and that they will have unimpaired rights to the project revenues pledged to them. . . .

Id. at 12 (emphasis added). For example, prior to the 1988 Amendments, special revenue bondholders were at risk that section 552(a) of the Bankruptcy Code would strip them of their liens on post-petition revenues. The Senate Report addressed that issue:

In the municipal context, therefore, the simple answer to the Section 552 problem is that Section 904 and the tenth amendment should prohibit the interpretation that pledges of revenue granted pursuant to state statutory or constitutional provisions to bondholders can be terminated by the filing of a chapter 9 case. Likewise, under the contract clause of the constitution (article I, section 10), a municipality cannot claim that a contractual pledge of revenue can be terminated by the filing of a chapter 9 proceeding.

Id. at 6 (emphasis added). The risk posed by section 552(a) was eliminated by the 1988 Amendments. See In re Cnty. of Orange, 179 B.R. 185, 191-92 (Bankr. C.D. Cal. 1995).

While protecting the integrity of special revenue bonds in chapter 9, Congress was also determined to protect the integrity of the state laws that authorize special revenue municipal financing. With revenue bonds, “the general taxpayers are usually not committed to repaying the bonds or funding operational deficits through general tax revenues . . . [and] it would be quite problematic and contrary to state law if a bankruptcy filing resulted in revenue bonds being converted into general obligation bonds.” Senate Report, at 5. With regard to the 1988 Amendments, one court has noted:

The 1988 Amendments to the Bankruptcy Code added the definition of “special revenues” in § 902(2). The 1988 Amendments were intended to preserve a dichotomy between general obligation and special revenue bonds for the collective benefit of bondholders (to secure the benefit of their bargain), municipalities (to maintain the effectiveness of the revenue financing vehicle) and taxpayers (to ensure that revenue obligations were not transformed into general obligations).

In re Heffernan Mem’l Hosp., 202 B.R. 147, 148 (Bankr. S.D. Cal. 1996).

C. Sections 927, 928(a) And 1111(b) Protect Special Revenue Debt From Impairment During the Case and From a Cram Down.

The confluence of sections 927, 928(a) and 1111(b) of the Bankruptcy Code demonstrate Congress’ intent to protect the benefit of the bargain made by a municipal debtor, as issuer, and the holders of special revenue debt obligations under chapter 9 of the Bankruptcy Code both during the case and at confirmation.

i. Congress preserved the extent, validity and priority of liens on special revenues post-petition.

Through section 928(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, Congress preserved the extent of the creditors’ liens on special revenues of a municipal debtor. Section 902 defines special revenues as:

(A) receipts derived from the ownership, operation, or disposition of projects or systems of the debtor that are primarily used or intended to be used primarily to provide transportation, utility, or other services, including the proceeds of borrowings to finance the projects or systems; (B) special excise taxes imposed on particular activities or transactions; (C) incremental tax receipts from the benefited area in the case of tax-increment financing; (D) other revenues or receipts derived from particular functions of the debtor, whether or not the debtor has other functions; or (E) taxes specifically levied to finance one or more projects or systems, excluding receipts from general property, sales, or income taxes (other than taxincrement financing) levied to finance the general purposes of the debtor[.]

11 U.S.C. § 902(2). In turn, section 928(a) of the Bankruptcy Code preserves the extent of a creditor’s lien on special revenues by granting such creditor a continuing post-petition lien on special revenues to the same extent as existed prepetition. Specifically, section 928(a) of the Bankruptcy Code provides:

Notwithstanding section 552(a) of this title and subject to subsection (b) of this section, special revenues acquired by the debtor after the commencement of the case shall remain subject to any lien resulting from any security agreement entered into by the debtor before the commencement of the case.

11 U.S.C. § 928(a). Whereas, in a chapter 11 case a secured creditor with a consensual lien will not maintain its liens on collateral of the same type generated post-petition, in a chapter 9 case a consensual lien secured by special revenues continues to attach to post petition revenues to the same extent it existed prepetition.

ii. Congress similarly preserved the value of liens on special revenues.

Through the combination of sections 1111(b) and 927 of the Bankruptcy Code, Congress also preserved the value of liens against special revenues. Section 1111(b) of the Bankruptcy Code provides:

(1)(A) A claim secured by a lien on property of the estate shall be allowed or disallowed under section 502 of this title the same as if the holder of such claim had recourse against the debtor on account of such claim, whether or not such holder has such recourse, unless – (i) the class of which such claim is a part elects, by at least two-thirds in amount and more than half in number of allowed claims of such class, application of paragraph (2) of this subsection; or (ii) such holder does not have such recourse and such property is sold under section 363 of this title or is to be sold under the plan.

(2) If such an election is made, then notwithstanding section 506(a) of this title, such claim is a secured claim to the extent that such claim is allowed.

11 U.S.C. § 1111(b). Congress enacted Section 1111(b) in an attempt to prevent the harsh results faced by non-recourse lenders in a cram-down scenario. See, e.g., Great Nat’l Life Ins. Co. v. Pine Gate Assocs., Ltd., 2 B.C.D. 1478 (Bankr. N.D. Ga. 1976). In Pine Gate, the court exercised its cram-down powers under Chapter XII to cash out a nonrecourse undersecured mortgagee at the appraised value of the property, rather than the amount of debt, at a time of depressed prices. In opposition to the debtor’s proposed plan, the lenders argued that their negotiated “benefit of the bargain” under the non-recourse financing arrangement was either (i) full payment or (ii) the right to foreclose on the property, and that their interests would not be adequately protected unless they were paid in full or allowed to foreclose. The Pine Gate court disagreed, holding that the proposed treatment of the secured claim through a cash payment equal to the appraised value of the collateral was sufficient. In reaching its decision, the court relied upon authority for the proposition that a secured creditor was entitled to receive no more than the appraised value of secured property as just compensation for the loss of the property and satisfaction of its security interest.” Pine Gate, 2 B.C.D. at 1478. Accordingly, while the debtor retained ownership of the property, the mortgagee was not paid in full, did not retain its lien, and was deprived of its right to sue for a deficiency. See In re S. Vill., Inc., 25 B.R. 987 (Bankr. D. Utah 1982) (discussing the Pine Gate decision).

As a result of Pine Gate, it became clear that a debtor could seek relief through bankruptcy during a period when property values were depressed, propose to repay secured indebtedness only to the extent of the then-appraised value, cram-down a non-recourse secured lender, and preserve all potential future appreciation for the debtor alone.” See In re DRW Prop. Co., 57 B.R. 987, 990 (Bankr. N.D. Tex. 1986). In addition, “[t]he undersecured nonrecourse lender would not be entitled to vote in the unsecured class, thereby making confirmation of the plan much easier.” Id. (citing In re S. Vill., 25 B.R. 987 (Bankr. D. Utah 1982); Jeffrey A. Stein, Section 1111(b): Providing the Undersecured Creditors with Post-Confirmation Appreciation in the Value of the Collateral, 56 Am. Bankr. L.J. 195 (1982)). Secured creditors were shocked by this result and sought relief from Congress when the Bankruptcy Code was proposed and debated. See Richard F. Broude, Cramdown and Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code: The Settlement Prerogative, 39 Bus. Lawyer 441 (1984).

As a result of the concern communicated to Congress, the final version of the Bankruptcy Code included section 1111(b) for purposes of alleviating the problem recognized under Pine Gate and restoring the “benefit of the bargain” expected by nonrecourse lenders. Kenneth N. Klee, All you Ever Wanted to Know About Cram Down Under the New Bankruptcy Code, 53 Am. Bankr. L.J. 133 (1979); Michael J. Kaplan, Nonrecourse Undersecured Creditors Under New Chapter 11 – The Section 1111(b) Election: Already a Need for Change, 53 Am. Bankr. L.J. 269 (1979). Accordingly, as codified in the Bankruptcy Code, section 1111(b) now represents Congress’ attempt “to create a balance between the debtor’s need for protection and a creditor’s right to receive equitable treatment.” See In re Trenton Ridge Investors, LLC, 461 B.R. 440, 505 (Bankr. S.D. Ohio 2011) (quoting In re Union Meeting Partners, 160 B.R. 757, 769 (Bankr. E.D. Pa. 1993)).

Section 1111(b) balances those interests in two ways. First, if a nonrecourse mortgagee is substantially undersecured, the mortgagee may retain the recourse status conferred by section 1111(b)(1)(A) and cause that class of claims to vote to reject the plan. Id. In such a circumstance, the undersecured creditor can make it impossible to confirm a plan absent a cramdown in accordance with section 1129(b)(2)(B), which would require that the unsecured claims be paid in full or that junior interests receive nothing under the plan. Id. In this way, the undersecured creditor can force the debtor into a situation where the debtor must propose a plan satisfying the unsecured debt or eliminate the debtor’s interest in the property. Id. (citations omitted).

Second, a secured creditor is permitted to make an election pursuant to section 1111(b)(2). Upon making such an election, the secured creditor forfeits its right to recourse against the debtor (i.e., the right to pursue an unsecured claim), but is instead granted an allowed secured claim in the amount of the debt rather than in a judicially determined amount. Id. Hence, the creditor may benefit from any future increase in the value of the property. Id.; see also Tuma v. Firstmark Leasing Corp., 916 F.2d 488 (9th Cir. 1990) (with section 1111(b), Congress sought to give creditors the opportunity to capture future appreciation in the value of their collateral); In re Bloomingdale Partners, 155 B.R. 961, 974 n.7 (Bankr. N.D. Ill. 1993) (“Congress [arguably] enacted section 1111(b) to prohibit debtors from cashing-out creditors at judicially determined values.”); In re Weinstein, 227 B.R. 284, 295 n.12 (B.A.P. 9th Cir. 1998) (“The real benefit of the [section 1111(b)] election is that it protects the creditor against a quick sale of its collateral. . . . By making the election, the creditor guards against an opportunistic sale . . . .”).

In 1988, Congress amended chapter 9 of the Bankruptcy Code, proposing “to clarify the provisions of the Bankruptcy Code applicable to municipalities and to correct unintended conflicts that currently may exist between municipal law and bankruptcy law.” Senate Report, at 1. Congress approved the 1988 Amendments to chapter 9 because it wanted to ensure that the market for municipal debts remained stable. Id. at 21 (Senate Judiciary Committee recognizing that “[r]easonable assurance of timely payment is essential to the orderly marketing of municipal bonds and notes and continued municipal financing.”). In approving the 1988 Amendments, Congress recognized that the pledges common to municipal finance must not be adversely affected, even where a bankruptcy filing has occurred, in order to ensure stability in the special revenue financing market. Id. at 3. Congress also recognized that there were restraints on the treatment of special revenue financing imposed by state constitutions. Accordingly, Congress included limitations on both the: (i) conversion of non-recourse obligations into recourse obligations; and (ii) the ability to impair the holders of special revenue debt obligations.

As part of the amendments in 1988, Congress addressed the non-recourse nature of special revenue financing. One of the main concerns that the 1988 Amendments sought to address was that “[s]ection 1111(b) provides that in some circumstances non-recourse debt may be treated as recourse debt.” Senate Report, at 22. The problem presented was that “[m]any municipal obligations are, by reason of constitutional, statutory, or charter provisions, payable solely from special revenues and not the full faith and credit of the municipality.” Id. Thus, to resolve this problem, the 1988 Amendments adopted section 927, prohibiting conversion of revenue bonds into general obligation bonds in a chapter 9 case. “[The 1988 Amendments] [therefore] avoid[] the potential conversion of revenue bonds into General Obligation bonds under Section 1111(b).” Senate Report, at 2; see also H.R. Rep. No. 100-1011 (1988), at 7 (new section 927 to be added to ensure that non-recourse revenue bonds cannot be converted under section 1111(b) into recourse, or general obligation, debt because allowing such may violate some state constitutions and statutes). The reasoning behind Section 927 has been summarized as follows:

The amendments protect the future effectiveness of revenue bond financing against the possibility of an adverse judicial determination in connection with a municipal bankruptcy. Specifically, the amendments insure that in the event of a municipal bankruptcy, taxpayers will not be required to pay bondholders for bankrupt municipal projects that were intended to be funded exclusively through project revenues. The amendments insure that state constitutional and statutory debt limits will not be preempted by the application of bankruptcy laws. Finally, the amendments insure that revenue bondholders receive the benefit of their bargain with the municipal issuer, namely, they will have unimpaired rights to the project revenues pledged to them.

Senate Report, at 12-13 (emphasis added).

Section 927 of the Bankruptcy Code reads as follows:

The holder of a claim payable solely from special revenues of the debtor under applicable nonbankruptcy law shall not be treated as having recourse against the debtor on account of such claim pursuant to section 1111(b) of this title.

11 U.S.C. § 927. While adding section 927 to chapter 9, Congress could also have elected to remove the incorporation of section 1111(b) into chapter 9. However, pursuant to section 901, Congress incorporated section 1111(b), but chose merely to limit it. Section 1111(b), subject to the limitations imposed by section 927, still stands. Thus, in the context of special revenue bonds, the section 1111(b) election is automatic, not requiring any affirmative act by the secured creditor. The ability to elect full recourse treatment for non-recourse debt has been statutorily removed by section 927.

Although Congress recognized that the existing chapter 11 choice for full recourse treatment of non-recourse debt would be unavailable to chapter 9 creditors due to state constitutional limitations on recourse financing, it did not intend for the result to be the continued impairment of special revenue financing by results such as that reached in Pine Gate. Indeed, the existing structure of the Bankruptcy Code prevents such an impairment. By incorporating section 1111(b) into chapter 9, but also limiting the conversion of nonrecourse debt to recourse debt, Congress made the section 1111(b)(2) election automatic, providing that the debtor must pay the full value of the claim. Any other reading would render the incorporation of section 1111(b) and the limitation set forth in section 927 superfluous. Further, it makes no sense to read chapter 9 as taking both the recourse protection as well as the section 1111(b)(2) protection away from secured lenders when Congress could have achieved such a result by simply not including section 1111(b) in section 901. Accordingly, in a case under chapter 9, a special revenue finance creditor must be treated as having an allowed secured claim in the full amount of the outstanding debt.

D. In Addition To The Foregoing Provisions Of The Bankruptcy Code, Municipal Debtors Face Additional Constitutional Limitations.

In addition to Congress’s intent to protect the bargains made with respect to special revenue financing, municipal debtors, as governmental units, are also subject to certain limitations imposed by the United States Constitution (the “Constitution”) and the municipality’s applicable state constitution.

Limitations set forth in the Fifth Amendment to the Constitution may impose obstacles or otherwise prohibit a cramdown with respect to a creditor whose claim is secured by special revenues. The Fifth Amendment provides:

No person shall be held to answer for a capital, or otherwise infamous crime, unless on a presentment or indictment of a grand jury, except in cases arising in the land or naval forces, or in the militia, when in actual service in time of war or public danger; nor shall any person be subject for the same offense to be twice put in jeopardy of life or limb; nor shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a witness against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law; nor shall private property be taken for public use, without just compensation.

U.S. Const. amend. V. (emphasis added). The limitations of the Fifth Amendment also apply, through the Due Process Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment, to takings by state governments and their subdivisions. See, e.g., Lucas v. S.C. Coastal Council, 505 U.S. 1003 (1992). As a result, the Fifth Amendment is applicable to municipal debtors, and a municipal debtor may not take property without just compensation.

The protections afforded by the Fifth Amendment are not abrogated by the Bankruptcy Code. The legislative history of the Bankruptcy Code indicates that the drafters of the Bankruptcy Code considered the Fifth Amendment to be a limitation upon the impairment of property rights in bankruptcy, and current bankruptcy law gives great deference to property rights. Julia Patterson Forrester, Bankruptcy Takings, 51 Fla. L. Rev. 851, 863 (Dec. 1999). The Supreme Court of the United States has addressed the takings issue in the context of bankruptcy on several occasions, holding each time that the bankruptcy power is limited by the Fifth Amendment. See United States v. Security Indus. Bank, 459 U.S. 70, 75, 78 (1982); Wright v. Vinton Branch of Mtn. Trust Bank, 300 U.S. 440, 456-58 (1937); Louisville Joint Stock Land Bank v. Radford, 295 U.S. 555, 589 (1935); see also Continental Ill. Nat’l Bank & Trust Co. v. Chicago, Rock Island, & Pac. Ry., 294 U.S. 648, 669 (1935) (stating that the bankruptcy power is not unlimited); Holt v. Henley, 232 U.S. 637, 639 (1914) (holding that an amendment to bankruptcy law must be applied prospectively to avoid affecting existing property rights). In the context of a chapter 9 case, it is important to determine the scope of the property rights held by a creditor where the debt at issue is secured by special revenues, and the impact that may have on the debtor’s ability to effect a cramdown.

While most people think of property as a thing that is owned by someone, bankruptcy specialists understand property as a collection of rights with respect to things. Stephen J. Ware, Security Interests, Repossessed Collateral, and Turnover of Property to the Bankruptcy Estate, 2002 Utah L. Rev. 775, 776 (2002). A sophisticated understanding of property dissolves the unitary conception of ownership into a metaphorical “bundle” of rights reflecting the fact that more than one person can have rights with respect to a particular thing. Id. Consistent with this understanding, courts have held that contractual rights are cognizable property interests protected under the Takings Clause of the Fifth Amendment. Century Exploration New Orleans, Inc. v. United States, 103 Fed. Cl. 70, 76 (Fed. Cl. 2012) (citing Lynch v. United States, 292 U.S. 571, 579 (1934) (stating that valid contracts are property protected by the Fifth Amendment); Lion Raisins, Inc. v. United States, 416 F.3d 1356, 1370 (Fed. Cir. 2005)). Even further, courts have generally classified as property, or rights to property, transferable interests generating pecuniary value. 21 West Lancaster Corp. v. Main Line Restaurant, Inc., 790 F.2d 354, 357 (3d Cir. 1986) (citing United States v. Bess, 357 U.S. 51, 55 (1958) (for tax lien purposes, life insurance policies are property to the extent of their cash surrender value, since policy holder could compel payment of that amount); Note, Property Subject to the Federal Tax Lien, 77 Harv. L. Rev. 1485, 1486–87 (1964) (federal classifications have focused on transferability and leviability of interest)). In the words of one court, the question to be asked is, “[is] the interest . . . bargainable, [is] it transferable, [does] it have value?” Randall v. Nakashima & Co., Ltd., 542 F.2d 270, 278 (5th Cir. 1976). Based upon the foregoing, the question then becomes, “Which parts of the contract – of the bargain – constitute property subject to the protections afforded by the Fifth Amendment?”

While it is clear that the Fifth Amendment provides certain protection, there is no set formula for determining when justice and fairness require that economic injuries caused by public action be compensated by the government, rather than remain disproportionately concentrated on a few persons. Penn Central Transp. Co. v. City of N.Y., 438 U.S. 104, 124 (1978). Rather, a takings analysis depends on the facts of each case, as the Supreme Court of the United States has explained:

[T]he Court’s decisions have identified several factors that have particular significance. The economic impact of the regulation on the claimant, and, particularly, the extent to which the regulation has interfered with distinct investment-backed expectations are, of course, relevant considerations. . . . So, too, is the character of the governmental action. A “taking” may more readily be found when the interference with property can be characterized as a physical invasion by government . . . than when interference arises from some public program adjusting the benefits and burdens of economic life to promote the public good.

Id. (citations omitted). Consistent with the Penn Central opinion, the Supreme Court of the United States has further explained that, when considering whether an impermissible taking has occurred, courts should consider: (i) the economic impact of the action; (ii) its interference with reasonable investment-backed expectations, and (iii) the character of the governmental action. Kaiser Aetna v. United States, 444 U.S. 164, 175 (1979).

Based upon the foregoing, many questions arise in the context of a chapter 9 debtor seeking to cramdown the holders of debt, particularly special revenue debt. Can a municipal debtor impair covenants, such as the covenant to control the value of the stream of special revenues – i.e., covenants with respect to controlling the proverbial spigot – without violating the Fifth Amendment? Is a municipal debtor entitled to divert special revenues to pay additional obligations for the good of the municipality? To the extent certain provisions of the contractual relationship between a municipal debtor and a creditor secured by special revenues are deemed property, the Fifth Amendment arguably prohibits such actions or, at least, imposes obstacles to the debtor’s ability to do so.

E. State Trust Law May Remove Special Revenues From A Municipal Debtor’s Control and Its Ability to Impair in a Case Under Chapter 9.

As mentioned above, some state laws provide that special revenues pledged to the repayment of special revenue obligations are pledged and held in trust. For example, the Supreme Court of Alabama has stressed, a pledge “means set apart, appropriated, or charged with the payment of a specific obligation authorized by law. . . . That the pledge may, by appropriate remedy, require such revenues conserved and applied to the secured demand . . . needs no citation of authority.” Heustess v. Hearin, 104 So. 273, 274 (Ala. 1925). See also Sylvan G. Feldstein, et al., The Handbook of Municipal Bonds 1295 (John Wiley & Sons, Inc. eds., 2008) (defining “pledged revenues” as “revenues legally pledged to the repayment” of the warrants).

It is fundamental that a debtor can only restructure “claims” against it in accordance with the requirements of the Bankruptcy Code. “[A] debtor owes a ‘debt’ to [a] creditor, who has a ‘claim’ against the debtor.” In re Threatt, No. 04-82082C-13D, 2004 WL 2905344, at *2 (Bankr. M.D.N.C. Dec. 13, 2004) (quoting 8 Collier on Bankruptcy ¶ 1300.12[5] (15th ed. 2d. rev. 2004)). “Claims against a debtor” are defined as including “claims against the property of the debtor.” 11 U.S.C. § 102(2) (emphasis added).4 These fundamental principles of bankruptcy law were incorporated into chapter 9. When special revenues are by state law transferred to be held in trust for the benefit of the holders of the debt secured by the special revenues, the municipal debtor may not be able to impair the creditors’ property interests in the revenues.

A bankruptcy court must look to state law to determine the debtor’s interest in a particular piece of property. Under settled principles of state trust law, property held in trust by one for the benefit of another is deemed to be property belonging to the beneficiary, not the trustee. Because, under state law, trust assets belong to the beneficiaries, the trust assets are not debtor’s property or property of the debtor’s estate, and shall not be distributed to any other creditors or sold unless all trust beneficiaries have been paid. See, e.g., In re Monterey House, Inc., 71 B.R. 244 (Bankr. S.D. Tex. 1986) (“That the corpus of a trust is not property of the estate is so widely accepted as to be beyond dispute.”); Matter of Vacuum Corp., 215 B.R. 277, 280 (Bankr. N.D. Ga. 1997) (“Because the debtor does not own an equitable interest in property he holds in trust for another, that interest is not ‘property of the estate’ and is also not ‘property of the debtor’ for purposes of § 547(b).”); Matter of Quality Holstein Leasing, 752 F.2d 1009 (5th Cir. 1985) (“Congress did not mean to authorize a bankruptcy estate to benefit from property that the debtor did not own.”); United States v. Whiting Pools, Inc., 462 U.S. 198, 205 n. 10 (1983) (“Congress plainly excluded property of others held by the debtor in trust at the time of the filing of the petition.”); Pearlman v. Reliance Ins. Co., 371 U.S. 132, 135-36 (1962) (“[Bankruptcy law] simply does not authorize a trustee to distribute other people’s property among a bankrupt’s creditors.”).5

Courts have treated numerous types of municipal debtors as “trustees” of funds held on behalf of municipal bondholders. See, e.g., State ex rel. Central Auxiliary Corp. v. Rorabeck, 108 P.2d 601, 603 (Mont. 1941) (officers of irrigation district responsible for levy and collection of tax sufficient to pay principal and interest on bonds of the district, as well as county treasurer who is custodian of those funds, are trustees for district bondholders); Blackford v. City of Libby, 62 P.2d 216, 217-18 (Mont. 1936) (city becomes trustee on behalf of warrantholders of special improvement district); Fidelity Trust Co. v. Vill. of Stickney, 129 F.2d 506 (7th Cir. 1942) (holding the money which municipality collects in payment of special assessments is trust fund). In those cases, the courts held that the municipality merely served as a custodian of the funds held for the bondholders, and could not apply the funds toward other purposes. See, e.g., In re City of Columbia Falls, Mont., 143 B.R. 750, 762 (D. Mont. 1992) (“A fund that is derived from a special levy or one created for a specific purpose is in the hands of municipal officials in trust. The municipality is merely a custodian, and its duties relative to such funds are purely ministerial. . . .”; holding funds held in trust may not be applied to purchase of other property). In addition, courts have found a fiduciary relationship exists between the municipality and the bondholders. See, e.g., Vill. of Brookfield v. Prentis, 101 F.2d 516 (7th Cir. 1939) (municipality issuing special assessment bonds for local improvement is a trustee of the special assessment funds charged with all duties of such a fiduciary, including the obligation to spread the assessment, collect it, and make disbursement thereof in conformity with the statutory provisions to those holding bonds payable out of the assessments); Sampson v. Vill. of Stickney, 173 N.E.2d 557 (Ill. App. 1961) (holding special assessments bondholder entitled to accounting from municipality who acted as trustee; “[t]he rule is that when a municipality issues special assessment bonds it becomes a trustee of the funds resulting from the collection under the special assessments, and is charged with all attending fiduciary duties.”).

Based upon the foregoing, a bankruptcy court could find that, because the holders of debt secured by special revenues hold an ownership interest solely in the special revenues, and because the special revenues are held in trust and are not property of the debtor, such holders do not have a claim against the debtor or the debtor’s property. See, e.g., Ni-Fuel Co. v. Jackson, 257 B.R. 600, 619 (N.D. Okla. 2000) (remanding to state court those claims which are not “property of the estate,” and involved “no claims” against the bankrupt debtors); In re Threatt, 2004 WL 2905344, at *2 (holding the movant has “no claim” against the debtor or against any property of the debtor; hence, there is no debt owed to movant and movant is not a creditor in the case). Without a claim against the debtor or the property of the debtor, the holder of debt secured by special revenues is arguably not subject to the cram-down provisions contained in the Bankruptcy Code.

To read this article in full, please click here.

Footnotes

1 U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, Field Hearing on the State of the Municipal Securities Market, Distressed Communities, Remarks of James E. Spiotto, July 29, 2011, at 36 (generally, foreclosure is not permitted for essential governmental property as it would be against public policy). http://www.sec.gov/spotlight/municipalsecurities/statements072911/spiotto.pdf (the “Spiotto Statements”).

2 See also Spiotto Statements.

3 For an excellent discussion of the history or chapter 9 and the 1988 Amendments, see Spiotto Statements.

4 11 U.S.C. § 101 also defines the term “claim” to mean—(A) right to payment, whether or not such right is reduced to judgment, liquidated, fixed, contingent, matured, unmatured, disputed, undisputed, legal, equitable, secured, or unsecured.”

5 Further, the Senate Report on the 1978 Bankruptcy Act and statements of the floor managers of the Act in both the House and Senate demonstrate that the Bankruptcy Act “will not affect various statutory provisions . . . that create a trust fund for the benefit of a creditor of the debtor.” See S. Rep. No. 989 at 82, 95th Cong., 2d Sess. (1978). U.S. Code Cong. & Admin. News 1978, pp. 5787 at 5868; 124 Cong. Rec. S17.413 (daily ed. Oct. 6, 1978) (remarks of Sen. DeConconcini); 129 Cong. Rec. H11.096 (daily ed. Sept. 28, 1978) (remarks of Rep. Edwards).

Last Updated: April 28 2014
Article by David Lemke, Blake D. Roth and Courtney Rogers
Waller Lansden Dortch & Davis

For further information visit Waller




Hedge Funds Take Muni-Bond Market By Storm.

Something big is cooking in Puerto Rico, and it demands our immediate investment attention.

For the last seven years, the beleaguered Puerto Rican economy has been mired in the muck, enduring GDP contraction in five of those seven years.

To keep the commonwealth afloat, policymakers have suffered through innumerable debt offerings, which now tally roughly $73 billion, according to bond documents.

But did Puerto Rico just hit rock bottom in February?

Likely so.

In February, the three largest rating firms slashed Puerto Rico’s credit below investment grade, citing “liquidity problems” as the culprit.

Since then, however, the commonwealth has been getting tons of “big money” attention.

Puerto Rico’s mid-March bond issue (valued at $3.5 billion) is now the largest U.S. municipal junk bond sale in history.

Trading of the bonds has been fast and furious, with demand outstripping supply by a huge margin.

Orders totaled more than $16 billion from 270 different accounts.

The second-most-popular bond in the first quarter had orders totaling only $131 million.

Yields on the bonds have spiked as high as 9.425%.

 

But here’s where the story really gets juicy . . .

Hedge funds accounted for roughly 70% of the Puerto Rican bond issue.

Why is that significant? Because hedge funds rarely dip their toes into the municipal bond pool.

Och-Ziff Capital Management, Paulson & Co, Fir Tree Partners, Perry Capital LLC and Brigade Capital Management each bought more than $100 million of the bonds.

Billionaire hedge fund manager, John Paulson, is among the believers, saying that “Puerto Rico will become the Singapore of the Caribbean.”

Paulson has municipal debt interests in Puerto Rican hotels and continues to strategically add to his Puerto Rican portfolio. In fact, he’s on pace to invest $1 billion in the territory over the next two years, mostly through real estate.

The fact that Puerto Rico’s governor just announced that it will balance the budget without selling debt – for the first time in 20 years – only adds to the investment appeal.

One particular stock now stands ready to explode as a result of the situation.

Onward and Upward,

Robert Williams

Founder, Wall Street Daily




Why Insured Municipal Bonds are Staging a Comeback.

Since 2005, the percentage of municipal bonds that are insured has plummeted. But, it’s recently started to rise.

After a long dry spell, we are starting to see renewed interest and growth in the insured municipal bond market. For investors, the promising outlook may be due to the recent outperformance of insured bonds relative to uninsured bonds. For financially troubled municipal issuers, the recent credit-rating upgrades by Standard & Poor’s (S&P) of two large bond insurers has aided the growth of the insured municipal bond market.

Signs of growth in the market

In 2005, the percentage of municipal bonds that were insured was 57%; in 2012, it was 3.5%. Why the dramatic fall? Bond insurers were obligated to pay for underperforming or defaulted structured-finance instruments (i.e., mortgage-backed securities) that they insured during the financial crisis in 2008, which weakened the financial condition of the insurers.

Today, insured municipal bonds are showing strong signs of a recovery. The percentage of municipal bonds that were insured in 2013 increased to 3.9% (the first annual increase since 2005.), and the rise has continued this year, hitting 4.3% as of April 30, 2014. Bond insurers expect the insured market to increase to 7.0% to 8.0% of issuance later in 2014.

At the same time, the rating agencies are more bullish on the companies that insure municipal bonds. S&P upgraded two of them in March: Assured Guaranty (AA/stable) and National Public Finance (MBIA) (AA-/stable). The upgrades were supported by the insurers’ strong capital levels, good operating performance, a decline in their legacy structured-finance portfolios and their payment of claims for recent high-profile municipal bankruptcies. Higher credit ratings will help support the insured municipal market by increasing the value of bond insurance and will also make bond insurance more attractive to issuers by lowering borrowing costs.

Why consider insured municipal bonds?

Municipal bond insurance does not cover market risk due to interest rate movements, but it can help investors reduce credit risk in an overall portfolio. Based on current pricing of selected Detroit and Puerto Rico credits, investors can see the value of municipal bond insurance. The table below shows that credits wrapped with insurance from Assured Guaranty performed 20+ points better than the same uninsured bonds following Detroit’s bankruptcy and the selloff of Puerto Rico bonds over their financial concerns.

Conclusion

After experiencing years of decline, we believe the insured portion of the municipal bond market is staging a comeback. Suitable investors in higher tax brackets may wish to talk to their advisors about adding insured municipal bonds to their long-term fixed income allocations.

 

Sources

The Bond Buyer, “Bond Insurance: Then & Now: The Revival of an Industry,” April 30, 2014
Citi, “U.S. Municipal Strategy Special Focus: The Return of Monolines,” March 28, 2014
Bank of America Merrill Lynch, “Municipal Weekly,” May 2, 2014
Standard & Poor’s, “U.S. Bond Insurance and the Financial Guarantee Sector Stand at a Crossroads”
Important information

Municipal securities are subject to the risk that legislative or economic conditions could affect an issuer’s ability to make payments of principal and/ or interest.

NOT FDIC INSURED MAY LOSE VALUE NO BANK GUARANTEE
All data provided by Invesco unless otherwise noted.

Invesco Distributors, Inc. is a U.S. distributor for retail mutual funds, exchange-traded funds, institutional money market funds and unit investment trusts.

Invesco unit investment trusts are distributed by the sponsor, Invesco Capital Markets, Inc. and broker dealers including Invesco Distributors, Inc. These Invesco entities are indirect, wholly owned subsidiaries of Invesco Ltd.

By Tim O’Reilly and Greg Rawls

©2014 Invesco Ltd. All rights reserved.

blog.invesco.us.com

 




S&P: Limited Visibility For Climate Change's Effects on U.S. State and Local Government Credit Quality.

Weather-related events place local governments, which are generally the first responders to disaster, on the front lines of caring for their citizens. They must also manage budget volatility following such events, as well as repair and adapt their infrastructure to prepare for changing risks. In Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services’ experience, U.S. municipal and state governments have historically been able to manage the risk of natural disasters without diminishing their credit quality. The credit impact of most natural disasters has been limited. There are some exceptions, however: Hurricane Katrina, which hit an underprepared Gulf Coast at a time when the federal government was ill-equipped to respond, led to a number of negative credit actions on local communities and Louisiana, and Hurricane Ike led to a downgrade of Galveston, Texas’ general obligation and water and sewer ratings. To some extent, our ratings on local governments and states incorporate the potential for disasters in high-risk areas, such as the Gulf Coast and the earthquake-prone West, by considering financial flexibility and liquidity in the context of potential losses from a major storm or quake. However, the potential for increasingly frequent climate-related disasters makes the issue more relevant for local governments all across the U.S.

While the timing and severity of weather events remain unpredictable, the increasing uncertainty arising from changing climate patterns represents a difficult-to-quantify risk for local governments. This risk could result in more credit pressure for local governments if the federal government were to not provide timely and sufficient financial support for relief, or if the local government’s ability to prepare for disasters — for example through improvements that reduce the impact on infrastructure of extreme weather, transportation adaptation, or flood control measures — comes at the cost of financial flexibility and increased leverage.

Overview

In our 2011 article on natural disasters and credit quality (see “Ready for the Big One? How Natural Disasters Can Affect U.S. Local Governments’ Credit Quality,” on Ratings Direct), we noted that Standard & Poor’s evaluates the impact of natural disasters in light of key credit factors — both quantitative (such as the government’s financial position and the tax base’s relative strength and diversity) and qualitative (including management’s emergency preparedness and the adequacy of its response).

The Effects Of Weather Events On U.S. Municipal Governments

The immediate effects of extreme weather on local governments may include volatile fiscal performance, strained liquidity, increasing debt burdens, and economic loss during periods of extended extreme weather or disaster recovery. While federal disaster relief is available, increased recovery costs for local governments could result if future federal government austerity affects reimbursement levels. Even when federal relief is available, it might not completely cover the loss of taxing and revenue capacity for entities that rely on property taxes and retail sales, and distribution of federal funds can take several years. Municipalities, therefore, may be tasked with managing the immediate disaster costs — for emergency response costs, debris removal, and restoration of services — using immediately available liquid resources at a time when revenue streams, such as sales taxes and development-related fees, may temporarily decline. If future federal budgets were to limit disaster relief (from the Federal Emergency Management Agency, for instance), an increase in the magnitude and frequency of weather-related events could exacerbate this dynamic over time, forcing local governments to assume more of the recovery costs.

Perhaps most difficult to measure are the long-run economic consequences of a failure to prepare for climate change. In the past two years alone, major weather events have been severe enough to put a dent in national GDP growth for a short time. By some estimates, the deep freeze that gripped the eastern U.S. in early 2014 crimped national first quarter 2014 GDP growth by one- to two-tenths of a percentage point, and Superstorm Sandy lowered growth during the fourth quarter of 2012 although the recovery effort quickly boosted output once again. At the local and regional level, short-run economic effects may be more pronounced and are sometimes accompanied by lost taxing capacity when a portion of the property tax base is damaged. The interdependence of urban infrastructure, such as water and wastewater, power, transportation, and communications systems can magnify the downside risk, as we saw from the damage to the entire New York metropolitan region and the New Jersey coast following Superstorm Sandy.

These short-term losses may be followed by a rebound in GDP as construction and rebuilding activity ramp up following a disaster. Over the long run, however, taxing capacity at the local level may suffer if, for example, there are significant out-migrations as occurred following Hurricane Katrina, or if reconstruction and development are prohibited in high-risk areas following a disaster, as has occurred in many communities in the Gulf Coast. In other cases, such as in California’s Sacramento Valley, we have observed the dampening effect of weather-related risk on private development activity in high-risk areas as insurers tighten their underwriting standards for disaster coverage, and governments place constraints on new development. This limits the tax base growth that many municipal issuers rely on to fund their recurring and disaster-related expenditures.

Responding To Climate-Change Risk: Local Strategies And Their Credit Effects

State and local governments are key stakeholders in national climate change-related efforts. States create policies and programs that encourage or discourage adaptation and mitigation at all levels of government through regulation, funding, and public adoption of “clean” technologies. Currently, many state and local governments’ efforts to address climate change have focused on land-use planning and incremental improvements to public facilities and infrastructure. Some state and local efforts to reduce carbon emissions have also been undertaken: most notably, in 2012, California became the first state to implement a cap-and-trade program to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, which generates a relatively small amount of revenue for the state, but which we believe has had little effect on the state’s credit quality.

A growing number of state and local governments are also making adaptive improvements to reduce the effects of weather events on critical infrastructure. These include flood control improvements and water storage and delivery system upgrades, as well as storm-preparedness improvements by utility and transit providers to increase infrastructure resistance to severe storms.

In California’s Sacramento Valley, for instance, joint federal and local efforts are currently underway to finance levee improvements designed to achieve 200-year flood protection, according to FEMA’s most recent standards, which have become stricter in the wake of Hurricane Katrina and subsequent storms. These types of financing projects increase debt burdens and cost-sharing with federal and state agencies. If shared revenues and tax-supported debt together are not sufficient to cover costs, these projects may have the potential to erode credit quality by placing strain on resources available for capital spending.

New York State’s Sea Level Rise Task Force is one example of a nonfederal effort to identify and address climate change. The 2010 task force report identifies the risks associated with climate change — particularly rising sea levels — to communities and infrastructure. It also recommends actions for state and local governments to undertake to address these risks, including studying the impact of sea-level change on communities, making regulatory changes to address sea level change, implementing funding mechanisms, and seeking federal aid for adaptation and disaster-prevention measures. However, the recommendations are short on cost details.

In our view, New York’s task force and the California investment highlight some of the efforts underway to understand and mitigate weather-related vulnerability. We expect continued focus on this area given the pattern of natural disaster activity over the past decade. The pace and progress of actual investments will likely be slow due to funding constraints at all levels of government.

What’s Costlier, Preparing Or Doing Nothing?

Ultimately, the risk for U.S. public finance issuers of a changing climate emanate from the impact of unpredictable weather patterns on infrastructure and economic growth. While we continue to believe that local governments — in collaboration with regional, state, and federal entities -– can withstand the effects of extreme weather with limited impact on credit quality, only time will tell whether an increase in the unpredictability of climate-related events will make ratings more volatile. But as evidence of climate change and related risks mounts, the costs associated with not preparing for them may continue to grow.

20-May-2014

 

Primary Credit Analyst: Sarah Sullivant, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5051;
[email protected]
Secondary Contacts: Robin L Prunty, New York (1) 212-438-2081;
[email protected]
Lindsay Wilhelm, New York (1) 212-438-2301;
[email protected]
Victor M Medeiros, Boston (1) 617-530-8305;
[email protected]
Horacio G Aldrete-Sanchez, Dallas (1) 214-871-1426;
[email protected]
Jeffrey J Previdi, New York (1) 212-438-1796;
[email protected]

 




Municipal Bond Market Monthly - Janney Fixed Income Strategy - May 22, 2014

ay 22, 2014

MUNICIPAL BOND MARKET MONTHLY – JANNEY FIXED INCOME STRATEGY – May 22, 2014




Awakening the Potential of Clean Energy Bonds.

A paper by the Brookings-Rockefeller Project on State and Metropolitan Innovation has investigated the barriers that are currently holding back widespread adoption of clean energy bonds. The paper has provided recommendations for development finance agencies seeking to tap their potential.

Clean energy bonds hold enormous potential to drive investment in renewable power and energy efficiency and reduce their cost of capital. Yet progress has been sluggish with only a handful of examples of clean energy bonds to date.

The paper, “Clean Energy Finance through the Bond Market: A New Option for Progress,” was released on April 9. It details the difficult environment that currently exists with regard to financing clean energy projects.

Strengthening Weak Investment

Fickle federal support, extremely high costs of capital, and weak demand for clean energy investments have dampened growth. But the report said state, municipal and local bonds offer a proven way to address these issues, following a model that has been successfully used to fund major infrastructure projects throughout the past century.

The Council of Development Finance Agencies (CDFA) has identified over 50,000 state, county and municipal development finance agencies with a total tax-exempt bond market of $3 trillion. CDFA estimates the potential for clean energy bonds as being “in the tens of billions of dollars in the next several years.”

Building New Programs

Compared to this impressive potential, the current list of clean energy bond offerings is staggeringly small. New York State Energy Research and Development Authority (NYSERDA) has raised $24.3 million in bonds that will be used to finance energy efficiency improvements. Smaller offerings have recently taken place in Oregon, Connecticut and Pennsylvania.

Since 2009, Morris County, N.J. has used a combination of bonds and power purchase agreements to finance solar installations. And Hawaii has enacted legislation to issue clean energy bonds funded in part by an on-bill utility surcharge.

Weighing Risk and Return

Toby Rittner, president and CEO of CDFA and coauthor of the report, said he sees the mismatch between the potential of clean energy bonds and their current levels as a failure by development finance agencies, investors and rating agencies to appreciate the low risk that clean energy projects offer.

“With energy, we get frustrated or we get concerned about risk. It really doesn’t make a whole lot of sense. We’ve found very little historical evidence to say why there is this concern over risk,” Rittner said. “We need the market to frame projects in a way where they’re showing there’s reduced risk. Bond-financed clean energy projects are the same risk as a traditional piece of infrastructure.”

Collaboration between state energy offices and development finance agencies can help initiate clean energy investment, according to the report. Rittner said local organizations and municipalities should lead the way by creating clean energy investment options.

“We’re recommending a much more intensive collaboration between clean energy financing and bonding officials,” said Lew Milford, president of Clean Energy Group (CEG) and coauthor of the report, during a webinar called Clean Energy Financing through the Bond Market. The webinar, which referenced the release of the Brookings report, took place on April 22 and was hosted by CDFA, Brookings and CEG.

“States should be considering things like joint investment plans,” Milford said. He also said states should be looking at instruments like pooled bonds for clean energy. He recommends finding ways to link clean energy funds and funds raised by utilities and the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to create larger pools of capital.

New York leveraged EPA funds last year. Jeff Pitkin, treasurer of NYSERDA, said during the webinar that this bond deal won the 2013 Deal of the Year Award for small issuer financing from The Bond Buyer. The state used a credit enhancement guarantee that included EPA funding.

Rittner has identified four major problems that currently inhibit the widespread use of infrastructure bonds for clean energy projects.

Changing Development Finance

The first major barrier is changing how the development finance agencies perceive these projects as risky since they simply aren’t used to financing energy projects.

“In the bond world and in the finance world, we finance roads and bridges and sewers and wastewater treatment facilities and city halls,” Rittner said. “We finance all sorts of infrastructure with traditional financing like bonds.”

It is not surprising that development finance agencies with little experience or technical knowledge of clean energy projects are hesitant to step up to the plate. But improved cooperation between these agencies and clean energy offices is critical to widespread bond funding of clean energy, sharing of information, and reduction of perceived risks.

Building Market Scale

The second major issue is that the lack of a large market for clean energy bonds is inhibiting rapid scaling. In essence, most state and local agencies are waiting until the clean energy finance model has been proven, with few willing to take the lead by innovating and experimenting with different financing models.

“The only way to get to scale is to get a lot of small places all heading in the same direction,” Rittner said. Yet he sees evidence that this is starting to happen, since some states are experimenting with credit enhancement tools through green banks and PACE financing programs.

Standardizing Performance Data

Third, lack of standardized documentation and performance data make it difficult to convince institutional investors or ratings agencies of how safe clean energy investments really are. While the data that does exist supports this claim, it is lacking in both quantity and quality.

Improved data and increased standardization will ultimately result in securitized portfolios of clean energy loans that investors can purchase and trade. A further challenge of securitization is that, as Rittner said, “no two deals are the same, but you can create really big tranches of standard programs or portfolios” that can be bundled into single products.

“We need a lot more standardization,” Milford said. “A lot more documentation, a lot more data. We’ve suggested a number of things that can be done to get to that point. A lot more work needs to be done in this space and federal labs can play a role as well.”

A number of initiatives led by National Renewable Energy Laboratory’s Solar Access to Public Capital working group and Environmental Defense Fund’s Investor Confidence Project are currently focused on developing securitized solar PV and energy efficiency markets. Local and state agencies have a part to play by adopting standardized documentation and data collection processes.

“We need to develop more substantial amounts of performance data that would allow these structures to stand on their own,” Pitkin said.

Creating Investor Demand

Finally, institutional investor demand for clean energy bonds remains limited. “I think this is changing rapidly,” Rittner said.

Rittner said sales of energy efficiency loan portfolios in Oregon, New York, Connecticut and Pennsylvania in the last 18 months are signs of this change. Despite failing to attract attention from Wall Street, these portfolios have been oversubscribed and shown strong performance and low default rates.

Rittner said he sees it as just a matter of time before rating agencies and institutional investors stand up and take notice. He said he anticipates this sea change will take place during the next two years – as long as irresponsible market players do not set the industry back.

“We think there is a demand for clean energy securities,” Milford said. “We’re looking for partners to try to help us achieve a lot of these goals.”

“I think we’ve seen efficient markets and processes for structured finance products,” Pitkin said. “We think that same market has the potential to deal with securitization. The traditional methodology that’s used relies upon a great deal of historical information that this sector doesn’t have yet.”

by Michael Puckett and Kat Friedrich

You may email the authors of any of the Clean Energy Finance Forum’s articles via our contact form.

 




Municipal Issuer Brief - May 19, 2014

Municipal Issuer Brief – May 19, 2014




S&P: How Utilities Pay For Post-Sandy "Storm-Hardening" Infrastructure Investments Could Factor Into Credit Quality.

In October 2012, Superstorm Sandy knocked out electric service to 1.4 million of New York’s Consolidated Edison Inc.’s approximately 3.3 million electric customers and about 920,000 of Long Island Power Authority’s (LIPA) approximately 1.1. million customers. The lights also went out for about 1.7 million of New Jersey’s Public Service Electric & Gas Co.’s (PSE&G) 2.2 million electric customers. For many, the outages lasted weeks, resulting in strong economic impacts that reverberated through the region as businesses closed and gasoline sales ground to a halt. Because the repercussions of the storm-related power outages were so wide, utility and government officials realized they needed strong utility responses to prevent this from happening again. Specifically, the utilities clearly needed to pursue investments in what the industry calls “storm hardening.”

Although these utilities’ solutions and their costs share common elements, the funding sources available reflect varying views among government officials as to where the financial responsibility for funding these investments lies. The availability of federal aid is also an important element of the funding solutions. Standard & Poor’s believes that the means for funding and cost recovery can be important factors in determining credit quality.

Overview

The Storm-Hardening Programs’ Common Attributes

Given the breadth of these utilities’ service areas and their extensive coastal exposures, storm hardening costs will be substantial — about $1 billion per utility. Common elements of their storm hardening programs include raising key structures, such as substations, to heights that are better able to withstand storm surges. The utilities will also replace existing poles with stronger poles in those areas at risk for storm surges and they will step up activities to reduce the potential for trees and branches knocking down power lines.

FEMA Comes To LIPA’s Aid

The long outages that LIPA’s customers experienced triggered considerable ire among customers and politicians, leading to state legislation that imposed greater regulatory oversight. It whittled LIPA’s capacity to set rates on its own, subjecting rate adjustments to hearings if rate increase proposals exceed prescribed thresholds. In addition, the legislation transformed the utility’s operations by transferring day-to-day operations to an affiliate of one of the region’s investor-owned utilities and sets three days as the baseline for restoring service following a major power failure. If LIPA does not meet this target, the system operator must provide New York’s Department of Public Service with an assessment of the utility’s pre-event preparedness and post-event restoration efforts. The state also asked LIPA to freeze its base rates for at least one year, which it did, and the state is seeking a second year on that freeze. We believe these actions could reduce the utility’s financial flexibility. We consider financial flexibility to be critical to responding to potentially volatile costs and preserving credit quality. Our negative outlook on LIPA reflects the constraints these conditions could impose on financial performance.

Against the backdrop of the state’s response to the storm outages, the utility found a financing lifeline in the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA). FEMA reimbursed LIPA for about 90% of its storm restoration costs. The agency reimburses these types of costs for not-for-profit utilities because they cannot take advantage of the federal tax benefits that investor-owned utilities can. Moreover, in an unusual move, the agency also agreed to finance much of LIPA’s prospective storm hardening activities. This decision provides the utility with the capacity to buttress its system without incurring substantial infrastructure investment financing needs while its base rates remain frozen. The FEMA reimbursement plan helps shore up credit quality while enabling LIPA to invest in reliability as it faces ratemaking constraints.

Limits On Consolidated Edison’s Options

Unlike LIPA, New York’s Consolidated Edison, an investor-owned utility, will not have the benefit of FEMA resources to strengthen its system’s storm resiliency. It also funded its storm recovery and restoration costs differently from LIPA, by capitalizing portions of its $363 million of spending. It recorded the uncapitalized balance as a regulatory asset for deferred recovery. In 2012, the company had no current federal income tax liability as a result of, among other things, deduction of costs incurred in connection with Sandy.

Consolidated Edison asked the state’s rate regulator for cost recovery for about $1 billion of prospective storm hardening projects. The regulator approved the projects, albeit within a framework of stable rates. We believe that the company will need to effectively control costs and avoid cost overruns in its sizable capital program to mitigate the rate freeze’s impact. The costs of storm hardening also need to be considered within the context of the recent East Harlem natural gas explosion. Although the explosion’s cause has yet to be determined, and we believe Consolidated Edison carries insurance that should cover a portion of potential costs if it is found liable, it is our view that such a finding could lead to penalties and higher compliance costs for the utility’s aging gas distribution system. Our outlook on the company is stable, but possible penalties and additional capital investment needs could harm its financial condition and might lead to modestly lower ratings.

PSE&G Benefits From Supportive State Regulation

By comparison, neighboring PSE&G appears to operate under more beneficial state regulation. On May 1, the New Jersey Board of Public Utilities’ staff recommended that the regulator allow the utility to recover from customers $1.2 billion of the $2.6 billion of the multiyear storm hardening investments it had proposed. PSE&G ultimately plans to align its storm hardening spending with the amounts the regulator approves. Staff’s recommendation includes a 9.75% return on equity on the first $1 billion of investment and a rate of return on the balance that this utility’s next rate case will determine.

Vehicles For Recovering Investments Can Influence Credit Quality

Although very different avenues for funding storm hardening investments are available to these utilities, and some of the investments might weigh negatively on credit quality, the utilities and their regulators nevertheless are consistent in recognizing that investments that will help these systems better withstand storms are critical to enhancing operational predictability and improving customer satisfaction. Although we believe that these investments can contribute to greater operating stability and benefit utilities’ enterprise and financial risk profiles, cost recovery — whether from customers or government reimbursements — remains an overarching consideration for credit quality.

Primary Credit Analyst: David N Bodek, New York (1) 212-438-7969;
[email protected]
Secondary Contacts: Geoffrey E Buswick, Boston (1) 617-530-8311;
[email protected]
Kyle M Loughlin, New York (1) 212-438-7804;
[email protected]
Barbara A Eiseman, New York (1) 212-438-7666;
[email protected]
Gabe Grosberg, New York (1) 212-438-6043;
[email protected]

 




U.S. School Revenue Dropped in 2012 for First Time in 35 Years.

Public elementary and secondary schools saw annual revenue decline $5 billion in 2012, the first drop since 1977, according to a U.S. Census Bureau report.

Total expenditures fell for a third consecutive year, to $594 billion, a drop of $2.5 billion, according to the study of the 50 states and the District of Columbia issued today in Washington.

New York was the top spender, at $19,552 per pupil. The District of Columbia, AlaskaNew Jerseyand Connecticut rounded out the top five.

The states spending the least per pupil were Utah, at $6,206, followed by Idaho, Oklahoma, Arizona and Mississippi.

State governments were the leading source of support for public schools, with $270 billion provided in 2012. Local taxes followed closely at $265 billion, the report said.

By Tim Jones  May 22, 2014 11:56 AM PT  

To contact the reporter on this story: Tim Jones in Chicago at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Stacie Sherman

 




Moody's: Directing Investments at New Priorities Can Benefit Not-for-Profit Hospitals.

 New York, May 21, 2014 — Hospital systems that direct their investment dollars into improving efficiency, information technology and outpatient services will be the ones best positioned to soften the impact of declining patient utilization rates, says Moody’s Investors Service in the report “Building Value: Investments Aimed at New Priorities Create Opportunities for Not-For-Profit Hospitals.”

“Hospital systems that can supplement inpatient revenue with new, diversified revenue streams are more likely to remain successful and enhance consumer value,” says Brad Spielman, a Moody’s Vice President and Senior Credit Officer. “These investments are generally less expensive than building inpatient capacity and can help mitigate inpatient utilization declines.”

The outpatient services of the hospitals, however, are facing several new types of competitors as consumers become more sensitive to price. Nontraditional competitors include the healthcare services provided by drug stores and unaffiliated outpatient centers.

The popularity of health insurance plans with high deductibles is helping to drive the growth in less expensive outpatient services, says Moody’s.

“As the dominant healthcare model in the country shifts from volume to value, income pressures will increase, putting hospitals’ income statements at further risk,” says Moody’s Spielman.

Many organizations have also hitched their pursuit of value to the acquisition and implementation of comprehensive and expensive IT systems. The return on these investments can be allusive, while the cost can immediately weaken both income statements and balance sheets, says Moody’s.

For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report at

https://www.moodys.com/research/PBM_PBM170100.

***

NOTE TO JOURNALISTS ONLY: For more information, please call one of our global press information hotlines: New York +1-212-553-0376, London +44-20-7772-5456, Tokyo +813-5408-4110, Hong Kong +852-3758-1350, Sydney +61-2-9270-8141, Mexico City 001-888-779-5833, São Paulo 0800-891-2518, or Buenos Aires 0800-666-3506. You can also email us at [email protected] or visit our web site at www.moodys.com.

Brad Spielman
VP – Senior Credit Officer
Public Finance Group
Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
One Front Street
Suite 1900
San Francisco, CA 94111
U.S.A.
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

Kendra M. Smith
MD – Public Finance
Public Finance Group
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

Releasing Office:
Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
250 Greenwich Street
New York, NY 10007
U.S.A.
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

 




Preparer Survey on the Effectiveness of Statement 34.

The Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB) is currently conducting pre-agenda research to inform its assessment of the effectiveness of Statement No. 34, Basic Financial Statements—and Management’s Discussion and Analysis—for State and Local Governments, and related standards. The objective of this research is to gather feedback on these broad questions:

The GASB has developed an online survey to gather feedback from preparers of governmental financial statements. The GASB would greatly appreciate you taking the time to complete the preparer survey, which can be accessed by following this link http://www.gasb.org/GASB-reexam-survey.

It is anticipated that the survey will take longer than a typical GASB survey, given the magnitude of the requirements in Statement 34. You can, however, download a copy of the survey in its entirety to consider before entering your responses into the online version. The deadline for completing the survey is Friday, June 6, 2014.

Your input is vital to the GASB’s standards-setting process. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact Roberta Reese ([email protected]) or Lisa Parker ([email protected]).




SIFMA Commends House Committee for Taking Action to Stop Eminent Domain Scheme.

Washington, DC, May 21, 2014 – SIFMA today issued the following statement from Kenneth E. Bentsen, Jr., SIFMA president and CEO, after the House Committee on Appropriations voted to adopt a legislative provision (Section 233) which, if signed into law, would effectively eliminate the threat that eminent domain could be used to seize mortgages, a serious concern of housing market participants for over two years:

“SIFMA commends the members of the House Committee on Appropriations for adopting a provision which would  prevent the Federal Housing Administration (FHA) from using taxpayer monies to facilitate a scheme by which eminent domain would be used to seize mortgage loans from Main Street investors.  Should FHA allow this scheme to move forward, investors in pension plans, 401Ks, mutual funds and other savings and retirement accounts will suffer the losses.  Today’s action is an important development in the fight to remove a cloud hanging over our housing markets.”

 




MuniNet Guide: Five Handy Online Calculators for Municipal Research.

We’ve come a long way from the abacus.

The online world is not flat, which continues to increase the power of the Internet.  Certainly, we can access vast amounts of information online.  We can also, in a growing number of examples,interact with that information, through tools or calculators that allow us to change variables and see the impact of those changes.

At what rate are these calculators cropping up and changing the online experience?  Well, we don’t have a calculator for that.  (Not yet, at least.)  But we can point you to five powerful online tools that can help with your municipal-related research.

Continue reading.




Investors Withdraw Appeals Against California Eminent Domain Plan.

May 16 (Reuters) – Pacific Investment Management Co, BlackRock Inc and DoubleLine Capital LP and other investors on Friday withdrew appeals of a ruling that had dismissed their lawsuits to block a California city’s plan to seize mortgages and keep delinquent borrowers in their homes.

In a filing in the U.S. Court of Appeals in San Francisco, lawyers for mortgage-bond trustees moved to end appeals in two related cases.

The move was made because the plan, based on a legal process called eminent domain to seize private property for a public purpose, had not materialized, said John Ertman, partner at law firm Ropes & Gray, which representing mortgage trustees Wells Fargo and Deutsche Bank.

But the lawsuit would be “immediately re-filed” if the city of Richmond, California, took steps toward adopting the plan, he said.

The trustees sued Richmond last year over the plan aimed at keeping local residents who owed more than their properties were worth in their homes.

The other trustees are Bank of New York Mellon, U.S. Bank, and Wilmington Trust.

U.S. District Judge Charles Breyer ruled last September that the original case was premature, and that ruling was appealed roughly a month later. Friday’s withdrawal was filed in the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit in San Francisco.

“We continue to believe that using eminent domain to seize mortgage loans is unconstitutional, and harmful to homeowners and ordinary savers with a pension, 401(k) or IRA,” Ertman said.

He said the trustees were dismissing the appeal since Richmond had not progressed toward seizing loans since Judge Breyer’s ruling and the filing of their appeal seven months ago.

San Francisco-based private investment firm Mortgage Resolution Partners (MRP) crafted the eminent domain plan for Richmond. The investor group had said that if the city of Richmond was allowed to go ahead with its plan, it may result in steeper down payment requirements and higher interest rates. (Reporting by Sam Forgione; Editing by Andrew Hay)

BY SAM FORGIONE

NEW YORK Fri May 16, 2014 8:25pm EDT




SIFMA: Detroit's LTGO Treatment Would "Shatter" Muni Industry.

CHICAGO — Detroit’s bankruptcy exit plan would “send shock waves through the municipal bond market,” and the federal judge overseeing the case should reject it, the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association argued Monday in a brief filed with the bankruptcy court.

SIFMA said it realizes the difficulty that Detroit has faced in crafting a plan of debt adjustment that allows it to deliver essential services and repaying obligations.

But its proposal to repay limited-tax general obligation bondholders only 10% to 13% would be illegal under Michigan law, unfairly discriminate against a class of creditors, and cause “havoc” on a muni industry that treats GO bonds as a gold standard.

“The predictable result is that the confidence of investors in the gold standard of GO bonds would be shattered which, in turn, will require municipalities in the future to offer more generous terms, i.e., higher interest rates and a lien on specified collateral, in order to attract sufficient investors,” the association said in the brief. “The impact cannot be underestimated.”

There is no precedent in Chapter 9 for impairing a class of creditors like the LTGO bondholders so badly, SIFMA argues.

Detroit has reached a settlement with its unlimited-tax general obligation bondholders that calls for a 74% recovery. In its brief, SIFMA focuses on the city’s proposed treatment of its LTGO holders, who have not settled. Detroit filed its fourth debt plan last week, and creditors began voting on it Monday. A trial on the plan’s confirmation is set for July 24.

If the city succeeds in cramming down its LTGO holders, the move could weaken financial markets and even lead to a loss of jobs and a “stifling of economic growth,” SIFMA said.

“Given that all eyes in the bond market are on Detroit, this all but certain effect on demand for GO bonds, with resultant higher borrowing costs, would have a significant negative impact well beyond this case, on municipalities and taxpayers across the United States.”

Under Michigan state law, the LTGO holders enjoy a pledge of first budget obligation of ad valorem taxes, SIFMA argues. In addition to violating state law, the city’s proposed LTGO treatment unfairly discriminates against a class of creditors. The court should reject the plan, the association says.

It’s not the first time that SIFMA, as well as other industry groups such as the Bond Dealers of America, have blasted Detroit’s proposed treatment of its GO bondholders. SIFMA in July, days after Detroit filed for bankruptcy, warned Michigan Gov. Rick Snyder that the city’s proposal would cost cities across the state and urged him to uphold the local GO pledge.

Law firms Steinberg Shapiro & Clark and Nixon Peabody LLP filed the brief on behalf of SIFMA.

BY CAITLIN DEVITT

MAY 12, 2014 5:06pm ET




Bond Markups as Low as 3% Said Excessive to Finra in Trading.

The Wall Street watchdog that culls bond-trade data is honing in on limits for acceptable commissions that are lower than their stated guidelines.

While dealers have been told for decades that they can’t mark up bonds more than 5 percent without regulators deeming their fees excessive, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority considers the real ceiling for most corporate-bond trades as 3 percent or even less, according to three people with direct knowledge of the matter.

Government agencies have been more closely examining transactions that traditionally occurred over the telephone in a U.S. debt market that’s almost doubled in the last decade to $40 trillion, attracting record cash from the growing population of pensioners and retirees in need of fixed income. Finra is going through its bond-price data looking for evidence of wrongdoing as it tries to nab brokers who charge customers more than they should.

“You’ve got a gotcha situation where people are trying to figure out what the limit is,” said W. Hardy Callcott, a securities attorney at Sidley Austin LLP in San Francisco. “They do have thresholds for different securities, but they don’t tell you what those thresholds are.”

Brokers who take too big of a cut on bond trades may be fined by Finra or receive disciplinary actions they’re required to disclose in public records.

Tolerating Markups

Regulators probably have opted not to reveal specific limits on commissions because such guidance may lead traders to charge as much as they can, Callcott said in a telephone interview last week.

Finra has different thresholds for acceptable commissions based on market conditions and the credit quality of the bonds being traded, one of the people said. The watchdog is willing to tolerate higher markups for riskier debt, said the person, who asked not to be identified because the conversations are private.

Nancy Condon, a Finra spokeswoman, declined to comment. Finra is an independent organization that writes and enforces rules governing the activities of more than 4,140 securities firms.

Scrutiny of practices in the debt market is increasing after individuals poured about $588 billion into bond funds since the beginning of 2009, according to Investment Company Institute data.

Litvak Verdict

The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission is separately examining to what extent smaller buyers are disadvantaged and whether the behavior constitutes market manipulation, Bloomberg News reported March 20. Brokers can choose which rivals and clients may see their bond prices on electronic trading systems by turning quotes on and off.

Bonds aren’t traded as frequently as stocks, which are listed on exchanges. Some will rarely change hands, making it difficult for buyers and sellers to assess a market rate.

Finra next month is expanding its bond-price reporting into the $1.5 trillion market for private company debt, which is only sold to institutional buyers. The plan extends the reach of a system introduced in 2002 into an area more likely to be rife with questionable practices because the securities are less frequently traded.

The watchdog plans to use the data to help identify dealers who profit from excessive fees, according to the people. It’s historically been more profitable to trade bonds than stocks because the debt markets are less transparent, making it easier for brokers to take a bigger fee for each exchange.

Being Scared

Finra’s computer-enhanced surveillance has helped fuel uncertainty about what constitutes acceptable practices on Wall Street, especially after former Jefferies Group LLC mortgage-debt trader Jesse Litvak was convicted in March for taking markups on some trades that were too big.

Litvak, a former managing director, was found guilty by a federal jury on March 7 of securities fraudand making false statements connected to the U.S. government’s Troubled Asset Relief Program. He was scheduled to be sentenced May 30 and planned to appeal the decision.

Prosecutors accused Litvak of defrauding investors of $2 million by misrepresenting how much sellers were asking for securities, or what customers would pay, and keeping the difference for New York-based Jefferies.

“You can understand why people would be scared,” said Neil Barofsky, a white-collar defense attorney at Jenner & Block and former special inspector general of the U.S. government’s Troubled Asset Relief Program.

1943 Study

For Litvak, the U.S. “had a case where the facts were not overwhelming and a defense that ‘Everyone is doing it,’” Barofsky said.

The conviction may bolster government efforts to prosecute other traders and banks related to the 2008 financial crisis and its aftermath, according to Barofsky. When asked if charges against others were likely, Assistant U.S. Attorney Eric Glover said in March the investigation is “ongoing and active” and declined further comment.

Finra’s board adopted what became known as the “5 percent policy” based on a study conducted in 1943 to serve as a guideline of what’s an acceptable markup in bond trading. The watchdog said last year that it’s working on completing an updated version of the rules.

Concrete Guidance

In 2011, Finra proposed dropping a numerical guideline altogether, then decided to retain the 5 percent reference in the latest draft of the rule released in 2013.

“Other than being on the opposite side of an enforcement proceeding, it is the only concrete guidance that Finra has issued,” attorneys at law firm Bingham McCutchen LLP wrote in a February 2013 report posted on their website.

Since the 5 percent threshold for bond-trade profits is based on a 71-year-old study, “it leaves the industry to an ever-changing and arbitrary determination of what appropriate markups should be,” they said.

In 2002, a Finra predecessor introduced the Trace bond-pricing reporting system to foster competitive pricing, starting with 500 bonds. It will begin disseminating prices on corporate bonds sold privately under Rule-144A for the first time in June.

Those bonds aren’t traded as frequently, so Wall Street takes more risk in brokering the debt and usually expects to be compensated accordingly. Finra has said it’s also planning to add trades in non-agency mortgage-backed securities, another less-liquid corner of the bond market, to Trace.

The expansion is exacerbating angst among bond traders concerned that they face retroactive punishment for activities that once were accepted, according to Callcott.

“If you tell people what they’re supposed to do, in my experience the vast majority are going to try to comply with it,” Callcott said. “The thing that’s frustrating to me is that they have a number and they won’t tell you what the number is.”

By Lisa Abramowicz  May 16, 2014 12:50 PM PT

To contact the reporter on this story: Lisa Abramowicz in New York at[email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Bob Ivry at [email protected] Caroline Salas Gage, Shannon D. Harrington




Illinois Launches Legal Argument for Pension Reform.

CHICAGO – Illinois acted within its sovereign authority in passing pension reforms given its precarious fiscal condition and the size of its unfunded pension obligations.

That’s the heart of the state’s initial legal defense of the pension legislation from Illinois Attorney General Lisa Madigan.

“In light of the magnitude of the pension problem and all of the other efforts the state has made to date, the act represents a valid exercise of the state’s reserved sovereign powers to modify contractual rights and obligations including contractual obligations of the state” under the Illinois constitution, say filings Illinois made Thursday.

Madigan filed the defense in response to a series of lawsuits seeking to overturn the December pension legislation as a violation of the state constitution which affords pension benefits strong contractual rights that cannot be impaired or diminished.

The lawsuits have been consolidated in Sangamon County Circuit Court, home of the state capital, and are being heard by Judge John W. Belz, though the Illinois Supreme Court is expected to have the final word.

Madigan’s responses to each of the lawsuits includes a response to the dozens of assertions laid out by the plaintiffs, which include the union coalition We Are One Illinois and various associations that represent state employees and retirees. In many instances, the state simply denies legal assertions made in the lawsuits.

Madigan then takes the additional step in the filings of laying out the state’s defense for adopting the pension changes, arguing they were both reasonable and necessary given the state’s precarious financial position, the size of its unfunded liabilities, and the need to fund critical services. “The Act’s limited changes to pensions were necessary to address these circumstances,” the filings contend.

The filings lay out the roots of the state’s financial deterioration and integral link to the rise in its unfunded pension obligations. Beginning around 2000 and continuing over the next decade the state’s underfunding of the systems “contributed significantly to a severe financial crisis for the state.”

That “adversely affected the long-term financial soundness of those retirement systems, the cost of financing the state’s operations and outstanding debt, and the state’s ability to provide critical services to Illinois residents and businesses.”

The filings outline steps taken by the state to improve its balance sheet and the pension system including the 2010 passage of legislation cutting pension benefits for new employees, an overhaul of its Medicaid system, spending cuts, and the 2011 enactment of a temporary income tax hike.

Those measures proved insufficient and the state’s “credit rating continued to suffer, causing it to incur still higher costs to finance its debt, thereby further reducing” revenues for critical services and to reduce unfunded liabilities.

The filings draw much of the information on the state’ fiscal struggles from a lengthy preamble to the legislation included by the attorney general’s father, House Speaker Michael Madigan, D-Chicago.

The legislation limits cost-of-living increases, caps pensionable salaries, and raises the retirement age for some while cutting employee contributions by 1%, shifting contribution calculations to a more actuarially sound method, and gives the pension funds enforcement rights over state payments.

Much of the expected $140 billion of savings stem from the COLA increases annuitants now receive. The state filings target the existing automatic COLA as a key driver for the rising pension burden and argue those adjustments “are not part of the core pension benefit.”

The state acknowledges that in past years the General Assembly failed to contribute sufficient funds to keep the system healthy, but also chides unions saying their past efforts to push wage increases came at the expense of greater pension contributions during tough fiscal times.

The state argues that the legislation provides “consideration” for the negative changes by stabilizing the pension system. The plaintiffs argue that pension benefits are protected by the state’s pension clause, that the reforms violate the contract clause, and violate the constitution’s takings clause that protects private property.

Belz on Thursday granted the plaintiffs’ request to stay the June 1 implementation of the pension legislation. Rating agencies have said the state’s weak credit rating could stabilize if the pension changes are eventually upheld and the state shores up its budget by extending a temporary income tax.

The state’s rating has sunk over the last several two years to the A-minus level, the weakest among states due to its pension and budgetary strains. Two rating agencies assign a negative outlook and Standard & Poor’s a “developing” outlook. The state has $100 billion of unfunded pension obligations.

The plaintiffs did not have an immediate reaction to the state attorney general’s filings.

BY YVETTE SHIELDS

MAY 16, 2014 3:48pm ET




Chicago Crisis Obscures $8.4 Billion Pension Gap in Small Towns.

Larry Morrissey is mayor of the old industrial hub of Rockford, Illinois, and he says that if bankruptcy revived the U.S. auto industry, it might save his city of 151,000 from “the slow death” of pension costs.

“Bankruptcy is designed to avert that kind of a slow, perpetual indentured servitude for individuals and corporations — why the hell should cities be treated differently?” said Morrissey.

This borders on fantasy in Illinois, where municipalities can’t file for court protection without legislative approval. Yet the discussion reveals alarm over mounting shortfalls among the 650 pensions in large and small towns outside Chicago that cover police and firefighters. Fiscal crises in the state and its biggest city have diverted attention from the $8.4 billion in liabilities those systems faced in 2012, up from $4.1 billion in 2001.

Partisan gridlock in the legislature and lawsuits have stalled attempts to stabilize them, and costs are mounting in tandem with mayor’s frustration.

“In the next three to five years, you’re going to find communities in situations they cannot financially recover from,” said Scott Eisenhauer, mayor of the central Illinois town of Danville, with a population of 32,000. “Pension debt is now factored into bond ratings, and you’ll find that some of them won’t be able to borrow like they once did because of pension debt.”

General Disarray

Illinois pays more to borrow than any of the 17 states tracked by Bloomberg, with investors demanding an extra 1.03 percentage points above AAA munis to own state debt, Bloomberg data show. The penalty trickles down to localities.

The state itself faces a $100 billion pension liability, the largest in the U.S. In December, after years of inaction, lawmakers approved a benefit-cutting bill last December designed to wipe out the shortage in the next 30 years. Its fate is likely to be determined by the Illinois Supreme Court, perhaps not until 2015.

Rating companies have also raised the specter of insolvency in Chicago, the nation’s third-largest city, where gaps in its four pensions total $20 billion. Democratic Governor Pat Quinn hasn’t signed a bill passed last month to stabilize two of them, expressing concerns about an associated property-tax increase.

Although state retirement funds cover municipal employees and teachers, police and fire retirements are handled by local units. Many struggle.

No Unicorns

Moline’s police fund was 41 percent funded in 2010, according to the Illinois Department of Insurance. In Cairo, the firefighter system was 24 percent funded.

As a group, police pensions outside Chicago were 56 percent funded in 2012, down from 76 percent in 1999, while firefighter systems dropped to 55 percent from 78 percent over the same period, according to the Illinois Department of Insurance.

Morrissey said liabilities in Rockford, about 85 miles (137 kilometers) northwest of Chicago, have grown to $120 million from $20 million in 1999. Only benefit cuts or bankruptcy, he said, can control them.

“What makes anybody think a miracle’s going to happen?” Morrissey said. “We don’t live in the land of fairies and magic beans.”

Diverting Blame

Morrissey said bankruptcy allowed General Motors Co. and Chrysler Group LLC to become profitable. The record for municipalities is less clear cut. Voters in Stockton, California, approved a sales-tax increase last November to help move toward solvency. Detroit still needs state assistance to emerge from bankruptcy, Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr said May 13.

Illinois unions representing police and firefighters dismiss bankruptcy talk as a cover for mismanagement and a desire to break promises and contracts.

“That’s really idiotic,” said Sean Smoot, director and chief legal counsel for the Police Benevolent and Protective Association of Illinois, which represents about 10,000 active and retired police officers.

Crises are largely of towns’ own making, said Sean Devaney, president of the Associated Fire Fighters of Illinois.

“Blaming police and fire benefits are really convenient talking points for some of these mayors to relieve themselves from poor decisions,” Devaney said.

Last Resort

About two-thirds of the 50 states prohibit or place tight restrictions on municipal bankruptcy, while a dozen allow it. The legacy of Detroit’s Chapter 9 filing in 2013 is that more states are intervening early to prevent crises from spinning out of control, said James Spiotto, managing director at Chapman Strategic Advisors and a municipal bankruptcy specialist.

Illinois oversees some towns, such as the Mississippi River communities of East St. Louis and Washington Park, through a program to assist distressed cities.

Joe McCoy, legislative director for the Illinois Municipal League, said mayors’ talk of bankruptcy is a vote of no confidence in the state’s leadership.

“It may be the only viable option short of these problems being addressed by the general assembly,” he said. “They don’t have a lot of confidence in the general assembly to address intractable problems.”

By Tim Jones  May 18, 2014 5:11 PM PT

To contact the reporter on this story: Tim Jones in Chicago at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Mark Schoifet




GASB: Tax Abatement Disclosures.

Project Description:

The objective of this project would be to consider developing disclosure guidance for governments that have granted tax abatements. For purposes of this project, tax abatements are a reduction of or exemption from taxes, offered by a government to a specific taxpayer, typically for the purpose of spurring economic development. The project would not consider guidance for programs that reduce the tax liabilities of broad classes of taxpayers, such as senior citizen or veterans, and which are not the product of individual agreements with each taxpayer. The project also would not consider issues related to recognition.
Status: Added to Current Agenda: December 2013

TAX ABATEMENT DISCLOSURES—PROJECT PLAN


Background
: Tax abatement programs are highly prevalent in the U.S.—governmental entities in 44 states currently have them. The results of external research conducted under a Gil Crain Memorial Research Grant from the GASB suggest that tax abatements are an issue of concern among citizen groups, county board members, and municipal bond analysts, and that each group desires to receive information about the level of abatement activity and the results of the abatement programs. However, the researchers found relatively few states (six) with statutes requiring any level of external reporting after tax abatements are granted. These findings indicate that there is an important information need that is largely unmet.

Tax abatement programs are widespreadand the dollar amounts and number of governmental entities involved can be substantial. For example, 40 percent of localities in Michigan granted at least one tax abatement between 1980 and 2001 under a statewide industrial development abatement program that abated local government taxes by an estimated $1 billion annually.1 That is the equivalent of approximately 4.2 percent of all sub-state tax revenue in Michigan.2

Further, the academics awarded the Gil Crain grant for 2010 found that 44 states have statutes regarding programs in line with the definition of a stand-alone property tax abatement program. (This is consistent with a 2007 study that concluded governments in 42 states are allowed by their states to offer tax abatements.3). However, they identified just six states with statutes addressing reporting requirements. Fourteen states addressed accountability for abatement programs in their statutes by including provisions for benefit recovery (clawbacks) in instances of nonperformance by the recipient of the abatement. It may be possible that more states require reporting or impose consequences for nonperformance in policies and procedures outside their statutes.

Their review of websites involved 36 counties (across 14 states) which had been identified through a Lexis-Nexis search as having tax abatement programs. The review turned up only one of the 36 county websites with any reporting on tax abatements after they were granted.

The academics concluded, “While other county websites included information about tax abatements in general or about the granting of a particular abatement, none provided information that would be useful in monitoring abatements currently in effect. Finding even limited information on these websites required much effort and diligence. Certainly, the average citizen could not be considered to have reasonable access to tax abatement information from any of these counties’ websites.”

Constituents have periodically raised the possibility of a pronouncement requiring governments to disclose additional information about tax abatements. At present, generally accepted accounting principles do not require state and local governments to disclose information related to tax abatements.

In September 2013 the project staff conducted interviews and received feedback from 78 individuals responsible for keeping records on tax abatements within governments that had been identified as authorizing stand-alone tax abatements. This research indicates that governments generally do keep records on the type of information identified by users as being necessary for their decision-making and assessment of a government’s accountability of stand-alone tax abatements that have been authorized.

Finally, some tax abatements, depending on how they are structured (for example, refunds, rebates. or credit), do involve cash inflows and cash outflows. In these instances, the taxpayer first pays the taxes and the government refunds, rebates, or credits the appropriate amount back to them once they have fulfilled their obligations associated with receiving the tax abatement. In other tax abatements, there is no flow of resources but rather a foregone cash inflow and associated cash outflow. In these instances, the taxpayer pays a tax amount that is net of the tax abatement authorized. However, this foregone flow of resources has affected the government’s net position. Users also have expressed a need for this information to make assessments of how other taxpayers have subsidized the taxes that have been abated to other taxpayers.

User needs. The survey of users was conducted by the academics awarded the Gil Crain grant was administered to staff and members of citizen groups, municipal bond analysts, and county board members. Responses were received from 38 citizen group staff and members (response rate of 26.4 percent), 68 county board members (8.8 percent), and 114 bond analysts (10.3 percent). The overall response rate of 10.9 percent is low but in line with typical responses to targeted email surveys (10–15 percent) and characteristic for these populations.

One portion of the survey offered statements about tax abatement programs drawn from the literature and asked respondents to rate their agreement or disagreement with the statement on a five-point scale (1 = strongly disagree, 5 = strongly agree). The statements specifically relevant to financial reporting were:

  1. Governments should report annually on tax abatement agreements outstanding.
  2. Legislators (for example, county commissioners or county board members) involved in granting tax abatements should receive timely reports comparing expected performance to actual performance.
  3. Citizens and other interested parties should have access to annual reports comparing expected performance to actual performance for all tax abatement agreements outstanding.
  4. Information about taxes recovered through recapture provisions should be reported to legislators who grant tax abatements.
  5. Information about taxes recovered through recapture provisions should be accessible to citizens and other interested parties on an annual basis.

Overall, the level of agreement in each of the three groups of users was very high on all five of these statements (an average greater than 4.0). Citizen group members and staff particularly agreed with statements a (average ranking of 4.53), b (4.54), and c (4.62). The difference between the rankings by citizens and county board members was statistically significant for several of the statements, and the county board member rankings were lower across the board (though still above 4.0 on each statement). The highest level of agreement among county board members was with statement b (4.23). The rankings by municipal bond analysts fell in between those of citizens and county board members. Municipal bond analysts most strongly agreed with a (4.31), c (4.40), and d (4.33).

Bond analysts were asked to rate how often they consider five issues related to tax abatements when analyzing municipal securities on a five-point scale (1 = never, 5 = always):

  1. Revenues forgone through property tax abatements
  2. Expected and actual outcomes related to existing property tax abatements
  3. Taxes recovered through recapture provisions when abatements recipients fail to meet conditions in the tax abatement agreements
  4. The degree to which a government uses property tax abatements to attract new businesses or to retain and expand existing businesses
  5. The degree to which a government uses tax incentives to encourage economic development.

Four of the five factors linked to tax abatements were identified by bond analyst respondents as being considered somewhat regularly (average mean of approximately 3.0—1, 2, 4, and 5).

The surveys of all three user groups asked them to rank the importance of seven items that could be reported by governments about tax abatements they have granted:

  1. Name of recipient
  2. Date abatement was granted
  3. Amount of tax abatement in the current year
  4. Length of tax abatement and projected abatement amounts in future years
  5. Commitments made by the government (e.g., infrastructure improvements)
  6. Contractual promises made by the recipient (if any)
  7. Recipient’s compliance with contractual promises.

The survey again used a five-point scale (1 = not at all important, 5 = very important). All three groups rated the importance of items iii–vii highly (average of 4.0 or greater). Citizen respondents rated i and ii highly as well, and county board member respondents rated those items near 4.0 (3.97 and 4.02, respectively). Citizen respondents rated items iv–vii particularly highly (each over 4.5). Those items also were the most highly rated among county board member respondents. The highest-ranked items among bond analyst respondents were iii and iv.

The surveys concluded by asking the three groups of users their opinions about how, if at all, tax abatements should be reported in audited financial reports. The questions were posed to all municipal bond analysts and to citizens and board members who responded with a 2 or higher when asked to rate their familiarity with audited government financial reports (1 = not at all familiar, 5 = extremely familiar; the average citizen response was 3.42 and for board members 3.60). Respondents were asked to identify their preference among five reporting options:

Tax Abatement Reporting Options

Options

% Selecting Option

Citizens
(n = 30)

Board
(n = 44)

Analysts
(n = 99)

As a reduction in revenues (e.g., total revenues – amount abated = net revenue)

40

48

27

As an expenditure or use of government resources

20

7

8

Only as a disclosure in the notes to the financial statements

30

32

42

Only as unaudited supplementary information after the notes

0

9

16

Not reported in an audited annual financial report

10

4

7

The greatest support across the three groups was given to recognition as a reduction in revenues and disclosure only. In fact, recognized property tax revenues do not include abated taxes either because they were not levied on the abatement recipients or they were levied but are not expected to be collected. The academics acknowledge that a part of the explanation of the relative popularity of the reduction of revenues option may be the parenthetical specification of “total revenues – amount abated = net revenue.” Respondents may have been signaling a desire to know all three components of that equation; whereas the net revenue is an issue of recognition in the financial statements, the reporting of gross revenues and the amount abated may be more suitable to note disclosure.

Accounting and Financial Reporting Issues: The project will consider the following issues:

  1. What information about tax abatements, if any, should be disclosed in the notes?
  2. What tax abatement information do governments currently have available?
  3. What costs, if any, might a government incur to collect information about tax abatements?

Project History: The GASAC considered this topic during its discussion of priorities at its March 2012 and 2013 meetings. The GASAC members have ranked the topic among the highest in priority of all research activities and potential projects in the GASB’s technical plan.

Work Plan:

Board Meetings Research
January-February 2014:
Appointment of task force.
March 2014: Review project history and relevant literature.
April 2014: Discussion of criteria for identifying what types of tax abatements would be within the scope of the project.
May 2014:
May 2014: Discussion of whether and what tax abatement information should be disclosed.
July 2014: Continue discussion of whether and what tax abatement information should be disclosed.
August 2014: Review draft standards section.
September 2014: Review preballot draft of Exposure Draft.
October 2014 (T/C):  Review ballot draft and issue Exposure Draft.
November 2014-January 2015: Redeliberate issues based on respondent feedback.
July 2015: Review preballot draft of final Statement.
August 2015: (T/C): Review ballot draft and issue final Statement.

TAX ABATEMENT DISCLOSURES—PROJECT PLAN

Minutes of Meetings, April 8-10, 2014

The Board began deliberations on the Tax Abatement Disclosures project, focusing on defining the scope of transactions that will be covered by this project and creating a tentative definition of the term tax abatement.

The Board discussed whether to include the following components in the definition of a tax abatement: (a) the mechanism for reducing taxes, (b) the purpose of the tax abatement, (c) the breadth and applicability of abatement programs, (d) the existence of an agreement, and (e) the type of revenue being abated.

The Board tentatively agreed to include the purpose of the tax abatement, the existence of an agreement, and the type of revenue being abated in the tentative definition of a tax abatement. The mechanism for reducing taxes and the breadth and applicability of abatement programs were tentatively excluded from the definition.

Based on these tentative decisions, the Board tentatively agreed to propose the following definition for a tax abatement, for the purposes of this project, subject to further revision after subsequent deliberations:

For financial reporting purposes, a tax abatement is a reduction in taxes that results from an agreement between one or more governmental entities and an individual taxpayer in which (a) one or more governmental entities forgo tax revenues that the taxpayer otherwise would have been obligated to pay and (b) the taxpayer promises to take a specific action that contributes to economic development or otherwise benefits the government(s) or its citizens.

Further, the Board tentatively agreed that the scope of possible standards that it will consider for tax abatement disclosures should be limited to transactions that meet the proposed definition of a tax abatement.

Minutes of Meetings, March 3-5, 2014

The Board received and discussed the results of staff research on the key issues of the Tax Abatement Disclosures project. Preliminary research findings were presented covering the following areas: nature and extent of tax abatements; commitments made in tax abatement agreements; user needs; and the availability of information. No formal deliberations took place at this meeting.

TAX ABATEMENT DISCLOSURES—TENTATIVE BOARD DECISIONS

These tentative decisions have been made since the inclusion of the project as a part of the current technical agenda. The Board tentatively agreed to the following:

 


1Sands, Gary and Laura A. Reese. Public Act 198 Industrial Facilities Tax Abatements: Current Practices and Policy Recommendations. (East Lansing, MI: Land Policy Institute, Michigan State University, October 2007).
22007 Census of Governments, State and Local Government Finances, U.S. Bureau of the Census. Available at: http://www.census.gov/govs/www/estimate07.html.
3Wassmer, Robert W. “The Increasing Use of Property Tax Abatement as a Means of Promoting Sub-National Economic Activity in the United States” (December 12, 2007). Available at SSRN:http://ssrn.com/abstract=1088482.

Wassmer, Robert W. “The Increasing Use of Property Tax Abatement as a Means of Promoting Sub-National Economic Activity in the United States” (December 12, 2007). Available at SSRN:http://ssrn.com/abstract=1088482.

2Sands, Gary and Laura A. Reese. Public Act 198 Industrial Facilities Tax Abatements: Current Practices and Policy Recommendations. (East Lansing, MI: Land Policy Institute, Michigan State University, October 2007).

32002 Census of Governments, State and Local Government Finances, U.S. Bureau of the Census. Available at: http://www.census.gov/govs/www/estimate02.html.

4Dalehite, Esteban G., John Mikesell, and Kurt C. Zorn. “Variation in Property Tax Abatement Programs Among States.” Economic Development Quarterly, 2005, pp. 157–173.




GASB: Lease Accounting - Reexamination of NCGA Statement 5 and GASB Statement.13

Project Description:

The objective of this project is to reexamine issues associated with lease accounting, considering improvements to existing guidance. This project will provide a basis for the Board to consider whether operating leases meet the definitions of assets or liabilities. Current guidance is provided by National Council on Governmental Accounting (NCGA) Statement 5, Accounting and Financial Reporting Principles for Lease Agreements of State and Local Governments, GASB Statement No. 13, Accounting for Operating Leases with Scheduled Rent Increases, GASB Statement No. 62, Codification of Accounting and Financial Reporting Guidance Contained in Pre-November 30, 1989 FASB and AICPA Pronouncements, and GASB Statement No. 65, Items Previously Reported as Assets and Liabilities. Statement 62 incorporates the provisions of FASB Statement No. 13,Accounting for Leases, as amended and interpreted, into the GASB’s authoritative literature.

Status:

Added to Current Agenda: April 2013
Added to Research Agenda: April 2011

LEASE ACCOUNTING—PROJECT PLAN


Background
: Governments routinely enter into leases. Under the current authoritative literature, many of these leases are reported as operating leases. Even though operating leases represent long-term commitments to make payments, no liabilities are reported, although there are disclosures. Likewise, no assets are reported when governments have long-term rights to receive operating lease payments. In Concepts Statement No. 4, Elements of Financial Statements, the Board established definitions of assets and liabilities. This project provides an opportunity for the Board to consider whether operating leases meet the definitions of assets or liabilities.

The FASB and the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) have current projects that propose to replace private sector guidance. Because of the potentially significant changes of the FASB/IASB project, the staff has received technical inquiries regarding whether there are any plans for the GASB to update its leasing guidance.

This project undertaken by the GASB is being performed in concert with the similar FASB/IASB project to maximize efficiency and timeliness. A simultaneous lease accounting project on the GASB agenda provides the opportunity to follow the progress of the FASB/IASB leasing project to assess any proposed new or amended leasing guidance in the context of the state and local government environment on a contemporaneous basis. This allows the Board to consider and address amendments to FASB Statement 13 (GASB Statement 62) in a timely manner.

Finally, part of the GASB’s strategic plan is to evaluate the effectiveness and impact of existing standards that have been in effect for a sufficient length of time. NCGA Statement 5 was issued in 1982 and GASB Statement 13 in 1990. This project provides an opportunity for a fresh look at the existing guidance for any improvements not contemplated by the FASB/IASB project given the unique nature of governmental entities and the complexities of their leasing transactions.

Accounting and Financial Reporting Issues: The major topic being researched is the forms of financial reporting display and disclosure that would meet essential financial statement user needs. The project is considering the following issues:

  1. What types of leases are entered into by state and local governments?
  2. What specific user needs exist regarding governmental leases and what decision-useful or accountability information is needed to meet those needs?
  3. Are current accounting and financial reporting standards appropriate to meet essential user needs?
  4. Should there be a distinction between types of leases, such as operating and capital?
  5. If current standards are not considered adequate, what additional potential requirements should be considered?

Project History: A proposal to add the project to the research agenda was discussed by the GASAC at its March 2011 meeting and the project was added to the research agenda in April 2011.

At its February 2013 meeting, the GASAC ranked the project fifth in priority among research and potential projects. The project was added to the current agenda in April 2013.

The project was added to the current agenda in April 2013. At the June 2013 meeting, the FASB staff presented an education session on the proposed revisions to lease accounting contained in its revised Exposure Draft that was issued in May 2013.

At its August 2013 meeting, the Board discussed the scope of the project, the definition of a lease, and related scope issues. The Board tentatively agreed with the timeline and scope of the project. The Board then discussed minor revisions to the definition of a lease. The Board tentatively decided to replace “agreement” with “contract” and replace “capital assets (land and/or depreciable assets)” with “an asset (the underlying asset). The Board also tentatively decided to add the phrase “in an exchange or exchange-like transaction” to the definition of a lease.

The Board then discussed the inclusions and exclusions to the scope of lease guidance.

The Board tentatively decided to continue to include contracts not identified as leases but that meet the definition of a lease. The Board tentatively decided to not provide an example of such a contract, and remove the example currently provided. The Board tentatively decided to continue to exclude the following from the scope of the guidance: agreements that are contracts for services that do not transfer the right to use capital assets from one contracting party to the other; leases to explore for or use of minerals, oil, natural gas, and similar nonregenerative resources; licensing agreements for such items as motion picture films, video recordings, plays, manuscripts, patents, and copyrights; and agreements that meet the definition of a service concession arrangement (SCA). In addition, the Board tentatively decided that biological assets, including timber should be excluded from the scope of the lease guidance, while intangible assets other than licensing agreements would continue to be included in the scope.

Current Developments: At the September 2013 meeting, the Board discussed issues associated with lease classifications and lease terms that drive the accounting treatment of leases. After discussing characteristics of various types of leases, the Board considered alternate methods to classify leases for accounting purposes. The Board tentatively agreed that while there might be inherent differences in leases, a single accounting model could be developed in the interest of not creating unnecessary complexity, with potential exceptions for certain circumstances.

The Board then discussed elements relevant to the duration of a lease, including the definition of a lease term, how to account for fiscal funding clauses, and the reassessment of a lease’s term. The Board tentatively decided that the lease term should start with the noncancellable period. The Board also tentatively decided that the lease term should include the periods covered by renewal options (or exclude periods covered by termination options) that are probable of being exercised based on an assessment of qualitative factors. The Board tentatively agreed to include in the noncancellable period of the lease term periods covered by fiscal funding and cancellation clauses with a remote possibility of cancellation. Leases that contain a fiscal funding or cancellation clause with a more than remote possibility of cancellation should be treated as having a termination option. The Board also tentatively agreed the lease term should be reevaluated when there is a change in relevant factors that would result in a change in judgment as to the lessee’s likelihood to exercise or terminate the lease, or when the lessee actually exercises or terminates the lease opposite of what was previously expected. The Board tentatively decided the relevant factors used in the initial assessment also should be the factors that trigger a reassessment.

At the October 2013 meeting, the Board discussed lessee recognition and measurement, including the foundation for recognition and measurement, and lessee recognition of assets and liabilities. The Board also began discussions on the lessee initial measurement of liabilities. The Board tentatively decided that the notion of leases as financings be the foundation for the governmental leasing model.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing the recognition of assets and liabilities for lessees. The Board tentatively agreed that the right to use the underlying asset be recognized as an asset by the lessee and that the obligation to make lease payments be recognized as a liability by the lessee. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided that the obligation to return the underlying asset at the end of the lease not be recognized as a liability by the lessees; it also should not be recognized as a deferred inflow of resources or an outflow of resources. The Board then discussed other rights and obligations that may arise from a lease. The Board tentatively agreed that other rights be considered part of the overall lease asset and that other obligations be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.

The Board then discussed potential exceptions to the overall lease model. The Board tentatively decided that exceptions be made for short-term leases, under which the lessee government is not required to recognize assets or liabilities. The Board tentatively decided that a short-term lease be defined as a lease that, at the beginning of the lease, has a maximum possible term under the contract, including any options to extend, of 12 months or less. The Board tentatively agreed that the presence of a purchase option not affect the definition of a short-term lease. However, the Board also tentatively decided that leases that transfer ownership not qualify for the short-term lease exception, even if those leases meet the other criteria.

The Board then discussed the overall approach to the measurement of lease assets and liabilities for lessees. The Board tentatively decided that the general approach to measuring lease assets and liabilities be to measure the liabilities first and base the assets on that amount. The Board also tentatively decided that the general measurement approach for a lease liability be based on the present value of future payments.

The Board discussed the lessee measurement of lease liabilities and the types of payments that should be included. The Board tentatively decided that the following types of lease payments be included in the measurement of the initial lease liability:

The Board tentatively decided that lease payments that depend on a lessee’s performance or usage of an underlying asset not be a component of the initial lease liability. The Board also discussed residual value guarantees as a potential component of the lease liability as well, and requested additional staff research before making a tentative decision.

At the November 2013 teleconference, the Board discussed certain topics related to the initial measurement of assets that are created when entering into a lease. Specifically, the Board discussed prepayments, lease incentives, and initial direct costs. The Board tentatively agreed that prepayments (amounts paid for the lease prior to measuring the lease liability) should be included in the value of the reported lease asset. The Board also tentatively decided that lease incentives received should be reductions in the cost of lease assets. The Board tentatively decided that initial direct costs should be either capitalized (if they are ancillary charges to place the asset into use) or expensed (all other costs). The Board also discussed measurement in governmental funds and tentatively decided that lease liabilities should be measured consistent with the current measurement requirements for capital leases.

At the December 2013 meeting, the Board continued discussions on issues related to initial measurement of a lease liability and asset for lessees. The Board also discussed issues related to subsequent measurement of lease liabilities and assets, additional issues related to short-term leases, and issues related to leases with multiple components, noncore assets, and other expense topics.

Work Plan: In addition to the topics below that will be deliberated by the Board, the project staff will continue to monitor the progress of the FASB and IASB projects on leases.

Work Plan:

Board meetings Topics to be considered
January 2014:
Discuss lessee disclosures.
March 2014:
Discuss lessor—recognition and measurement
April 2014:
Continue discussion of lessor—recognition and measurement.
May 2014:
Discuss lessor disclosures.
July 2014:
Discuss special topics.
August 2014:
Review draft Standards section.
September 2014:
Review preballot draft of proposed Statement.
November 2014:
Review ballot draft and issue Exposure Draft.
December 2014–March 2015:
Due process, including field test.
April–October 2015:
Redeliberations.
November 2015:
Review preballot draft of final Statement.
December 2015(T/C):
Review ballot draft and issue final Statement.

LEASE ACCOUNTING —RECENT MINUTES

Minutes of Meetings, April 8-10, 2014

The Board began deliberations by discussing potential note disclosure requirements for lessees in relation to the general description of leasing arrangements. The Board tentatively agreed to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose a general description of the lessee’s leasing arrangements, including the basis, and terms and conditions, on which variable lease payments are determined and the existence, and terms and conditions, of residual value guarantees provided by the lessee. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose the existence and terms of purchase options; the existence, and terms and conditions, of renewal and termination options; the restrictions or covenants imposed by leases; or information about significant assumptions and judgments made in accounting for leases.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing potential disclosure requirements for lessees related to assets and liabilities. The Board tentatively agreed to propose that lessees be required to disclose only the general reconciliations of the changes in the lease liability and of the changes in capital assets currently required by Statement No. 34, Basic Financial Statements—and Management’s Discussion and Analysis—for State and Local Governments, and not to include a requirement for a more detailed reconciliation. Furthermore, the Board tentatively agreed to propose a requirement for the total amount of assets recorded under leases, and the related accumulated amortization, to be disclosed separately from owned assets. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lease assets to be disaggregated by major classes of underlying assets.

The Board then discussed potential disclosure requirements for lessees involving expenses related to leases. The Board tentatively decided not to propose that lessees separately disclose the amount of amortization expense recognized for lease assets. The Board also tentatively decided to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose the total variable lease payments actually incurred. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that the due process document supersede any existing disclosures related to operating leases.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing potential disclosure requirements for lessees in relation to future lease obligations. The Board tentatively agreed to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose a maturity analysis of future minimum lease payments that shows the payments for each of the first five years and five-year increments thereafter, with the payments shown undiscounted and total interest summed for all years. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose that the lessee disclosure requirements include amounts of sublease rentals to be received. The Board agreed that this topic would be addressed in the lessor disclosure deliberations.

Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose commitments relating to leases, other than short-term leases, for which the lease term has not begun with a conforming edit to NCGA Statement 1, Governmental Accounting and Financial Reporting Principles. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose a maturity analysis of the nonlease components of a contract.

The Board then discussed other considerations regarding lessee disclosures. The Board tentatively decided not to propose that the due process document refer to the noncash transaction disclosure requirement in Statement No. 9, Reporting Cash Flows of Proprietary and Nonexpendable Trust Funds and Governmental Entities That Use Proprietary Fund Accounting. The Board also tentatively agreed to replace the example in Statement 9 of “obtaining an asset by entering into a capital lease” with “obtaining a right-of-use asset by entering into a lease.” Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided not to propose that the due process document refer to the related party disclosures in Statement No. 62, Codification of Accounting and Financial Reporting Guidance Contained in pre-November 30, 1989 FASB and AICPA Pronouncements.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing other potential disclosure requirements. The Board tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for disclosure of the discount rate(s) used in measuring lease liabilities. The Board also tentatively decided to propose an amendment to Statement 62 to exempt lease liabilities from imputed interest guidance. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose the fair value of the lease liability, the amount of initial direct costs capitalized as part of lease assets during the reporting period, and information about arrangements that upon transition no longer meet the definition of a lease. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose the amount of interest expense related to leases or a requirement for lessees to disclose together all lease-related expenses. In addition, the Board tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose cash paid for principal and interest on leases.

The Board tentatively agreed to propose a requirement for disclosure of payments made in excess of contractual requirements, such as residual value guarantees or penalties. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose the actual lease terms for significant leases and the weighted-average lease term of all leases, as well as the categorization of renewal options by likelihood.

The Board tentatively agreed to propose that lessee disclosure requirements not include information about below-market leases. The Board tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose information about a government’s decision-making. Furthermore, the Board tentatively agreed to propose an amendment to Statement 62 to exempt disclosure of the underlying asset as collateral. The Board also tentatively agreed to propose that lessee disclosure requirements include the components of a net impairment loss (that is, gross impairment loss and adjustment to the lease liability).

The Board continued deliberations by discussing short-term lease disclosures for lessees. The Board tentatively decided that the existing disclosure requirements for accounting policies are sufficient to cover disclosure of accounting treatment for short-term leases and that no additional guidance is necessary in the due process document. The Board also tentatively agreed to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose the amount of expense and expenditure recognized for the period related to short-term leases. The Board also tentatively decided not to propose a requirement for lessees to disclose commitments under short-term leases or qualitative information about circumstances when the next period’s short-term lease expense is expected to be significantly different than the current period’s expense.

Minutes of Meetings, March 3-5, 2014

The Board met in a joint session with the Federal Accounting Standards Advisory Board (FASAB). The Board and FASAB began by discussing the foundation of a new accounting model for lessors. The Board tentatively decided that a new accounting model for lessors should be considered and that symmetry between the lessee and lessor accounting models should be a key factor in development of the lessor model.

The Board and FASAB then discussed the tentative decisions the Board has made to date. No further tentative decisions were made by the Board.

Minutes of Meetings, February 13, 2014

The Board discussed topics related to impairment of a lease asset. The Board tentatively decided to propose that in circumstances in which an asset underlying a lease is damaged and requires restoration or replacement, the time period during which the underlying asset is not usable generally is the relevant factor in assessing whether the impairment test has been met. This amended the Board’s previous tentative decision that a lessor’s responsibility to repair or replace an impaired underlying asset may indicate that impairment of the lease asset (right to use) will be temporary.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing impairment indicators. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the following be included in the text of a proposed Leases standard:

a) Impairment indicators present with respect to the underlying asset may result in a change in the manner or duration of use of the lease asset
b) A change in the manner or duration of use of the lease asset may indicate impairment of that asset.

The Board then discussed whether a lessor’s responsibility to restore or replace the underlying asset may indicate that the magnitude of the decline in service utility of the lease asset is not significant. The Board tentatively decided not to include that statement in a potential Leases standard.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing how to measure and recognize the impairment of a lease asset. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the lease asset should be adjusted first by the same amount as any change in the related lease liability. If the carrying value of the lease asset is reduced to zero, any further adjustments should be recognized in the flows statement. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that an impaired lease asset first be adjusted by any change in the corresponding lease liability, with any remaining adjustment recognized as the impairment loss.

The Board continued its discussions by reviewing examples of different impairment scenarios presented by the project staff. The Board provided suggestions to staff for changes to the examples if they are to be included in a due process document or future implementation guidance.

Minutes of Meetings, January 27-29, 2014

The Board began deliberations by discussing a possible exception to the overall lease accounting model for noncore assets, which could be defined as assets that are not essential to a government’s operations. The Board tentatively decided to propose that there not be an exception made to the overall leases model for leases of noncore assets.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing topics on lease-related expenses. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the existing guidance related to the accounting treatment for operating leases with scheduled rent increases be superseded. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that lease payments for short-term leases that have a rent holiday or rent reduction provisions be recognized as expenses based on the terms of the contract. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that lease payments not included in the liability measurement be recognized as expense in the accrual accounting-based flows statement in the period in which the obligation for those payments is incurred.

The Board then discussed recognition in governmental funds. The Board tentatively decided to propose conforming edits to the existing guidance on accounting for leases in governmental funds. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that the general guidance for recognition of liabilities in governmental funds adequately addresses short-term leases, and only limited amendments to existing provisions are needed.

The Board then discussed issues relating to the lease asset. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the right-of-use asset in a lease is an intangible asset that should be accounted for in accordance with existing authoritative guidance for capital assets. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that the relationship between the underlying asset and the lease asset could mean that the lease asset is impaired if indicators of impairment are present with respect to the underlying asset. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that a lessor’s responsibility to repair or replace an impaired underlying asset may indicate that an impairment of the lease asset (right to use) will be temporary. The Board discussed how a lessee would measure an impairment of the lease asset and requested that the staff develop example calculations.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing guidance on presentation of lease assets and liabilities. The Board tentatively decided to propose that existing guidance on presentation of capital assets would apply to the lease asset. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that existing guidance on presentation of general long-term liabilities apply to the lease liability and that it be referred to as a long-term liability in a proposed Statement. Additionally, the Board tentatively decided to propose that specific guidance on the presentation of lease activities in the statement of cash flows be provided through implementation guidance rather than in the proposed Leases standard as existing standards related to the statement of cash flows are sufficient.

Minutes of Meetings, December 10-12, 2013

The Board continued its discussion on the measurement of lease liabilities by a lessee and the types of payments that should be included. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the following types of lease payments be included in the measurement of the initial lease liability:

The Board then discussed several alternatives with respect to the determination of the discount rate. The Board tentatively decided to propose that lease liability payments be discounted using the rate the lessor charges the lessee. However, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate should be used. The Board tentatively decided not to propose an exception to use a risk-free interest rate in certain situations. The Board also continued its discussion of the initial measurement of lease assets and tentatively decided to propose that the first component of the lease asset be the initial measurement of the lease liability.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing subsequent measurement of the lease asset and lease liability by a lessee during the term of the lease. The Board tentatively decided to propose that a lessee remeasure a lease liability by calculating the amortization of the discount on the lease liability and reducing the lease liability by the actual lease payment amount less the amortization of the discount. The Board tentatively decided to propose that lease assets be amortized using a systematic and rational basis. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that lease assets be amortized over the shorter of the useful life of the underlying asset or the lease term. However, the Board also tentatively decided to propose that the lessee amortize the right-of-use asset as if the lessee owns the underlying asset, using the lessee’s depreciation policy, if the lease transfers ownership or if by assessing qualitative factors, it is probable that a purchase option will be exercised. In those situations, if the underlying asset is a non-depreciable asset such as land, the lessee should not amortize the right-of-use asset. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided that the proposed guidance on leases that transfer ownership be included in the text of a standard.

The Board then discussed classification in the accrual-basis flows statement and the Board tentatively decided to propose that the lessee report the amortization of the lease asset as amortization expense and the amortization of the discount on the lease liability as interest expense.

The Board then discussed the reassessment of lease liabilities for lessees. The Board tentatively decided to propose that there be a reassessment of a lease liability when there is a change in the likelihood (probable to not probable or vice versa) of a purchase option being exercised based on an assessment of qualitative factors. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that, based on an assessment of qualitative factors, there be a reassessment of the residual value guarantee component of a lease liability when there is either a change in the amounts expected to be payable or when there is a change in the likelihood (probable to not probable or vice versa) that a payment will be required. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that there be a reassessment of a lease liability when the result of a change in an index or a rate used to determine lease payments during the reporting period may be significant.

The Board tentatively decided to propose that a reassessment of the discount rate be required in any of the following situations:

The Board also tentatively decided to propose that in the event of a reassessment the Board’s tentative decision regarding the initial selection of a discount rate also be the approach for selection of a discount rate.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing the recalculation of the lease liability and asset. The Board tentatively decided to propose that adjustments arising from remeasurements of lease liabilities also adjust the right-of-use asset. The exception is adjustments due to a change in the rate upon which a variable lease payment is based, which should be recognized as revenue or expense in the current period.

The Board then discussed whether a lease asset should be subject to existing guidance on impairment. The Board requested to defer a tentative decision on this question until it discusses classification of the lease asset. The Board then considered a situation in which a lease asset also meets the proposed definition of an investment. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the asset be measured in accordance with guidance for investments rather than leases.

The Board then continued discussions on short-term leases. The Board tentatively decided to propose that a short-term exception be an accounting requirement, rather than a policy election, for all leases that qualify. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that lessees not be required to recognize assets or liabilities associated with the right to use the underlying asset for short-term leases. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that lease payments for short-term leases be recognized as expenses/expenditures based on the terms of the contract.

The Board also discussed cancellable leases and tentatively decided to propose that cancellable periods (those periods for which a lessee and lessor each have the right to cancel the lease) be excluded from the lease term. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that the maximum possible term for a cancellable lease be defined as any noncancellable period, including any notice periods.

The Board then discussed whether contracts with multiple components (lease and nonlease, or multiple leases) should be bifurcated for accounting purposes and, if so, how the consideration should be allocated to the different components. The Board tentatively decided to propose that governments separate contracts into lease and nonlease components, subject to a practicality exception related to measurement. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that governments separate lease contracts involving multiple assets into multiple lease components only if there are different lease terms, subject to a practicality exception related to measurement.

For allocation of consideration between multiple components, the Board tentatively decided to propose that lessees first use prices in the contract for individual components, if available, if those prices are reasonable based on other observable stand-alone prices. If individual prices are not included in the contract, or the prices are not reasonable, the Board also tentatively decided to propose that lessees allocate consideration based on relative observable stand-alone prices, if those prices are available for all components of the contract. If observable stand-alone prices are not available for all components, the Board tentatively decided to propose that lessees (1) allocate the stand-alone price to any components for which there are such prices and then (2) consider any remaining components to be a single unit of account and assign the remaining consideration to that unit.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing how to account for a contract if components are not separated and the idea of providing guidance for concurrent contracts. The Board tentatively decided to propose that guidance be provided when multiple lease components are considered one unit for accounting purposes. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that accounting for multiple lease components that are considered as one unit for accounting purposes be based on the primary component. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that guidance be provided for treating separate contracts that were signed concurrently. The Board will consider issues associated with concurrently signed contracts at a later meeting.

Minutes of Meetings, October 29-31, 2013

The Board discussed lessee recognition and measurement, including the foundation for recognition and measurement, and lessee recognition of assets and liabilities. The Board also began discussions on the lessee initial measurement of liabilities. The Board tentatively agreed that the major criticisms of current lease accounting, opportunities for structuring around a bright-line classification test and omission of a perceived liability, are items that the Leases project should attempt to address. The Board also recognized that the proposed accounting model for leases may have differences from the private sector as a result of factors found in the state and local government environment. The Board tentatively decided that the model should attempt to measure resources available to provide services, and obligations to sacrifice such resources, with consideration given to the characterization of expenses. The Board also discussed whether leases are executory contracts but did not reach a tentative decision. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the notion of leases as financings be the foundation for the governmental leasing model.

The Board continued deliberations by discussing the recognition of assets and liabilities for lessees. The Board tentatively agreed to propose that the right to use the underlying asset be recognized as an asset by the lessee and that the obligation to make lease payments be recognized as a liability by the lessee. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that the obligation to return the underlying asset at the end of the lease not be recognized as a liability by the lessees; it also should not be recognized as a deferred inflow of resources or an outflow of resources. The Board then discussed other rights and obligations that may arise from a lease. The Board tentatively agreed to propose that other rights be considered part of the overall lease asset and that other obligations be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.

The Board then discussed potential exceptions to the overall lease model. The Board tentatively decided to propose that exceptions be made for short-term leases, under which the lessee government is not required to recognize assets or liabilities. The Board tentatively decided to propose that a short-term lease be defined as a lease that, at the beginning of the lease, has a maximum possible term under the contract, including any options to extend, of 12 months or less. The Board tentatively agreed to propose that the presence of a purchase option not affect the definition of a short-term lease. However, the Board also tentatively decided to propose that leases that transfer ownership not qualify for the short-term lease exception, even if those leases meet the other criteria. Furthermore, the Board tentatively decided to propose that it not be necessary to make an exception for leases that transfer ownership of underlying assets.

The Board then discussed the overall approach to the measurement of lease assets and liabilities for lessees. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the general approach to measuring lease assets and liabilities be to measure the liabilities first and base the assets on that amount. The Board also tentatively decided to propose that the general measurement approach for a lease liability be based on the present value of future payments.

The Board discussed the lessee measurement of lease liabilities and the types of payments that should be included. The Board tentatively decided to propose that the following types of lease payments be included in the measurement of the initial lease liability:

The Board tentatively decided to propose that lease payments that depend on a lessee’s performance or usage of an underlying asset not be a component of the initial lease liability. The Board also discussed residual value guarantees as a potential component of the lease liability as well, and requested additional staff research before making a tentative decision.

Minutes of Meetings, September 17-19, 2013

The Board discussed issues associated with lease classifications and lease terms that drive the accounting treatment of leases. After discussing characteristics of various types of leases, the Board considered alternate methods to classify leases for accounting purposes. The Board tentatively agreed that while there might be inherent differences in leases, a single accounting model could be developed in the interest of not creating unnecessary complexity, with potential exceptions for certain circumstances.

The Board then discussed elements relevant to the duration of a lease, including the definition of a lease term, how to account for fiscal funding clauses, and the reassessment of a lease’s term. The Board tentatively decided that the lease term should start with the noncancellable period. The Board also tentatively decided that the lease term should include the periods covered by renewal options (or exclude periods covered by termination options) that are probable of being exercised based on an assessment of qualitative factors. The Board tentatively agreed to include in the noncancellable period of the lease term periods covered by fiscal funding and cancellation clauses with a remote possibility of cancellation. Leases that contain a fiscal funding or cancellation clause with a more than remote possibility of cancellation should be treated as having a termination option. The Board also tentatively agreed the lease term should be reevaluated when there is a change in relevant factors that would result in a change in judgment as to the lessee’s likelihood to exercise or terminate the lease, or when the lessee actually exercises or terminates the lease opposite of what was previously expected. The Board tentatively decided the relevant factors used in the initial assessment also should be the factors that trigger a reassessment.

Minutes of Meetings, August 6-8, 2013

The Board began deliberations for the leases project by reviewing the history of leases and current literature, the tentative scope of the project, the definition of a lease, and related scope issues. The Board tentatively agreed with the timeline and scope of the project. The Board then discussed minor revisions to the definition of a lease. The Board tentatively decided to replace “agreement” with “contract,” and “capital assets (land and/or depreciable assets)” with “an asset (the underlying asset).” The Board also tentatively decided to add the phrase “in an exchange or exchange-like transaction” to the proposed definition of a lease.

The Board then discussed the inclusions and exclusions to the scope of lease guidance. The Board tentatively decided to propose including contracts not identified as leases but that meet the definition of a lease. The Board tentatively decided to not provide in the proposal an example of such a contract, and remove the example currently provided. The Board tentatively decided to propose continuing to exclude the following from the scope of the guidance: agreements that are contracts for services that do not transfer the right to use capital assets from one contracting party to the other; leases to explore for or use of minerals, oil, natural gas, and similar nonregenerative resources; licensing agreements for such items as motion picture films, video recordings, plays, manuscripts, patents, and copyrights; and agreements that meet the definition of a service concession arrangement. In addition, the Board tentatively decided to propose that biological assets, including timber, be excluded from the scope of the lease guidance, while intangible assets other than licensing agreements would continue to be included in the scope of lease guidance.

Minutes of Meetings, June 25-27, 2013

The FASB project staff on leases provided the Board with background information on the provisions of the recently released revised Exposure Draft, Leases. The session was educational in nature. No deliberations were conducted and no decisions were reached.

LEASE ACCOUNTING—TENTATIVE BOARD DECISIONS TO DATE

The Board tentatively agreed to propose that:




GASB: On the Horizon.

Fair Value Measurement and Application

The idea of fair value – which involves the measurement of certain assets and liabilities, primarily investments – has a long history in governmental accounting. The Board approved a Preliminary Views,Fair Value Measurement and Application, laying out its initial thinking on this topic, in June 2013. In it, the Board proposed new standards regarding how fair value should be measured, to which assets and liabilities those fair value measurements should be applied, and what information about fair values should be disclosed in the notes to the financial statements. A new Exposure Draft of proposed standards that incorporates feedback on the Preliminary Views from stakeholders will be released this week.

A new Exposure Draft of proposed standards that incorporates feedback from stakeholders will be released this week

Under the Board’s forthcoming proposed guidance, fair value would be defined as the price that would be received from the sale of an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. In the Board’s view, fair value is a market-based measurement and represents an exitprice (what a government would get to sell an asset), as opposed to an entry price (what a government would pay to purchase an asset), which is often different.

The proposal would further expand the requirement that most investments are reported at their fair value by applying this measurement attribute to various types of alternative investments. It defines an investment as “a security or other asset that a government holds primarily for the purpose of income or profit, and its present service capacity is based solely on its ability to generate cash or to be sold to generate cash.”

If guidance ultimately results from the project, it would improve comparability and consistency of governments’ measures of fair value. Financial statement users would be better informed about how governments ascertained fair value. It would also bring clarity to certain issues important to pinpointing fair value that may be uncertain at present.

More information on the Fair Value Measurement and Application project

Fiduciary Responsibilities

One of the reasons a government may have to include a separate legal entity or a particular activity in its financial statements is that the government has a fiduciary responsibility for the entity or activity. In other words, the government acts in a trustee or agent capacity for the resources associated with the entity or activity.

The Board added a project on Fiduciary Responsibilities to the current technical agenda in August 2013 after pre-agenda research activities were conducted following the Governmental Accounting Standards Advisory Council identifying the issues as a key priority. The Board is currently deliberating the issues in this project and first will expose its preliminary views for public comment in late 2014.

The project’s central objective is to consider whether to develop additional guidance on how to decide if a government should report fiduciary activities

Currently, the concept of what constitutes fiduciary responsibility is not well defined in governmental accounting standards. GASB research and technical inquiries from constituents have indicated inconsistency in the current reporting of various types of fiduciary activities. Research also has indicated a general inconsistency in the reporting of fiduciary activities between governments that perform only business-type activities (such as colleges, utilities, and hospitals) and general purpose governments (such as states and cities).

The project’s central objective is to consider whether to develop additional guidance on how to decide if a government should report fiduciary activities in its general purpose external financial reports. It also will address such issues as confusion about the proper uses of private-purpose trust funds and agency funds, and whether a stand-alone business-type activity engaging in fiduciary activities should present fiduciary fund financial statements.

More information on the Fiduciary Responsibilities project




GASB Stakeholder Focus: The Request to Delay Statement 68.

Governments should continue gearing up to implement the GASB’s recent pension standards as planned in light of a recent Board decision not to delay the implementation date. The decision came after extensive Board discussion, research, and outreach in response to a request by certain stakeholders to delay implementation.

The Stakeholder Request

Two organizations of GASB stakeholders—one representing financial statement preparers and the other persons involved in various aspects of public employee pensions—asked the GASB at the end of February and in early March to delay the implementation of the revised pension standards, Statement No. 68, Accounting and Financial Reporting for Pensions. Governments are required to implement Statement 68 for fiscal years beginning July 1, 2014, and later.

One of the more difficult but essential tasks of the Board is to weigh the competing needs of its stakeholders

The organizations’ request for delay was based primarily on a concern that audit procedures related to the pension standards were unsettled and, consequently, the financial reports of governments implementing Statement 68 might not receive a “clean” audit opinion.

Other individual stakeholders and stakeholder organizations wrote to the GASB asking that the implementation of Statement 68 not be delayed. These groups and individuals cited the importance of the information that would result from implementation of the Statement, and the fact that many governments and their pension plans are already working toward implementation, as reasons for allowing Statement 68 to be implemented as originally required.

The GASB’s Response

In light of the fact that the effective date of Statement 68 was just four months away at that time, the GASB moved quickly to evaluate the request. Shortly after the request was received, the Board discussed it with the GASAC members at their scheduled meeting on March 11 and 12. The GASAC’s 30 members are broadly representative of the GASB’s stakeholders and include all of the major organizations representing preparers, auditors, and users of financial statements.

the Board follows the same set of open and objective due process procedures for all subjects

Annual financial reports of various types of governments in all 50 states were examined to assess how many governments would be affected by the issue raised by the groups seeking a delay. The experiences of other standards setters that had previously delayed implementation of a pronouncement were reviewed and the repercussions of those actions considered. The GASB staff also followed up with the organizations and individuals mentioned above, consulted with other groups representing GASB stakeholders, and conducted interviews with financial statement users and auditors. The purpose of the latter interviews was to obtain insight into the audit procedures that might be applied as governments implement Statement 68 and auditors’ experience in performing those procedures for the first time with their clients.

The user interviews were intended to inform the Board’s understanding of how municipal bond analysts, taxpayer associations, and other users would potentially view a government receiving a modified audit opinion in these circumstances and what ramifications, if any, there would be. Users generally preferred that Statement 68 not be delayed.

The Board’s Decision

The Board considered all of the information and feedback that had been assembled and deliberated the request for a delay during its open public teleconference meeting on March 24. After a lengthy discussion, the Board unanimously concluded that the implementation of Statement 68 should not be delayed.

Although many factors contributed to the Board’s decision, four particular factors were most influential:

  • Financial statement users consider the information that will result from implementation of Statement 68 to be highly important.
  • Pension plans are already well into the process of implementing related standards for their own separately issued financial reports. Consequently, if the implementation of Statement 68 were postponed, some governments would incur the added cost of engaging an actuary to provide information under the old pension standards in addition to the information already obtained under the new standards.
  • Delaying the new standards may not address the concern about a modified audit opinion.
  • Concerns about the effort required to implement Statement 68 are real and significant, particularly with regard to governments in some cost-sharing multiple-employer pension plans. However, the Board was fully aware of these issues when it originally considered the costs and benefits associated with establishing the implementation date. No new evidence has been brought forth to date that would result in the reconsideration of this issue.

Conclusion

Many accounting and financial reporting issues the Board considers generate a wide range of stakeholder views, usually representing multiple sides of the issues. One of the more difficult but essential tasks of the Board is to weigh the competing needs of its stakeholders. The Board seeks to establish standards that lead to users receiving the information they need to make decisions and assess government accountability, while simultaneously minimizing the impact on the governments that will be responsible for providing that information.

Few accounting and financial reporting issues the Board considers resonate with the general public the way that pensions do. Nevertheless, the Board follows the same set of open and objective due process procedures for all subjects, whether they touch upon controversial areas of public policy or deal with narrow technical issues of accounting practice.




CDFI Fund Opens Application Period for FY 2014 CDFI Bond Guarantee Program.

Up to $750 Million in Bond Guarantee Authority AvailableThe U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Community Development Financial Institutions Fund (CDFI Fund) today opened the fiscal year (FY) 2014 application period for the CDFI Bond Guarantee Program. Application materials are available on the CDFI Fund’s website in anticipation of the Notice of Guarantee Authority (NOGA) being published in the Federal Register on May 13, 2014. The NOGA makes up to $750 million in bond guarantee authority available to eligible Community Development Financial Institutions (CDFIs) in FY 2014.

Through the CDFI Bond Guarantee Program, selected certified CDFIs or their designees will issue bonds that are guaranteed by the Federal government and use the bond proceeds to extend capital within the broader CDFI industry for community development financing and for long-term community investments. The Secretary of the Treasury may guarantee bond issues having a minimum size of $100 million each, up to an aggregate total of $750 million. Multiple CDFIs may pool together in a single $100 million bond issuance provided that each eligible CDFI participates at a minimum of $10 million.

The CDFI Bond Guarantee Program supports CDFIs that make investments for eligible community or economic development purposes. Authorized uses of the loans financed through bond proceeds may include a variety of financial activities, such as supporting commercial facilities that promote revitalization, community stability, and job creation/retention; housing that is principally affordable to low-income people; businesses that provide jobs for low-income people or are owned by low-income people; and community or economic development in low-income and underserved rural areas.

Deadlines

Please reference the NOGA and application instructions for detailed information regarding the following application deadlines for consideration for FY 2014 bond guarantee authority.

  • Qualified Issuer Applications must be submitted through myCDFIFund by 11:59 p.m. EDT on June 23, 2014.
  • Guarantee Applications must be submitted through myCDFIFund by 11:59 p.m. EDT on June 30, 2014.
  • The last day the CDFI Fund will accept questions regarding the FY 2014 application for the CDFI Bond Guarantee Program is Wednesday, June 18, 2014. All questions must be submitted electronically to the program office:[email protected].

Qualified Issuer Applications and Guarantee Applications received in FY 2013 and that were neither withdrawn nor declined in FY 2013 will be considered under FY 2014 authority.

Application Materials

In addition to being available through myCDFIFund, the FY 2014 NOGA and application materials are available on the CDFI Fund’s website at www.cdfifund.gov/bond.

Application Workshops

The CDFI Fund will conduct three application workshops (two days per workshop, 9 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.) for potential applicants regarding the FY 2014 Qualified Issuer and Guarantee Application requirements. Specifically, the workshops will include an in-depth discussion of the financial structure of the program, including:

  • Roles of the Qualified Issuer, Program Administrator, and Servicer;
  • Capital Distribution Plan requirements;
  • Eligible CDFI and Secondary Loan Requirements;
  • Costs of the CDFI Bond Guarantee Program;
  • Review processes for the Qualified Issuer and Guarantee Applications;
  • Reporting; and
  • Compliance-related activities.

Attendees will have the opportunity to ask CDFI Fund staff questions and receive clarification about the topics discussed during each module.

The two-day application workshops will be held:

  • June 2-3, 2014 in Detroit, MI, at the Federal Reserve Bank of Chicago – Detroit Branch;
  • June 10-11, 2014 in Washington, DC, at the U.S. Treasury Department; and
  • June 17-18, 2014 in San Francisco, CA, at the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco.

Registration is required and opens on May 12, 2014. The registration link will be posted on the CDFI Fund’s website at www.cdfifund.gov/bond. There is no registration fee; however, due to limited space, registration will be honored on a first come, first served basis.

For interested parties unable to attend an in-person application workshop, the presentation materials will be posted on the CDFI Fund’s website atwww.cdfifund.gov/bond.

Questions

Inquiries regarding legal documents related to the CDFI Bond Guarantee Program should be directed to the CDFI Fund’s Office of Legal Counsel by email at [email protected].

For more information about the CDFI Bond Guarantee Program, please visit www.cdfifund.gov/bond, or call the CDFI Fund’s Help Desk at (202) 653-0421.




California Public Debt Issuance Monthly Data CDIAC | May 16, 2014

Read the Report.




Foley: Department Of Energy Announces New Loan Guarantee Program For Renewable Energy And Energy Efficiency Projects.

The Department of Energy’s Loan Program Office (the “DOE”) announced on April 16, 2014, a new loan guarantee program for up to $4 billion under Section 1703 of Title XVII of the Energy Policy Act. The announcement coincides with the DOE’s release of a Draft Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency Project Solicitation (the “Draft Solicitation”) for innovative renewable energy and efficient energy projects in the U.S. that reduce, avoid, or sequester greenhouse gases. The aim of the Draft Solicitation is to foster renewable energy and energy efficiency technologies that are “catalytic, replicable, and market ready.”

The Draft Solicitation identifies five (5) technology areas of interest to the DOE.

Continue Reading.

Last Updated: May 15 2014

Article by Jason W. Allen and Justus J. Britt

Foley & Lardner




S&P: Disclose Bank Loans or Risk Rating.

Standard & Poor’s, citing concern over hidden debt exposure in the municipal bond market, sent letters this month warning issuers they could lose their ratings if they don’t disclose their direct loans.

S&P told issuers that it now requires notification and documentation of any private debt they owe, including bank loan financings, whether or not that debt is rated by S&P.

“We are concerned about the undisclosed terms in the loans, or simply the magnitude of these loans,” Steve Murphy, the head of public finance at S&P, said in an interview.

The letters were sent out on May 6 to all of the roughly 24,000 issuers S&P rates, Murphy said. Direct loans’ impact on issuers’ credit quality has been on S&P’s radar awhile. These letters “fall in line with S&P’s commentary regarding issuers’ direct loans,” a spokesman for S&P said in an interview.

S&P’s primary concern is bank loans, whether called direct purchases or direct loans, a spokesman for S&P wrote in an email. Broadly, the term direct loans refers to alternative financings, meaning non-traditional placement in the public market.

Direct loans occur when issuers choose to raise capital by selling municipal securities to a select number of investors instead of making the bonds available to the public. Direct loans have increased to offset a decline in variable-rate demand bond issuance in recent years, S&P wrote in a report released on March 26.

Direct loans are attractive because they are less costly to issue than VRDOs, Matt Fabian, managing director at Municipal Market Advisors, said in an interview..

“There is no bond counsel, there is no legal fee, there is no paying a remarketing fee, which VROS pay,” he said. “You don’t have to disclose the purchase. Any bond going to one investor has very limited disclose requirements.”

VRDO balances have fallen by about half in five years, MMA wrote in an April 14 report.

The amount of direct loans outstanding is difficult to determine because banks are not obligated to report these purchases. Murphy said that bank loans do not have to be disclosed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or with any other regulator.

“There is no way of knowing the amount [of direct loans] occurring in aggregate,” Murphy said. “That’s part of the issue we have with this.”

Fabian said that for official private placement there is very limited disclosure, and that for bank’s direct purchases there is none.

“Direct loans would be disclosed in financials, but muni financials lag by nine months or so,” he said. “You have a nine month window and if they are done earlier in the fiscal year, somewhat longer.”

MMA cited industry estimates that direct purchases totaled $40 billion to $50 billion in 2013, and that projections show similar volume in 2014. MMA said those numbers understate the full amount of direct purchase activity, which it estimated at as much as $55 billion.

One of the major risks of direct purchases is that they reduce public municipal supply available at a time when the buy-side is starved for more issuance. Supply this year has remained low, totaling only $89.34 billion as of April 30 this year compared to $122.72 billion for the same period in 2013, according to data provided by Ipreo and The Bond Buyer.

“As DPs replace a greater amount of new money projects —- that, in the current market, might otherwise go into fixed rate bonds — they will incrementally reduce the income available to traditional lenders,” MMA wrote in the report.

A second major risk is that there could be terms in a direct loan covenant that harm investors holding public bonds released by the same issuer.

“[These direct loans] could have credit annexes and credit terms that could force the loan to be accelerated,” Fabian said. “They could have a covenant like a cash covenant or a credit covenant, where if the issuer were to violate it, the covenant could be immediately payable. If you are a bond holder of an issuer that has a direct loan, if that direct loan is forced to accelerate it could eat up all the issuers’ cash. It could push them into default or restructuring.”

Direct loans undermine investors’ confidence in the disclosed materials available and makes them more gun-shy, because weaker issuers may be closer to their debt limit than investors believe, Fabian said.

S&P described the disclosure requirements related to direct loans as “eccentric at best”. Murphy said that if issuers do not comply with sending S&P the documents they will be downgraded.

“We have a very specific sequence we follow in terms of credit ratings,” he said. “We contract the obligor to request documents not just for bank loans, but for any additional information requested when performing surveillance. If we do not receive anything in 15 days, a second request is sent and 10 days after that request is received, if we are not sent any documentation a third request is sent out and the issuer is placed on credit watch for an additional 15 days.”

BY HILLARY FLYNN

MAY 15, 2014 4:43pm ET




S&P 2014 Review of U.S. Municipal Water and Sewer Ratings: How They Correlate with Key Economic and Financial Ratios.

12-May-2014

In our annual update of the key statistics underlying our assessments of debt issues in the U.S. municipal water and sewer sector, we’re focusing on the medians and means of several widely used variables. As in previous reports, we present data for economic and financial measures to offer insight into correlations that exist between these measures and the ratings we’ve assigned to issuers in this sector.

When assigning a bond rating, Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services takes into account a variety of factors, both qualitative and quantitative. We believe a thorough examination of the quantitative information sheds light on the strengths and weaknesses of individual issuers relative to others. By providing this information, we hope to increase transparency and continue our open and accurate discussions about credit quality among all participants in the municipal water and sewer bond sector.

Overview

  • U.S. municipal water and sewer retail system bond ratings remain mostly in the ‘AA’ and ‘A’ category.
  • While our ratings strongly correlate with key measures of an issuer’s debt, liability, and service area population, they also factor in important qualitative factors.
  • Given this sector’s stability, we have not seen, and do not foresee, significant deviations in the ratings and ratios.

It is important to remember that the ratios and other measures we provide here are not the sole determinants of our rating assignments, nor can they serve as rating benchmarks because they do not account for the issuer’s complete financial, operating environment, or sector risk. Moreover, these means and medians reflect recent historical information, while we intend our credit ratings to be forward-looking. Also, because our long-term ratings are designed to hold up through business cycles, a particular issuer’s ratios may appear to be inconsistent with its assigned debt rating at a particular point within a cycle. We also exercise some degree of caution when making national comparisons of revenue bond issuers because the operating environments may differ from state to state. Issuers often face differences in regulations that determine their ability to raise rates and issue debt, what their required service provisions may be, and the regulatory environment in which they operate. However, these differences tend to be minor.

Rating Distributions Continue To Cluster In The ‘AA’ And ‘A’ Categories

Given the stability of the municipal water and sewer sector, a quick look at the overall rating distributions for municipal water and sewer bonds reveals two immediate conclusions: (1) the ratings are almost exclusively investment-grade, with only 0.3% of all bonds rated below ‘BBB-‘, and (2) nearly half of the ratings are now in the ‘AA’ category. In this year’s report, we focus on exclusively, or predominantly, retail systems and exclude ratings on larger wholesale systems. However, we do include data for the systems that determine a wholesaler rating. For example, we have excluded the ratings on certain debt issued by Trinity River Authority, Texas, but have added the data related to its principal wholesale customers. This explains some of the differences in ratings counts from last year’s report.

Of our total rated universe of more than 1,500 issuers, just over 90% fall in either the ‘AA’ or ‘A’ category. Approximately 47% of the ratings are in the ‘AA’ category, with 45% in the ‘A’ category. Currently, about 6% of the ratings in this report are ‘AAA’, with only 2% rated ‘BBB+’ or lower (see chart 1). While ratings cluster around the ‘AA’ and ‘A’ categories, with a median rating of ‘A+’, a self-selection bias admittedly affects the distributions. Many water and sewer systems of potentially poorer self-assessed credit quality may choose not to apply for a public Standard & Poor’s rating, or they may access capital though state revolving funds. The absence of those potentially lower-rated issuers may artificially elevate the rating distribution.

Chart 1  |  Download Chart Data

image

When we dive deeper into the rating distributions according to the systems’ service area population, some differences begin to emerge. As in previous years, for systems with populations of less than 20,000, the ratings are predominantly in the ‘A’ category (72%). The ‘BBB’ category is now home to less than 5% of systems with service areas with populations under 20,000, while 24% are rated ‘AA’ and less than 1% are ‘AAA’ (see chart 2).

Chart 2  |  Download Chart Data

image

For systems with populations between 20,000 and 150,000, the spread between those in the ‘AA’ category (57%) and those in the ‘A’ category (39%) has widened in recent years. Approximately 5% of those in this population range are rated ‘AAA’, while less than 1% are ‘BBB+’ or lower (see chart 3).

As population levels increase, so does the percentage of higher-rated issuers. For systems with a service area population ranging between 150,000 and 500,000, the majority of the ratings are in the ‘AA’ category (64%), while only about one-third are ‘A+’ or lower. In this range, about 25% are rated ‘AAA’ (see chart 4). Similarly, for very large systems with populations above 500,000, about 20% are ‘AAA’, 60% are ‘AA’, and about 20% are rated ‘A+’ or lower (see chart 5).

Chart 3  |  Download Chart Data

image

Chart 4  |  Download Chart Data

image

Chart 5  |  Download Chart Data

image

Summary Of Key Economic, Financial, And Debt Ratios

The ratios we provide below reflect three of the four main areas Standard & Poor’s evaluates when rating issuers: economic, financial, and debt factors. Measures for the fourth factor, administration and management, are generally more qualitative. The ratios include:

Table 1  |  Download Table

U.S. Water And Sewer Credit Ratios: Medians And Means By Rating Category
AAA AA A BBB or lower
Median Mean Median Mean Median Mean Median Mean
Population 237,492 575,254 74,051 227,882 18,919 64,802 12,500 476,784
Median household effective buying income as % of U.S. 120 128 103 108 85 90 83 92
Unemployment rate (%) 6.1 6.3 7.1 7.4 7.5 8.1 7.8 8.8
Concentration (%) 6.4 10.2 8.7 12.6 10.3 15.6 8.9 13.5
Water rate ($) 30.88 31.55 32.84 35.63 40.84 42.68 34.95 39.70
Sewer rate ($) 36.26 39.91 38.81 41.38 40.45 44.02 43.21 44.40
Total operating revenues* ($) 65,116 125,725 15,835 41,096 4,245 12,311 3,472 52,513
Days’ cash* 472 629 417 556 283 402 144 261
Senior-lien debt service coverage* (x) 3.30 3.97 2.40 3.65 1.73 2.45 1.35 1.50
All-in debt service coverage* (x) 2.35 2.96 1.87 2.29 1.43 1.66 0.97 1.19
*Average of last three years.

Table 2  |  Download Table

U.S. Water And Sewer Credit Ratios: Medians And Means By Population
Pop Above 500,000 Pop 150,000 to 500,000 Pop 20,000 to 150,000 Pop Below 20,000
Median Mean Median Mean Median Mean Median Mean
Population 998,454 1,459,872 241,934 268,001 50,095 61,715 9,164 9,529
Median household effective buying income as % of U.S. 98 104 99 103 97 103 85 94
Unemployment rate (%) 7.6 7.9 7.3 7.6 7.2 7.8 7.2 7.5
Concentration (%) 8.0 15.4 7.5 11.5 9.0 12.2 12.1 16.7
Water rate ($) 30.12 33.66 31.2 33.1 33.6 36.0 40.36 42.27
Sewer rate ($) 42.54 44.48 41.15 42.58 37.64 40.03 40.56 44.93
Total operating revenues* ($) 174,087 243,840 49,140 58,055 13,017 16,453 2,692 3,890
Days’ cash* 281 353 404 537 375 508 349 422
Senior-lien debt service coverage* (x) 2.02 3.04 2.15 3.32 2.27 2.98 1.91 2.63
All-in debt service coverage* (x) 1.53 1.81 1.80 2.33 1.75 2.15 1.43 1.65
*Average of last three years.

Table 3  |  Download Table

U.S. Water And Sewer Credit Ratios: Medians And Means Within The ‘AA’ Category
AA+ AA AA-
Median Mean Median Mean Median Mean
Population 172,038 419,393 86,642 252,853 43,871 128,640
Median household effective buying income as % of U.S. 107 115 107 113 97 100
Unemployment rate (%) 6.5 6.9 7.3 7.4 7.2 7.6
Concentration (%) 7.8 13.9 8.0 10.9 9.6 13.4
Water rate ($) 31.85 34.98 31.95 33.94 34.30 37.30
Sewer rate ($) 38.50 42.70 37.20 38.62 40.81 43.16
Total operating revenues* ($) 32,382 75,292 18,140 45,206 11,391 23,623
Days’ cash* 443 501 431 583 397 555
Senior-lien debt service coverage* (x) 2.32 3.44 2.46 3.74 2.39 3.66
All-in debt service coverage* (x) 1.96 2.42 1.93 2.44 1.80 2.13
*Average of last three years.

The Relationships Between Our Ratings And Select Ratios

As in previous years, the data show correlations between several ratios-—including the issuer’s population, income levels, and liquidity—-and our ratings on these debt issues. This is not surprising because the economic base (i.e., the population and income levels) tends to provide the foundation for credit quality in general. What’s more, larger systems tend to enjoy the benefits of economies of scale because they can tap into a larger base to generate revenue, address system emergencies, and adapt to fluctuations in demand often more expeditiously and efficiently than smaller systems. Similar to population, a system’s total operating revenues correlate to rating level: Systems with larger budgets generally get rated higher.

Given the overwhelming majority of ratings are ‘A-‘ or higher, ratings below this level usually have a unique set of credit factors associated with them. This year, ratings at the ‘BBB’ level or lower include those on Detroit; Jefferson County, Ala.; Stockton, Calif.; New Orleans; and Atwater, Calif. Each of these issuers has experienced significant stress related to either their enterprise fund, general government operations, or both.

A direct correlation exists between our issue ratings and ratios such as median and mean population, days’ cash on hand, and coverage ratios. For several of the data points, we used the average of the previous three years for analysis. Although the sector is extremely stable and only minor deviations typically occur from year to year, using a three-year average tends to smooth any atypical year-over-year changes.

Across all rating categories, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is, for almost every data point, extremely large. For example, days’ cash levels for ‘AAA’ issuers range from less than 100 days to more than 2,000 days. Given the size differences between the smallest issuers and the exceptionally large issuers, the means may be skewed but can nevertheless provide some insight.

Income levels, unemployment rates, and population

In general, better economic indicators correlate with higher ratings. From the ‘BBB’ category to the ‘AAA’ category, median household effective buying income increases to 120% of the national average from 83%, while the median unemployment rate declines to 6.1% from 7.8%. Additionally, the median population for ‘AAA’ rated issuers is significantly higher than those in any other rating category.

Liquidity ratios

The issuers’ days’ cash on hand, a measure of liquidity, are also stronger at the higher rating levels, although median liquidity levels remain healthy, in our view, for each category. However, for smaller systems, a high days’ cash number does not always equal a nominally high amount of cash. For example, a very small system with 180 days’ cash may have a nominally low amount of cash available to address any emergencies or wet weather conditions that cause a decline in demand.

The median days’ cash level is about 144 days for ‘BBB’ category issuers and rises to 283 for those in the ‘A’ category, 417 for those in the ‘AA’ category, and 472 for ‘AAA’ issuers. When aggregating by population, the correlations are not quite as strong, with median liquidity levels of the midsize issuers greater than those of the larger issuers. Again, liquidity measures are typically strong across all rating categories despite population levels.

Coverage ratios

As with days’ cash on hand, the coverage ratios also have strong correlations with credit quality because the higher-rated issuers tended to have better debt service coverage. Mean and median coverage levels improved noticeably between each rating category. The median senior-lien coverage ratio is 1.3x for ‘BBB’ credits and rises to 3.3x for ‘AAA’ credits. However, these correlations do not exist when taking population ranges into account because issuers in the 20,000 to 150,000 range had higher coverage means and medians than larger systems. These trends are consistent with previous years.

A closer look at the ‘AA’ category

While ‘A+’ remains the median rating level, a slightly greater percentage of ratings are in the ‘AA’ category versus the ‘A’ category. Within the ‘AA’ category, a slightly higher percentage of ratings are at ‘AA-‘ (20%) than ‘AA’ (17%), with about 8% at ‘AA+’. Some of the correlations that were evident from category to category are still evident within the ‘AA’ category itself. Specifically, median population levels and unemployment rates improve with rating quality. Financial indicators, such as days’ cash and debt service coverage, do not differ significantly from ‘AA-‘ to ‘AA+’, though the liquidity ratio rises slightly (see table 3).

As Always, Numbers Don’t Tell the Whole Story

While the ratios presented here may show particular trends from category to category, or even within certain categories, they are not the sole determinants for the assignment of a rating. Management policies and practices, coupled with the environment in which the utility operates, will often lead to higher coverage or liquidity ratios. Those governance factors may be the primary reason for a higher rating, with the operating performance a result of higher-quality management. While strong financial metrics can certainly lead to higher ratings, it is also the underlying management of the system, the resources available to staff and the ability to maintain those strong financial metrics that ultimately underpins the rating assignment.

Primary Credit Analyst: James M Breeding, Dallas (1) 214-871-1407;
[email protected]
Secondary Contact: Theodore A Chapman, Dallas (1) 214-871-1401;
[email protected]



S&P General Obligation Medians for Counties Under the Revised Local GO Criteria: 1Q 2014 Update.

15-Apr-2014

We present the medians by rating category and they apply to U.S. counties. These ratios exclude municipalities and special districts such as school districts. We are publishing a separate GO municipality median report concurrently with this article. We plan to continue updating this article quarterly as we move through the one-year implementation period.

We drew the medians from 325 county reviews completed through March 12, 2014, of the approximately 1,000 total ratings in our portfolio for counties that fall under the revised GO criteria. We have committed to reviewing all issuers that fall under the new GO criteria by September 2014.

We calculate the metrics, for which we provide the medians, based on raw, or in some cases, data that we have adjusted (for more information, see the related research article below), and they are only one component of the rating analysis. The metrics play a part in the quantitative analysis in five factors: economy, budgetary flexibility, budgetary performance, liquidity, and debt and contingent liabilities. Qualitative adjustments within each factor (which the medians do not reflect) also play an important part in the analysis.

Download Table

General Obligation Medians For Counties Under The Revised Criteria
%
Rating No. MVPC ($) Proj PC EBI FB/exp GF op res TGF op res TG cash/exp TG cash/DS Net DD/rev TGF DS/exp
AAA 55 109,300 120 25 2 0 43 587 66 8
AA 194 82,827 89 33 2 1 44 744 56 6
A 72 58,061 77 20 2 0 33 375 72 7
BBB and lower 4 45,576 80 (10) (4) (3) 16 277 57 7

Median Definitions

Related Criteria And Research

Related Criteria

USPF Criteria: Local Government GO Ratings Methodology And Assumptions, Sept. 12, 2013

Related Research

S&P Public Finance Local GO Criteria: How We Adjust Data For Analytic Consistency, Sept. 12, 2013

Primary Credit Analysts: Karl Jacob, Boston (1) 617-530-8134;
[email protected]
Christopher M Krahe, Chicago (1) 312-233-7063;
[email protected]
Jeffrey J Previdi, New York (1) 212-438-1796;
[email protected]
Horacio G Aldrete-Sanchez, Dallas (1) 214-871-1426;
[email protected]



S&P General Obligation Medians for Municipalities Under the Revised Local GO Criteria: 1Q 2014 Update.

15-Apr-2014

We present the medians by rating category, and they apply to U.S. municipalities covered under the GO criteria including cities, towns, townships, boroughs, and villages. They exclude special purpose districts such as school districts. We are publishing a separate county GO median report concurrently with this article. We plan to continue updating this article quarterly as we move through the one-year implementation period.

We draw the medians from 1,245 municipality reviews completed through March 12, 2014, of the approximately 3,000 in our portfolio of total ratings for municipalities that fall under the revised GO criteria. We have committed to reviewing all issuers that fall under the new criteria by September 2014.

We calculate the metrics, for which we provide the medians, based on raw data, or in some cases, data we have adjusted (for more information, see the related research articles), and they are only one component of our analysis. The metrics play a part in the quantitative analysis in five factors: economy, budgetary flexibility, budgetary performance, liquidity, and debt and contingent liabilities. Qualitative adjustments within each factor (which the medians do not reflect) also play an important part in the rating outcome.

Download Table

General Obligation Medians For Municipalities Under The Revised Criteria
%
Rating No. MVPC ($) Proj PC EBI FB/exp GF op res TGF op res TG cash/exp TG cash/DS Net DD/rev TGF DS/exp
AAA 126 158,096 152 30 3 2 55 562 73 8
AA 774 86,775 103 29 3 1 51 532 85 9
A 285 50,247 80 21 1 0 50 439 113 11
BBB and lower 60 47,300 77 0 0 (1) 29 300 108 11

Median Definitions

Related Criteria And Research

Related Criteria

USPF Criteria: Local Government GO Ratings Methodology And Assumptions, Sept. 12, 2013

Related Research

S&P Public Finance Local GO Criteria: How We Adjust Data For Analytic Consistency, Sept. 12, 2013

Primary Credit Analysts: Karl Jacob, Boston (1) 617-530-8134;
[email protected]
Christopher M Krahe, Chicago (1) 312-233-7063;
[email protected]
Jeffrey J Previdi, New York (1) 212-438-1796;
[email protected]
Horacio G Aldrete-Sanchez, Dallas (1) 214-871-1426;
[email protected]



Anaheim Says $265 Million Bond Deal Terminated by Citigroup.

Citigroup Inc. terminated a deal to purchase $265 million of revenue bonds from Anaheim, California, after opponents sued over plans to expand the city’s convention center, a city spokeswoman said.

Citigroup was the lead underwriter on the bonds offered March 24, according to data compiled by Bloomberg. The bonds were rated AA- by Standard & Poor’s, according to a disclosure document. The deal was set to close May 14.

A local group that calls itself the Coalition of Anaheim Taxpayers for Economic Responsibility filed the suit May 12, alleging that the public financing authority wasn’t allowed to offer the debt because California lawmakers dissolved redevelopment agencies, one of which was a member of the financing authority.

“Unfortunately, the originally targeted investors were not willing to accept the litigation risk and chose not to proceed even though the city, the city attorney and bond counsel were of the opinion that such litigation would not likely succeed,” Anaheim spokeswoman Ruth Ruiz said by e-mail.

Scott Helfman, a spokesman for Citigroup, decined to comment on the termination.

The city council in March approved the funding and plans to build a 200,000-square-foot expansion of the convention center, which is less than two miles south of the city’s star attraction, Disneyland.

Proceeds from a 2 percent hotel room tax were to pay for the bonds.

Ruiz said city officials are trying to determine if they can move forward with the project.

“It is unfortunate that a few local activists, in contradiction to the overwhelming community support shown at the council meeting where the bonds were authorized, have taken legal action against this project,” she said.

By Michael B. Marois  May 16, 2014 8:14 AM PT

To contact the reporter on this story: Michael B. Marois in Sacramento at [email protected]
To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]




Phoenix Sells $300 Million Amid Pension Push: Muni Credit.

Phoenix, facing pension costs that have doubled in six years, may become the largest U.S. city to put new workers in 401(k)-style plans if voters pass a ballot measure in November.

Backers of the plan say a move last year to roll back pensions didn’t go far enough to curb retirement expenses, which swallowed $218 million, or 22 percent of Phoenix’s general-fund expenditures in the year through June 2013, up from 11 percent in 2007, budget documents indicate. Standard & Poor’s cited the costs in stripping Phoenix of its AAA rating in December.

Investors get to weigh in on the sixth-most-populous city’s fiscal wellbeing next month, when Phoenix plans to sell $297 million of debt. The state’s capital city still has time to get a handle on its pension obligations, said Todd Curtis, who manages the Aquila Group of Funds’ $271 million Aquila Tax-Free Trust of Arizona.

“Pensions are a growing concern within the credit analysis of any city in the country,” Curtis said from Phoenix. “Being an Arizona buyer, I am not too worried about Phoenix. They have a long history of taking steps to balance their budget.”

Pension Deficit

Local officials nationwide are contending with pension deficits exacerbated by the recession that ended almost five years ago. The 25 most-populous U.S. cities have more than $125 billion less than needed to meet promises to retirees, according to Morningstar Inc.

Unfunded obligations for pensions and retiree health care are crowding out spending on schools, police and libraries, Pew Charitable Trusts said in a March 2013 report. Pension costs have helped tip Detroit and the California cities of Stockton and San Bernardino into bankruptcy since 2012.

Phoenix pensions are 61 percent funded, trailing the median of 75 percent for the 25 largest cities, Morningstar said in a December report. The proportion of Phoenix’s spending going toward pensions is the group’s third-highest, trailing California’s San Jose and San Diego, according to Morningstar. Voter-approved changes in March 2013 should ease the pressure on Phoenix, the company said.

Phoenix Rising

The city of about 1.5 million has rebounded from the recession, which led to the smallest municipal workforce in 40 years and cuts to parks, recreation and cultural facilities, Pew said.

Home prices in Phoenix reached a five-year high in November, although they’re still down almost 40 percent from a 2006 peak, according to the S&P/Case-Shiller property-value index.

Phoenix balanced its budget last year as the rebounding economy boosted revenue, allowing it to restore police and fire services, pool and library hours and programs for youth and seniors. The city cut services to deal with a $277 million budget shortfall two years earlier caused by declining tax revenue, according to the city’s 2013 fiscal report.

Pension costs threaten to reverse the progress, Jim Waring, the vice mayor, said in an interview.

Benefit Crossroads

Waring, a Republican, supports the November ballot measure to cap pension benefits available to current employees — a measure intended to curb padding of benefits through late-career raises and special pay — and to put new civilian hires into a 401(k)-style system rather than a defined-benefit pension. The 401(k) is a tax-deferred retirement account that workers manage themselves.

Savings would total $150 million in the first 10 years, said Scot Mussi, executive director of theArizona Free Enterprise Club, which backs the measure. City officials haven’t produced an estimate.

Phoenix would be the most-populous city to replace pensions with 401(k)-type accounts for new hires, said Jordan Marks, executive director of the union-backed National Public Pension Coalition. Voters in San Diego approved such a system in 2012, and it went into effect that year.

“Where we’re going to be in 20 years is a potentially unsustainable path,” Waring said. “We’re trying to get ahead of the curve.”

Phoenix, which hasn’t offered general-obligation debt since 2012, plans to refinance bonds issued in 2003, 2004 and 2005, said Treasurer Randy Piotrowski. The city plans to price the bonds June 2, he said.

Highest Rating

Even after S&P downgraded Phoenix in December to AA+, its second-highest level, Phoenix is still tied with Houston for the highest rating of the seven most populous cities.

“Pension costs have been on the radar of all investors,” Piotrowski said. “However, we haven’t heard any direct concerns from investors.”

The pension change that voters approved last year — which increased employee contributions toward pensions and established later retirement ages — is projected to save $600 million over 23 years, the city’s then-acting chief financial officer, Neal Young, wrote in the 2013 fiscal report.

The population of Phoenix, home of PetSmart Inc. (PETM) and Freeport-McMoRan Copper & Gold Inc. (FCX), grew almost 3 percent from 2010 to 2012, according to the U.S. Census.

Waring said the measures, which were backed by Democratic Mayor Greg Stanton, didn’t reverse the growth in pension liabilities.

Stanton’s policy director, Seth Scott, didn’t return two phone calls and an e-mail message seeking the mayor’s position on the latest initiative.

‘Free Market’

The Phoenix Pension Reform Act is principally funded by the Arizona Free Enterprise Club, according to its website. The club, which describes itself as a “free market policy and lobbying group,” raised $501,000 in 2012, all through membership dues, according to its most recent tax filing.

City unions have formed the Arizona Retirement Security Coalition to fight the measure. Money from outside Phoenix is fanning the perception of a pension crisis to persuade voters to hand over management of municipal retirement accounts to private firms, said Frank Piccioli, president of the American Federation of State, County & Municipal Employees Local 2960, which represents about 2,200 city employees.

Marks of the National Public Pension Coalition was in Phoenix this week planning how to defeat the measure. Marks said Phoenix could set a “dangerous” precedent for stripping municipal workers of guaranteed pensions.

Piccioli couldn’t name the funders of the drive to cut pensions, and Mussi declined to name donors. Neither side of the ballot measure has filed financial disclosure statements ahead of a June 30 deadline.

“The long-term outlook is a very healthy pension system,” Piccioli said. “We are not in crisis. This is not Detroit.”

By James Nash  May 15, 2014 5:00 PM PT

To contact the reporter on this story: James Nash in Los Angeles at [email protected]
To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]




Fitch: Despite Local CA Victory, OPEB Battles Will Go On.

Fitch Ratings-San Francisco-08 May 2014: The California Supreme Court’s decision last week against reviewing a lower court’s decision on other post-employment benefit (OPEB) liabilities removed one legal challenge to public employers’ efforts to reduce obligations, Fitch Ratings says. However, many other hurdles remain. We generally view OPEBs as more flexible than pensions. This decision supports that view, as well as the view that local governments’ (in this case California’s) ability to make material adjustments to these benefits.

The April 30 denial by the California Supreme Court leaves standing a December 2013 opinion by the state’s Court of Appeals, which affirmed the city of San Diego’s ability to cap its contributions toward retiree health care benefits. The appeals court cited substantial legal precedent in concluding that San Diego’s OPEBs were an employment benefit rather than a vested contractual right and, unlike pension benefits, could be reduced for current employees and retirees.

California courts have looked closely at the circumstances under which OPEBs have addressed the validity of subsequent reductions. A series of decisions over the past several years by both the federal 9th Circuit Court and the state Supreme Court have held that OPEBs in general are not vested with contractual rights, but this status may be granted or implied through labor negotiations or other governing board actions. As a result, local governments’ legal authority to reduce OPEBs must be determined on a case-by-case basis, leading to repeated litigation of benefit cuts across multiple jurisdictions.

Fitch expects OPEB litigation to continue as public employers in California increasingly look for means to reduce long-term liabilities and growing expenses. Several cases arising from OPEB cuts made during the recent recession continue to wend their way through the state’s courts, and any new efforts to reduce benefits are likely to face legal challenges as well. Litigation is likely to slow the pace of OPEB reform in California and the prospect of litigation may also lead some employers to reconsider such efforts.

Contact:

Stephen Walsh
Director
U.S. Public Finance
+1 415 732-7573
650 California Street
San Francisco, CA

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY




NYT: Detroit Bankruptcy Deadline May Be Missed, Imperiling State Funds.

The federal judge handling Detroit’s bankruptcy indicated on Thursday that the current timetable for finishing the case might be unrealistic given the many disputes outstanding, raising questions about whether Detroit can exit bankruptcy before the end of its emergency manager’s term.

Judge Steven Rhodes made the observation in a hearing after saying he had heard that the state had promised to give Detroit some money — but only if the city could get him to approve its bankruptcy exit plan by the end of September. He said state lawmakers needed to understand he could not guarantee meeting that deadline.

“There are a bazillion things that could happen between now and Sept. 30,” the judge said.

Judge Rhodes seemed to be alluding to the thick stack of objections to Detroit’s bankruptcy plan that piled up in the courthouse this week in response to a deadline. For months, a team of mediators has been trying to negotiate out-of-court settlements to Detroit’s many obligations, and until recently it seemed to be having remarkable success, particularly with the so-called grand bargain, which proposed to use the city’s famous art collection to raise $816 million for retirees’ pensions. The grand bargain calls for $466 million from private foundations and the Detroit Institute of Arts and a $350 million appropriation from the state — with the contingency that Judge Rhodes said he heard about through the grapevine.

Many of the new objections complain that Detroit is improperly proposing to treat its pensioners more favorably than its investors, and some of them cite the art deal as an example of what is wrong. Bankruptcy law requires debtors to treat similarly situated creditors equitably, and now creditors are arguing that Detroit’s proposal must be rejected because it fails to do so.

“The debtor’s plan is hopelessly defective,” said one creditor, Syncora Capital Assurance, in a filing that arrived on Monday. “If it were an automobile, it would be pronounced a lemon and promptly sent to the scrapyard.”

Detroit’s plan of debt adjustment, which lays out the terms it wants to use to settle its various debts, is scheduled to go to trial in July, when Judge Rhodes will have to decide how to handle any remaining objections. Even before the judge warned that the timetable might be unrealistic, bankruptcy experts said they were taken aback by the number and complexity of objections to the plan and wondered how the judge would manage it all.

“This case is a law school exam,” said David Skeel, a bankruptcy law professor at the University of Pennsylvania. “Every issue you could possibly want to ask about a recovery plan is being raised. Even teachers who teach this over and over don’t know all the issues.”

Some of the new objections come from investors that had not complained about Detroit’s approach until now. In addition to their concerns about equitable treatment, some go to great length to explain the laws underlying municipal securities, which can be very different from those governing the corporate debts that turn up in Chapter 11 bankruptcies. Some of Detroit’s bonds fall into a category that has never been impaired in bankruptcy before, and the holders are resolute that it cannot happen in Detroit.

Mr. Skeel and other bankruptcy experts said it would be difficult, though not impossible, to negotiate settlements to so many disputes before the all-important confirmation hearing in July. Most parties to a bankruptcy prefer to settle before the final trial, even if it means bearing a loss, because they know that if they go to trial the judge may leave them with an even bigger loss, and an unfavorable legal precedent to boot.

“Everybody wants to go into July with as few major objections left as possible,” Mr. Skeel said. “No one wants to be surprised. If the plan is fatally flawed, that has to be discovered now, and not in July. There’s a possibility that if you’ve got a battle royale, the whole thing gets derailed.”

Officials have been pushing Detroit to get everything squared away by September, when the term of its emergency manager, Kevyn Orr, expires and the city’s elected leaders will regain their full powers. Now, though, backup plans are being prepared to bring in a new emergency manager if the city is still mired in bankruptcy when Mr. Orr departs.

The hearing on Thursday was originally scheduled to hear the arguments of two bond insurers that stand behind Detroit’s shakiest debt — about $1.4 billion of certificates issued in 2005 and 2006 to raise money for Detroit’s pension system. Not only has Detroit stopped making its payments on the certificates, it has filed a lawsuit arguing that the borrowing was illegal to begin with and that the certificates are unenforceable.

Detroit’s plan of adjustment says the two insurers — Syncora and the Financial Guaranty Insurance Company — have no valid claim in the bankruptcy and that it does not owe them a cent. But it offers to accept 40 percent of the certificates as valid if the creditors in this group will vote for its overall plan of adjustment. The result would be a small recovery, perhaps about 5 cents on the dollar of the certificates’ face value. Along with the two insurers are several European banks that bought certificates that were not insured.

Financial Guaranty has responded with a counterclaim to Detroit’s lawsuit. It argues that the 2005 deal was perfectly legal, but that if Judge Rhodes finds that it was not, then the city’s pension system will have to disgorge the $1.4 billion and send it back to the investors. Such an outcome would severely undermine Detroit’s hopes of getting its books balanced and coming back to normal.

Judge Rhodes questioned Financial Guaranty’s lawyer, Alfredo Perez, about its counterclaim and said he would issue a written opinion later on whether the insurer could proceed.

He also granted limited permission to the insurer’s request to determine whether investment bankers can improve on Detroit’s proposal to raise money connected to the city’s art collection, a crucial part of the grand bargain. Judge Rhodes said Financial Guaranty could work with officials of the Detroit Institute of Arts on evaluating artwork that the museum now has in storage, but barred it from removing any of the works on display to have them appraised. He also denied the creditors’ motion seeking detailed records of how the art came to be in the museum’s collection. The creditors had said the records would show which artwork was given to the institute free and clear, and which was given with instructions that might make it hard to sell.

Before the hearing on Thursday, Financial Guaranty went out and tested the market appetite for Detroit’s collection and came back with four bids for some or all of the artwork. The bids differ widely, but the insurer contends they show that Detroit could raise a lot more money by simply marketing even some of the artwork than it has by tying it up in the grand bargain.

No one can force Detroit to sell its art collection, but Financial Guaranty says that if Detroit does decide to sell the art, then the terms must meet the requirements of bankruptcy law: The sale must be an arms-length transaction, and the proceeds must be distributed equitably, not channeled to a single, favored group of creditors. The insurer says the grand bargain fails these tests because the terms are not arms-length, and all the proceeds would be used to pay pensions, shutting out the bondholders.

By MARY WILLIAMS WALSH

Mary W. Chapman contributed reporting from Detroit.




WSJ: More Detroits Are on the Way.

Even as pension bombs tick, cities and states still borrow far beyond their means.

The most significant step taken after New York City’s near-bankruptcy in 1975 was to curb creative-accounting practices. How was that accomplished? Through a state requirement that the city balance its budget in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. The city has not had a fiscal crisis since.

 So it’s not surprising that since the city’s new mayor, Bill de Blasio, released his first budget last week, there’s been intense public debate involving the comptrollers of both the city and the state about whether the deferral of payments contractually due city employees was properly accounted for. Between the scrutiny of the press, civic organizations and public officials, the city’s record of 30 years without a fiscal crisis is likely to last.

Sadly, no other local government chose to follow the example of New York City, a choice that has led to chronic shortfalls. Earlier this year, former Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker and I released the “Final Report of the State Budget Crisis Task Force” after nearly three years of study and analysis. The report sought to understand whether the states’ current fiscal problems were cyclical—caused by the financial collapse of 2008 and likely to abate with economic recovery—or whether they were structural, the result of long-term revenue and spending imbalances. The report’s main finding is that in most states and cities the problems are structural and the crisis is deepening.The crisis has many elements but a few stand out. First, contributions to employee pension funds are often well below the levels needed to ensure the payment of the benefits that are contractually or constitutionally guaranteed, let alone those that past trustees and legislatures added on a discretionary basis. Sometimes the contributions are not made at all for years at a time. Everyone with a role in determining these contribution levels has an incentive to keep them as low as possible. Politicians don’t like to raise taxes to meet future obligations, while public unions would rather take the long-term risk of underfunding rather than face immediate layoffs or benefit reductions.

The largest single expenditure in most state budgets is for Medicaid. Unfortunately, health-care costs have been rising faster than either inflation or state and local tax revenues, and most economists believe they will rise even faster in the next few years.

But the most critical piece of the states’ fiscal dilemma is that they are borrowing to cover their operating deficits. They do this directly—by issuing debt securities—but also indirectly. Some states, like New York, make contributions to their pension systems in promissory notes rather than cash. States and cities also sell assets and treat the proceeds as operating revenues, in effect selling off the family silver to stay afloat.

In 2009 Arizona sold its capitol buildings for more than $700 million. In 2008 Chicago leased its parking meters for 75 years for nearly $1.2 billion. In 1991 New York sold Attica Prison for $200 million to itself through a bond issuance, providing a temporary revenue boost but costing taxpayers far more in the long run in interest. While state constitutions contain various balanced-budget clauses, they generally don’t define revenues or prevent such creative accounting.

The consequences of our state and municipal fiscal crises are plain: We are drastically underinvesting in physical infrastructure—roads, bridges, ports, etc.—the necessary underpinning of future growth. Just as important, we are also underinvesting in human infrastructure, most notably our children’s ability to compete. No one is satisfied with the output of our educational system, yet states spent over half a billion dollars less on prekindergarten education last year than they had the year before.

Permitting states and municipalities to continue these practices will result—indeed, has already begun to result—in harmful service cuts and a failure to fund promises made to creditors, public employees and the beneficiaries of essential public services, including elderly people without minimal levels of financial support. What this means is we can expect to see more Detroits. Last July the Motor City filed the country’s largest municipal bankruptcy after racking up $18 billion in promises it could no longer afford to keep.

Meanwhile, the federal government is facing understandable pressure to rein in spending and reduce deficits. One proposal is to reduce health-care spending by raising the age of Medicare eligibility to 67 from 65. Yet this would greatly increase the spending burden on state and local governments currently obligated to fund health care for some 19 million retirees until they are eligible for Medicare. Worse, we can only guess the scale of such impact since there is currently no mechanism in the federal government that properly measures the effects of federal proposals on the states.

No one seriously argues that when credit markets won’t allow more state or local government borrowing, Washington should write checks to get them through their crises. Even if an administration proposed such a Band-Aid, it would be politically impossible for Congress to approve it. Yet if the number of cities and states in extreme distress were to grow significantly, the political pressure to do something would increase inexorably. The ultimate cost would be staggering.

It is time for the federal government to take the steps needed to avoid the social and financial crisis that must be expected if nothing changes. Washington now provides almost 30% of what the states spend annually and already imposes many mandates on states and localities in return for its largess. The federal government could condition its continued financial support on states and local governments adopting budget systems that would require recurring expenses to be matched by current revenues.

The political difficulty involved in such a step will be far less than the pain that will result if states and localities are not forced to move toward a responsible system of accrual budgeting. One thing is clear: Continuing to use cash budgeting practices that allow states and cities to inflate revenues, defer costs and multiply the burdens on future generations is the worst option.

By

RICHARD RAVITCH
May 15, 2014 6:46 p.m. ET

Mr. Ravitch is the former lieutenant governor of New York and an adviser to the bankruptcy judge in Detroit.




GASB Issues Exposure Draft on Fair Value Measurement and Application.

Norwalk, CT, May 15, 2014—The Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB) today issued for public comment a proposed Statement addressing accounting and financial reporting issues related to fair value measurements.

The Exposure Draft, Fair Value Measurement and Application, describes how fair value should be defined and measured, what assets and liabilities should be measured at fair value, and what information about fair value should be disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

“The proposed changes to the GASB’s fair value standards are intended to increase clarity, consistency, and comparability in governments’ fair value measurements and their related disclosures,” said GASB Chairman David A. Vaudt. “The Board believes that fair value measurements enhance the relevance of reported financial information, particularly when accompanied by robust disclosures.”

The GASB is proposing that fair value be defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. The Exposure Draft also proposes that investments would generally be measured at fair value. Investments would be defined as a security or other asset that a government holds primarily for the purpose of income or profit and the present service capacity of which is based solely on its ability to generate cash or to be sold to generate cash.

Certain investments would continue to be excluded from measurement at fair value, such as investments in money market instruments with remaining maturities at time of purchase of one year or less.

Under current accounting standards, state and local governments are required to disclose how they arrived at their measures of fair value if they are not based on quoted market prices. In the Exposure Draft, the GASB is proposing to expand those disclosures to include the inputs a government uses to measure fair value and the judgments made to arrive at those inputs.

The Exposure Draft is available on the GASB website, www.gasb.org. Stakeholders are encouraged to review the proposals and provide comments by August 15, 2014.

The GASB will hold a live, one-hour, CPE webinar on the Exposure Draft at 1 p.m. EDT on Tuesday, July 15 aimed at auditors and preparers. On Thursday, July 17 at 1 p.m. EDT, the GASB will host a one-hour, non-CPE webinar for financial statement users. Registration for both events will be announced on the GASB website in the coming weeks.




GFOA Best Practice of the Week - Guidance for Affordable Care Act Implementation.

 Recently, the White House announced that 8 million Americans have signed up for private health coverage under the Affordable Care Act. Approximately a third are younger than 35 years old, and the costs of the expansion are reportedly less than expected; for instance, the administration predicts that Medicare and Medicaid costs in 2020 will be $180 billion less than 2010 estimates. Many governments are looking for more information about complying with the act and making sure their health-care benefit is sustainable. Take a look at the GFOA’s best practices for ideas on implementation, as well as insurance and cost containment options.

Developing a Process for Complying with the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act recommends steps for successfully implementing a process for reviewing federal health-care benefit requirements. One tip: review the requirements at least quarterly to make sure you’re aware of any newly issued or soon-to-be issued regulations related to the Affordable Care Act.

Strategic Health-Care Plan Design helps jurisdictions with guiding principles and key objectives for managing health-care costs and improving participant wellness. This best practice gives users advice in determining the purpose of its health-care plan, using performance measures to establish and define cost objectives, using analytical tools to measure the cost drivers and health risk factors of plan participants, determining appropriate cost-containment measures in relation to the plan’s performance goals, working with other departments to make sure the long-term strategic plan design for health care is understood and will be taken into consideration during labor negotiations, establishing ongoing education initiatives, and considering the effect of OPEB on the costs and sustainability of the jurisdiction’s overall health-care benefit package.

Strategies for Budgeting and Managing Health-Care Costs suggests strategies for managing employee health-care benefit costs more effectively. These include monitoring medical plan provider network and prescription drug discounts, setting an appropriate level of cost-sharing with employees, encouraging good consumer behaviors, analyzing the risks of self-insurance, using measurements to assess plan performance, and reviewing federal requirements.

Wednesday, April 30, 2014




GFOA: A Guide to Starting the Lean Journey.

You’ve heard of Lean and you are intrigued. You are acquainted with the basic Lean tools and concepts such as Kaizen, the 8 wastes, root cause analysis, and process maps – but what are the next steps? The purpose of this guide is to help you get off to a good start on your Lean journey, including:

  • Considering Lean. You first must consider if Lean is the right journey for you.
  • Become aware of what a Lean organization looks like. Stephen Covey says “Begin with the end in mind.” Learning about Lean and the experiences of others and what they have accomplished puts you in a better position to begin the journey.
  • The strategy for implementing Lean at home. Once you have learned about Lean you and decide it is the suitable journey for you, then you are ready to begin the Lean journey in your own organization.
  • Building a Lean culture. Lean is not just collection of tools. It is a mindset and way of working. Lean will have its greatest impact when that mindset pervades the organization.
  • Building support for Lean. Change is often hard for employees. Change is sometimes for employees so thought must be given on how to make the transition easier.
Download

 

Author:

Shayne Kavanagh
Jeff Cole
Harry Kenworthy

Year:

2014




CUSIP Global Services Launches Municipal Pre-Refunded Linkage Service.

New York, NY, May 13th 2014 – CUSIP Global Services (CGS) today announced the launch of its Municipal Pre-Refunded Linkage Service. Created to identify and link partially pre- refunded municipal bonds into one record, the new product will reduce clerical errors that could arise from the manual process typically followed in today’s market. The service will also aid in the risk management of partially pre-refunded bonds, which are frequently backed by U.S. Treasuries.

The new service assigns CUSIP numbers when a municipal bond is partially pre-refunded, a situation that occurs when a portion of the outstanding principal amount of an issue is pre- paid before the scheduled maturity date. The service contains over 59,000 linked issues which include reference data for the partially pre-funded parent, the newly issued pre- refunded bond and the newly issued bond for the un-refunded balance. The service is delivered daily via FTP in the form of an initial master file along with daily updates.

“We are constantly surveying our clients for ways we can offer solutions to help in their daily operations,” said Jim Taylor, Managing Director and Head of CGS. “This product underscores our commitment not only to the municipal market, but to all of those who are looking for easier ways to properly track municipal assets in their portfolio.”

About CUSIP Global Services

The financial services industry relies on our unrivaled experience in uniquely identifying instruments and entities to support efficient global capital markets.

Our extensive focus on standardization over the past 45 years has helped us earn the reputation for being the trusted originator of quality identifiers and descriptive data, ensuring that essential front- and back-office functions run smoothly.

CGS is managed on behalf of the American Bankers Association (ABA) by S&P Capital IQ, with a Board of Trustees that represents the voices of leading financial institutions For more information, visit www.cusip.com.

About The American Bankers Association

The American Bankers Association represents banks of all sizes and charters and is the voice for the nation’s $14 trillion banking industry and its two million employees. Learn more at www.aba.com.For More Information:

Michael Privitera S&P Capital IQ Communications [email protected] 212-438-6679




Opportunities Abound for Bond-Financed Infrastructure, But So Do Obstacles.

ORLANDO — Transportation finance experts expect robust bond financing of new transportation and infrastructure projects in the near future, even though federal policy is making those investments increasingly tricky.

Several market participants provided that perspective to municipal analysts attending the National Federation of Municipal Analysts’ conference here Wednesday.

Nearly everyone agrees that there is a major investment shortfall in America’s infrastructure needs, they told the analysts, and the response needs to be both intelligent and creative.

The U.S. spends roughly 3% of its gross domestic product on its infrastructure, said Alexander Heil, chief economist for the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey. That is comparable to the expenditures of most other industrialized countries, including most of Europe. Despite this, the American Society of Civil Engineers gives the U.S. a D+ grade on its infrastructure scorecard. ASCE calculates that the nation will require about $3.6 trillion in infrastructure investment by 2020, of which about only $2 trillion is likely to be available.

Heil told conference attendees to be mindful that demographic trends will shape American infrastructure demand. Millenials are less likely to be interested in car ownership than previous generations, he said, leading to the conclusion that some caution may be warranted when considering whether assets with an expected lifespan of 100+ years will still be paying off generations from now.

“We need to look at risk. We need to look at uncertainty,” Heil said.

Duane Callender, director of the Transportation Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act loan program at the U.S. Department of Transportation, said that 75% of TIFIA’s approximately $16 billion of loans to more than 40 programs over 15 years have gone to highway programs. Callender said he expects more transit and multi-modal projects to join the program’s portfolio, and that strong bipartisan support of TIFIA means the program will probably remain well-funded for the time being.

But TIFIA is clearly the “good,” in federal policy best characterized as “the good, the bad, and the ugly,” said Citigroup managing director and public finance sector head Tom Green. On a more negative note, the gas tax-fueled federal Highway Trust Fund, is being repeatedly patched with general fund transfers because the federal gas tax has remained stagnant for two decades, Green pointed out. He said Citi sees promise in the idea of allowing states to decide whether to toll their sections of interstate highways, an idea that has been opposed by trucking and other groups.

While Green said he sees many opportunities for bond-funded new money projects on the horizon, federal regulation of high-quality liquid assets (HQLAs) is throwing up a road block. The Federal Reserve System’s Board of Governors, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corp. and the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency proposed a rule in October that would require large banks to maintain a minimum liquidity coverage ratio, defined as the ratio of HQLA to total net cash outflows. Assets would qualify as HQLA if they could be easily and immediately convertible to cash with little or no loss of value during a period of liquidity stress. Munis are not included because federal regulators have suggested they are not liquid enough, though muni market participants — including Citi — have argued the opposite. Under the proposed rule, high-quality corporate or foreign bonds could qualify as HQLA, but not munis. That would hamper the market, Green told analysts.

“There’s no logic to that,” he said.

A conference attendee said there has been some talk of funding infrastructure by reviving Build America Bonds at a lower subsidy rate, but Green said Republican opposition makes that unlikely.

BY KYLE GLAZIER

MAY 7, 2014 4:11pm ET




Pension Plans Go Risky With Investments.

ORLANDO — Unfunded public pension liabilities can be vastly different depending on the assumptions made and how they are calculated, but it is clear that plans are taking far more risk today than they have in the past, pension experts told municipal analysts at a conference here Wednesday.

Representatives of the Governmental Accounting Standards Board, Moody’s Investors Service, and the Rockefeller Institute of Government spoke to members of the National Federation of Municipal Analysts at the group’s annual conference.

Calculations of unfunded pension liabilities sometime seem contradictory, causing a government’s plans to appear either well-funded or poorly-funded despite starting with the same numbers. Rockefeller Institute senior Fellow Donald Boyd said the calculation of a liability can swing very wildly depending on the projected rate of return of its pension investments.

Boyd said there is no “right” discount rate, but pointed out that a typical plan could show a liability that is 63% lower when assuming an 8% rate of return vs. a 4% rate of return. Boyd advocated for a conservative assumption, which places more initial burden on governments because it assumes a lower level of long-term pension benefit payouts will be covered by the plan’s investment earnings.

“You ought to have a pretty risk-free or low-risk rate,” he said.

Boyd added that many public plans are heavily-invested in equities, leaving them exposed to more market volatility than in the past. Further, some state and local officials wrongly believe that under performance in the short-term will be canceled out over the course of 30 years of investment, Boyd said.

“The risk has grown very, very substantially over the past couple of decades,” he warned.

GASB standards approved in 2012 that become effective on July 1 require governments to disclose a “net pension liability” figure for the first time on their balance sheets in addition to funding projections. The net pension liability is the difference between the total pension liability and the assets set aside in a trust and restricted to paying benefits. The GASB standards are not binding, but state and local governments must meet them in order to receive clean or non-qualified opinions from auditors on their financial statements. GASB research manager Dean Mead said he does not expect the new standards to have any impact on funding levels. “I don’t have any reason to believe this will have any impact on funding at all,” Mead told analysts, adding that groups such as the Government Finance Officers Association have put out their own guidance for pension funding.

“How they fund is their business and not ours,” Mead said.

Marcia Van Wagner, a senior analyst at Moody’s said the rating agency has created its own adjusted pension analysis formula to create a more workable measurement of how pension liabilities impact municipal credit. Moody’s change in pension methodology resulted in an almost immediate downgrade of 19 muni issuers when the agency rolled it out last year. Moody’s treats pension liabilities more like bond debt, which Van Wagner said carries a comparable level of legal and moral obligation to pay in most cases. Van Wagner said the new GASB standards will be helpful by providing a more fulsome picture of pension liabilities, but will not likely impact the way Moody’s evaluates pensions.

“We are looking forward to more detail,” she said.

BY KYLE GLAZIER

MAY 7, 2014 3:21pm ET




NFMA Bestows Industry Awards on Four Individuals and NASACT.

ORLANDO — The National Federation of Municipal Analysts presented annual awards during its conference here on Wednesday, honoring four individuals and an organization for contributions to the municipal bond industry.

Jeffrey Burger, a senior portfolio manager at Standish Mellon Asset Management, presided over the ceremony which, the NFMA has held every year since 1984.

James Spiotto, managing director of Chapman Strategic Advisors LLC, won an award for industry contribution. Spiotto has been a prominent voice on the subject of municipal bankruptcy and has appeared around the country to speak about the implications of bankruptcy and defaults for the muni industry.

“Simply put, there is no stronger Chapter 9 legal counsel than Jim Spiotto and, importantly, no one more generous and willing to share his knowledge and experience than Jim,” Burger said. “Jim has been instrumental in helping the municipal analyst community to navigate the complexities of Chapter 9 through his years of research and analysis on the subject. His work has been ground-breaking. Additionally, his analysis of state-by-state bondholder legal protections has become an invaluable resource for the industry.”

Richard Raphael a managing director at Fitch Ratings, received the career achievement award. Raphael is a charter member of the NFMA who Burger called an “analyst’s analyst.”

Assured Guaranty managing director Mary Francoeur and Standish Mellon senior analyst Mark Stockwell both received meritorious service awards. Both have, and continue to, serve in leadership positions with the NFMA. Francoeur holds the chairmanship of the annual conference, disclosure, communications and sponsorship committees. Stockwell is currently serving as disclosure chair and is a former NFMA chairman.

“Mary is extremely dedicated to the NFMA and cares so much about our organization, Burger said. “She is a person that can be called upon and relied upon to do whatever is needed for the NFMA and is always willing to be first to step up.”

“If we were to simply look at Mark’s contributions to the NFMA during his service as an officer, that would be sufficient to warrant recognition, however it is what Mark accomplished prior to his time as an NFMA officer and what he continues to do on behalf of the NFMA that makes him even all the more worthy of this honor,” said Burger.

The National Association of State Auditors, Comptrollers and Treasurers received an award the previous day for excellence in disclosure. The award recognizes NASACT’s work in promoting interim disclosure reporting by the states and the development of its “Voluntary Interim Financial Reporting: Best Practices for State Governments,” which it released last fall, the NFMA said in a statement.

BY KYLE GLAZIER

MAY 8, 2014 11:38am ET




Michigan Bill Would Impose 20 Years' Oversight on Detroit.

CHICAGO — Michigan would create a seven-member committee to oversee Detroit for 20 years under legislation expected to be unveiled late Thursday, lawmakers said.

The bills would also authorize a state contribution of $195 million in a one-time lump cash infusion toward the bankrupt city’s pension debt.

The money would come from Michigan’s rainy-day fund, which currently has a balance of $580 million. The money would be repaid with annual appropriations of $17 million from the state’s tobacco settlement fund.

The lump sum payment is a change from Gov. Rick Snyder’s original proposal, in which the state was to contribute $350 million over 20 years. Snyder had proposed bonding against the tobacco funds to generate the proceeds.

The 10-bill package, expected to be unveiled late Thursday, is part of a so-called “grand bargain” between the state, the city, its pension systems, a group of private foundations and the city owned Detroit Institute of Arts museum.

In return for a roughly $816 million contribution, which includes the state funds, the DIA would be spun off to an independent nonprofit board that would protect the art collection from any future sale or privatization.

Detroit’s final plan of debt adjustment relies on the grand bargain, as most of the creditor settlements feature the additional funds.

The oversight board would have final say over the city’s finances, budget and contracts, according to Rep. John Walsh, R-Livonia, who is taking the lead on the legislation.

The state would control most of the appointments to the oversight committee. Members would be appointed by the governor, state treasurer, state House speaker, state Senate Majority Leader, and the Detroit mayor. It’s modeled after the board that oversaw New York City during that city’s late 1970s fiscal crisis.

“If there are periods of fiscal health in the city, then it could go dormant,” Walsh said.

House leaders earlier this week formed a new committee to handle the Detroit-related legislation. The House Committee on Detroit’s Recovery and Michigan’s Future will be chaired by Walsh and made up of two Republicans and two Detroit Democrats.

Snyder wants lawmakers to pass legislation before they break at the end of June.

BY CAITLIN DEVITT

MAY 8, 2014 3:04pm ET




Strategists Concerned Muni Investors Can't Manage Tobacco Bonds' Risk.

Tobacco bonds have lured investors with some of the highest returns in the muni market this year, raising concern among strategists that traditional municipal bond investors’ are taking on too much risk.

The S&P Municipal Bond Tobacco Index, which tracks all tobacco bonds, had a total return of 10.87% through April 30, while the S&P National AMT-Free Municipal Bond Index returned 4.67%.

“The question is, ‘is the currently yield environment rewarding investors for all that risk we’ve been talking about?’,” J.R Rieger, global head of fixed income indices at S&P Dow Jones Indices at S&P, said in an interview. “Relative to the reward, is a pretty risky sector in general.”

Rieger said that investors are mainly interested in tobacco bonds because they offer high-yields in a market where lack of supply has driven down municipal bond yields. Muni supply for 2014 totaled $89.34 billion as of April 30, compared to $122.7 billion for the same period last year.

The Buckeye Tobacco Settlement Finance Authority’s benchmark tobacco bond with a 5.875% coupon maturing in 2047 traded at a yield of 7.69% on Thursday, according to data provided by Bloomberg. This year the yield hasn’t dropped lower than 7.28% it fell to on March 5.

“We’re seeing that demand is coming back into municipal bond funds, and as funds reach for anything with yield on it tobacco has that longer-duration high-yield aspect to it,” Rieger said. “An average yield of over six percent is very hard to find in other sectors of the municipal market.”

High-yield tobacco bonds topped the Barclays’ Municipal Index’s municipal returns by sector for both the month of April and year to date, according to a May 5 report. High-yield tobacco bonds reported 2.8% returns for April 2014, and returns of 14.1% so far this year.

As fund managers have poured more money into high yield funds, strategists are dubious about traditional municipal bond investors’ ability to properly manage the tobacco bonds’ credit risk. The Buckeye Tobacco benchmark bond mentioned above is currently rated B3 by Moody’s Investors Service, B-minus by Standard & Poor’s and B by Fitch ratings.

Tracy Rice, vice president and senior analyst at Moody’s, and Irina Faynzllberg, vice president and senior credit officer at Moody’s, wrote in a report Thursday that 79% of the tobacco bonds Moody’s rates earned B1 or lower.

Tobacco bonds are unique because they are not paid from taxes on cigarettes, but from funds from the 1998 Tobacco Master Settlement Agreement. In the agreement the major tobacco companies agreed to pay states between $5 billion and $7 billion every year to manufacture and ship cigarettes in the U.S. without being subject to state lawsuits for medical costs associated with tobacco use.

That agreement tied tobacco bonds’ performance to the amount of revenue generated from tobacco sales.

Last Thursday, the National Association of Attorneys General released data showing that domestic cigarette shipment volumes fell 4.9% in 2013, one of the largest annual declines since the group began reporting the figures in 1999, Rice and Faynzllberg wrote in the report, which concluded the decline was a credit negative for the bonds

“What we saw from data published recently was that there was a decline of 4.9%, outside of our range of 3%-4%,” Debash Chatterjee, associate managing director at Moody’s, said in an interview. “If you look at average annual decline over time, with some years higher and some lower, the long term trend still meets our expectations. Based on that expectation, a lot of these bonds could see default, and our ratings reflect that.”

Moody’s found that around 80% of the aggregate rated tobacco bond balance has a break-even annual rate of decline in cigarette shipments of less than 4%, and approximately 65% has a break-even annual rate of decline in shipments of less than 3%.

“Therefore, 65%-80% of the tobacco settlement bonds will default according to our projection of shipments falling at a rate of 3%-4% per year,” Rice and Faynzllberg wrote in the report.

The bond’s reliance on revenue from cigarette sales makes them highly volatile. Among all the sectors included in Barclay’s high yield muni index, tobacco was the top performer in 2011 and 2012, with annual returns of 23.0% and 32.4% respectively; these returns dropped to the second worst in 2013 when the sector reported an 11.6% loss. Triet Nguyen, managing partner at Axios Advisors wrote in an April 17 report.

With the 14.1% return so far in 2014, high-yield tobacco bonds have already recouped all of last year’s losses.

Nguyen said in an interview this volatility may be why crossover buyers such as hedge funds are attracted to tobacco bonds.

“Given their familiarity with mortgage-backed securities, crossover investors are very comfortable with cash flow securitization deals like tobacco bonds,” he said.

Very few traditional municipal buyers have built the necessary models to do a cash flow analysis, he said.

“Traditional muni buyers have not been as disciplined in monitoring out the cash flow scenarios related to tobacco bonds.”

Nguyen wrote in the April 17 report that he finds it surprising that many municipal investors still trade tobacco bonds in the traditional manner, which is on a yield-to-worst basis.

The YTW spread between S&P Municipal Bond Tobacco Index and S&P National AMT-Free Municipal Bond Index has widened to 379 as of April 30, from 296 for the same time last year.

“The preferred approach, at least in our view, would be to model each issue’s future cash flows to maturity, with cigarette consumption rates as a key variable, and then decide if the current market price provides you with an acceptable internal rate of return based on various potential default scenarios,” he wrote.

He wrote that alternatively investors could go back into a price they are willing to pay for the bonds based on their preferred default scenario.

“Having said that, we suspect very few muni buyers have devoted their resources to build internal tobacco bond cash flow models, putting them at something at a disadvantage versus many of the larger broker-dealer firms who have, in fact, made that analytical investment,” he wrote.

“Most of the longer maturities will probably end up defaulting, so you have to take that into account,” Nguyen said in the interview.

Richard Larkin, senior vice president and director of credit analysis at HJ Sims, said in an interview that he has been predicting for over 10 years that tobacco bonds will default in the not too distant future.

Larkin said that he projects bonds may now default even sooner, as early as mid-2020s and early-2030s.”I think mid-2020 would be a little earlier than we would think for the bonds to default, but when we say a significant portion of bonds would default, you have to look at it from deal for deal,” Chatterjee said. “For example, A lot of bonds have a longer maturity than others. The ones that are outstanding in late 2030s to mid-2040s are exposed to a bigger risk.”

BY HILLARY FLYNN

MAY 8, 2014 5:14pm ET




No-Bid Sales Drop as Philadelphia Chooses Auctions.

U.S. states and cities are selling bonds via competitive bidding at the fastest pace in more than a decade as officials strive to cut costs almost five years after the recession.

Localities have issued $22.8 billion of bonds via auction this year through May 2, or about 27 percent of sales in the $3.7 trillion market, data compiled by Bloomberg show. That’s the highest rate since the figures begin in 2003, and is up from 15 percent in 2009.

Auctions account for almost half of New York’s sales, marking a shift from negotiated deals where rates are set in discussions with underwriters. Philadelphia said in April that its first competitive deal in eight years saved $7 million on a $65 million offer. Buffalo said last month that 18 bidders for $33 million of securities reduced borrowing costs.

“It’s helping us get the lowest possible rates for our taxpayers,” said Patrick Curry, executive assistant to Buffalo Comptroller Mark Schroeder. “We’re finding we get very good rates when there is more competition.”

Wall Street banks are fighting for dwindling business. The municipal market shrank the past three years as officials hesitated to embark on projects even with yields close to generational lows. Soliciting bids for bonds means governments are choosing the same process they use to buy asphalt and toilet paper. They’ve cut costs elsewhere: Combined state and local payrolls are about 660,000 below 2008 peak levels.

On Target

New York, the third-most-populous state, raised competitive sales to 49 percent in fiscal 2013-2014 from about 2 percent in 2009, state data show.

“Our goal of selling half our bonds on a competitive basis reflects our belief that doing so will lower borrowing costs, increase transparency and provide an essential benchmark for bonds sold on a negotiated basis,” Morris Peters, spokesman for New York’s budget division, said in a statement.

Municipalities’ use of bidding may increase as a ban on underwriters serving as advisers takes effect July 1, said Joy Howard, principal with WM Financial Strategies, a financial adviser in St. Louis.

Advisers’ Duty

“Financial advisers have a fiduciary duty and will have to recommend the method of sale they believe will produce the best result,” said Howard, whose clients often use bidding. “For most highly rated general-obligation bonds, it will be difficult to suggest that a method of sale other than competitive bidding is best.”

Missouri’s state auditor, Thomas Schweich, pushed legislation this year to boost competitive sales after a 2013 study found local issuers, who used negotiated deals 88 percent of the time from 2008 to 2011, could have saved $43 million with auctions. The plan drew opposition from investment banks that stand to earn fees on negotiated business, said Jeff Earl, senior legislative adviser to the auditor.

“The opposition was able to get enough lawmakers to keep it from passing,” Earl said. “This could save school districts some money.”

While local officials and academics say that negotiated sales are needed during volatile markets, “the competitive method is less costly for government in most cases,” Craig Brown, assistant professor of finance at the National University of Singapore, said by e-mail.

Pricing Variation

Securities sold in negotiated sales are underpriced by as much as 4.7 percent, according to a 2011 study by Brown, whose research includes methods of sale in the U.S. municipal market.

“The competitive method seems to be better for taxpayers on average,” said Brown. That route also is “less prone to corruption” because auctions determine which underwriters win the deals, he said.

In October, St. Louis-based underwriter L.J. Hart & Co. agreed to pay a $200,000 fine to settle charges by the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority that it violated rules on gifts by giving local official tickets valued at $183,546 to sports events over three years. The firm didn’t admit or deny breaking Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board rules.

The gifts were to thank clients, not to win business, Larry J. Hart, founder and principal, said in an interview.

“Our firm’s policy on giving tickets to sporting events has always been restricted to existing clients as appreciation for past business transactions and as reminder advertising between financings,” he said. “We never offer tickets as an inducement to non-clients to select our firm as the municipal bond underwriter.”

California Approach

California, the most-indebted state, uses both methods, sometimes within weeks. The most-populous state sold about $1.8 billion of bonds through negotiation in March, followed by $750 million in April via bidding.

In eight segments with similar maturities, the competitive sale had narrower yield spreads than the negotiated, by as much as 0.36 percentage point, Bloomberg data show.

The sale method didn’t drive the lower yields on the competitive sale, said Tom Dresslar, spokesman for Treasurer Bill Lockyer. He attributed the lower cost to an improving financial picture as the state enjoys its biggest surplus in more than a decade.

“In both the March and April deals, we got the best possible price for taxpayers,” said Dresslar. “It’s difficult to provide a valid comparison when you look at the spread.”

Size Matters

The state generally sells deals under $1 billion competitively and those over $1 billion via negotiated. The larger deals often require added compensation for underwriters, he said.

“A one-size-fits-all approach would not serve our citizens well,” he said.

Competitive sales have risen in part because of a drop in refinancing to lower interest costs, according to the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association, which represents investment banks. One type of refunding requires negotiated sales to complete the transactions.

“In the last few years, refundings have comprised a big part of the market,” said Michael Decker, managing director and co-head of munis at the group.

About 49 percent of issuance this year through April 23 was related to refunding, compared with 61 percent a year earlier, according to Bank of America Merrill Lynch data.

‘Strong Pricing’

Philadelphia, which sold long-term debt competitively in April for the first time since 2006, said it doesn’t plan to halt negotiated sales. At the same time, it cited $7 million in savings, partly because 14 bidders competed.

“We got very strong pricing, and part of that is because of the competitive sale,” Nancy Winkler, city treasurer, said in an interview. “It saved us money.”

Municipalities’ challenge in negotiated sales is showing that they got a good price, said Bob Eichem, chief financial officer for Boulder, Colorado. The case for negotiated sales is stronger with new or infrequent borrowers, he said.

“The thing with a competitive sale is that you know on the day you sold you got the absolute lowestinterest rate possible,” said Eichem, who has been in city finance for 35 years. “With negotiated sales, it’s difficult to say you got the absolute lowest.”

By Darrell Preston  May 8, 2014 5:00 PM PT

To contact the reporter on this story: Darrell Preston in Dallas at [email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Mark Tannenbaum, Justin Blum




Moody's: Municipal Bond Defaults Remain Low in Number, but New Trends are Emerging.

New York, May 07, 2014 — Municipal bond defaults have increased in number since the financial crisis, but remain extremely infrequent, says Moody’s Investors Service in the report, “US Municipal Bond Defaults and Recoveries, 1970 — 2013.” With seven Moody’s rated defaults in 2013, after five in 2012, there has been an average of 5 defaults per year over the 2008-13 period.

That is much higher than the 1.3 per year average in the preceding 1970-2007 period, but the one-year default rate for municipal issuers remains extremely low. For the last five years it has averaged 0.03%, up from the 0.01% average for the 1970-2007 period.

Since the financial crisis, there has been a shift in the composition of Moody’s-rated defaulters, with general government defaults and bankruptcies on the rise, although few in number. In 2013, there were seven Moody’s-rated municipal defaults, five of which were general government defaults, including the first-ever school district default and Detroit, now the largest US municipal bankruptcy filing. A major not-for-profit healthcare system and a small charter school also defaulted in 2013.

In all, Moody’s rates approximately 15,700 municipal issuers.

“Looking ahead, our outlook for state and local governments is stable, but downside risk will persist in some places,” says Al Medioli, the Moody’s Vice President, Senior Credit Officer who co-authored the report. “This reflects a sluggish and uneven recovery, economic stress on households, demographic trends, and growing pension liabilities.”

Moody’s notes that few issuers are in distress, but those that are remain unpredictable and can be accompanied by a high level of correlation in credit quality across related issuers.

“When credit risk rises in a given region or state, severe stress and default are likely to occur in clusters,” says Moody’s Medioli. “For example, state and local governments share exposures to a dominant pension plan, many school districts are dependent on states for funding and operational mandates, and federal policies may impact entire sectors.”

When municipal issuers do default, there has been a new and growing trend toward more variability in recoveries and also toward lower recoveries, says Moody’s, although they remain generally higher than corporate recoveries.

On average, the ultimate recovery rate for municipal bonds was about 60% for the period 1970-2013, compared with 48% for corporate senior unsecured bonds over 1987-2013. However, individual historical recovery rates of defaulted bonds are highly dispersed, ranging from full recovery to 2%.

In 2013, the three separate recoveries from the Jefferson County, AL and Harrisburg, PA defaults mirrored this trend, averaging 69% but ranging from 100% to 31%. The proposed recoveries for Detroit and Stockton, cities now in Chapter 9 bankruptcy, also vary widely based on creditor class.

For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report at https://www.moodys.com/research/US-Municipal-Bond-Defaults-and-Recoveries-1970-2013–PBM_PBM170048.

***

NOTE TO JOURNALISTS ONLY: For more information, please call one of our global press information hotlines: New York +1-212-553-0376, London +44-20-7772-5456, Tokyo +813-5408-4110, Hong Kong +852-3758-1350, Sydney +61-2-9270-8141, Mexico City 001-888-779-5833, São Paulo 0800-891-2518, or Buenos Aires 0800-666-3506. You can also email us at [email protected] or visit our web site at www.moodys.com.

 

 

 

Alfred Medioli
VP – Senior Credit Officer
Credit Policy
Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
250 Greenwich Street
New York, NY 10007
U.S.A.
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

Anne Van Praagh
MD – Sovereign Risk
Credit Policy
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

Releasing Office:
Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
250 Greenwich Street
New York, NY 10007
U.S.A.
JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653




Fitch: Fracking Water Supply Risk Would Fall on U.S. Utilities.

Fitch Ratings-New York-02 May 2014: Despite more stringent state laws, water and sewer utilities must comply with EPA water regulations and would bear much of the financial burden if hydrofracking (fracking) operations lead to contamination of a water supply, Fitch Ratings says. This week the state of Michigan joined a growing list of states that require disclosure of the chemicals injected into the ground during fracking processes.

State regulations require oil and gas companies to disclose the chemicals used for fracking. However the utilities are subject to federal disclosure laws that allow companies to claim trade-secrets exemption. Even if the chemicals used for fracking are disclosed, they may not be on the EPA’s list of regulated contaminants. As water utilities are ultimately responsible for complying with EPA regulations for monitoring, treating and delivering water that is safe for public consumption, they would bear much of the financial, operational and regulatory burden of safeguarding water that could potentially be contaminated by fracking operations.

In this scenario, Fitch would expect a serious blow to a utility’s revenues, with losses concurrent with other growing direct and indirect costs. This would lead to debt service coverage reductions, liquidity strains and possibly the need for additional leverage.

In the coming days we will release a report entitled “Fracking: Possible Implications to Water & Sewer Credits” that will provide more detail on this possible scenario and illuminate the risks for bondholders.

Contact:

Doug Scott
Managing Director
U.S. Public Finance
+1 512-215-3725
111 Congress Avenue
Austin, TX

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY
Media Relations: Elizabeth Fogerty, New York, Tel: +1 (212) 908 0526, Email: [email protected].

Additional information is available on www.fitchratings.com.

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article, which may include hyperlinks to companies and current ratings, can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com. All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.

ALL FITCH CREDIT RATINGS ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS. PLEASE READ THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS BY FOLLOWING THIS LINK: HTTP://FITCHRATINGS.COM/UNDERSTANDINGCREDITRATINGS. IN ADDITION, RATING DEFINITIONS AND THE TERMS OF USE OF SUCH RATINGS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE AGENCY’S PUBLIC WEBSITE ‘WWW.FITCHRATINGS.COM’. PUBLISHED RATINGS, CRITERIA AND METHODOLOGIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THIS SITE AT ALL TIMES. FITCH’S CODE OF CONDUCT, CONFIDENTIALITY, CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, AFFILIATE FIREWALL, COMPLIANCE AND OTHER RELEVANT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE FROM THE ‘CODE OF CONDUCT’ SECTION OF THIS SITE. FITCH MAY HAVE PROVIDED ANOTHER PERMISSIBLE SERVICE TO THE RATED ENTITY OR ITS RELATED THIRD PARTIES. DETAILS OF THIS SERVICE FOR RATINGS FOR WHICH THE LEAD ANALYST IS BASED IN AN EU-REGISTERED ENTITY CAN BE FOUND ON THE ENTITY SUMMARY PAGE FOR THIS ISSUER ON THE FITCH WEBSITE.




How Will State and County Government Employees Fare under Kentucky's New Cash Balance Pension Plan?

Kentucky recently replaced its traditional pension with a new cash balance plan for state and county employees hired after 2013. Employees who join the government payroll at relatively young ages and remain for no more than 25 years will accumulate more benefits in the cash balance plan than the traditional plan, while many of those with more years of service and hired at older ages will accumulate less. More than half of employees hired in 2014 who complete at least five years of service will fare better in the cash balance plan, which distributes benefits more evenly across the workforce.

 

Richard W. JohnsonBenjamin G. Southgate

Read complete document: PDF

Document date: April 30, 2014
Released online: April 30, 2014




Testimony on the Status of the Highway Trust Fund and Options for Financing Highway Spending.

Testimony by Joseph Kile, Assistant Director for Microeconomic Studies, before the Committee on Finance, United State Senate

In 2013, governments at various levels spent $156 billion to build, operate, and maintain highways, and they spent $60 billion on mass transit systems. For both types of infrastructure, most of that spending was by state and local governments; about one-quarter of that total came from the federal government, mostly through the Highway Trust Fund. For several decades, the trust fund’s balances were stable or growing, but more recently, annual spending for highways and transit has exceeded the amounts credited to the trust fund from taxes collected on gasoline, diesel fuel, and other transportation-related products and activities. Since 2008, in fact, lawmakers have transferred $54 billion from the U.S. Treasury’s general fund to the Highway Trust Fund so that the trust fund’s obligations could be met in a timely manner.

Moreover, with its current revenue sources, the Highway Trust Fund cannot support spending at the current rate. The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) estimates that, at the end of fiscal year 2014, the balance in the trust fund’s highway account will fall to about $2 billion and the balance in its transit account will be only $1 billion. Spending for highways and transit will be $45 billion and $8 billion, respectively. By comparison, revenues collected for those purposes are projected to be $33 billion and $5 billion, respectively. The Department of Transportation (DOT) has indicated that it will probably need to delay payments to states at some point during the summer of 2014 in order to keep the fund’s balance above zero, as required by law. Then, if nothing changes, the trust fund’s balance will be insufficient to meet all of its obligations in fiscal year 2015, and it will incur steadily accumulating shortfalls in subsequent years. If lawmakers do not take action, all of the receipts credited to the fund in 2015 would be needed to meet obligations made before that year; none would be available to cover any new commitments that would be made in 2015.

Several options (or combinations of those options) could be pursued to address projected shortfalls in the Highway Trust Fund:

  • Spending on highways and transit could be reduced. If lawmakers chose to address the projected shortfalls solely by cutting spending, no new obligations from the fund’s highway account or its transit account could be made in fiscal year 2015; that would also be the case for the transit account in fiscal year 2016. Over the 2015–2024 period, the highway account would see a decrease of more than 30 percent in the authority to obligate funds, and the transit account’s authority would decrease by about 65 percent, compared with CBO’s baseline projections.
  • Revenues credited to the trust fund could be increased—for example, by raising existing taxes on motor fuels or other transportation-related products and activities or by imposing new taxes on highway users, such as vehicle-miles traveled (VMT) taxes. The staff of the Joint Committee on Taxation (JCT) estimates that a one-cent increase in taxes on motor fuels—primarily gasoline and diesel fuel—would raise about $1.5 billion each year for the trust fund. If lawmakers chose to meet obligations projected for the trust fund solely by raising revenues, they would need to increase motor fuel taxes by an amount between 10 cents and 15 cents per gallon, starting in fiscal year 2015.
  • The trust fund could continue to receive supplements from the Treasury’s general fund. Lawmakers could maintain funding for surface transportation programs at the average amounts provided in recent years, but to do so they would need to transfer $18 billion in 2015 and between $13 billion and $18 billion every year thereafter through 2024. Spending resulting from such general fund transfers could be paid for by reducing other spending or by increasing broad-based taxes, or such transfers could add to deficits and thus increase federal borrowing.

The projected shortfalls in the Highway Trust Fund have generated interest in greater use of borrowing by state and local governments to finance highway projects. In particular, state and local governments (and some private entities) can use tax-preferred bonds that convey subsidies from the federal government in the form of tax exemptions, credits, or payments in lieu of credits to finance road construction. Similarly, some of those governments make use of direct loans from the federal government to finance projects.

Federal policies that encourage partnerships between the private sector and a state or local government may facilitate the provision of additional transportation infrastructure, but a review of those projects offers little evidence that public-private partnerships provide additional resources for roads except in cases in which states or localities have chosen to restrict spending through self-imposed legal constraints or budgetary limits.

Only a small number of highway projects in the United States have involved public-private partnerships with private financing. Some that have been financed through tolls have failed financially because the private-sector partners initially overestimated their revenues and as a result have been unable to fully repay their projects’ debts. Perhaps as a response, projects that are still under construction rely less on tolls as a revenue source; more commonly, private partners are compensated from a state’s general funds, thus limiting the private risk of not being repaid and leaving the risk of lower-than-expected revenues to the public partner.

Regardless of its source, however, borrowing is only a mechanism for making future tax revenues or user fee revenues available to pay for projects sooner; it is not a new source of revenues. Borrowing can augment the funds available for highway projects, but revenues that are committed for repaying borrowed funds will be unavailable to pay for new transportation projects or other government spending in the future.

Read Complete Document

May 6, 2014




Financial Accounting Foundation Issues 2013 Annual Report.

Offers Glimpse into “The Road Ahead” for the FAF, the FASB, and the GASB

Norwalk, CT, May 8, 2014—The Financial Accounting Foundation (FAF) today issued its 2013 Annual Report, available online at www.accountingfoundation.org.

Themed as “The Road Ahead,” the 2013 Annual Report outlines the future direction of the FAF and its standard-setting Boards, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB). As stated in the introduction:

The issues we face are varied and complex. How should we continue to work toward more comparable global accounting standards? To what degree should we provide accounting alternatives for private companies while preserving the strength and consistency of GAAP? How can we make the financial position of governments more transparent for taxpayers, bond buyers and other users of financial statements?

These questions are examined from the perspective of the leaders of all three organizations and in letters to stakeholders from FAF Board Chairman Jeffrey J. Diermeier, FAF President & Chief Executive Officer Teresa S. Polley, FASB Chairman Russell G. Golden, and GASB Chairman David A. Vaudt.

The report also provides illustrative, high-level overviews of the accomplishments of the FAF, the FASB, and the GASB, presented in a way that gives even the most time-pressed readers a comprehensive overview of the year’s highlights.

Other features in the 2013 Annual Report include:

Those interested in receiving a hard-copy version of the annual report may request one by e-mailing[email protected]. Hard copies will be distributed in late May.

For more information about the FAF, visit www.accountingfoundation.org.

About the Financial Accounting Foundation

The FAF is responsible for the oversight, administration, and finances of both the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and its counterpart for state and local government, the Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB). The Foundation is also responsible for selecting the members of both Boards and their respective Advisory Councils.




GFOA: Tips on Creating a Budget Document that Communicates with Stakeholders.

The importance of the budget document can’t be overstated. It identifies the services that will be provided to the community, and how they will be paid for, and provides the rationale behind key decisions. Effective Presentation of the Budget Document, a GFOA best practice that was updated this year, provides tips on organization, level of detail, design, consistency, highlights, and format to help governments create a high-quality document that stakeholders will be able to understand – improving transparency and promoting better communication.



Detroit Files New Debt Plan.

CHICAGO — Detroit filed an updated plan of debt adjustment with the bankruptcy court Monday that incorporates new settlements with retirees and public safety unions.

It’s the city’s fourth updated debt plan and disclosure statement. Detroit has continued to revise its bankruptcy exit plan as it secured a series of settlements with major creditors over the past several weeks.

Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes approved the documents later Monday, allowing Detroit to begin sending out ballots to creditors next week, with a voting deadline of July 12. A trial on the confirmation plan is set to begin July 24.

The bankrupt city has yet to reach deals with its limited-tax general obligation bondholders, despite court-ordered mediation sessions last week, or holders of $1.4 billion of pension certificates of participation.

A plan to privatize the Detroit Water and Sewer Department, considered crucial to the city’s Chapter 9 exit, also remains elusive as does a settlement with holders of the city’s $5.9 billion of water and sewer bonds.

The 406-page debt plan includes a new deal with the Detroit Police Lieutenants and Sergeants Association and the Detroit Police Command Officers Association for new five-year contracts. The city’s largest police union has not signed onto the settlement and is reportedly challenging proposals to halt retiree health care benefits to police officers and pay new hires $14 an hour.

Also new is the city’s proposal that if it privatizes the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department within seven years, it would use 50% of the proceeds from the deal to restore pension cuts. All the proceeds previously were to go to the city’s general fund. The general employees fund would get priority over the police and fire pensions, according to the disclosure statement.

The plan also says the state of Michigan may give the city $195 million in a one-time lump sum to go toward its pension debt as part of the so-called grand bargain over pensions and city owned art. The state had originally planned to bond against its tobacco settlement funds to generate $350 million over 20 years. The smaller lump-sum plan is reportedly more politically palatable for state lawmakers as they prepare to vote on legislation in May or June.

Like the third version of the plan, the new one includes deals reached with the three insurers of the city’s unlimited-tax general obligation bonds, a court-appointed committee representing retirees, as well as its public safety and general employee pension systems.

Under current deals, the city’s police and fire pensioners would see no pension cuts and roughly 55% cuts to cost-of-living adjustments. General employees would see a 4.5% pension cut and elimination of COLAs. The Detroit Retired City Employees Association, which represents 8,000 retirees, agreed Friday to support the plan and recommend its members vote to approve it.

The city wants to pay retirees $450 million to cover a $4.3 billion other post-employment benefit liability, translating into a roughly 10% recovery for that debt, considered among the least secured.

Nearly all the settlements hinge on the grand bargain that has Michigan contributing up to $350 million over 20 years, or $194 million in a lump sum, to match private foundation funds and a $100 million contribution from the Detroit Institute of Arts. The money would be used for the city’s pension debt and would protect the city owned art from a sale, by transferring the museum to an independent authority. The bargain requires all retiree and pension creditors approve the plan, that they give up the right to sue the state, and that the plan itself be confirmed by Sept. 30, 2014.

The latest plan strikes a provision that would have required water and sewer bondholders who agree to receive new DWSD bonds to give up any rights to object to the plan on any grounds.

Detroit has not yet reached a settlement with limited-tax GO holders, despite court-ordered mediation held on May 1. The city is negotiating with Ambac Assurance Corp., which insures roughly $383 million of unsecured LTGOs.

BY CAITLIN DEVITT

MAY 5, 2014 3:04pm ET




Nossaman Posts Draft Model P3 Legislation for Public Buildings and Invites Comments.

As demand for government services continues to grow across the United States, federal, state and local government agencies must identify innovative and cost effective methods to deliver essential social infrastructure. While many agencies are interested in pursuing innovative P3 delivery models to procure public buildings, they often lack the clear necessary legislation to authorize P3 deals.

We offer below, for consideration and comment, a draft model social infrastructure P3 bill.  We developed the draft legislation based on our experience advising US public agencies using innovative delivery methods for other classes of infrastructure. This draft model legislation seeks to provide the authorizations that a public sponsor requires to engage in the P3 delivery of a social infrastructure project.  The draft model legislation is also intended to be a flexible instrument and as such it does not set out rigid rules that a public sponsor must follow in the execution of P3 project.

We invite you to review and consider our draft bill.

We are very interested in receiving your comments and suggestions.  Please send your comments by June 11, 2014 to Yukiko Kojima at[email protected] or to Andrée Blais at [email protected].

POSTED ON APRIL 28, 2014 BY ANDRÉE BLAIS




Bond Insurance Then & Now: The Revival of an Industry.

If you’re new to the municipal market, you may not know what bond insurance is. And if you’re a veteran in the market, you certainly don’t recognize it. Bond insurance has undergone a makeover unlike any other segment of the municipal bond industry.

With the rapid dissolution of a then-$2.5 trillion business, the demise of the financial guarantors served as testament to the sprawling devastation of a financial crisis that left no asset class unscathed.

Exposure to toxic residential mortgage-backed securities that went bust with the pop of the housing bubble stuck the insurers with a fat tab to pay, with companies that had ventured into the collateralized debt end of the risk pool getting hit the hardest.

As industry leaders like Ambac, MBIA Corp. and Financial Guaranty Insurance Co. were stripped of their ostensible first-class triple-A ratings, the enormity of the mortgage crisis unfolded and restructurings permeated the bond insurance business. The number of municipal bonds issued with a guarantee plummeted, from as high as 57% before the recession to 19% in 2008, and to 3.5% in 2012.

The financial crisis incited a debate over the merits of insurance that sent market penetration by insurers into a free-fall that hasn’t shown signs of abating — until now.

With freshly upgraded ratings on Assured Guaranty and MBIA-owned National Public Finance Guarantee, the bond insurers are hoping rising interest rates will push more state and local governments this year to consider the savings that come with piggybacking on an insurer’s rating.

But where National, which plans to restart business, and Build America Mutual, the newcomer, see hope for rebirth from the ashes, many muni bond buyers see an antiquated model that’s had its time in the sun.

And then there are the rating agencies — chastised by some on Wall Street for not getting the downgrade ball moving fast enough — which come down somewhere in the middle.

One thing they can all agree on: bond insurance will never be the same.

CRISIS FALLOUT

In 2007, around half of all new municipal bonds carried insurance. A product that originated as a competitive enhancement had become a commodity, and few buyers of bonds were looking at the underlying issuer rating. When it became clear that many of the loans behind those structured transactions would inevitably default, the insurers unraveled.

Standard & Poor’s hit the industry with a slew of downgrades in early June 2008 and Moody’s Investors Service followed suit weeks later. Within a year, the stock price of Ambac, which introduced bond insurance to the muni market in the early 1970s, was barely worth more than a dollar. By 2010, Ambac and FGIC had filed for bankruptcy, other major players stopped writing new business and MBIA launched muni-only National.

Assured Guaranty, having acquired former league leader Financial Security Assurance, emerged as the only — and by default, biggest — bond insurer selling its product on the market. Assured continued business unchallenged, all the while fighting in courts against the banks that packaged the toxic policies in the first place.

In July 2012, former FSA veterans launched Build America Mutual, a mutual insurance company that promised it would only insure safer, essential public-purpose municipal bonds. In its first year, BAM took 39% of the total insured market by par amount.

Now, with National poised to write new business, competition is once more a word in the bond insurance vocabulary.

CRITICAL YEAR

National’s timing couldn’t be better. Bond insurers wrapped 3.6% of all new bond issues this past year, and while the rate remains less than a 10th of what it was before the financial crisis, it represents the first sign of growth in a decade.

“I believe it is the critical year for insurers,” Mark Palmer, an equity analyst at BTIG, told The Bond Buyer. “What we have now are all the pieces in place for an increase in demand for bond insurance.”

Those pieces were expectations for rising interest rates, S&P’s March rating upgrades of Assured and National to AA and AA-minus, respectively, and a Detroit-driven awareness in the market that if your defaulted bond is insured, you’ll still get paid.

“It’s a pivotal year,” John Dillon, chief muni bond strategist at Morgan Stanley Wealth Management, said in an interview. “Away from the upgrades, which I think are helpful, the bankruptcy of Detroit has proven the value of bond insurance.”

While most of the fixed-income investing community shudders at the thought of rising interest rates, the insurers embrace it. Higher rates mean higher costs for municipalities looking to sell bonds, who would then, in theory, be more willing to pay for insurance.

“If, as some believe, the 10-year is going to go from 2.6% to something in the mid-3% range, that would create an environment that would be great for bond insurers,” Palmer said.

Palmer is one of just a few remaining equity analysts actively following publicly traded Assured, MBIA and Ambac. One could say he represents the bullish side, with target prices on Assured and MBIA’s stock at 54% and 80% higher than they’re currently trading.

“The problem for the past couple of years has been it hasn’t made sense for a municipality to pay up for bond insurance when their funding costs are already so low,” Palmer said.

But the value proposition of bond insurance doesn’t seem to be a self-evident idea in the municipal marketplace. After all, newcomers to the buy-side only see three insured bonds come by their screen for every 100 new ones. And those who remember insurance from its glory days now see a very different product.

VALUE PROPOSITION

With the introduction of BAM and the July 2013 launch of Assured’s muni-only Municipal Assurance Corp., insurers now target the smaller traditional municipal issuers who don’t carry the name recognition needed to make a sale in the marketplace. For them, insurance provides not just cost savings, but liquidity.

Assured and National may occasionally wrap the larger, riskier transactions, but single-A credits are now the insurers’ bread and butter.

For an A-rated issuer selling bonds in the market as of April 1, wrapping with an AA-rated bond insurer would save the issuer 46 basis points on a 10-year bond, according to Municipal Market Data. On the 20-year bond, insurance would save the issuer 50 basis points. On the short end, insurers currently don’t add much value: the yield for an A-rated five-year bond was 1.44%, compared with 1.75% on AA.

The value of insurance has undeniably withered. In 2009, the same issuer would save 160 basis points on 10-year bonds by issuing along an insurer’s triple-A yield curve instead of their own single-A curve. No longer boasting the triple-A rating, insurers are waiting for an interest jump to buoy the business.

“Our business is countercyclical to rates. As rates go up our business grows,” Billy O’Keefe, co-head of public finance at Assured, told The Bond Buyer. “In the second half of last year, when rates picked up and spreads were wider, we had the best fourth quarter we’ve had in a while.”

The spread between single-A and double-A yields fell to a decade-low 41 basis points in April 2013. The gap has since grown closer to 50 basis points, but still remains well below 2009 levels, when the spread was 140 basis points.

The economy will continue to improve, quantitative easing will come to a close, and Federal Reserve Board chair Janet Yellen will eventually have to hike interest rates. Issuers will look to Assured, BAM and National to fill that gap, or so the story goes.

REBUILDING THE BRAND

But while credit spreads are tighter than in 2009, they’re actually well above pre-financial crisis levels, when insurance was booming. The difference between single-A and double-A yields today is almost four times what it was from 2005 to 2007, MMD data shows.

“I don’t buy the credit-spread argument,” Dan Heckman, a municipal strategist at US Bank, said in an interview. “I just don’t think buyers today put that much value in it. We’re happy it’s back but the reality is it’s going to turn few buyers from a non-buy decision to a buy decision.”

The challenge for bond insurers, buy-side analysts say, is in reclaiming the investor appeal that a guarantee once carried. While higher spreads may boost the value of the product for sellers, the benefit of insurance could be muted without receptive buyers.

“It’s hard to look at it simply at a spread basis,” Patrick Early, chief muni analyst at Wells Fargo Advisors, said in an interview. “The landscape is completely different now. There was reliance on insurers pre-crisis with buyers used to seeing those names — it was just the way things were done.”

In the post-crisis world, many investors now make decisions based on an underlying rating, regardless of credit enhancement. Insurers need to be proactive in approaching the institutional investor community as well as the issuers, analysts said.

“With the recent upgrades, this will certainly be a good year to see how well the insurers will execute marketing plans and expand penetration,” Patrick Early, chief muni analyst at Wells Fargo Advisors, said in an interview.

Insurers as a whole must rebuild the brand, and the reformed National will need to sell a new image that will put negative stigma attached to its parent company, MBIA, at rest.

NATIONAL’S RETURN

“They’re going to have to convince people that they were just rehabilitating the company during their hibernation,” John Mousseau, vice president and portfolio manager at Cumberland Advisors, said in an interview. “They’re not starting from scratch, but there will be a little pricing pressure on premiums.”

With the company eager to begin rebuilding its books, National is likely to be faced with issuers looking to get a cheap price on insurance. Issuers looking to take advantage of the resurrected company will be a challenge in the earlier phases, BTIG’s Palmer said.

National CEO Bill Fallon is well aware of the tactic.

“We’re not trying to cut price to win market share or anything along those lines,” he said in an interview, adding that serious inquiries are already coming. “We’ve had several calls for our insurance both on the secondary and primary side, and that’s without really doing a whole lot apart from people knowing about the S&P upgrade.”

For National, which hasn’t written new policies since the financial crisis, a string of settlements with Bank of America and Societe Generale in May 2013 for more than $2 billion was a turning point. The company found liquidity after being repaid on a $1.7 billion loan it made to parent MBIA; it was then just a waiting game for the rating agencies.

In March, the AA-minus rating came from Standard & Poor’s.

“Whereas in the old days it was a triple-A rating from two rating agencies, it appears nowadays that it’s a double-A rating by S&P that’s the requirement to do business,” Fallon said.

The waiting game continues for Moody’s, which rates National at Baa1 with a positive outlook. The rating agency has Assured at A2, the equivalent of an S&P single-A rating, which the company has openly contested.

“A lot of this depends on Moody’s,” said Howard Cure, director of municipal research at Evercore Wealth Management. “If they upgrade insurers it would help the business. The future of the industry depends on rating agencies.”

Moody’s plans to revisit its industry commentary, the rating agency told The Bond Buyer. And while National has a positive outlook, Assured’s rating remains stable.

“The sector has not recovered from the financial crisis but has stabilized, and it’s still a very small fraction of what we saw pre-crisis,” Stanislas Rouyer, associate managing director at Mooody’s, said in an interview. “It seems to show some increased penetration, but it’s too early to tell if it’s the start of a trend or not.”

$20 BILLION FOR EVERYONE

The addition of a third competitor could have mixed results on the market. Insurers are hoping National’s added business will invigorate the market, but increased competition could mean lower premiums for insurance. S&P reported in November that Assured and BAM were getting less compensation for taking on risk, with Assured’s risk-adjusting pricing ratio, a risk-versus-return measure of the company’s portfolio, falling to 3.55% from 4.46% in 2012. BAM’s was 3.46%.

“The new competition from BAM has not breathed too much life into the market,” Rouyer said. “It’s mostly just redistributed market share and not enlarged the pie.”

As National builds out its marketing strategy and takes hold in the market, so will BAM continue its effort to gain name recognition among investors.

BAM, which opened for business in July 2012, received its initial startup capital from White Mountains Insurance Group, a financial services holding company. White Mountains owns $503 million in BAM surplus notes, which accrue interest annually.

That interest was at $59 million as of Dec. 31, 2013, putting BAM at a GAAP operating loss of $79 million in 2013. But the interest isn’t compounded, and the insurer isn’t under pressure to begin payment on the debt until 2042.

BAM’s key insurance metrics — statutory capital and claims paying resources — were relatively stable through its first full year of operations, with statutory capital down $13.6 million to $470 million by year-end. Claims paying resources were unchanged as of March 31, at $583 million.

“There’s a very good playing field for BAM to come and extoll its values in this market,” Rick Holzinger, head of investor relations at BAM, said in an interview. “We have no legacy portfolio and none of the noise associated with one.”

With full registration in all 50 states, 2014 will be an important year for the startup insurer, which nabbed 39% of the market from Assured in 2013. With a rating now equal to BAM’s, Assured is looking to take some of that back.

Competition among three insurers, if premiums are kept at healthy levels, may indeed be the piece of the puzzle needed to get the market to animate investors once more. In the first quarter of 2014, market penetration continued its slow climb from last year, moving toward 5%.

“People are so focused on the old days when it used to be 50% penetration,” National’s Fallon said. “You don’t need $60 billion to make this business model work. You could do it at $20 billion. Now there are three competitors – if they each do $20 billion in par, the economics should work fine for everyone.”

BY OLIVER RENICK and MARIA BONELLO

APR 30, 2014 6:16pm ET




Detroit Strikes Tentative 5-Year Deal with 14 Unions in Bankruptcy Case.

Detroit has reached a five-year agreement with 14 of its unions, including AFSCME — the city’s largest union — in its bankruptcy case, according to a statement issued this morning by federal mediators who are assisting with the city’s restructuring.

The tentative agreement covering 3,500 workers is among a flurry of deals that Detroit has been able to reach in recent weeks as progress toward completion of its historic bankruptcy reorganization case has intensified.

“This agreement, in principle, offers an opportunity for the unions to provide regular input and guidance to city management,” Ed McNeil, chief spokesman for the Coalition of Detroit Unions, said in a statement.

The deal includes restoration of some pay for city workers who have faced wage freezes and a 10% pay cut in recent years, although details will vary by union, according to a person familiar with the proposal who wasn’t authorized to discuss it and spoke on condition of anonymity.

Other factors in the deal include work-rules concessions from the unions, the person said.

Detroit’s public safety unions, which have formed a coalition in negotiations with the city, are not part of the deal announced today, said Mark Diaz, president of the Detroit Police Officers Association. The public safety labor coalition also includes the Detroit Fire Fighters Association, the Detroit Police Command Officers Association and the Detroit Police Lieutenants and Sergeants Association.

Diaz said the public safety unions are still open to negotiating with the city, but proposed contract terms so far have been unacceptable. The city has been offering police officers wages starting at $14 an hour, Diaz said.

“What I’ve seen so far is, essentially, another pay cut. I understand the city’s in bankruptcy. But the reality is, the city is going to come out of bankruptcy, and they’re not going to have the debts they have,” Diaz said. “We’ll see what’s going to happen this week.”

U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes commended the unions, retirees and other groups that have negotiated deals so far, calling the work, along with mediated efforts to rescue the Detroit Institute of Arts and city pensioners, “extraordinary and unprecedented in the history of bankruptcy.

“I once again strongly encourage those who are still involved in negotiations over settlements to continue to work hard and in good faith to achieve those settlements,” Rhodes said during a hearing on the city’s latest version of its bankruptcy exit plan, filed late Friday.

Exact terms of Detroit’s deals with the 14 unions were not disclosed, leaving open the question of whether the unions agreed to concessions that will help Gov. Rick Snyder gain support in the Legislature for the $350 million he has pledged for the city’s bankruptcy restructuring.

The collective bargaining agreement terms “between the city and the coalition unions are fair and balanced,” the federal mediators said in the statement. “They provide security for union workers and, at the same time, provide an economically feasible agreement for the city as it emerges from bankruptcy.”

But McNeil also warned against the drawbacks of privatization. This year, Detroit has hired private companies to handle trash collection and has asked for bids from private companies to operate the city’s water and sewer system.

“All too often, the city management looks to privatization as the answer, and all too often, privatization proves ineffective,” said McNeil, who also is special assistant to the president of the American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees Council 25.

Emergency manager Kevyn Orr’s office would not disclose additional details, saying that terms are still being finalized. “Because these negotiations remain subject to a federal mediation order, the city will refrain from issuing any statement about the details of the agreement until such time as authorized by the federal mediator,” Orr’s office said in a statement.

The tentative deals — reached with assistance from a mediation team led by Chief U.S. District Judge Gerald Rosen — must be approved by members of the unions and by Rhodes as part of the city’s Chapter 9 case.

Detroit’s unions are now among the last major groups of creditors to reach a framework agreement with the city.

The city has reached deals in recent weeks with its pension funds, its retiree committee, two banks and its general obligation bondholders.

“More good news today,” David Heiman, a Jones Day lawyer for Detroit, said this morning at the court hearing. “I think we have very much of a consensus building on these important issues. … We still have some lifting to do.”

Heiman said all of the parties that have reached agreements in mediation have “stretched themselves, including the city. We’ve come together to find common ground. … It was not easy. In fact, at some times it seemed impossible.”

One of the biggest issues that still must be worked out before the city can emerge from bankruptcy is a restructuring of the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department. Detroit initially proposed the creation of a regional authority with Oakland, Macomb and Wayne counties but was unable to reach an agreement after 10 months of negotiations.

Rhodes urged regional leaders to negotiate seriously for a regional authority to run the public utility and has asked the counties to try again with the help of mediators.

The results of mediation so far “certainly establish that, with hard work and good faith, nothing is impossible,” Rhodes said. “They should proceed on the basis that on the right terms a regional water authority is in everybody’s best interests.”

Terms of Detroit’s existing restructuring plan are contingent on the state Legislature’s approval of the $350 million Snyder pledged toward an $816-million rescue fund in a deal that would significantly reduce pension cuts and spin off the Detroit Institute of Arts. The deal is being backed by wealthy philanthropic foundations and the DIA. Without that money, pension cuts would be far deeper.

Rhodes this morning told city lawyers that, given questions about whether the Legislature will approve the state’s share of the deal, they need to create a clear way for retirees to vote in support of the city’s bankruptcy exit plan if the state money comes through — and for their votes to count against the plan if lawmakers balk.

House Speaker Jase Bolger, R-Marshall, has said that unions must contribute cash to the deal for the City of Detroit before the Legislature will act on Snyder’s funding request.

On Monday, Bolger congratulated the city and the unions and called the agreements a “good sign,” but reiterated his call for unions to contribute money.

“I hope the unions will join the state’s taxpayers in putting money that would otherwise go to legal bills into protecting their retirees,” Bolger said in a statement.

Last week, Senate Majority Leader Randy Richardville, R-Monroe, and Snyder have resisted a cash contribution from unions as a condition for support.

“We’re seeing very constructive progress on people coming to agreements,” Snyder said last week. “A settlement would be, by far, the best answer, so hopefully we can all work towards that.”

Rhodes asked the city and creditors to have a final draft of the bankruptcy plan filed by Friday.

By Brent Snavely, Matt Helms and Joe Guillen

BY  | APRIL 29, 2014

(c)2014 the Detroit Free Press




Pension Reporting Change Has Jurisdictions Reviewing their Funding Policies.

GASB Statement No. 68, Accounting and Financial Reporting for Pensions, is scheduled to take effect for the fiscal period that ends June 30, 2015. Once the standard goes into effect, the actuarial valuation report – which has always played an important role as the basic source document for information regarding actuarially determined contributions and the funded status of pension and other post-employment benefit plans – will play an even more critical role, as funding information for pensions will no longer automatically be provided in financial reports. In its Reviewing, Understanding, and Using the Actuarial Valuation Report and Its Role in Plan Funding best practice, the GFOA recommends that state and local government finance officials and others with decision-making authority carefully review and understand their actuarial valuation report and use the information it contains to make policy decisions that ensure that pension benefits are funded in a sustainable manner – as discussed in Core Elements of a Pension Funding Policy, another GFOA best practice. Core Elements recommends that jurisdictions adopt funding policies that ensure their defined benefit plans will be funded equitably and sustainably, and provides guidelines for doing so.



BondUnderwriter Rolls Out New Issue Muni Bond Platform for Individual Investors.

SAUSALITO, CA, Apr 29, 2014 (Marketwired via COMTEX) — BondUnderwriter, Inc. (BU) has expanded its proprietary online new issue municipal bond platform to allow retail investors to create advanced customized searches and access the primary bond markets.

“Tax-exempt bond buyers often find it difficult to access the marketplace, even though 70 percent of the $3.8 trillion municipal bond market is owned by individuals and 34 percent is held directly in individual accounts,” said M.P. Henderson, founder and CEO of BondUnderwriter, Inc.

Newly launched features allow bond buyers to sign up for a free weekly calendar to search, view and select upcoming U.S. state and local government bond sales online. And now, bona fide investors also can connect directly with participating syndicate members to ultimately purchase tax-free and taxable fixed-income securities in the primary market.

The user-selected brokerage firms will determine investment suitability, provide pre-pricing, open accounts and take customer indications of interest and orders in advance of the actual bond sale, allowing for increased investor participation.

The BU(TM) database currently monitors upcoming bond sales on more than 4,000 state and local government issuers. For no charge, potential investors can sign up for customized email alerts that give them early notification of upcoming sales, or can subscribe to a weekly municipal bond calendar electronically distributed once a week. Each week there are approximately 70 new issue listings, averaging a total of $7 billion in par value.

“By offering our clients access to multiple brokerage firms’ new issues, we provide a comprehensive, one-stop shopping site for new issue municipal bonds,” Henderson said.

Each deal-specific interactive ebondpage(TM) includes issue details, pre-sale documents and various links to relevant data and contacts.

“Our established bond-investor audience will give issuers the extra assurance that their financing is an open process to all investors. This is also a win for taxpayers since increasing demand for the bonds should result in lower borrowing costs for public projects,” Henderson added.

Additional information is available at http://www.bondunderwriter.com and on Twitter at @Bondunderwriter.

Broker-dealers interested in participating in the BU retail network may contact the firm athttp://bondunderwriter.com/Contact.aspx . A one-minute video for fixed-income investors is at http://bondunderwriter.com/investor_video.html . A video for issuers also is available.

About BondUnderwriter BondUnderwriter, Inc., a financial technology firm, provides online posting and pre-order conduit services for new municipal bond issues. It was founded in 2008 by Mary P. Henderson, a 30-year municipal industry veteran. She was formerly president and managing director of public finance for Henderson Capital Partners LLC, a West Coast municipal underwriting firm. Headquarters are in Sausalito, Calif.




Moody's: First-Quarter 2014 US Public Finance Rating Revisions in Line with Improving Credit Conditions.

New York, April 29, 2014 — Upgrades made up a growing share of US public finance rating changes during first-quarter 2014, says Moody’s Investors Service in a new report, consistent with the trend of improving credit conditions in evidence since the second half of 2013. In the report “Positive Trend of Upgrades Continues,” Moody’s also says some pockets of the country are still facing fiscal pressure and revenue stagnation, which contributed to downgrades in the first quarter again outnumbering upgrades, as they have every quarter since 2008. In general, however, Moody’s views credit conditions as improving.

Because there were downgrades of a few issuers with large amounts of rated debt during the quarter, the amount of debt downgraded during the quarter greatly exceeded the amount of debt upgraded. Specifically, the par value of the debt Moody’s downgraded came to $119.4 billion, while the amount upgraded totaled $14.4 billion.

“Most public finance sectors are seeing improvements in credit quality, which will contribute to increased upgrades if those trends continue,” says Analyst Chandra Ghosal. “However, pressured sectors and regions will weigh on overall rating activity, resulting in a larger number of downgrades for the remainder of the year in most sectors.”

During the quarter, the number of upgrades nearly doubled to 97, the highest number since third-quarter 2009. Nearly half of the upgrades resulted from Moody’s updating its US local government general obligation debt methodology in January.

There were also 150 downgrades, making up 61% of all rating changes.

By sector, downgrades accounted for 57% of the 180 rating changes in the local government sector, 70% of the 20 rating changes in the not-for-profit hospital sector, and 65% of the 23 rating changes in the higher education and other not-for-profit sector.

The most notable downgrades were the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico ($55 billion par value), University of California ($18.8 billion) and the City of Chicago ($11.6 billion). The largest upgrades were the California Department of Water Resources Power Supply System ($6.6 billion) and the City of Atlanta Airport Enterprise ($1.9 billion).

For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report at https://www.moodys.com/research/US-Public-Finance-Rating-Revisions-for-Q1-2014-Positive-Trend–PBM_PBM169748.




Muni Commentary - Where's the Infrastructure Volume?

The municipal market continues to grapple with a limited supply in the primary market issuance. One of the frequent questions we get when talking with investors is “Where is the volume?” With historically low rates, why aren’t issuers taking advantage of this environment to access capital? We think this issuance malaise reflects a lack of issuer confidence exacerbated by uncertainty about federal policy and/or economic factors, such as weak sales growth. However, there are areas within the infrastructure space1 where issuance is on track with prior years. We also think there will be primary market deals in the infrastructure space to invest in later this year with more supply available in certain areas than others.

Read the full commentary here.




WSJ: A Discount on Muni Funds.

Many closed-end funds that own municipal bonds can be bought at a discount to the value of their assets, an opportunity for investors who are willing to wager that interest rates don’t soar and fiscal meltdowns such as the one in Detroit remain rare.

The funds issue a fixed number of shares that can be bought or sold on exchanges like stocks. In contrast to conventional mutual funds, closed-end funds can trade for more or less than the value of the underlying assets. The discount or premium depends on how investors view the risk of the investments held by the fund.As of March 31, the discount on the S-Network Municipal Bond Closed-End Fund Index, which tracks 84 municipal-bond closed-end funds, was 6.87%, down from 7.29% at the end of December, according to S-Network Global Indexes, an index publisher based in New York.

The potential to buy at a discount is one reason some investors are drawn to closed-end funds. In addition, investors often want the income the funds can generate. Many of the funds use borrowed money to increase their holdings, which typically results in higher yields.

Not for Everyone

Closed-end funds aren’t usually suited to short-term investors, because the discounts can persist and even widen. The use of borrowed money also can make share prices more volatile, by magnifying a fund’s gains or losses.

The municipal-bond market has been roiled by Detroit’s bankruptcy filing in July and Puerto Rico’s fiscal problems, which include a hefty debt of roughly $70 billion.

 

In addition, municipal-bond prices have taken a hit since May, when Ben Bernanke, then-chairman of the Federal Reserve, said the central bank could begin slowing its asset-purchase program. Mr. Bernanke’s statement led many investors to sell bonds, pushing down prices and driving up yields, which move in the opposite direction.

But some experts believe investors are selling bonds indiscriminately and note that yields on municipal bonds have historically been less sensitive to rising rates than Treasurys.

Fears that interest rates will rise further are damping demand for closed-end funds that hold municipal bonds, says Patrick Galley, chief investment officer at RiverNorth Capital Management, a Chicago-based investment firm that manages $2.1 billion.

A Buying Opportunity

Nonetheless, he says, “for those investors who have muni-bond exposure or other fixed-income-like exposure, this is a great time to invest” in the funds, because of the current discounts. Discounts will narrow as interest rates stabilize or perhaps even as they rise, “taking some air out of the fear in fixed income,” Mr. Galley says.

Investors who own municipal bonds in a mutual fund, for example, might want to consider selling and buying that same exposure at a discount through a closed-end fund, says Mr. Galley, who bought shares in the funds for his clients late last year and earlier this year.

Paul Winter, president of Five Seasons Financial Planning in Salt Lake City, bought a number of municipal-bond closed-end funds last year, focusing on those with lower leverage ratios, and he says he hasn’t sold any of them yet.

“It seemed like a great opportunity to rebalance clients out of stocks and into bonds,” he says.

Among the funds he holds are Western Asset Municipal High Income Fund, Invesco Municipal Income Opportunities Trust and Eaton Vance National Municipal Opportunities Trust, which traded at discounts of 9.79%, 6.43% and 10.15%, respectively, as of April 15, according to Chicago-based investment-research firm Morningstar.

Mr. Winter, whose firm manages $36 million, says he is reluctant to add to his holdings at current prices. But, he adds, “I’m still closer to being a buyer on weakness than a seller on strength.”

The Risk of Leverage

Closed-end funds aren’t appropriate for the most conservative investors, says Mariana Bush, who heads the closed-end fund research group at Wells Fargo Advisors.

Most of funds will suffer the additional volatility that comes with leverage, she says. And it may take some time for the discounts to narrow, a process that likely would be driven by the market feeling more comfortable about interest-rate risk, she adds.

Nonetheless, Nicholas LaVerghetta, a principal at NCM Capital Management, says he has been adding to his municipal-bond closed-end fund holdings over the past six months.

“There is interest-rate and leverage risk, but the 6% plus in tax-free income is compensating us for that risk,” says Mr. LaVerghetta, whose Ramsey, N.J., firm manages $82 million.

By

DAISY MAXEY

Updated April 18, 2014 8:37 p.m. ET

Write to Daisy Maxey at [email protected]




WSJ: Investors Embrace 'Catastrophe Bonds.'

Insurance companies are taking advantage of the appetite for high-yielding debt by selling bonds that can force investors to help pay for the cost of natural disasters.

With the U.S. hurricane season about a month away, insurers are issuing “catastrophe bonds” at the fastest clip since before the financial crisis. Insurers sell the bonds to help cover potential claims from hurricanes, tornadoes, earthquakes and other major insured risks. While losses on so-called cat bonds have been rare over the years, investors can forfeit both interest payments and their principal if disaster costs exceed designated levels, which gives insurers the right to tap the funds. The bonds have floating interest rates and are usually paid off upon maturity in three or four years.

Cat-bond issuance in the first quarter more than doubled from the year-earlier period, to $1.2 billion, and second-quarter issuance is expected to hit an all-time high above $3.5 billion, according to Willis Capital Markets & Advisory. More than $2 billion of deals have closed or been announced this quarter, Willis said.

Citizens Property Insurance Corp., the state-run insurer in Florida, this week boosted its latest cat-bond offering to at least $1.25 billion from $400 million, according to investors. It would be the largest single cat-bond transaction ever, according to Artemis, an insurance-linked data provider.

Yields on cat bonds, meanwhile, have sunk to their lowest level in nine years. The average quarterly yield dipped to 5.22% recently, from 9.61% in 2012.

Cat bonds historically have appealed to large pension funds but now are attracting a wider array of buyers, yield-hungry investors who otherwise might purchase corporate junk bonds, according to brokers, bankers and investors.

“Institutions of smaller and smaller size are becoming interested in the market,” said Brett Houghton, a managing principal at Connecticut-based Fermat Capital Management LLC, a long-standing specialist in catastrophe bonds, with $4.4 billion under management.

By

AL YOON And
LESLIE SCISM

April 23, 2014 6:44 p.m. ET




S&P: Why Local Economies Have a Greater Credit Impact on Local Governments than on U.S. Public Housing.

U.S. public housing authorities (PHAs) are mainly federally funded agencies that work in local communities to solve affordable housing problems. And while they function in a local government’s area, their ties to it can vary. Some have a tight reporting relationship with local government administration while others are entirely separate -– they just happen to serve in the same area. Also varying is the degree of policy coordination, which does not necessarily rely on a close administrative relationship.

Although a local government and a PHA both work to benefit residents of the same area, the factors that influence their respective credit quality differ greatly, resulting in divergent ratings. Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services rates 16 PHAs and 15 of the cities and counties in which these PHAs operate. City ratings fall into a wider range and are generally higher than the respective PHA ratings. This is because city and county governments typically have a stronger and more diverse revenue stream and greater control over revenues than do PHAs, which rely on federal funding that is largely beyond their control. (Watch the related CreditMatters TV segment titled, “How Standard & Poor’s Ratings On U.S. Public Housing Authorities And Their Local Governments Measure Up,” dated April 1, 2014.)

Overview

  • A PHA rating doesn’t necessarily move in tandem with that on its respective local government.
  • Local government and PHA revenue streams differ greatly.
  • PHAs that develop private housing can diversify their revenue sources, but they also become more vulnerable to shifts in the rental market.

Revenue Streams Are The Key Credit Difference

In general, cities have more flexibility in determining their revenue sources — whether they be through taxes, fees, or assessments. Of course, some of this mix depends upon the makeup of a local economy: A tourist-based economy may rely more on sales and use taxes, whereas a major city that is growing slowly may rely more on property taxes and assessments.

PHAs, by comparison, have virtually no control over their funding source — the federal government — nor how much they receive. A PHA’s federal funding is determined by Congress based on a formula determined by cost to operate a unit in a particular city although Congress can modify this. Those PHAs that have expanded into other lines of business, such as affordable nonpublic housing, have more flexibility but assume real estate market risk. As such, the ties to the local economy are stronger for PHAs with nonpublic housing development than for those that operate under the more traditional public housing model. However, among PHAs we rate, those with an emphasis on market-based development are located in cities with strong economies (Howard County, Md.) or have operated as nontraditional affordable housing providers with minimal disruption to revenues (Vancouver, Wash.).

Relative Economic Strength Affects Local Government More Than PHA Ratings

Under our local government criteria, released Sept. 12, 2013, the relative strength of a city or county local economy accounts for 30% of the indicative rating score. Although very weak scores on other factors, such as debt and pension liabilities or financial management, may ultimately constrain the rating, a higher general obligation (GO) rating in many cases indicates a strong underlying economic base linked to a broad and diverse metropolitan region. In these cases, the rating on the local government is likely higher than that on the PHA. In instances where the local economy is weak, the city GO rating may be closer to (or even below) that on the local PHA. Our economic analysis considers the health of the asset base on which local tax revenues rely, as well as the likelihood of demand for services that may arise as a result of economic deterioration.

Local governments can adjust their economy-dependent revenues . . .

Standard & Poor’s data suggests that 79% of municipal and county revenues are locally sourced while direct federal government funding represents just 4% of local government revenues, much of which is dedicated to capital spending. The historical stability of ratings in this sector, even throughout the recent economic downturn, speaks to the overall diversity and stability of local taxing entities’ revenue bases, as well as their financial flexibility relative to other sectors. This stability results from the way in which properties are assessed in many states, which effectively delinks tax base growth from overall market volatility. In addition, the lag between market cycles and their effect on revenues allows public officials to adjust rates to offset market effects. As the current economic recovery progresses, we expect local tax bases to stabilize and economically sensitive revenue growth to contribute to improving credit conditions for many local government entities (see “U.S. State And Local Government Credit Conditions Forecast: 2014 Will Be A Balancing Act,” published Dec. 17, 2013 on RatingsDirect).

. . .But pensions may be a weakness

Cities with ratings lower than those on their respective housing authority often have weak to very weak debt and contingent liability profiles, which account for 10% of the total score in our local government GO rating methodology. Large pension obligations pressure ChicagoNew Haven, Conn.; Bridgeport, Conn.; and Philadelphia. Among these four, only Philadelphia has presented a credible plan, in our view, to address these rising pension costs. While we view Chicago as having a strong economic profile, its four pension plans together are just 35% funded, and state legislation aiming to improve this funding status will cause Chicago’s current contributions to rise sharply in 2016 (see Chicago, published Feb. 24, 2014). In our opinion, Chicago’s lack of progress in making structural changes in pension funding is a significant negative credit factor. While high debt burdens can limit a housing authority rating, liabilities are typically limited to debt service, and retirement obligations do not present significant challenges. (We rate Chicago’s housing authority ‘AA’ and Chicago itself at ‘A+’.)

The local economy is less important to PHA ratings

For PHAs, which are federally funded, the local economy has a less direct influence on credit quality than it does for taxing entities. PHAs that we rate have waiting lists that may reach into the tens of thousands of households regardless of the economy. Vacancies are low, but so are rents, and subsidies are subject to federal appropriations, which are not correlated to the economy. In some cases, a strong economy results in a better subscore in economic fundamentals for a PHA, but that component contributes only 25% to the enterprise profile that we assign when rating a PHA. As other factors reduce the impact of a strong economy, no PHA receives a boost in its enterprise profile score to “extremely strong” from “very strong,” meaning that even an extremely strong economy cannot bump up the rating on a PHA. On the other hand, weak economies can affect a PHA’s rating. Two PHAs in adequate or vulnerable economies, Fall River, Mass. and Bridgeport, Conn., have “strong” enterprise profiles, which are one level down from the norm of “very strong” for PHAs. The resulting ratings are lower than they might be for Fall River Housing Authority and the Bridgeport Housing Authority, at ‘A-‘ and ‘A+’, respectively.

The main factors we use to determine the rating on a PHA are its level of federal government support, market position, financial performance, and debt profile. The economy figures into this only indirectly as the third most important of three factors that constitute the enterprise profile. The general mood for federal appropriations can vary, but not necessarily in accordance with that of the local area. Public housing appropriations are set by federal law, which are distinct from economic conditions or the demand for low-income housing. The condition of housing stock, the makeup of the programs the PHA offers (relative amount of Section 8 vouchers versus in-house development), and management strength are all factors that can augment or take away from the level of government financial support.

Reliance on the federal government boosts some PHA ratings but caps others

Because we consider PHAs to be government-related entities with a moderate likelihood of government support, a few PHAs benefit from this relationship in terms of the rating. The three lowest-rated PHAs — Bridgeport, Conn.; Fall River, Mass.; and San Francisco — have ratings higher than their stand-alone credit profiles would indicate because of the federal government support. However, significant reliance on the federal government can result in a cap on the rating to the U.S. sovereign rating. For example, just two PHAs we rate, Howard County Housing Commission, Md., and the Vancouver Housing Authority, Wash., receive less than half of their income from federal sources. Vancouver HA is one of five PHAs with the highest rating for the sector: ‘AA’. The revenues VHA has been able to generate resulted in a “very strong” financial profile score, one of only four at that level among the rated PHAs.

PHAs’ reliance on U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development dollars insulates them somewhat from local economic fluctuations but leaves them vulnerable to unpredictable federal funding decisions. Even when the national economy grows, appropriations for public housing often do not increase. There has been very little correlation between changes in spending on public housing and U.S. GDP (see chart). Tenant rental payments represent a small share of revenue and are not based on the rental market but on the resident’s income. Although strong demand for services enables housing providers to maintain waiting lists and reduce vacancy rates, their financial performance and credit quality ultimately depend on federal subsidies and rent payments from low- and moderate-income tenants, neither of which is strongly correlated with the local economy.

Download Chart Data

image

Criteria Revisions Give Local Government Ratings A Boost, While PHA Ratings Remain Stable

In recent months, Standard & Poor’s has raised a significant number of city and county ratings based on our new local government GO criteria. As our review of cities and counties under the new criteria began in September 2013, the pace of rating actions across U.S. public finance spiked to nearly three times the historical quarterly average, and nearly six out of seven actions were positive. As we apply the criteria to more cities and counties, positive rating actions will likely continue to outnumber negative changes in this sector. We expect that PHA ratings will remain more stable than in the local government sector although we have made two rating changes in recent months based on financial performance. The recent upgrades of many local governments may amplify the divergence between local government and local housing agency ratings.

Standard & Poor’s baseline economic forecast calls for lower unemployment and stronger GDP growth in 2014 than in 2013 and both the baseline and pessimistic scenarios call for stronger GDP growth in 2015 (see table 1). Local economies could benefit from such growth to varying degrees while PHAs will probably not see much impact. Because PHA ratings are tied to that of the U.S. sovereign (AA+/Stable/A-1+), the U.S. sovereign rating is more likely to result in rating changes to PHAs than the state of the respective local economies.

Table 1  |  Download Table

2014-2015 Economic Outlook for U.S. Public Finance Housing
Forecast / Scenarios Actual
Downside Baseline Upside
2014 2015 2014 2015 2014 2015 2013
Macroeconomic indicators
30-year fixed mortgage rate (%) 4.09 4.41 4.63 4.98 5.40 6.49 3.96
10-year Treasury note yield (%) 2.00 2.41 3.03 3.30 4.18 4.85 2.32
Unemployment rate (%) 7.59 7.68 6.47 5.82 6.05 5.00 7.45
Real GDP (% change) 0.58 1.84 2.77 3.25 4.13 4.01 1.68
Total nonfarm payrolls (% change) 0.75 0.78 1.76 2.03 2.46 2.58 1.64
CPI (% change) 0.80 1.95 1.44 1.77 2.13 1.61 1.44
Households (mil.) 122.84 124.20 123.10 124.72 123.29 125.02 121.41
Median single-family existing-home price ($000s) 194.80 190.37 198.71 198.47 202.09 200.72 195.57
Median new-homes sale prices ($000s) 261.67 254.38 265.77 266.02 263.72 252.29 264.53
Existing single-family home sales (mil. units) 4.42 4.70 4.70 5.12 5.22 5.28 4.52
Single-family housing starts (mil. units) 0.56 0.74 0.82 1.05 0.90 1.19 0.62
Multi-family housing starts (mil. units) 0.26 0.33 0.35 0.43 0.36 0.49 0.29
Federal government spending (3.00) 0.10 (1.10) 0.00 (0.60) 0.90 (4.60)
Standard & Poor’s U.S. economic team’s forecasts are constructed using the Global Insight model of the U.S. economy. Forecasts are from the “U.S. Economic Forecast: Two Economies Diverged in A Wood,” published Dec. 5, 2013 on RatingsDirect. CPI–Consumer Price Index.

Table 2  |  Download Table

Local Area Economy And Public Housing Rating Factors
City or county Housing authority
Rating Analyst Stand-alone credit profile (SACP) Rating Social rent as a % of market rent* Analyst
Baltimore Housing Authority of Baltimore City
AA-/Stable Nicole Ridberg a+ A+ 18.4 Kib Park
Baltimore is a job center for the region with large education, health care, and government employers. At the end of fiscal 2012, the city had a $20.7 million surplus, increasing available reserves to a very strong 16.5% of expenditures. Management’s financial practices are “strong,” and its debt profile is low at 2.7% of market value. Offsetting factors include its large pension and OPEB liabilities, with annual costs at about 15% of expenditures. The Housing Authority of Baltimore City (HABC) ranks “very strong” in its enterprise profile and “strong” in its financial profile, resulting in an SACP of ‘a+’. The component rankings are typical of U.S. PHAs. HABC’s scores differ in that it has lower marks for financial performance but the highest possible marks for debt profile and liquidity. The authority also has the highest possible score for asset quality and operational performance. The average social rent as a percentage of market rent is 18.4%, among the lowest for rated U.S. PHAs.
Boston Boston Housing Authority
AAA Victor Medeiros a+ A+ 20.6 Stephanie Morgan
Boston has a deep and strong economy that historically has resulted in unemployment rates lower than those of the commonwealth and the nation. The city posted a $61.6 million surplus in fiscal 2012 (2.4% of budget). Debt service is 5% of total governmental fund expenditures, and the city’s net debt is low at 1.4% of market value. A long-term credit consideration involves the city’s pensions and OPEBs, but the city has improved its position through negotiations with unions and funding of obligations. The Boston Housing Authority (BHA) ranks “very strong” in its enterprise profile and “strong” in its financial profile, resulting in an SACP of ‘a+’. BHA’s scores differ from those of other PHAs in that it has lower marks for financial performance but the highest possible marks for debt profile and liquidity. The authority also has the highest possible score for economic fundamentals, due to steady population growth; average social rent as a percentage of market rent, at 17.6%; along with other ratios and qualitative factors.
Bridgeport, CT Bridgeport Housing Authority
A Victor Medeiros a A+ 17.9 Raymond Kim
Bridgeport has a weak economy, with per capita effective buying income at 69% of the U.S. and an unemployment rate of 12.2%. The city has weak budgetary flexibility with reserves equal to 2.3% of expenditures. Budgetary performance has been adequate, with a slight deficit of 0.7% in fiscal 2012. Debt and contingent liabilities are very weak, with governmental fund debt service representing 11.8% of total expenditures. Bridgeport has large unfunded OPEB and pension liabilities; it has been funding less than its full annual required contributions, and expenses will likely increase. The Bridgeport Housing Authority (BHA) is one of only two PHAs to score as low as “strong” in its enterprise profile, compared with other PHAs that we consider “very strong.” The low ranking is driven by the weak economy that also affects the city’s rating. Low population growth and a deflated housing market are key factors in the economic analysis. .
Chicago Chicago Housing Authority
A+ Helen Samuelson aa AA 16.9 Kib Park
Chicago has been downgraded over the past four years, reflecting very weak budgetary performance, a very weak debt and contingent liabilities position, and a weak institutional framework. On the other hand, the city has a broad and diverse economy; however, the Cook County unemployment rate is historically higher than that of the state and nation, and stood at 9.3% in 2012. The city ended fiscal 2012 with a $101 million general fund shortfall, and the funding levels of the four major city pension plans ranged from around 60% to only about 25%. The Chicago Housing Authority (CHA) ranks “very strong” in its enterprise and financial profiles, resulting in an SACP of ‘aa’. The financial ranking is higher than that of almost all U.S. PHAs, and its three-year EBITDA-to-revenue average of 33.6% is in line with the best-performing international social housing providers. Despite a debt portfolio of $340 million, CHA has a debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 1.1x, low among global social housing entities. CHA’s social-rent-to-market-rent ratio of 16.9% is the fourth-lowest among rated U.S. PHAs.
Cuyahoga County, OH Cuyahoga Metropolitan Housing Authority
AA Carol Hendrickson a+ A+ 16.44 Moraa Andima
Cuyahoga County benefits from the diverse economy of Cleveland, but we consider the economy weak given that the population has been declining at an annual average of 6.7% over the past 10 years, and assessed value decreased 7.1% in 2012. The county does have “very strong” management and has reserves of about 70% of general fund expenditures. The Cuyahoga Metropolitan Housing Authority (CMHA) has a “very strong” enterprise profile and “strong” financial profile, typical for U.S. PHAs. CMHA has the highest possible asset quality and strategy and management scores, with a slightly lower economic fundamental score due to its having the greatest population decline among the locations with PHAs we rate. Despite the declining population and the lowest home purchase price of any rated PHA, CMHA’s social rents as a percentage of market rents are similar to those in much more expensive cities.
Fall River, MA Fall River Housing Authority
A- Victor Medeiros bbb+ A- 27.76 Kib Park
Fall River has an adequate economy that has been vulnerable to economic downturns. In 2012, the city’s unemployment rate was 13%. The city produced an operating surplus of just 1% of expenditures. State aid represents 64% of revenues, which is a high proportion. The city has very strong liquidity based on low debt service from a small amount of outstanding bonds. The city appears to have improved its financial management, which previously received “material weakness” findings in its audit. Pension and OPEB liabilities remain a long-term risk. The Fall River Housing Authority (FRHA) is the only rated U.S. PHA to score as low as “vulnerable” in two categories in the financial profile category, leading to a financial profile score of “adequate,” lowest among PHAs. Most importantly, the PHA has a “vulnerable” subscore for liquidity. The social rent as a percentage of market rent is higher than average, at 27.8%.
Houston Houston Housing Authority
AA+ Russell Bryce a+ A+ 43.8 Stephanie Morgan
Houston has a large and diverse economy and fared better than many areas during the Great Recession. Unemployment in Harris County was 6.8% in 2012, below the national average. The city had general fund reserves equal to 9.4% of operating expenditures in 2013, and we expect that figure to remain fairly constant at 8.55% in 2014. Houston has a “strong” financial position with a budget surplus of about 10%. The debt and contingent liability profile is very weak, with total governmental fund debt service at 11.5% of total governmental fund expenditures and 151% of total governmental fund revenue. Still, the city’s financial position is improving, with projected growth in property tax revenues of 3.8% and sales tax revenues of 4.7% in 2014. We view Houston Housing Authority’s (HHA) financial performance as “vulnerable” mainly due to its volatile net operating income and depleting reserves to cover its ongoing housing cost voucher program deficit. The authority has one of the lowest EBITDA-to-revenues ratios at 11%, which contributes to its low score for financial performance. However, we still view its financial profile as “strong,” given other factors such as debt profile, liquidity, and financial policies. The second-highest population growth among localities of rated U.S. PHAs boosts HHA’s enterprise profile to “strong.” The percentage of social rent to market rent is high at 44%.
Howard County, MD Howard County Housing Commission
AAA Timothy Barrett a+ A+ 38.1 Kib Park
Howard County has a deep and diverse economy that benefits from significant employment opportunities in the county and throughout the Washington-Baltimore region. Income is very strong with per capita effective buying income at 165% of the national average, and the county fared better than many areas during the most recent recession. Unemployment has historically been well below state and national rates, about 5% in 2012. The county has reserves of about 9% of operating expenses. In addition, Howard County maintains a budget stabilization fund that contains another 15% of operating expenditures. Net debt is just 2% of market value. Howard County Housing Commission (HCHC) is one of only two rated PHAs that derives less than half of its income from HUD subsidies. Despite this, we still view HCHC’s financial performance as vulnerable due to its low EBITDA-to-revenue ratio of 20%. HCHC has a relatively high social-rent-to-market-rent ratio of 38%.
New Haven, CT New Haven Housing Authority
BBB+ Hilary Sutton a+ A+ 10 Kib Park
New Haven has a history of budget shortfalls, contributing to a downgrade in 2013. A number of revenue shortfalls led the city to draw $8 million from the general fund in 2012, leaving a balance of 0.7% of expenditures, which is below the city’s target of 5%. The significant presence of educational institutions in New Haven stabilizes the economy but depresses income indicators. Its May 2013 unemployment rate of 11.9% was significantly higher than the national rate. We consider the overall net debt burden moderately high at 6.4% of market value, and New Haven’s pension and OPEB liabilities are significant. The plans are 46% and 50% funded, respectively. The New Haven Housing Authority (NHHA) has financial scores similar to those of most PHAs with the exception of liquidity, which we consider adequate. NHHA is just one of two rated U.S. PHAs with a liquidity score that low, but its financial performance, also “adequate,” is better than that of most PHAs. The social rent as a percentage of market rent is among the lowest, at 10%.
Norfolk, VA Norfolk Redevelopment & Housing Authority
AA+ Timothy Barrett a+ A+ 44.9 Adam Cray
Norfolk has a strong economy based on the military sector with more than 83,000 regional employees, nearly two-thirds of whom are stationed in the city. The city has very strong budgetary flexibility with available reserves at approximately 20% of general fund expenditures. Overall net debt is moderate at roughly 3% of market value, and the city’s pension liability is about 80% funded. Norfolk Redevelopment and Housing Authority (NRHA) has a very strong enterprise profile and a strong financial profile, which mostly reflect very strong demand for public housing in Norfolk, as well as the authority’s excellent strategic planning, very high liquidity, and low debt burden; however, a low EBITDA-to-revenue ratio (9.6%) and significant volatility in operating performance weaken NRHA’s financial profile score.
Philadelphia Philadelphia Housing Authority
A+ Hilary Sutton aa AA 15.4 Moraa Andima
Philadelphia’s economy is weak given high unemployment of 10.8% in 2012 and projected per capita effective buying income of 76.3% although the property tax base has been growing. Philadelphia encountered financial stress in the early 1990s, but state oversight has helped the city maintain strong budgetary performance and adequate reserves at 7.2% of expenditures. Management practices are strong. City pension and OPEB obligations were a high 13% of expenditures in fiscal 2012. We consider the strategy and management of the Philadelphia Housing Authority to be extremely strong, the highest-ranked indicator in its enterprise profile, which we rank “very strong.” Philadelphia HA also is one of only four U.S. housing authorities to rank “very strong” in its financial profile, with the highest possible rankings for debt profile and liquidity. The authority is one of the minority of PHAs that receives a ranking as high as “adequate” for financial performance. The PHA’s average rent is 15.4% of market rent, the third-best among rated U.S. PHAs.
San Diego San Diego Housing Authority
AA Misty Newland aa AA 70.5 Jose Cruz
San Diego has a very strong regional economy that has historically benefited from the presence of the high-tech, tourism, and military and defense sectors. Although unemployment in San Diego County remains close to the statewide level, assessed value in the city grew 4.3% from 2013 to 2014 following several years of modest declines and weak growth. The city’s debt profile, burdened by very large retiree benefit obligations, remains a credit weakness, and pending legal challenges to attempted benefit reform have the potential to thwart efforts to restructure these obligations. The San Diego Housing Commission (SDHC) ranks “very strong” in both its enterprise and financial profiles. We consider the management and strategy of the authority to be extremely strong, but the economic fundamentals have a relatively low ranking of “strong” despite an extremely expensive housing market. The reason for the comparatively low economic ranking is that SDHC operates only subsidized Section 8 housing, which charges higher rents than public housing. The average rent paid by an SDHC voucher recipient is 70.5% of market rent, among the highest of our rated U.S. PHAs, and exposes the authority to more market risk than do traditional PHAs. We also view the financial performance of SDHC as vulnerable because of a low EBITDA-to-revenue ratio of 14%, surpassing only three other rated U.S. PHAs. However, SDHC is the only PHA to achieve the highest ranking in the three other financial profile components.
San Francisco San Francisco Housing Authority
AA+ Misty Newland a A+ 11.6 Jose Cruz
San Francisco’s economic strength stems from its concentration of high-wage, high-skilled jobs in finance, business services, and technology, which have recovered quickly following the recession, as well as its status as a global destination for tourism and industry conventions. Employment and assessed value have begun to rebound, fueling recent revenue growth that has contributed to budgetary performance we consider adequate. The city and county’s finances are supported by very strong management conditions although relatively high pension and OPEB liabilities weaken its debt profile, in our opinion. The San Francisco Housing Authority has a lower enterprise profile ranking (“strong”) than most rated U.S. PHAs while the financial profile is strong like that of almost all rated U.S. PHAs. The main weaknesses of SFHA is its highly vulnerable financial performance and vulnerable strategy and management. The authority has the highest economic fundamentals ranking, based on a social rent as a percentage of market rent of just 11.6%, the strongest measure among rated U.S. PHAs by a significant margin.
Seattle Seattle Housing Authority
AAA Chris Morgan aa AA 36 Aulii Limtiaco
Seattle’s status as a regional economic center with deep ties to export markets and a number of major high-tech and manufacturing employers has supported its recent recovery, as unemployment in King County fell to 6% in 2013, and assessed value began to stabilize. The recovery has also led to a surge in economically sensitive and development-related revenue, which, together with management practices we view as very strong, has helped the city balance its budget and contribute to recent surpluses. The city’s debt burden is notably “very strong,” with moderate debt service carrying charges and low overall net debt relative to revenues. The Seattle Housing Authority’s (SHA) enterprise profile ranking of “very strong” reflects extremely strong management and strategy, and economic fundamentals, while the financial profile ranking of “strong” reflects a very strong debt profile and adequate financial performance that is better than most PHAs. SHA’s EBITDA-to-revenue ratio of 22% is stronger than that of most PHAs. Despite an average social rent of 36% relative to market rent, SHA scores high in economic fundamentals due to annual population growth of 2%, which is among the highest for rated PHAs.
Vancouver, WA Vancouver Housing Authority
AA Chris Morgan aa AA 64.5 Adam Cray
Vancouver’s location within the Portland-Vancouver metropolitan area provides a strong and stable employment base while its Columbia River port connects the Pacific Northwest agricultural regions to global export markets. Recent declines in market value have not yet stabilized although we expect a return to growth as early as 2014. Despite flagging revenues throughout the recession, the city expects balanced operations for the 2013-2014 biennium. Its credit profile is strengthened by financial management conditions we view as strong with a moderate debt burden. The Vancouver Housing Authority (VHA) is the only rated U.S. PHA to score at least very strong in every category under Standard & Poor’s social housing criteria. VHA is the only rated U.S. PHA to rank very strong in financial performance, based upon an EBITDA-to-revenues ratio of 41%, significantly above all other PHAs. This is the result of the authority’s limited reliance on federal subsidies, which represent only 44% of VHA’s revenues and makes VHA one of the few PHAs to receive less than half its income from the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development. On the other hand, the emphasis on workforce housing results in higher social rents in comparison to the market, 40%, which is the second-highest and exposes the authority to market risk.
*Social rent–Average rent charged by social housing providers or PHAs. OPEB–Other postemployment benefit.
Primary Credit Analyst: Lawrence R Witte, CFA, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5037;
[email protected]
Secondary Contacts: Carol A Hendrickson, Chicago (1) 312-233-7062;
[email protected]
Sarah Sullivant, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5051;
[email protected]



S&P: U.S. Bond Insurers and the Financial Guarantee Sector Stand at a Crossroads.

We expect business volume for bond insurers to rise through 2015 and for the industry’s risk-adjusted pricing ratios to improve. Municipal bond market participants in the public finance arena we have spoken to generally feel that bond insurance has proven its worth during the past several years. (Watch the related CreditMatters TV segment titled, “Projected Higher Interest Rates And Spreads May Create Added Opportunities For U.S. Bond Insurers,” dated April 2, 2014.)

Overview

  • Municipal bond insurance is still necessary in the U.S. public finance market.
  • We expect business volume for bond insurers to rise through 2015 and for the industry’s risk-adjusted pricing ratios to improve.
  • If interest rates rise as expected and insured par volume does not increase or the increase in competition leads to poor pricing decisions, we could take rating actions on the bond insurers.

Business Prospects Are Likely To Increase

The prevailing lower yield environment and the spread compression it created hurt the financial guarantee market for much of 2013, making it difficult for bond insurers to attract insurable issuers and investor demand. Issuers already benefited from all-time low market yields. Investors searched for the highest-yielding fixed-income municipal assets available and were not willing to give up yield for the credit protection and liquidity provided by a financial guarantee.

If municipal yields widen by 50-75 bps through 2015 based on our analysis, there should be a corresponding increase the insurable primary U.S. public finance market, as bond insurers should be able to create yield savings that would make it economical for issuers to pay for insurance. We have asked bond insurers their expectations for the U.S. public finance market and the insurable market in 2014. In a period of rising interest rates, they expect total U.S. public finance new issue par to be $285 billion to $300 billion, including refundings of approximately $90 billion. The estimate for total new issue insured public finance par volume is $20 billion to $25 billion, equating to 7%-8% of total public finance issuance in 2014.

The bond insurers expect secondary market insured par to total $2 billion to $4 billion in 2014, depending on municipal market headline events, yield widening, and institutional investor capital market and hedging activities. In late 2013, insured secondary transaction picked up for the bond insurers as a result of Detroit’s bankruptcy filing, headline events about Puerto Rico, and general investor worries about the municipal debt market. There are still pockets of stress in the U.S. that might spur retail investors’ demand for secondary market insurance.

We believe the market can support three bond insurers with the reemergence of National Public Finance Guarantee Corp. (National). In fact, U.S. public finance market participants have indicated a demand for a third insurer for diversity. In the near term, expansion of the insurable market with the expected rise in interest rates, combined with the disparate underwriting strategies of the bond insurers, should lead to sufficient underwriting opportunities to support each company’s underwriting strategy. In the long term, as the bond insurers continue to prove the value of their product, the demand for financial guarantees should increase and the insured penetration of the U.S. public finance market should rise, but not to the same levels as prior to 2008.

To gauge demand for bond insurance, we spoke to various municipal bond-market participants who have different applications in the public finance arena. The findings of our discussions included the following:

U.S. Public Finance Macroeconomic Trends

The 30-year Municipal Market Data (MMD) ‘AAA’ benchmark yield rose to 4.5% in September 2013 after the Federal Reserve announced quantitative easing tapering and headline risk associated with Puerto Rico increased. The current 30-year yield is 3.7%–65 basis points (bps) less than its recent peak, and 35 bps less than in January 2014.

We expect a gradual increase in long-term interest rates, with U.S. municipal rates rising through 2014 and 2015 by 50-75 bps. Standard & Poor’s economists estimate a U.S. Treasury 10-year average yield of 3.0% for 2014 and 3.3% for 2015 (see U.S. Forecast Update: A Recovery Postponed Not Canceled, published Feb. 10, 2014, on RatingsDirect). This is a 30-bp widening for 2014 and 70 bps for 2015.

The correlation of U.S. treasuries to the ‘AAA’ MMD general obligation yield curve has historically been close to the 0.9x-1.0x range, except during 2007-2009 both on 10-year. We therefore expect yields to widen by 25-50 bps by year-end 2014 and an additional 25-30 bps in 2015, increasing in total by 50-75 bps by the end of 2015.

Bond Insurers Economic Trends

With credit spreads forecast to widen in 2014 and 2015, we expect the bond insurers’ risk-adjusted pricing (RAP) to improve from 2013 levels. We base this view on our assumption that the bond insurers will be able to capture a greater amount of the wider credit spread in the form of higher premium rates. We also assume that the rise in the premium rates will result in better pricing per dollar of risk as measured by our transaction capital charges and that the rise in premium rates will be greater than any rise in capital charges. In first-quarter 2013 when interest rates began to rise, this pricing dynamic was illustrated as the bond insurers experienced stronger pricing with relatively minimal change in underwriting risk. Interest rates in January 2014 began to decline toward the end of the month, but bond insurers were able to execute on strong pricing, with RAPs on primary and secondary market transactions higher than those in 2013.

Ratings Hinge On Future Developments

Although we believe there is still a need for municipal bond insurance in the U.S. public finance market, the next two years will be crucial in determining the health of the financial guarantee sector. If interest rates rise as expected and insured par volume does not increase, we would likely reevaluate all our ratings in the sector.

The reemergence of National has introduced another layer of competition to the pricing dynamics of the financial guarantee market. In this competitive environment, insurers must exercise discipline when pricing insured transactions. If the increase in competition leads to poor pricing decisions or the current spread compression persists and insurers’ RAPs are projected to fall and remain less than 4%, we could lower our ratings on the bond insurers.

19-Mar-2014

Primary Credit Analyst: David S Veno, Hightstown (1) 212-438-2108;
[email protected]
Secondary Contact: Marc Cohen, CFA, New York (1) 212-438-2031;
[email protected]



Deloitte: U.S. Renewable M&A Sees Warming Trend.

U.S. Renewable M&A Sees Warming TrendDeal making heats up amid rapid growth in distributed solar generation and strong wind development pipeline 

What a difference a year makes in the mood and momentum of the renewable energy sector. Despite fears of a slowdown in 2012 due to low power prices and competition from domestic natural gas, 2013 generally turned out to be a good year for developers and financiers. While there were only 1,084 megawatts (MW) of wind installations during 2013, extension of the production tax credit for wind at the end of 2012, which was modified to qualify projects that began construction by December 31, 2013, created a strong development pipeline that will likely spur strong deal activity over the next two years (2014–2015).

Solar 
On the solar side, the impetus for continued growth came from an unexpected direction. While utility-scale development marched onward, distributed solar took off, finding legs of its own in the residential market, and to a lesser, but still notable, extent among commercial and industrial customers. Unlike utility scale solar development, this distributed solar activity was not driven by a need to fulfill state renewable portfolio standards: Instead, it was driven by the “power of the people,” many of whom now see solar as a financially and environmentally appealing alternative to the current offerings from their electricity providers.

M&A activity expected to remain strong 
Mergers and acquisitions (M&A) activity in the renewable energy sector is expected to remain strong over the next two years due to these factors and others, particularly the advent of new funding mechanisms and financial structures. Our newest report from the Deloitte Center for Energy Solutions, U.S. Renewable M&A Sees Warming Trend, explores these trends. It also provides an overview of 2013 U.S. renewable M&A activity and drivers, policy and market developments, and an outlook for 2014 and beyond




Atlanta's Teacher Pension Gamble.

To shore up one of the worst-funded pension plans in Georgia, Atlanta’s school system is considering borrowing money to bet on the stock market.

Atlanta Public Schools officials say selling up to $540 million worth of bonds could save money by taking advantage of historically low interest rates and by giving the school system breathing room to invest the proceeds for the long haul.

Critics say that’s a risky strategy that can exaggerate losses if the stock market slumps. School officials, who haven’t decided whether to recommend such a bond issue, say they understand the risks and believe it has high odds of succeeding.

“It’s a ridiculous idea. It’s speculating,” said attorney Edward Siedle, who formerly worked for the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission and now runs a firm that investigates pension abuses. “Everything has got to go exactly right for this to work.”

A panel commissioned by the Society of Actuaries, the experts who figure out what shape pension plans are in, warned this year that public pension plans shouldn’t use the strategy to shore up pensions.

Atlanta Public Schools could be the first government in Georgia to try this financial device, called a pension obligation bond. The school system is considering it because paying for pension benefits has become a huge cash drain. The pension plan has less than 16 cents in assets for each dollar of benefits it has promised, and is essentially paying out cash nearly as fast as it comes in.

The pension debt has been building for 35 years. When many Atlanta teachers transferred from the city-run school pension plan to the Teachers Retirement System of Georgia in the late 1970s, they brought most of the school retirement plan’s assets with them. About 3,100 active and retired school system employees remain in the city pension fund — many of them bus drivers and custodians — and it is overseen by a city of Atlanta pension board.

To close the funding gap, the district’s annual contributions would have to rise from $48 million this year to almost $84 million over the next decade.

Higher return hoped

The district believes the bond issue could lower those payments. The idea would be to borrow money at a low interest rate and inject it into the pension fund, which could earn a higher return from stocks and other investments. School system actuaries estimate that in today’s dollars, this plan would save $53 million over the 20-year life of the deal.

“While it’s risky, we have money we’re throwing at the pension right now that’s at risk as well,” said Jason Esteves, a chairman of the school board’s Pension Fund Task Force, which includes current and former board members, the superintendent and outside financial experts. “It really is pick your poison.”

The task force expects to make a recommendation in May. Incoming Atlanta Superintendent Meria Carstarphen, who takes leadership of the school district in July, will be included when the group next meets in a week or two, Esteves said.

A pension bond would have to win approval by Atlanta voters. A bond issue for the full $540 million could require a property tax increase of about $35 a year on a $250,000 home, but a smaller bond issue could be paid off from existing general funds. A tax hike to pay down the pension liability without bonds isn’t being discussed. Other solutions under consideration include higher annual payments or a combination of higher payments and a smaller pension bond.

Pension obligation bonds have been used across the country over the past 20 years, with results ranging from financial windfalls to municipal bankruptcies.

Researchers for Boston College’s Center for Retirement Studies found in 2010 that most governments that had issued them between 1992 and 2007 were losing money on them, and the only profitable deals were set up either decades ago or during recessions, when stock prices and interest rates were low.

They recently found that, while markets have recovered dramatically since the 2007-2009 crash, about half of the pension bond deals are still losing money.

The researchers also found that governments under financial pressure were the most likely to use pension obligation bonds. APS projects that it could borrow money via the bonds at an interest rate of about 4.5 percent, making annual payments of about $42 million for 20 years.

The district forecasts that the invested money would earn 7.5 percent a year — the same as its assumed rate of return for its pension plan — allowing it to pay off the loan and rescue the pension plan, which was $532 million in the hole as of mid-2012.

Critics emphasize risks

But pension bond deals often don’t work so well in the real world, critics say.

“It’s buy low, sell high. If you can do that, you’d be a billionaire,” said Thad Calabrese, a public and nonprofit financial management professor at New York University whose research concluded that pension obligation bonds haven’t enabled school districts to increase educational spending. “If your investment strategy is dependent on market timing, you’re doomed.”

The greatest risk is that a market downturn would leave APS in an even bigger hole.

APS’s actuary, Segal Consulting, looked at a hypothetical worst-case scenario for the pension bond proposal and projected that APS would end up nearly $96 million worse off. That projection was based on the last 10 years of actual returns in the financial markets, which includes the 2008-2009 recession.

Critics say another problem with pension bonds is they increase the risk of financial distress. The government takes on a bond debt that it has to make payments on every year with cold, hard cash, instead of a long-term pension liability where it has some flexibility to defer contributions when funds are short.

Segal Consulting warned that even if the pension bond deal appears to save money, APS needs to pay attention to “the loss of flexibility in difficult economic times, because of the need to make timely payments … in order not to default on the bonds.” Siedle, the former SEC official, said governments turn to risky solutions like pension bond deals because it’s politically unpalatable to do more prudent fixes, such as cutting pension benefits and raising taxes and workers’ share of pension contributions. The Atlanta school board hasn’t discussed those possibilities.

Bonds worked in Kentucky

“This is essentially a Hail Mary gamble to solve a financial crisis,” he said.

But some who have used them say the bonds still make sense when used properly.

The $17.5 billion Kentucky school pension system issued a $468 million pension obligation bond in 2010, after years of raiding the pension fund to pay retirees’ health benefits.

The pension system got an interest rate below 4 percent, investing not too long after the stock market began rebounding from the 2009-2009 crash. “We’ve had positive returns every year since we got it,” said Beau Barnes, general counsel for the Teachers’ Retirement System of Kentucky. “It turned out to be a good story.”

But he acknowledged that hasn’t been the case for everyone. “You need to consider market timing and interest rates,” he said.

And the earnings haven’t been enough to keep up, even though the system also increased the amount schools and teachers have to contribute.

State pension fund officials recently proposed another round of pension obligation bonds, which could mean investing a large sum when Wall Street is more than five years into a bull market. So far, the Kentucky legislature hasn’t given its approval.

“If we can do better than whatever interest rate we achieve on those bonds,” said Barnes, “then we would be OK.”

(c)2014 The Atlanta Journal-Constitution

BY  | APRIL 21, 2014




Bankrupt California City Fighting for Right to Withhold Pension Payments.

When this bankrupt, working-class city took the unprecedented step in 2012 of stopping its required pension contributions — arguing that it could not otherwise make payroll — other financially stressed California cities took notice: Could San Bernardino defy Calpers, the powerful agency that administers the state’s huge pension system?

The resistance ended last year when the city resumed its payments. But now, with a mayor who swept into office last month promising to deal once and for all with skyrocketing pension costs, San Bernardino is in another fight with Calpers that could embolden other municipalities seeking relief from crippling payments to the nation’s largest public pension system.

“We are under the microscope, no question about it,” said Carey Davis, 61, the mayor. “San Bernardino took a different approach in bankruptcy as related to pensions, and everybody is waiting to see how it comes out.”

At issue is the $17 million in back payments and penalties that San Bernardino failed to make between declaring bankruptcy in August 2012 and resuming payments in July. Calpers has maintained that it is owed in full. But now in bankruptcy negotiations, the city is hoping to pay only a fraction of that, arguing that the city’s creditors must all share in the bankruptcy pain. The amount may be small, given the system’s assets, but if San Bernardino gets a reduction, the precedent could be huge, opening the door to other struggling municipalities using bankruptcy law to justify delaying or withholding payments to the pension system.

“This city has taken on the 800-pound gorilla, which is Calpers,” said Ron Oliner, a lawyer for the San Bernardino Police Officers Association, which represents the city’s uniformed officers. “Everyone in California is watching San Bernardino, and everybody in the nation is watching California.”

Calpers has for many years resisted all efforts to allow cities, for whatever reason, to stop making their required payments. (Federal law allows bankrupt companies to slow them greatly.) While agreeing that “significant progress has been made in the mediation,” Rosanna Westmoreland, external communications manager for Calpers, said the pension system’s hands were largely tied by statutes mandating that all the pension system’s participants make their full contributions on time and that no workers’ benefits be reduced. “It is the law,” she said.

The problem is that it remains unclear whether, in cases like this, federal bankruptcy law trumps state pension laws. A federal judge hearing the Detroit bankruptcy case ruled, for instance, that federal laws took precedence in that case, so the benefits of city workers in Detroit could be reduced in defiance of state law. But Calpers has insisted that this does not apply to the situation in California, an assertion that may be tested in court, if the mediation provides no solution.

“With Vallejo and Stockton and other cities, everybody is looking at pensions and those obligations,” said Rikke Van Johnson, who, with 10 years in office, is one of the few remaining veterans on the City Council. “We’re all in the same boat. Some of us are just in a little deeper.”

Even before a recent wave of municipal bankruptcies hit California, the California Public Employees’ Retirement System, known as Calpers, had also insisted that under state law, no local government or public agency could reduce the benefits of current workers or retirees.

View Full Story from The New York Times

APRIL 21, 2014




Report of the City of Lincoln Park Financial Review Team.

A state review team has declared a financial emergency in the city of Lincoln Park and sent a report to Gov. Rick Snyder for his review. According to the report, Lincoln Park officials committed a number of big public finance no-nos, including, borrowing $2.5 million from its Water and Sewer Fund to make an annual pension payment and defaulting on a loan from SunTrust Bank.

Read the report.




2 Philly Firms Vie for Top U.S. Bankruptcy Deal.

Reports the Bond Buyer: “Detroit bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes’ decision to hire a municipal finance expert to review the city’s bankruptcy plan attracted responses from five professionals,” two of whom work for Philadelphia-area firms that have grown by advising this region’s much-indebted public agencies over the years.

“The applicants are: Dean Kaplan, a managing director at Public Financial Management Inc., who would lead a team of PFM colleagues; Richard Ravitch, a former New York lieutenant governor who was part of New York City’s high-profile restructuring in the late 1970s; Peter Hammer, a Wayne State University law professor; William Brandt, a Chicago-based turnaround consultant and chairman of the Illinois Finance Authority; and Martha Kopacz, from turnaround and investment banking advisory firm Phoenix Management Services LLC, whose team would include Bob Childree, the longtime controller of the state of Alabama.” PFM and Phoenix are local firms:

PFM,  the largest muni advisory firm in the US with 500 staff, was founded by Ed DeSeve, the late Mayor Frank Rizzo’s finance director, and partners including Jim White and Sam Katz; it has acquired other muni advisors around the U.S. Kaplan, an ex-Philadelphia city budget director who heads PFM’s “turnaround” team, “worked on the restructuring of cities (including) Pittsburgh, Washington, Cleveland, Miami and Baltimore,” and Detroit’s schools, and would head the Detroit municipal review team, the Buyer reports. He’s asking for $550 an hour, with lower rates to team members.

Phoenix, based in Chadds Ford, includes ex-Philadelphia Gas Works CFO Albert Mink (PGW was a Phoenix turnaround client) and ex-Alabama state treasurer Bob Childree on its team. Phoenix counts Wilmington, SEPTA and Nassau County (Long Island), NY, as past clients. Phoenix is asking $200/hour for analysts up to $595/hour for top team members.

Read more at http://www.philly.com/philly/blogs/inq-phillydeals/Philly-firms-vie-for-Detroit-bankruptcy-deals.html#upeJ8vpK62T718hY.99




About That TIAA-CREF Deal.

Why buy Nuveen?

Dazed and Confused

Monday morning a Morningstar analyst informed me that TIAA-CREF had purchased Nuveen Investments. My response: “Huh? Maybe this will make sense to me at a later date.” It’s currently Wednesday morning and, as of yet, no such luck.

I don’t know why an investment-management firm would wish to buy Nuveen. There was a time when Nuveen had a compact, comprehensible business. It was a municipal-bond underwriter and investment manager, based in Chicago, and a market leader and innovator in two niche business, unit investment trusts and closed-end funds. (Nuveen pioneered the leveraged closed-end muni fund.) Buying Nuveen meant instantly becoming a leader with municipal bonds, UITs, and closed-end funds.

Doing a deal with that version of Nuveen would have been similar to Franklin’s purchase of Templeton in 1992. Franklin was a bond manager that joined forces with an international-stock firm, which made integration a snap. Franklin had one large bond management group, another large international-stock management group located elsewhere, and the two units continued to do their own things. Franklin finished its three-legged stool four years later when it added U.S. equities manager Mutual Series.Things are not so simple with Nuveen. Over the past 15 years, Nuveen has conducted several of its own, smaller acquisitions. As a result, it no longer is solely a muni-bond specialist. Nor does it continue to run all of its assets from its Chicago office. Rather, its investment-management operations are spread across the country, in what Nuveen calls a “multiboutique” system.

This leads to the question of how TIAA-CREF–or any other asset-management company for that matter–can benefit from Nuveen. Nuveen’s operations are pleasantly profitable, as are those of every other mutual fund company of a certain size. However, Nuveen would also be pleasantly profitable if it were owned by Microsoft, or (as was recently the case) by a private equity firm. What makes Nuveen more useful for TIAA-CREF than for other owners? Where is the strategic value?

No doubt that TIAA-CREF believes that it has the answers. The trouble is, I’ve heard such stories before and they rarely seem to pan out. Although mutual fund firms have collectively spent hundreds of billions of dollars on acquisitions, most of the industry’s leaders grew organically. By my calculation, nine of the 15 largest U.S. fund companies (counting exchange-traded funds, but excluding money market funds and funds of funds) built essentially their entire businesses without acquisitions. Among those 15 are the three largest fund companies, Vanguard, Fidelity, and American Funds, which have more assets than the remaining 12 combined.


(At $800 billion in total fund assets, the new TIAA-CREF/Nuveen combination would seem to belong high on this chart. However, the new company does not have many of its assets in mutual funds and ETFs, as TIAA-CREF’s biggest business is annuities to educational and hospital 403(b) plans. For its part, Nuveen runs money in a wide variety of ways, including separate accounts in addition to the aforementioned closed-end funds and UITs.)

Of the six companies on the list that have grown partially though acquisitions, and thus are labeled as Acquisition, the biggest two, BlackRock and Franklin Templeton, would appear to be somewhat different from the TIAA-CREF/Nuveen deal. Franklin Templeton, as previously mentioned, is a tripartite construction, whereas Nuveen alone has seven investment-management divisions. BlackRock, too, is made up of three major parts: the iShares operations in San Francisco, its New York-based bond management, and the former Merrill Lynch investment-management group in Princeton, NJ.

As shown by J.P. Morgan, Invesco, OppenheimerFunds, and Columbia, it is possible to become a large mutual fund/ETF organization through acquisitions. Each of those cases is a bit different–Columbia and especially J.P. Morgan coming from bank mergers, OppenheimerFunds doing most of its deals 15 years ago and now growing organically, and Invesco biting off a single big chunk with its purchase of AIM. However, they do offer some general support for TIAA-CREF’s thesis.

This discussion, of course, is from the perspective of the shareholder of the mutual fund company, as opposed to the fund owner. What about the latter? Should fund investors be pleased if their fund companies make acquisitions? Are acquired? Do neither?

I asked Vanguard founder Jack Bogle a variation of those questions. His response: “Whatever happened to, ‘Don’t do something, just stand there?'” He also wondered whether companies with a mutual ownership structure should “use their capital to buy other firms,” and mentioned the “ego-building need of successor CEOs to outdo their predecessors.”

So you know where he stands: against. Next column, I’ll weigh in as to what this means for TIAA-CREF and Nuveen fund owners.

John Rekenthaler has been researching the fund industry since 1988. He is now a columnist for Morningstar.com and a member of Morningstar’s investment research department. John is quick to point out that while Morningstar typically agrees with the views of the Rekenthaler Report, his views are his own.




L.A. Spends 30% More on Wall Street Fees than Streets, and That's Just Half the Story.

The city of Los Angeles spent at least $204 million on Wall Street fees—not counting principal or interest on loans—last year, $41 million more than the budget for its Bureau of Street Services, according to a report (pdf) from a coalition of community, civil rights and labor groups. 

“No Small Fees: LA Spends More on Wall Street than Our Streets,” from the Fix L.A. Coalition, does not make any claims of nefarious actions by bankers or municipal officials; instead, it documents how business as usual costs the city millions of dollars it can ill afford to spend and suggests ways to avoid it.

The $204-million-dollar figure is actually the report’s conservative estimate on how much the city pays annually on a plethora of fees. The authors had to root around in city documents for the unpublicized information it cobbled together but suspect there is much more to be learned. “Alarmingly, we have concluded that the fees we were not able to document may exceed those we could document,” they wrote.

While the city readily provides a budget figure for what it spends on municipal functions like street maintenance and improvement, it is not so forthcoming on Wall Street fees. That is no surprise. “Municipal markets are characterized by poor information and illiquidity,” according to a study (pdf) published by the Hamilton Project at the Brookings Institution.

What the Fix L.A. folks say is known is that the city paid $133.1 million on investment management fees, $23.1 million on natural gas swaps, $17.9 million on letters of credit and $12.9 million on bond issuance costs. What they do not know is what was spent on fees involving private equity investments because they are not subject to public disclosure laws.

Wall Street has an advantage when arranging financing for municipal bonds because, unlike stocks and options, they are traded primarily on over-the-counter networks rather than open exchanges. That impedes competitive market pressures, according to the Brookings report. Its authors propose establishment of a “CommonMuni,” a privately-financed national institution that would give independent, low-cost advice to municipal issuers. It would be modeled after a fund that manages $25 billion in investments by more than 1,500 universities, hospitals and other nonprofit organizations.

Failing that, Fix L.A. suggests that the city could better leverage the $106 billion in assets, payments and debt issuance controlled by its seaport, airport, utilities and pension funds that course through the Wall Street’s veins. “The city would have far more negotiating strength if it consolidated its dealings with Wall Street, instead of dispersing them among nearly a dozen departments,” the report says.

That leverage could be used to renegotiate some of the risky deals, such as interest rate swaps the city obtained years ago as a market hedge against inflation, that tanked during the Great Recession. The suppression of any hint of inflation by the U.S. Department of the Treasury in ensuing years has generated a huge windfall for Wall Street to the detriment of governments and taxpayers.

“No Small Fees” highlights one “toxic deal” with New York Mellon Bank that could cost the city $65.8 million through 2028. The bank wants $24.7 million in penalties from the city to terminate the swap.

As the city prepares to head into the next fiscal year starting July 1, it is probably ending the year with a $21 million deficit. It faces a budget shortfall of $242 million for next year that newly-elected Mayor Eric Garcetti vows to eliminate. The solution probably won’t include recapturing money from Wall Street.

–Ken Broder

Tuesday, April 15, 2014

 

 



TIAA-CREF to Buy Nuveen Investments for $6.25 Bln.

(Reuters) – TIAA-CREF, an insurer and asset manager focusing on workers at non-profit organizations, said it would acquire fund manager Nuveen Investments for $6.25 billion, seeking to expand its mutual fund and municipal bond offerings.

The deal will add more than $221 billion in assets to TIAA-CREF’s roughly $569 billion in assets under management, broadening its portfolio with closed-end municipal bond funds that offer regular, annuity-type payouts.

Robert Leary, president of TIAA-CREF Asset Management, said his company is looking to sell more of its asset management products through Nuveen’s distributors.

It also offers relief to Nuveen’s current owner, private equity firm Madison Dearborn Partners LLC. Madison Dearborn will break even on the deal, according to a person close to the firm, having taken Nuveen private in 2007 for $5.8 billion and saddled it with debt that weighed on its earnings.

The transaction comes at a difficult time for the municipal bond market that many Nuveen funds invest in. Tax-free muni bonds have been hit over the last year by the bankruptcy of Detroit, fears of rising rates, and longer-term concerns about a looming pension crisis among city and state issuers.

The deal is expected to close by the end of the year, pending approval from existing Nuveen clients and antitrust regulators.

Lazard Ltd and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC advised TIAA-CREF. Bank of America Merrill Lynch, Wells Fargo Securities LLC and Citigroup Global Markets acted as financial advisers to Nuveen Investments. UBS Investment Bank, Goldman Sachs & Co and Moelis & Co acted as financial advisers to the Nuveen management team. (Reporting by Greg Roumeliotis and Mike Stone in New York; Editing by Tom Brown)

By Greg Roumeliotis and Mike Stone

Mon Apr 14, 2014 4:36pm EDT




Municipal Bond Mark-Ups: Measuring 'Reasonable'

 Summary
  • Despite marginal improvements, the municipal bond market remains inscrutable to many.
  • At the top of most gripe lists is investment cost; just what are reasonable mark-ups?
  • This article offers an expert’s insight.

The difference between what a muni dealer pays for a bond in the open market and the price at which it might sell that bond to a customer is known as a mark-up. There’s been a lot of talk about muni mark-ups of late, notably in a Wall Street Journal article from March 10.

Dealers say that they are entitled to mark-ups that fairly compensate them for the risks and costs they assume in furnishing liquidity for investors. Some academics say that dealers are overcharging, while retail investors have very little idea about what’s going on, but are feeling somehow exploited. The reality is that they all have a point, but some simple calculations show a high probability that current market practice does need to shift toward more favorable treatment of investors.

Historically, retail muni spreads have ranged from about $5 per bond ($1,000 par value) for shorter-term bonds (up to about 10 years to maturity) to as much as $30 per $1,000 for long term bonds (20 years or more.) The current average is estimated to be about $17 per bond. But what goes into that average?

It is commonly held that some larger brokerage firms charge more than many smaller firms. This is in part because the larger firms have more significant cost components to their trading and distribution operations, as follows:

1. Market Risk — Since 2008, most fixed-income markets have experienced diminished liquidity, while some firms have altogether left the market as principals. Other large firms have combined, leaving fewer large firms to furnish liquidity — i.e., a willingness to buy bonds from customers without an offsetting purchase order from another buyer. Given the recent negative credit trend among municipalities, this means increased loss exposure over time.

2. Research — The muni market has always been more obtuse than other U.S. credit markets for the simple reason that municipalities are not forced to file the kind of information and disclosures that are incumbent upon corporate issuers of debt. While corporate credit analysts can readily draw from available public data and borrow liberally from equity analytical work, muni analysts don’t have these luxuries and must spend a lot of time extracting data from infrequent filings and from thinly staffed local government finance departments. Additionally, muni bond structures are now often more complex than in the past, so for these reasons it’s simply more labor intensive to compile useful credit research for municipal bonds.

3. Scavenger Hunting — Finding suitable municipal bonds that fit a specific individual criteria set for an investor is time-consuming. Sourcing a muni bond with the right rating quality, maturity, credit risk profile, and state tax exemption can be a bit of an Easter egg hunt and often smaller firms must rely on larger firms to carry those special finds in their inventories, as their own firms do not even maintain inventory (see Figure 2 below).

4. Economies of Scale: Measured by trading volume, the muni market is but a fraction of the corporate debt market, implying fewer trades at the same basic unit cost for dealers (e.g., trade processing, clearing, reporting, etc.; see Figure 1). Moreover, nominal demand volume for taxable corporate debt is far greater than for munis, as there are many more and larger buyers of taxable debt, like pensions, banks, central governments, insurance companies, etc. Most of the demand for munis comes from individual investors, and that buyer group relies on the dealer community for research and other market information to a much greater extent than do more sophisticated buyers. In addition to this, turnover is lower for munis as tax-exempt bond investors tend to hold them longer than buyer classes of corporate debt.

5. Smaller muni dealers are today commonly forced to rely on the muni bond inventories of larger firms when filling orders for their own customers, more so than prior to 2008. This implies a much greater frequency of added mark-ups between the supplier dealer and the smaller firm serving its customer, but the middle-man dealer must take a small mark-up if it is to even have a chance competing for business against larger shops. These inter-dealer trades are tracked by the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board, and because of the growing dependence of some dealers on larger dealers’ inventory, interdealer trades have grown as a percentage of all customer trades. In 2004, interdealer trades were 12.7% of all customer buys and sells of munis. In 2012, that ratio was 24.3% (source: MSRB Fact Books, 2008 through 2012).

6. Oligopoly: Today, a larger proportion of trading volume is handled by fewer and larger firms. In 2012, the top 10 firms handled 72.4% of all customer trades in municipal bonds, and that’s out of a total of 1,645 registered dealers. This is due to firm consolidation. Morgan Stanley is comprised of former bulge-bracket muni firm Smith Barney, long a muni market behemoth; Bank of America is now comprised of Merrill Lynch; and Wells Fargo is made up of former muni shops Wachovia, Wheat First, and Butcher & Singer. That has resulted in a heavy concentration of secondary muni market trading in fewer organizations, all of whom would likely claim to have higher-than-the-industry-average overhead associated with muni business.

All that said, is an average spread of $17 a bond fair to retail investors? Let’s look at the math, or at least some of the math.

The Wall Street Journal article referenced above said that retail investors traded $951 billion in munis from 2009 to 2014 (based on trades of $100 thousand or less.) If dealers earned a spread of $17 on each trade that averaged $100 thousand par value, that means they made $1,700 on each trade. That strikes me as a per-trade number that would rather wildly exceed an average ticket cost, even if you factor in research, trade finance, market risk, processing, clearing, salaries, etc. Charles Schwab does not have most of the overhead costs that a large muni dealer does, but that notwithstanding, they only charge $125 for a broker-assisted muni trade of $100 thousand, or less than 8% of what appears to be the average mark-up. I would very conservatively estimate that a large muni shop has per-trade costs somewhere between $300 and $500, so is a margin of 240% to 466% fair to investors? Doesn’t sound like it, but it might be more equitable to look at things from the dealer’s market risk perspective.

Assume a dealer holds a 15-year muni bond paying 5% interest in inventory in hopes of selling it to a customer, after having bought it from another customer, and has as its cushion against market loss the $1,700 described above. Now, to be fair, some portion of that spread for the “house” will be paid to the client-facing broker in the form of a commission, so the spread as a cushion against market risk is actually somewhat lower. Assuming the dealer was including, say, $15 per bond out of the $17 spread as commission, it would appear that the dealer only has a $200 loss cushion — but we’re not done. The $15 commission is not all paid to the broker, as he or she actually receives what is known as a net commission based on what is called a “pay-out rate.” The industry norm for this is 30%, so, in fact, the dealer only gives away $4.50 of the $17 dollar spread, leaving a real cushion of $1,250.

Usually bonds move out of inventory within a few days or maybe a couple of weeks, but let’s assume this dealer doesn’t find a buyer for 30 days. During that period, market rates for the bond in position can rise by as much as 24 basis points before the dealer loses money. How likely is this to happen? Well, not highly likely, but it’s not a rare occurrence either. Using the 10-year Treasury note as proxy, from 2009 to 2014, this occurred 20% of the time.

Of course, there is also the chance that rates could fall, allowing the dealer to raise their offering price and make even more money. In our proxy case, prices rose in 30 day periods about 32% of the time from 2009 to 2014 enough to offset the bid/ask spread ($17 per bond), so it would appear that the odds were 3-to-2 against losing money to market risk over the last five years. While not a perfect benchmark for our hypothetical 15-year muni bond, yield movements on the 10-year T-note fairly well paralleled yield movement on munis, when compared to the Bond Buyer U.S. Municipal Bond Index, as shown in Figure 3. Interestingly, during the last 30 years, the above scenario would have experienced a net loss 22% of the time and a gain 21% of the time (source: U.S. Federal Reserve Bank, Bloomberg).

One of the challenges investors face in discerning mark-ups in muni-land is reinforced by the fact that nearly all trades take place with dealers acting in a principal capacity. This means that they take title to municipal bonds before they resell them to customers, rather than simply brokering the trade on behalf of the customer, much like a real estate broker does. The difference in prices paid and received by a principal constitutes the mark-up and because the dealers have first bought the bonds with their money, they may choose to characterize their position in the transaction flow as principal. But these circumstances can vary and one variance belies the principal characterization.

When a dealer has an order in hand from a customer and then buys bonds from another dealer in instant fulfillment of that customer order, it is called a “riskless trade.” This is much more like the real estate broker in that the buyer is known and ready to pay for and acquire the property. Trades like this are effected by the thousands every day and, in fact, are even more common today because more dealer firms rely on the bond inventory of other firms. And this reality gives rise to a scenario in which investors can begin to crack the force-field of mark-up opacity.

When a customer approaches a brokerage firm to buy munis, they should specify that any fulfillment of their investment inquiry that results in the dealer entering into a riskless trade should be done as an “agency” trade. It is the customer’s right to do so and if the dealer agrees to the request, they must disclose the commission amount on the transaction confirmation. While this won’t throw open mark-up practices to the full light of day, it will give investors a chance to gauge just how much a broker is taking as compensation and may even cause the broker to lessen that compensation.

Mark ConnerCorporate Treasury Investment Consulting




Mintz Levin: SEC Steps Up Scrutiny of Municipal Bonds: Recently Filed Enforcement Actions.

As discussed last week, the SEC has been stepping up its scrutiny of municipal bond offerings. Indeed, in the last year the SEC has filed a number of enforcement actions against municipal bond issuers and underwriters.  The alleged violations have involved misstatements or omissions concerning such topics as: compliance with tax exemption requirements or reporting requirements; limitations on debt capacity; property valuations; and municipal accounts.

In particular, in announcing its Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative, which encourages municipal issuers and underwriters to self-report possible disclosure violations (as discussed in more detail in Bret’s post), the SEC specifically noted that it may file enforcement actions against issuers for inaccurately stating in final official statements that they have substantially complied with their prior continuing disclosure obligations.  Underwriters may also be charged with securities violations if they have failed to exercise adequate due diligence in determining whether issuers have complied with such obligations.  The SEC cited the West Clark Community Schoolscase discussed below as an example of such an enforcement action.

Notably, in many of these recent enforcement actions the SEC has asserted claims for merely negligent violations of Sections 17(a)(2) and (3) of the Securities Act, instead of, or in addition to, claims for violations of Section 10(b) of the Securities Exchange Act and SEC Rule 10b-5, which require proof of knowing or reckless misconduct.  In some court cases the SEC has also successfully argued that the alleged knowledge of an employee or agent may be attributed to the bond issuer for purposes of pleading that the issuer acted with the requisite ”scienter” to support a 10b-5 charge.  Thus these cases raise a concern that even relatively “innocent” mistakes may lead to SEC charges.

While the issuer was actually fined in only one of these cases, the SEC has also required issuers to provide training for personnel or to hire consultants to review disclosure practices and procedures as a condition of settlement.  Meanwhile, underwriters have often faced more substantial financial penalties. Some particular examples are discussed further below.  More than ever, these cases illustrate how important it is for government entities and underwriters to obtain careful counsel about potential pitfalls in bond offerings.

  • In re the Greater Wenatchee Regional Events Center Public Facilities District. As we discussed in an earlier post, last November the SEC announced that, for the first time in its history, it had fined a municipal bond issuer for making misleading statements in an offering statement. The case involved a municipal corporation formed to fund development of a regional multi-use arena and hockey rink in the city of Wenatchee, Washington. The SEC found that the official statement for bond anticipation notes issued to fund the project failed to inform investors about debt capacity limitations and an adverse feasibility study. The SEC brought administrative claims against the issuer and others for negligent violations of Sections 17(a)(2) and (3). The SEC assessed fines of $20,000 against the issuer and $10,000 each against the project developer and its CEO, as well as $300,000 against the underwriter and $25,000 against the lead investment banker.
  • SEC v. City of Victorville.  To finance redevelopment of a former Air Force base, the City of Victorville, California, created a development authority that issued tax increment municipal bonds. The SEC alleged that the tax increment figures and debt service ratio in the offering statement for one of these bond offerings were based on a false assessment of the value of redeveloped airplane hangars at the base. The SEC filed suit in federal district court against the city, the authority, the authority executive director, the city’s director of economic development, the bond underwriter, and its principals, asserting claims for violations of Rule 10b-5 and Section 17(a) and aiding and abetting. The court denied the defendants’ motion to dismiss last November, and the case is currently in discovery.  Notably, in denying the authority’s motion to dismiss, the court accepted the SEC’s argument that the alleged knowledge of the city’s economic development director that the value of the hangars was overstated should also be attributed to the authority, because he was the authority’s agent for the content of the bond offering statement.  See SEC v. City of Victorville, No. ED CV13-00776 JAK (DTBx), 2013 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 164530 (C.D. Cal. Nov. 14, 2013).
  • In re West Clark Community Schools.  In July 2013 the SEC charged an Indiana school district and its municipal bond underwriter with falsely representing to bond investors that the school district was in compliance with its obligations under previous bond offerings, even though it had failed to file required annual financial information and notices. In settling these charges, the SEC required the school district to adopt enhanced disclosure and compliance policies and procedures and to provide annual training for personnel involved in the bond offering and disclosure process. The SEC also required the underwriter to pay approximately $580,000 in disgorgement and penalties for its failure to conduct adequate due diligence and providing improper gifts and gratuities to municipal issuers.  As noted above, the SEC has cited this case as an example of its readiness to bring enforcement actions concerning inaccurate statements about compliance with disclosure obligations.
  • SEC v. City of Miami.  In this well-publicized case, the SEC charged the City of Miami and its former budget director with securities fraud and negligence, alleging that they had misled the investing public about certain interfund transfers from the city’s capital improvement fund to its general fund in connection with municipal bonds issued in 2009. The SEC alleged that the transfers were undertaken to conceal deficits in the city’s general fund, without disclosing that the transfers involved restricted funds that were dedicated to specific capital projects.  The SEC’s complaint also charged the city with violating a 2003 SEC Cease-and-Desist Order based on earlier misconduct. A federal district court in Miami denied the defendants’ motions to dismiss the SEC suit in December.  As in the Victorville case, the court held that the alleged knowledge of the city’s budget director (whom the city characterized as a “low-level employee”) should be attributed to the city itself.  See SEC v. City of Miami, No. 13-22600-CIV-ALTONAGA, 2013 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 180704, 2013 WL 6842072 (S.D. Fla. Dec. 27, 2013).
  • In re the City of South Miami, Florida. In addition to its action against Miami, the SEC also instituted proceedings in an entirely separate matter against the neighboring city of South Miami.  South Miami obtained tax-exempt conduit bond financing through the Florida Municipal Loan Council (FMLC) for a mixed-use retail and parking structure in its downtown commercial district. However, according to the SEC, the city failed to disclose that it had jeopardized the tax-exempt status of the bonds by loaning proceeds from an earlier bond offering to the developer and restructuring a related lease agreement. The SEC also found that the city misrepresented that it was in compliance with the tax-exemption requirements of its loan agreement with the FMLC. After the city settled related tax issues with the IRS, the SEC instituted administrative proceedings against the city.  To settle the SEC proceeding, the city agreed to retain an independent consultant for three years to review its policies and procedures regarding its municipal securities disclosures, and to implement the consultant’s recommendations.

Mintz, Levin, Cohn, Ferris, Glovsky and Popeo, P.C.
Wednesday, April 9, 2014

©1994-2014 Mintz, Levin, Cohn, Ferris, Glovsky and Popeo, P.C. All Rights Reserved.




Bloomberg: Detroit Seeks Creditor Votes With ‘Divide and Conquer.’

Detroit’s “divide-and-conquer” campaign to build support for its plan to shrink $18 billion in debt with a recent series of creditor accords may put pressure on holdouts to settle before a bankruptcy judge decides to push it through, lawyers following the case said.

“‘Divide and conquer’ does seem to be the strategy that the city is pursuing, which is often a fear of creditors,” said George South, an attorney with DLA Piper LLP in New York, alluding to how the city has methodically reached agreements with individual creditor groups in its quest to resolve the biggest municipal bankruptcy in U.S. history by year’s end.

Under a proposal announced April 15, Detroit’s emergency manager, Kevyn Orr, agreed to pay retired city police officers and firefighters their full monthly pensions. Hours later, the pension system for general employees, such as city hall clerks and street workers, said it, too, had settled with Orr.

Those accords followed an agreement last week that would pay investors who hold unlimited general obligation bonds 74 percent of what they are owed. Holders of limited GO bonds would get only 15 percent under Orr’s debt-adjustment plan.

Today, Orr will ask U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes to approve a disclosure statement explaining the debt-adjustment plan to creditors and to send the plan out for a vote. Should Rhodes approve the requests, creditors would have May and June to vote. Rhodes would hear arguments on the plan in July.

‘Freight Train’

Trying to pick off creditors one deal at a time is an often-used strategy in bankruptcy, said Dale Ginter, a lawyer who represented creditors in Vallejo, California’s bankruptcy case. The strategy works by pushing creditors to compromise before a company or city can build up enough support to convince a judge that any remaining holdouts should be overruled, he said.

“We use the phrase, ‘The confirmation freight train coming down the track,’” Ginter said. “The judge has a natural inclination, if there is any way possible, to confirm a plan supported by creditors. The remaining objectors can get run over, even if they feel they have strong legal arguments on their side.”

The strategy does carry some risks, though.

“With every deal you make, it becomes more difficult to settle with the remaining creditors because they want at least as much,” said Ginter, with Downey Brand LLP in Sacramento, California. “And if they don’t get it, you end up giving them an argument for unfair discrimination,” when the plan goes before a judge for approval.

‘Unfair Discrimination’

The “unfair discrimination” standard in federal bankruptcy law typically requires similar creditors to be paid the same. In response to divide and conquer, creditors often “try to form alliances, when possible,” South said.

South and Ginter aren’t involved in Detroit’s bankruptcy.

Under the tentative agreements announced April 15, police and firefighters would get their full monthly pensions instead of being asked to accept a 6 percent cut, while pensions for general workers would fall by 4.5 percent instead of 26 percent, according to a person familiar with the talks.

The city confirmed the general employees’ offer in the latest version of its disclosure statement, filed last night.

Detroit entered bankruptcy in July, saying it couldn’t meet financial obligations and provide essential services. Since then, the city and creditors including bond insurers, public pension systems and unions have negotiated over cuts.

Art Shield

State political leaders and a group of foundations have promised to give the city $816 million to bolster its two underfunded pensions, but only if it can win support from employees and shield the city-owned artwork housed at the Detroit Institute of Arts from being sold to pay creditors.

About 30,000 retired city workers and current employees will be asked to vote on the deal. To lock in the money, a majority of those voting in each employee group must approve the city’s plan, and that majority must hold two-thirds of the claims of those voting.

Should enough retirees reject the plan, general workers would see their pension cut by about one-third and police and firefighters by 14 percent.

No matter how many deals Detroit makes to trim debt, it will still need to get creditors, especially police officers and firefighters, to support a longer-term plan if the city is to recover, said Jim Spiotto, a bankruptcy attorney with Chapman Strategic Advisors LLC.

“The debt adjustment is not curing the problem,” Spiotto said. Boosting investment in the city, to improve services and attract businesses, “is the real solution,” he said. “The adjustment just gives you more breathing room.”

By Steven Church  Apr 17, 2014 5:37 AM PT

The case is In re City of Detroit, 13-bk-53846, U.S. Bankruptcy Court, Eastern District of Michigan(Detroit).

To contact the reporter on this story: Steven Church in Wilmington, Delaware at[email protected]

To contact the editors responsible for this story: Andrew Dunn at [email protected] Stephen Farr, Fred Strasser




Local Governments Expand Incentive Programs for Technology Companies.

Incentives are taxpayer backed programs used to influence business decisions and spur company investment or job creation in specific locations. Incentive use has expanded tremendously over the past several years, though the exact amount of money devoted to incentives is unknown.

We do know that incentives are no longer reserved for special, targeted projects, but are offered to entities of all types and sizes. They include bonds, grants, investments, loans, and tax breaks. They might be used to provide capital, reduce taxes, prepare or purchase a facility or site, build or extend infrastructure, or recruit and train a workforce.

Over the past few weeks several communities in the Greater Washington region have either proposed or implemented changes to their incentives policies in the hopes of attracting more technology companies. Here is a quick rundown of some of their actions:

Arlington, VA: Proposed expanding the definition of eligible businesses that can take advantage of Technology Zone incentives that reduce the Business Professional and Occupational License tax on gross receipts. If implemented, smaller business (<100 workers) and expanding firms (not just new businesses) in a broader set of technology fields will be eligible for a 50% rate reduction ($0.18 instead of $0.36) in all 4 of the County’s Technology Zones.

Digital DC: The District of Columbia has committed $1 million to a venture fund that would provide $25k-$250k grants to early stage tech entrepreneurs locating in a designated corridor in the city. These businesses would also be eligible for funding for building rehabilitation or office construction. Digital DC adds to existing DC Tech Incentives and incubator/accelerator programs supported by the city.

Prince George’s County, MD: Approved creation of a science and technology business districtin order to create jobs by providing tax incentives, streamlining permitting and approvals, and fostering collaboration among academia, government and industry. The district in the northwestern portion of the County includes College Park (University of Maryland), Greenbelt (NASA Goddard Space Flight Center) and Beltsville (USDA).

Alexandria, VA: A Business Tax Reform Task Force has as one of its objectives to “identify revenue or other incentives that the City can deploy to attract businesses and encourage beneficial development aligning with the City’s Strategic Plan.”

Incentives have become more important to business investment decisions and the day-to-day work of economic development. We founded Smart Incentives because we believe it is vital for state and local leaders to have access to high-quality business intelligence, data and analytical tools to make the best decisions for their community.

Smart Incentives helps communities make sound decisions throughout the economic development incentives process. We serve cities and economic development organizations by providing in-depth business research on companies seeking incentives and business case analyses for incentive projects. Smart Incentives is also at the forefront of efforts to develop better processes for monitoring compliance and evaluating the effectiveness of incentive programs.

Ellen Harpel is President of Business Development Advisors (BDA) and Founder of Smart Incentives. She has over 17 years of experience in the economic development field, working with leaders at the local, state and national levels to increase business investment and job growth in their communities. 

Contact: [email protected] or[email protected]. Follow Ellen on Twitter @SmartIncentives.

APRIL 14, 2014




GASB Issues Concepts Statement on Measurement of Assets and Liabilities.

Norwalk, CT, April 14, 2014—The Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB) today issued Concepts Statement No. 6, Measurement of Elements of Financial Statements, which will guide the GASB in establishing accounting and financial reporting standards for U.S. state and local governments regarding the measurement of assets and liabilities.

Concepts Statement 6 augments the framework the Board employs in order to promote consistency in setting accounting and financial reporting standards and is primarily intended for the Board’s use. The new concepts also may benefit preparers and auditors of financial statements when evaluating transactions for which there are no existing standards.

“Measurement is an integral component of a fully developed GASB conceptual framework,” said GASB Chairman David A. Vaudt. “Our stakeholders should be able to count on the GASB’s standards consistently addressing financial transactions and other events in a similar manner. The conceptual framework helps to promote that consistency.”

Measurement Approaches

Concepts Statement 6 establishes concepts that will inform the GASB’s decisions when setting future standards for how state and local governments determine the dollar amount at which to report assets and liabilities.

It establishes two approaches to measuring assets and liabilities—initial amounts and remeasured amounts. Initial amounts are determined at the time an asset is acquired or a liability is incurred. Remeasured amounts are determined as of the date of each year’s financial statements.

Measurement Attributes

Concepts Statement 6 also establishes four measurement attributes—the characteristics of an asset or liability that is being measured:

The full text of Concepts Statement 6 is available on the GASB website.

About the Governmental Accounting Standards Board 

The GASB is the independent, not-for-profit organization formed in 1984 that establishes and improves financial accounting and reporting standards for state and local governments. Its seven members are drawn from the Board’s diverse constituency, including preparers and auditors of government financial statements, users of those statements, and members of the academic community. More information about the GASB can be found at its website, www.gasb.org.




NYT: Pensioners in Detroit Rejoice, Though Deal Is Far From Done.

DETROIT — The relief was palpable.

“My pension is my life,” Thomas Berry, a retired police detective, said on Wednesday, reacting to tentative deals that were struck between Detroit, the city’s pension funds and a retirees’ group that would mean no cuts to his current pension checks, though a reduction in annual cost of living increases. “I’m O.K. with that,” Mr. Berry said, “because a month ago, we were going to lose everything.”

A day after Detroit scaled back from the large pension benefit cuts it had once been proposing, the bankrupt city fended off charges from some that it had simply caved in to retirees in ways that could come back to haunt it. But it also felt the elation of many of its current and former employees who for months had feared a more dire outcome.

How it happened is the story of an effort to protect as much as possible the workers and retirees who have been the backbone of the city’s working and middle class. The deal was eased by a decision to project better pension fund returns because of the stock market’s performance last year, and fears by the workers’ negotiators that if they did not accept the agreement the terms would get worse.

“This is not so much a settlement as a reinstatement; it’s a complete and total capitulation to retired pensioners to secure their plan support,” said Stephen Spencer, a financial adviser to the Financial Guaranty Insurance Company, one of Detroit’s more than 100,000 creditors.

The city’s public shift in its posture on pensions this week seemed sudden and puzzling to some who wondered how a city could suddenly afford so much more than before.

As recently as two weeks ago, Detroit officials, who say the city’s unfunded pension liabilities amount to $3.5 billion of the city’s $18 billion in debts, had revised their estimates of how pensions might be cut, and at that point the cuts threatened to go even deeper than in their earlier proposals.

Because of differences in funding levels in the city’s two pension funds, retired firefighters and police officers had been expected to see cuts between 6 and 14 percent, while other retirees were told to prepare for cuts between 26 percent and 34 percent.

“Ultimately, in any bankruptcy, it’s about negotiating and positioning,” said Craig A. Barbarosh, a bankruptcy lawyer from Katten Muchin Rosenman who is based in Costa Mesa, Calif. “All along discussions were going on.”

Mr. Barbarosh represents a few creditors in the case but is not involved in talks over pensions.

The city gained flexibility, in part, by agreeing to assume a higher rate of investment return by the funds themselves. Projecting a rate of return is an essential part of fiscal policy, but experts often debate what is both realistic and sustainable for public pensions, and the federal bankruptcy judge in the case will be the ultimate arbiter. The city initially factored in rates of 6.25 percent and 6.5 percent for the two funds, but eventually agreed that the funds could be presumed to do better — 6.75 percent — because of an improved outlook based on the funds’ 2013 performance as compared with 2012.

In addition, the city has factored into the new agreement a separate, unusual deal that would save the collection of the Detroit Institute of Artsand would add more than $800 million to the pensions with money from charitable foundations and the state, which has yet to approve the funds.

“This is a dynamic process that changes day by day,” said Bill Nowling, a spokesman for Kevyn D. Orr, the emergency manager who is leading Detroit through its bankruptcy and who filed a revised plan with the court on Wednesday for Detroit’s exit from bankruptcy. “As we get more information — good or bad — we adjust.”

On the other side, for the retirees and their negotiators, there was pressure to accept a deal for fear that a better one might not come along, and that this one might soon be pulled from the table.

The offer certainly had its downsides for retirees. Some would see cuts to their pension checks as high as 4.5 percent, would probably lose cost of living increases entirely, and say they expect vastly diminished health care benefits.

Steven W. Rhodes, the federal bankruptcy judge in the case, has urged all parties to negotiate in recent days. Judge Rhodes ruled last December against the pension funds, which had argued that the state’s Constitution protected them from cuts. But he was also solicitous in allowing groups of ordinary retirees and workers to come before the court to argue that their benefits should be retained.

Some of the city’s financial creditors have been asked to accept 15 cents on the dollar for debts owed them, and the arrangement with retirees was seen by some as yet another sign that Detroit leaders were leaning in favor of Main Street over Wall Street as they searched for a way to resolve their $18 billion in debt and remake the city.

Not all retirees here were pleased with the tentative arrangement. Some say any pension cuts are unacceptable and object to seeing retired firefighters and police officers receive better deals than other workers.

“I did my part,” said Connie Lewis, who retired after 28 years as a 911 operator and supervisor and could expect to see a 4.5 percent cut to her payments. “Now not only do they want to take back what I’ve already earned, but they want to make it appear like it’s my fault.”

Uncertain, so far, is what a court-appointed committee of retirees and city union leaders, who were still negotiating with the city, think of the deal. But many seemed mainly surprised — and relieved.

“It’s a big burden lifted off your shoulders that now, after working all these years, you don’t have to fight for your pension, that you already worked for, that was promised to you,” said Roslyn Banks, a retired Detroit police sergeant, who was sitting with other police retirees when she heard the news. “There was clapping and shouting,” she said.

Jon Bozich, a Detroit firefighter who retired after 35 years with the department, said the possibility of pension cuts had been stressful, and had left him wondering how the burden could be shifted to retirees who had managed with relatively low pay, difficult conditions and Detroit’s abundance of arsons.

Of the new plan, Mr. Bozich said: “I think it will be approved overwhelmingly. Everybody was anticipating a lot worse. Everyone knew we’d have to take some cuts. The arguments were over how severe.”

In the end, though, Judge Rhodes must decide whether the city’s plans go forward. Not only will he consider whether the plan is fair to all parties, bankruptcy experts said, but he will look at whether it will truly leave Detroit leaders with a city and pensions they can afford.

By STEVEN YACCINO and 




Rhode Island's Pension Battle Heads to Court.

The battle over pension changes that state lawmakers made in 2011 will be resolved not through mediation but in court, the two sides said Friday.

Ordered to resume their talks after one public employee group rejected a proposed settlement, the two sides announced on Friday afternoon that they had reached an impasse.

Each seemed to blame the other for the breakdown.

“Due to a small group of union members the settlement agreement has failed and the mediation process has ended,” Governor Chafee and General Treasurer Gina Raimondo said in a joint statement. “We find this disappointing and frustrating.”

Ray Sullivan, spokesman for the employee and retiree groups that challenged the pension overhaul, said the plaintiffs “abided by the judge’s order to explore a path to a new settlement agreement, but the state decided it would rather pursue costly and drawn out litigation.”

“We are now prepared to take the necessary steps in proceeding to trial,” Sullivan said.

Superior Court Judge Sarah Taft-Carter ordered the two sides to mediation last year, and in February, after a year of closed-door talks, the two sides announced a proposed settlement — one Raimondo said would preserve 95 percent of the savings expected from the lawmaker-approved pension overhaul.

Five of the six public employee groups involved, including teachers, state employees and firefighters, voted to approve the deal. But the smallest group, local police officers, rejected it, with more than 250 of 417 officers who were eligible to vote saying no.

On Monday, that led Taft-Carter to order the two sides to resume talks, with the understanding that they would report back to her next Monday.

Then came Friday’s announcement.

Asked why the talks ended, Chafee’s office would not comment beyond the official statement issued with Raimondo, while Raimondo’s office said only that the two sides could not “reach consensus on a way forward.”

“Both sides mediated in good faith and no reasonable solution was available,” said Raimondo spokeswoman Joy Fox.

Sullivan, meanwhile, said the state made the decision, informing “the plaintiffs” on Friday “that mediation would not continue.”

It was not clear Friday whether Taft-Carter’s gag order, which bars the parties from talking about the mediation process, was still in place. Fox and Sullivan said it is their understanding that the order remains in place, and courts spokesman Craig Berke said “there is no plan for a formal retraction of the order.” But Berke also noted that the final paragraph of the order says it remains “in effect until such time as the mediation is suspended or terminated.”

“I will not interpret what it means,” he said.

The Raimondo-led 2011 overhaul raised retirement ages, cut benefits and suspended the annual payment of “cost of living adjustments,” or COLAs, to save a projected $4 billion over two decades and more than $274 million alone during the budget year it took effect.

Labor unions sued, saying they had a contractual right to promised benefits that were substantially reduced.

The proposed settlement, announced Feb. 14, tweaked the retirement age for newer employees, increased the defined-benefit pensions available to longtime employees and provided the opportunity for more frequent pension increases, as well as an immediate bump worth up to $500.

There were also concessions that applied to local police officers. Before the 2011 overhaul, they could retire at any age after 20 or 25 years, with the number varying by community. After the 2011 overhaul, the minimum retirement age was 55, after a minimum of 25 years.

Under the proposed settlement, officers employed as of June 30, 2012, would have been allowed to retire with a full benefit at age 50, after 25 years of work, if they contributed an additional 2 percent of their pay, raising their overall contribution to 9 percent or 10 percent, depending on whether they work in a community that provides COLAs. Alternatively, they could retire at age 57, after 30 years of work, and receive a slightly larger benefit.

Both sides expressed confidence that they will prevail in court.

Sullivan said “the plaintiffs continue to believe in the fundamental strength of our legal arguments,” while Fox said the state “has strong legal arguments to support its positions and will begin to prepare for litigation.”

A trial date is set for Sept. 15.

By Randal Edgar

BY  | APRIL 15, 2014

(c)2014 The Providence Journal




Detroit Pension Deal Inches City Closer to Bankruptcy Exit.

Negotiators for Detroit pension boards agreed late Tuesday to retiree benefit cuts that were dramatically lower than initially proposed, marking a watershed moment that could help resolve Detroit’s historic Chapter 9 bankruptcy and position the city to start reinvesting in services, sources familiar with the deal said.

The deal would require civilian retirees to accept 4.5% cuts to their monthly pension checks and the elimination of cost-of-living adjustment (COLA) increases, while police and fire retirees get no cuts to monthly checks but absorb a reduction in COLA increases, sources said.

“I do think with time we’re going to be pleased,” one pension official close to the talks said.

With the city’s two pension funds, two global banks and major bondholders on board with Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr’s plan, Detroit’s massive financial restructuring could now move quickly through court if Judge Steven Rhodes agrees that the roadmap is legal and feasible.

Pension board trustees must still sign off on the deal, and a U.S. government-appointed committee officially appointed to represent Detroit retirees is still weighing whether to support the city’s proposal.

But the pension deal – which comes after about 10 months of intense negotiations that included a bitter fight over the city’s eligibility for bankruptcy – leaves only a few major opponents of Detroit’s bankruptcy restructuring.

The city has about 32,000 retirees, beneficiaries and active employees entitled to pension checks.

The deal – which is not as good for general city retirees because their pension fund was not managed as well as the police and fire fund for years – could expedite Detroit’s trip through bankruptcy.

The accord would require pension board trustees and retirees to back a “grand bargain” in which the Detroit Institute of Arts would be allowed to spin off as an independent institution in exchange for $816 million over 20 years from the state of Michigan, nonprofit foundations and the DIA itself.

Bill Nowling, a spokesman for Orr, declined to comment on the pension fund deal.

It comes hours after Detroit bankruptcy mediator Gerald Rosen revealed that the Retired Detroit Police and Fire Fighters Association had agreed to support Orr’s new plan.

In his previous offer, Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr had proposed monthly pension cuts of 6% for police and fire retirees and 26% for general retirees with no COLA benefits for either side. If the retirees rejected the grand bargain, those cuts were set to rise to 14% and 34%, respectively.

But that offer is history.

Detroit police retiree Mustafa Abdur-Rahman, 52, of Macomb Township, said he’s ready to vote for the new deal.

“I’d say I’m thrilled about it,” said Abdur-Rahman, who receives a monthly check of about $3,500. “If I know what I’m working with up front, I can adjust what I’m doing. It’s like a Social Security check: I’ve never heard them cutting a Social Security check, but if they’re going to cut the cost of living, I can take that.”

Preventing monthly pension cuts for the uniformed retirees “is a favorable result, to put it mildly,” said Ryan Plecha, a lawyer for the city’s retiree associations.

Rhodes, who last week admonished the city and creditors to quickly reach deals, must still approve the city’s restructuring plan, which is expected to face stiff opposition from bond insurers that want the city to sell DIA artwork to pay off creditors.

But Rosen has aggressively pursued the grand bargain, soliciting donations from foundations that have been heralded by the city and pension leaders for their effort to help retirees and save the DIA.

“This settlement agreement was reached after intensive negotiating sessions over the past several months in which the parties’ interests were fully and vigorously represented by counsel and all issues robustly negotiated,” Rosen said of the police and fire deal.

By agreeing to support Orr’s deal, Detroit’s pension boards are expected to recommend a “yes” vote to retirees, drop their legal battle with the city and give up the right to sue the state over pension cuts.

Still, the state of Michigan must agree to contribute $350 million over 20 years to the settlement – a proposal that has drawn the support of Republican Gov. Rick Snyder and some Legislative leaders but skepticism from others.

Chesterfield Township resident Frank Rossi, 76, a former fire engine operator, is reserving judgment on the deal.

“I’ll believe it when I find out that’s the truth,” said Rossi, who retired in 1992 after 29 years in the Fire Department and receives a $1,850-per-month check. “I’ve got to wait and see what’s going on. I just keep my fingers crossed, that’s all.”

The deal comes after the City of Detroit agreed to a concession with retirees: raising the expected rate of annual investment returns for pension funds to 6.75%, which correspondingly improves their funding outlook. The city also agreed to allow the pension cuts to be reduced over time if the pension funds outperform their expected rate of return.

One source familiar with the deal said the proposed pension cuts are lower than Orr’s initial offer in part because the stock market’s surge in the last 18 months improved the financial health of the pension funds, while the higher investment rate of return also lowered the unfunded liability.

In his initial proposal, Orr estimated that the city’s unfunded pension liabilities totaled $3.5 billion. But that figure is expected to drop drastically when he delivers his final restructuring documents.

Plecha called the new investment return rate “a big moment in negotiations,” while the improvement in the pension funds’ market performance has also helped reduce pension cuts.

The police and fire retirees are expected to keep 1% annual COLA increases, down from 2.25%. Civilian retirees would lose COLA, a particularly sore spot for labor supporters.

The two pension fund boards would stay in tact under the deal struck today, but an independent investment advisory committee would be established to vet all the investments the boards would make.

The police and fire retiree association also agreed to support the establishment of a Voluntary Employee Beneficiary Association (VEBA) to manage retiree health care, which is expected to deliver significantly reduced benefits to retirees. A separate VEBA will be set up for general retirees.

The retiree association’s board unanimously agreed to back the deal, including a structure under which a separate entity called a Voluntary Employee Beneficiary Association (VEBA) would manage significantly reduced retiree health care benefits.

“This is another significant step forward as we work towards securing Detroit’s long-term financial viability,” Orr said in a statement earlier Tuesday.

To win approval for the cuts, a majority of retirees representing two-thirds of the city’s unfunded pension liabilities must approve the plan, according to bankruptcy law.

Despite the progress toward a resolution of pension cuts — the most contentious issue in Detroit’s bankruptcy — the city’s restructuring plan is still expected to draw fierce oppositions from bond insurers Syncora and Financial Guaranty Insurance Co.

Last week, FGIC, Syncora and employee union AFSCME Council 25 said in court documents that four outside investors had offered up to $2 billion for the DIA’s assets, or portions of the museum’s collection.

Rhodes has signaled that he won’t allow a one-time infusion of cash to help resolve Detroit’s bankruptcy.

Still, the bond insurers, which would incur steep losses under Orr’s plan, are expected to argue that the grand bargain unfairly benefits pensioners.

Wayne State University law professor Laura Beth Bartell said Rhodes is likely to allow better treatment for pensioners than bondholders.

“In fact, Judge Rhodes indicated way back at the beginning of the case that he has a soft place in his heart for pensioners and was not going to allow significant cuts in their pensions in a plan of adjustment, so he knows that the plan would discriminate in favor (of) the pensioners,” she said. “That’s not an unfair discrimination.”

By Nathan Bomey, Matt Helms, Alisa Priddle and Susan Tompor 

BY  | APRIL 16, 2014

(c)2014 Detroit Free Press




Are Michigan's Municipal Finance Problems Spreading?

Gov. Rick Snyder on Monday declared a financial emergency in Lincoln Park, the latest Michigan city that could come under the control of a state-appointed emergency manager.

On April 4, a review team reached the same conclusion in a report to Snyder.

The governor cited the city’s negative fund balance, “a trend of over-spending from the general fund,” and city projections that the general fund deficit will likely increase by at least another $1 million this year.

Under state law, the city has seven days to request a hearing if it wants to appeal the finding.

If the finding is confirmed, city leaders can opt for one of four options: an emergency manager, a consent agreement under which it promises to take certain steps within certain time frames, evaluation by a neutral party, or a Chapter 9 bankruptcy.

Lincoln Park City Manager Joseph Merucci said the seven-member City Council will hold a special meeting Tuesday to discuss the finding. Based on his conversations with council members, he said an appeal is unlikely and the city is most likely to opt for a consent agreement.

The city has been cutting back services for several years, and starting last year the City Hall is closed on Fridays, Merucci said. Public works employees have been reduced to 13 from 30-35 four or five years ago, he said.

City employee contracts expired last June and the city has been seeking concessions, he said. Agreements have still not been reached with police command officers and patrol officers.

Four cities — Detroit, Allen Park, Flint and Hamtramck — are under emergency managers.

Three others — Benton Harbor, Ecorse and Pontiac — are under transition back to self-government after being under the control of emergency managers.

Inkster and River Rouge are under consent agreements. Royal Oak Township and Highland Park are under review.

By Paul Egan

BY  | APRIL 15, 2014

(c)2014 Detroit Free Press




Public Pensions and the Lessons of Success.

Do we learn more from success or failure? When it comes to state- and local-government pensions, we tend to focus on the plans that are struggling. But there are valuable lessons to learn from public-sector retirement plans that have remained well funded and from governments that have successfully negotiated changes to put their pension systems on a path to full funding.

Well funded in Illinois: Given all the headlines about Illinois’ seemingly endless struggle to reform its pensions, some might be surprised to learn that that the Illinois Municipal Retirement Fund (IMRF), the state’s second-largest public pension, is a model of fiscal responsibility.

What distinguishes the IMRF from Illinois’ other three statewide plans, which are struggling, is that all 2,969 governments that participate in it are required to pay 100 percent of their annual required contribution. As a result, the IMRF has remained more than 80 percent funded, even after the investment losses that public and private plans suffered from the 2008 recession.

It is also noteworthy that the IMRF is separate from the Illinois state government and its assets are not included in the state’s financial statements. (State law does, however, determine employee benefits, including retirement age, employee contributions, vesting period and cost-of-living increases.)

The IMRF maintains fully funded reserves for employees and retirees, has a highly diversified portfolio and assumes a conservative 7.5 percent return on investments, even during periods of stock-market growth. This long-term approach helps the fund ride out market swings.

Navigating change in Georgia: Some governments focus all their attention on costs when they look at pension-plan changes. Because pensions are part of a broader human-resources strategy, it’s important to involve employees in the discussions and to consider recruitment and retention issues.

In 2007, Gwinnett County, Ga., decided to take control of its defined-benefit plan, which had been managed by the Association County Commissioners of Georgia. Key drivers of the county’s desire for change were to gain control over the county’s pension assets and control cost increases.

The county sought to put new employees into a defined-contribution plan. Before making the change, county staff conducted benefit comparison studies, carried out market research to learn what benefits were important to young professionals, and analyzed the short- and long-term costs of closing the defined-benefit plan to new employees. (When a pension plan is closed, the unfunded liabilities are amortized over a shorter period in keeping with sound actuarial principles, and with a fixed group of employees to serve, demographic assumptions must be revised.)

While county staff calculated that closing the defined-benefit plan would be more costly in the short run, the analysis showed long-term cost savings. County commissioners voted to move forward.

Although the costs to service the closed plan were higher than expected due to asset losses from the 2008 economic downturn, the county has continued to make its full annual required contribution. The closed plan was 70.2 percent funded in 2010 and reached the 76.8 percent level in 2012. So far, the county has not experienced any measurable changes in its ability to recruit or retain workers.

Legislating stability in Iowa: Sometimes, as in the case of the Iowa Public Employees’ Retirement System (IPERS), state legislation is needed so it is possible to make the full annual required contribution (ARC). While the IPERS’ funded ratio had remained relatively good, it was trending downward.

One problem IPERS had was a statutory required contribution rate that was well below the ARC. It had not been adjusted since 1979. The Iowa General Assembly authorized changes in 2006, 2010 and 2012 to increase the combined employer-employee contribution. Now IPERS has the authority to adjust the contribution rate to an annually adjusted cap and the funded ratio is over 80 percent again. For fiscal year 2014, the required contribution rate is at 100 percent of the ARC.

As these stories illustrate, there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to strengthening state and local pension plans. Each has a unique legal framework, and a solution that works for one government may be totally off the mark elsewhere. But while solutions for retirement plans can vary from place to place, there’s no debate about the importance of an adequate retirement income for government workers.




Pension Obligation Bonds - Beware of Quick Fixes.

Speaking of pensions, Municipal Market Advisors’ Matt Posner predicts that 2014 could mark an increase in governments issuing Pension Obligation Bonds to cover shortfalls in pension funding. These bonds are taxable debt that governments sell in order to dump the proceeds into pension funds to help fill funding gaps. They make the fund appear healthier, but also put more debt on the government’s books that must be paid out to bondholders. As such, “POBs are almost always a drag on credit quality,” Posner, a municipal analyst, writes in his Municipal Issuer Brief.

Posner lists four reasons for why POBs may become more attractive this year:

Posner warns that any government that issues POBs is sending up a red flag to investors. “Governments that have used POBs are likely to be viewed with some suspicion by investors [because this is] reflective of a gimmick,” he writes.




NYT: Bankruptcy Beyond the Potholes.

Congress is lurching toward its standard emergency, edge-of-the-cliff deal for the federal Highway Trust Fund, which could run short of money as early as August. The fund pays for the nation’s vitally needed road and transit projects and has operated on an 18.4-cents-per-gallon federal gasoline tax that hasn’t been raised since 1993. Now it is running on fumes, raising about $39 billion a year but facing shortfalls of close to $20 billion annually as more efficient cars pay less into the fund while infrastructure repair costs rise.

Worried lawmakers and administration officials are warning that road and transit projects could be halted in a matter of months and hundreds of thousands of construction workers left without paychecks unless Congress comes up with a viable solution soon. Without a long-term solution, planning, building and repairing infrastructure on state and local levels must inevitably suffer, transportation officials are warning.

Uncertainty over the faltering pace of federal funding prompted Arkansas officials to postpone the awarding of 10 planned highway and bridge projects last month. Officials in Colorado and California are talking of similarly slowing or delaying projects because of an anticipated summer slowdown in federal support as trust fund receipts fall short.

Increasingly, states have debated raising their own taxes to assure at least some continuity in transportation projects as Congress dawdles.

The obvious and equitable answer is to raise the gas tax, particularly in an era in which the neglect of infrastructure important to the economy gets palpably worse every year. But even a reasonable increase in the gas tax is considered a nonstarter for timorous lawmakers in an election year. The Obama administration has proposed a four-year, $302 billion transportation bill that would bolster the trust fund with the help of corporate tax reforms, not a higher gas tax. But this approach is already being rejected by congressional leaders as unlikely to pass this year.

Representative Dave Camp, the Michigan Republican who oversees the Ways and Means Committee, has talked about a tax code change to tax profits repatriated from abroad as a revenue source for the highway fund. While this idea has good bipartisan potential, it seems unlikely to happen given Congress’s default mode of gamesmanship and procrastination.

“We’re running out of time,” said Senator Barbara Boxer, the California Democrat who leads the public works committee, of the need to find a multiyear solution. A more stable, six-year plan sought by some lawmakers would require an additional $100 billion to cover trust fund shortfalls, according to congressional budget officials.

Two years ago, lawmakers raided general budget revenues to plaster a patch on the highway trust fund until Sept. 30 of this year. Congress has very little time left to come up with something better than last-minute fiscal sleight of hand.

By  




Fitch: Detroit Plan Shows ULT Pledge Has Adequate Protection.

The settlement allowing Detroit’s unlimited tax general obligation (ULTGO) bondholders to keep 74% of their principal payments is closer to Fitch Ratings’ expectation for how such securities would fare in bankruptcy, absent an express statutory lien. Yesterday’s agreement was preceded by an offer of just $0.15 on the $1.00 and a legal effort to designate these bonds as unsecured. In our view, this underscores the unpredictable nature of the negotiations for bondholders and issuers. Bond insurers Assured Guaranty, Ltd, Ambac Assurance Corp. and National Public Finance Guarantee Corporation agreed to allow the city to send the remaining 26% of tax revenues levied for ULTGOs to a fund for Detroit’s “most vulnerable” retirees, according to U.S. District Chief Judge Gerald Rosen. Whether or not this convinces pensioners to accept the settlement remains to be seen.

The prospects for other bonds in the proceeding also remain uncertain. A separate settlement with limited-tax general obligation bondholders seems likely. The city’s current proposal could reduce recovery on certificates of participation (COP) to zero if the COPs are invalidated and the pension system (which benefited from the sale of the COPs) is not required to return the borrowed assets.

Fitch will continue to monitor these actions and their potential implications for settlements in other distressed municipalities.
Contact:
Amy Laskey
Managing Director
U.S. Public Finance
+1 212 908-0568
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159
1 State Street Plaza
New York, NY

 

Media Relations: Elizabeth Fogerty, New York, Tel: +1 (212) 908 0526, Email: [email protected].

Additional information is available on www.fitchratings.com.

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article, which may include hyperlinks to companies and current ratings, can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com. All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.

ALL FITCH CREDIT RATINGS ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS. PLEASE READ THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS BY FOLLOWING THIS LINK: HTTP://FITCHRATINGS.COM/UNDERSTANDINGCREDITRATINGS. IN ADDITION, RATING DEFINITIONS AND THE TERMS OF USE OF SUCH RATINGS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE AGENCY’S PUBLIC WEBSITE ‘WWW.FITCHRATINGS.COM’. PUBLISHED RATINGS, CRITERIA AND METHODOLOGIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THIS SITE AT ALL TIMES. FITCH’S CODE OF CONDUCT, CONFIDENTIALITY, CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, AFFILIATE FIREWALL, COMPLIANCE AND OTHER RELEVANT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE FROM THE ‘CODE OF CONDUCT’ SECTION OF THIS SITE. FITCH MAY HAVE PROVIDED ANOTHER PERMISSIBLE SERVICE TO THE RATED ENTITY OR ITS RELATED THIRD PARTIES. DETAILS OF THIS SERVICE FOR RATINGS FOR WHICH THE LEAD ANALYST IS BASED IN AN EU-REGISTERED ENTITY CAN BE FOUND ON THE ENTITY SUMMARY PAGE FOR THIS ISSUER ON THE FITCH WEBSITE.




Fitch: Chicago's Plan Slow to Improve Pensions.

Fitch Ratings-New York-09 April 2014: The Chicago pension reform plan, approved by the Illinois State Legislature Tuesday, would eliminate the threat of pension insolvency facing two of the city’s four plans. However, long-term pension fund sustainability is many years away, according to Fitch Ratings. Illinois affords particularly strong legal protection to pension benefits and Fitch expects these changes will face protracted litigation.

Chicago’s (‘A-‘/Outlook Negative) combined unfunded liability for all four plans totals $19 billion, yielding a funded ratio of 35%. Fitch considers pension funding levels below 70% to be weak. The proposal seeks to improve two pension systems by trimming future growth of the liability with changes to the cost of living adjustments (COLA), while providing increased contributions from both employer and employees. The plan redefines the city’s annual required contribution (ARC) to an amount that would be sufficient to produce 90% funding in 40 years, similar to the weak funding standard used by the state’s plans prior to its recent pension reform.

The closed amortization period is a positive, but given the four- to six-year ramp up before reaching the weaker ARC level, combined with the long amortization period, Fitch believes it will be many years before meaningful reduction in the unfunded liability is evident.

Officials expect a property tax increase will cover half of the increased costs with budget savings, such as the elimination of most retiree healthcare benefits to make up the balance.

Increasing pension costs are a recurring theme among Chicago area governments and funding these increases will likely place a considerable stacked burden on the area’s resource base. The city plans to gradually increase its property tax levy by $50 million (approximately 6%) annually for five years before reaching the target increment of $250 million in the fifth year.

These increases will occur in the context of other steeply rising costs, including a statutorily required $600 million increase in contributions for the city’s other two pension systems (police and fire) in 2016. The city has not said how the $600 million increase for police and fire will be accommodated, but media reports indicate that future legislation may allow for a ramping up of the funding obligation.

Contact:

Arlene Bohner
Senior Director
U.S. Public Finance
+1 212-908-0554
33 Whitehall Street
New York, NY

Rob Rowan
Senior Director
Fitch Wire
+1 212 908-9159
1 State Street Plaza
New York, NY

Media Relations: Elizabeth Fogerty, New York, Tel: +1 (212) 908 0526, Email: [email protected].

The above article originally appeared as a post on the Fitch Wire credit market commentary page. The original article can be accessed at www.fitchratings.com. All opinions expressed are those of Fitch Ratings.

ALL FITCH CREDIT RATINGS ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS. PLEASE READ THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS BY FOLLOWING THIS LINK: HTTP://FITCHRATINGS.COM/UNDERSTANDINGCREDITRATINGS. IN ADDITION, RATING DEFINITIONS AND THE TERMS OF USE OF SUCH RATINGS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE AGENCY’S PUBLIC WEBSITE ‘WWW.FITCHRATINGS.COM’. PUBLISHED RATINGS, CRITERIA AND METHODOLOGIES ARE AVAILABLE FROM THIS SITE AT ALL TIMES. FITCH’S CODE OF CONDUCT, CONFIDENTIALITY, CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, AFFILIATE FIREWALL, COMPLIANCE AND OTHER RELEVANT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE FROM THE ‘CODE OF CONDUCT’ SECTION OF THIS SITE. FITCH MAY HAVE PROVIDED ANOTHER PERMISSIBLE SERVICE TO THE RATED ENTITY OR ITS RELATED THIRD PARTIES. DETAILS OF THIS SERVICE FOR RATINGS FOR WHICH THE LEAD ANALYST IS BASED IN AN EU-REGISTERED ENTITY CAN BE FOUND ON THE ENTITY SUMMARY PAGE FOR THIS ISSUER ON THE FITCH WEBSITE.




WSJ: Big Hedge Funds Roll Dice on Puerto Rico Debt.

  • Several large hedge funds doubled down on Puerto Rico in last month’s giant bond sale despite the U.S. territory’s financial struggles, according to confidential documents reviewed by The Wall Street Journal.

    Och-Ziff Capital Management LLC, Fir Tree Partners, Perry Capital LLC and Brigade Capital Management each bought more than $100 million of the bonds, according to a list of buyers of the $3.5 billion deal. The list doesn’t show whether the firms continue to hold the bonds, which carried junk credit ratings, or whether they sold some or all of their purchases afterward.

    John Paulson’s Paulson & Co. also purchased more than $100 million of the deal. It isn’t clear whether Mr. Paulson owned Puerto Rico debt before. His firm invested in a Puerto Rico hotel earlier this year.

    Hedge funds and other nontraditional buyers of municipal bonds bought around 70% of the deal when it was offered, according to calculations based on the document—an atypically high level for municipal-bond offerings. Many investors said they were drawn by the high yields and discounted price, though market participants said another major draw for buyers was the prospect of boosting the value of their existing investments in the island.

    Junk-rated municipal debt is rare and most municipal debt is bought by mutual funds and individual investors. Many mutual funds can’t buy debt rated below investment grade.

    Puerto Rico officials and the banks leading the bond sale— Barclays PLC, RBC Capital Markets LLC and Morgan Stanley—pitched the March 11 offering as a critical step in improving the island’s finances. Since then, prices of Puerto Rico’s bonds have fallen amid concerns it may restructure some of its debt, hurting some investors who purchased bonds at the offering price.

    Some hedge funds are known for their short-term investment strategies. If the island’s debt investors sell in and out of their bonds, it could push up Puerto Rico’s borrowing costs.

    Several large hedge funds doubled down on Puerto Rico in last month’s giant bond sale despite the U.S. territory’s financial struggles. An electronic billboard on the Morgan Stanley building near New York’s Times Square congratulates the territory on its sale. Reuters

    The list, assembled by the banks that underwrote the March offering, offers a rare window into how Wall Street doles out securities in hot offerings to its customers.

    The identities of debt buyers typically aren’t known to market participants. Regulations require banks that coordinated the deal to distribute the list to other banks that helped distribute the bonds, but it wasn’t meant to reach investors. Information about who owns what securities and when is valuable to traders when making decisions about buying and selling their holdings.

    “This is troublesome to know that all those names in any…deal are circulating because it gives an insight into what people are doing,” especially for private funds that aren’t required to report holdings, said Peter Hayes, head of the municipal-bond group at BlackRock Inc., which bought some of the Puerto Rico deal.

    Some of the firms including Och-Ziff, which bought $110 million of the offering, subsequently sold part of their holdings on the day of the deal, said a person familiar with the matter. Others including Perry Capital, which bought $120 million, are sticking with their investment, another person said.

    Brigade, Fir Tree, Perry and mutual-fund manager OppenheimerFunds were adding to already large investments in Puerto Rico’s debt. Many of these firms bought Puerto Rico debt over the past year at steeply discounted prices and higher yields, said people familiar with the matter. Puerto Rico bonds that were trading at distressed prices early in the year rose in price when it appeared the new bond sale would succeed, replenishing the government’s coffers.

    Warning signs are cropping up. Puerto Rico’s finance arm hired restructuring lawyers from Cleary Gottlieb Steen & Hamilton LLP, sparking worries among analysts that officials are considering a debt restructuring that could lead to bondholder losses. Puerto Rico in recent weeks also hired restructuring advisers at FTI Consulting Inc. who are working on the operations of utility and highway units, people familiar with the matter said. Puerto Rico previously had said it was working with a unit of Millstein & Co., a financial adviser that specializes in restructuring.

    Puerto Rico officials have said publicly that they intend to honor their obligations, and they have worked to change the island’s pension system and raised new taxes to increase revenues.

    Bill Black, who helps oversee the $6.2 billion Invesco High Yield Municipal Fund, said investors are asking “what the commonwealth is really intending now that they seem to have a restructuring financial adviser and a restructuring attorney engaged.”

    Mr. Black said his fund bought some of Puerto Rico’s new bonds last month, but sold the debt within a week as prices rose. The fund still owns some other Puerto Rico debt. His firm bought $14.5 million of the March bond.

    Other buyers of the March 11 bond included the biggest municipal-bond mutual-fund holder of Puerto Rico debt, OppenheimerFunds, as well as Harvard University and the treasury unit of publisher Gannett Co. Several insurance companies, banks and retail investors also were allotted chunks, according to the document.

    The 21-year bonds sold on March 11 recently were trading at around 92 cents on the dollar, to yield 8.839%, after trading up to about 99 cents on the dollar in the first few days on the market. The bonds originally were sold at 93 cents on the dollar to yield 8.727%, according to MSRB data.

    Puerto Rico officials declined to comment.

    Investors have sold $1.7 billion of the bond since Puerto Rico issued it, according to data from the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board. It isn’t clear how much of that debt was sold by hedge funds, and some of those transactions reflect trades by investors who purchased the bonds from original buyers of the debt.

    MATT WIRZ
    Updated April 9, 2014 8:41 p.m. ET

    —Mike Cherney, Al Yoon and Katy Burne contributed to this article.

    Write to Matt Wirz at [email protected]




    Judge Approves Pact to End Detroit Swap Deal.

    DETROIT — A federal judge on Friday approved this bankrupt city’s latest attempt to extricate itself from some long-term financial contracts that have been costing it tens of millions of dollars a year, holding up a settlement as an example of “the very spirit of negotiation and compromise” that he hoped other creditors would follow.

    Judge Steven W. Rhodes of United States Bankruptcy Court ruled that Detroit could proceed with a plan to pay $85 million to UBS and Bank of America to terminate the financial contracts, known as interest-rate swaps, that were used to help finance pensions.

    Under the terms of the settlement, the two banks agreed to back Detroit’s overall plan of adjustment, which is critical for the city’s push to resolve its bankruptcy by early fall. Municipal bankruptcy rules say that if one class of impaired creditors votes to approve the city’s plan of debt adjustment, the judge may be able to impose the terms forcibly on everybody else. The judge’s decision gives Detroit leverage for settlements with other creditors.

    Earlier this year, Judge Rhodes had rejected a previous attempt to end the swaps that called for Detroit to pay the banks $165 million. He called that proposal “just too much money” and noted that Detroit would have a reasonable chance of success if it sued the banks outright, calling the swaps invalid and refusing to make any termination payments at all.

    “They might have been discouraged and hardened their positions” by that assertion, Judge Rhodes said of the city and the two big banks. “They chose instead to re-engage.”

    “The message,” he added, “is that now is the time to negotiate.”

    Detroit’s emergency manager, Kevyn Orr, and other officials have been calling for creditors to negotiate settlements quickly out of fear that Detroit’s case will become a hopeless quagmire if creditors keep fighting the city’s proposals for resolving their debts. The state law that put Detroit under emergency management is scheduled to expire in September.

    “There’s a lot of pressure on the judge to wrap up this bankruptcy quickly,” said Abayomi Azikiwe, an observer who said he was a member of the Moratorium Now Coalition.

    Detroit entered into the swap contracts in 2005, when it tapped the municipal bond market for $1.4 billion to put into its workers’ pension funds. Much of the deal was structured with variable-rate debt, and the swaps were intended to work as a hedge, to protect Detroit if interest rates rose. But rates fell, and under those circumstances, the terms of the swaps called for Detroit to make regular payments to UBS and Bank of America. The swaps cost Detroit about $36 million a year.

    The 2005 borrowing also required an unusual structure to avoid violating the city’s legal debt limit. In 2009, the debt was downgraded to junk, putting the city out of compliance with the terms of the swaps. So Detroit restructured the swap obligations, offering the two banks the tax revenue that it received from local casinos as a backstop.

    When Detroit declared bankruptcy last summer, it estimated the cost of terminating its swaps at about $345 million. Days before filing its bankruptcy petition, Detroit said Bank of America and UBS had given it a break, so that it would have to pay only about $250 million to cancel the contracts. But other creditors, facing bigger relative losses, complained that the two banks were still getting way too much. They argued, among other things, that the interest-rate swaps were invalid from the beginning because the use of casino taxes for financial hedges is not allowed under state law.

    With complaints about the swap payment mounting last December, Judge Rhodes sent the parties back to renegotiate their deal with the help of another federal judge, Gerald E. Rosen, the chief justice for the Eastern District of Michigan. Judge Rosen is the lead mediator of the Detroit bankruptcy, trying to negotiate settlements among Detroit’s more than 100,000 creditors to keep the huge bankruptcy from being mired in endless lawsuits.

    Judge Rosen persuaded Bank of America and UBS to agree to a $165 million settlement just before Christmas, but Judge Rhodes rejected that deal, saying it was still too generous. He urged the two sides to try to negotiate a new settlement.

    By MARY WILLIAMS WALSH




    Innovative Transportation Funding.

    The Federal Highway Trust Fund is being depleted faster than tax receipts can replenish it. Having concluded that they no longer can count on a stable and growing stream of federal revenue, states and local jurisdictions are taking matters into their own hands. Here’s what some laboratories of democracy are doing.http://www.futurestructure.com/States-Get-Creative-to-Fund-Transportation-Infrastructure.html



    Chicago Mayor Changes Pension Plan.

    Mayor Rahm Emanuel still wants to raise Chicago property taxes as part of a plan to shore up city pension systems, but he no longer is asking state lawmakers to do the dirty work.

    Faced with blistering criticism from Gov. Pat Quinn and significant reluctance from state lawmakers, the mayor on Monday revised his pension proposal to ensure that the politically unpalatable task of a property tax hike instead would fall solely to the Chicago City Council.

    That change makes it easier for lawmakers to vote for the city pension bill and could help Emanuel score a big political victory this spring. But approval of the measure still would do nothing to solve the most immediate financial problem at City Hall — a $600 million increase next year for the pension funds of police and firefighters who would not be covered by the legislation in Springfield.

    The flurry of movement on the city pension situation started with Quinn, who last week declined to weigh in on the mayor’s plan. On Monday, however, the re-election seeking Democratic governor, who would have to sign the bill into law, announced that he didn’t like the property tax increase.

    View Full Story from the Chicago Tribune



    Md. Lawmakers Pass Bill to Block Use of Eminent Domain for 2 Years.

    State lawmakers approved a bill Monday that bars the state from using eminent domain to seize mortgages or deeds of trust for a two-year period.

    The move, sponsored by State Senator Joan Carter Conway, pre-emptively blocks municipalities from enacting a program pioneered in Richmond, Calif. designed to spur refinancing of underwater mortgages, in which a home is worth less than the original loan.

    Baltimore City Councilman Bill Henry, who is campaigning for Conway’s seat, had asked the city last year to look at the idea, which would establish a municipal authority to offer to buy underwater loans from lenders and, if refused, seize them for refinancing using the home’s current value.

    The program targets mortgages sold as private label securitizations to multiple investors, which can be particularly difficult to refinance.

    Banks and others have staunchly opposed the plan.  Under eminent domain, property must be acquired for “fair market value” which means the city could force the mortgage-owner to take a loss on the face value of the loan.

    The General Assembly also voted to reduce the amount of time homeowners are liable for mortgage debt not expunged by a short sale or foreclosure auction.

    Lenders must file within three years to collect the remaining debt – the difference between the value of the sale and the value of the original loan.

    Previously, banks had up to 12 years to file a deficiency judgment. State law places a three-year statute of limitations on most civil suits.

    Advocates had originally pushed the assembly to cut the statute of limitations from 12 years to six months. They argued that the extended timeline made it difficult for families to resolve their financial troubles in one-go, exposing them to greater uncertainty and risk.

    Maryland Consumer Rights Coalition Executive Director Marceline White, who had lobbied for the change, praised the progress.

    “The new law gives families who’ve struggled through foreclosures a better chance to rebuild their lives – without having a huge debt hanging over their heads for years and years,” she said in a statement.

    The governor must sign the bills for them to become law.

    Read more: http://www.baltimoresun.com/business/real-estate/wonk/bal-housing-measures-pass-general-assembly-20140408,0,3895961.story#ixzz2yVWhyax3

    By Natalie Sherman 1:00 p.m. EDT, April 8, 2014




    Moody's: Public Pension Plans Lag Corporate Plans in Managing Credit Risk.

    Credit risks related to pension liabilities will be a bigger problem for governments than for corporations for at least another decade, according to a new report from Moody’s Investors Service.

     The report is Moody’s first look at the divergent pension risks of the public and private sectors, said Alfred Medioli, vice president and senior credit officer for public finance. “It’s very illustrative to see how different disclosure regulation and exposure can be,” he said in an interview.

    While corporations have federal agencies, accounting rules and shareholders monitoring how well they fund their pension plans and manage the related credit risk, state and local governments do not. “It becomes an issue of governance,” said Mr. Medioli, who added that more arcane accounting practices for government pension sponsors don’t help control underfunding. “The problem began to build and nobody was able to grab a hold of it. That’s why we began this study.”

    The report notes the 50 largest corporations have a median pension liability as a percentage of total debt (including pensions) of 24%, while the government median is 73% for states and 49% for large local governments. The state data are for fiscal year 2012 and the local government number is based on fiscal 2011 data.

    The report also notes strategies used by the private sector to manage pension risk, including switching to defined contribution plans from defined benefit and the use of liability-driven investment strategies. “The question is, will (governments) have to follow the corporate route to derisk, or will they come up with something different? We think that they will find a solution to this,” said Mr. Medioli.

    The two sectors also differ on the degree of taxpayer backstops in place. While corporate sponsors are likely to place less strain on government pension guarantees as their risk of needing help from the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corp. diminishes as they derisk, state and local governments are facing a growing need for taxpayer funding, Moody’s found.

    Hank Kim, executive director and counsel of the National Conference on Public Employee Retirement Systems, Washington, cautioned that mimicking the corporate switch to defined contribution plans is not the answer for government workers. “Thirty years down the road, we’re going to be a nation of seniors subsisting on social safety net programs paid for by middle-class taxpayers. In the larger scheme, (the switch to DC is) just deferring costs onto taxpayers,” Mr. Kim said.

    BY  |  | UPDATED 

    — Contact Hazel Bradford at [email protected] | @Bradford_PI




    City Should Have Turned to TIFs Instead of Property Tax Hikes: Study.

    What the City of Chicago spent in each of the last several years on tax-increment financing funding exceeded what it owed in pension costs, so any proposal to raise property taxes to fund pensions should consider TIFs, wrote the authors of a study to be released Friday titled, “Putting Municipal Pension Costs in Context: Chicago.”

    For 2012 alone, the city owed $385.8 million to its pension funds while putting $457 million in property taxes into its TIFs, wrote Thomas Cafcas and Greg LeRoy, of Good Jobs First, a Washington, D.C.-based think tank that examines public subsidies. TIF revenue more than tripled since 2000, when it was about $129 million, they said, and once the money comes out of the city’s general fund, its uses are curtailed by law.

    Meanwhile, in a pension deal that must be approved in Springfield, Mayor Rahm Emanuel has proposed raising property taxes and pension reform for retired laborers and certain other city workers, including school clerks and classroom aides.

    “What we’re saying in the report is that any fair budgeting discussion that happens around the pensions certainly should include the enormous amount of revenues that are being diverted by TIFs,” Cafcas said. “A picture of the sky falling everywhere in Chicago is being painted. We think all of the city’s budget should be considered here.”

    Inside a TIF district, a portion of property tax revenue ordinarily destined for local governments is siphoned into a special fund to subsidize public or private projects at City Hall’s discretion. The district is supposed to meet legal standards for being “blighted,” but that definition has been stretched to include downtown Chicago and popular neighborhoods near it.

    The city earmarked $55 million for a proposed DePaul basketball arena/McCormick Place event center, which resulted in public uproar. It since has moved the money to a 1,200-room hotel project next to the arena site. But millions in TIF funds are paying for the resurfacing of parts of Lake Shore Drive and improvements to streetlights on the West Side.

    Of the $3.38 billion the city spent in TIF money between 2003 and 2012, $1.27 billion paid for private development projects, but $1.13 billion went toward debt service on past projects and $1.22 billion paid for public improvements, according to the mayor’s 2013 financial analysis.

    “We cannot stop the bleeding of the City’s pension crisis through the use of TIFs or TIF surplus, which would only serve as one-time revenue,” Kelley Quinn, a spokeswoman for the city budget office, said in an emailed statement. “The City’s pension crisis has been building for decades — much longer than the existence of TIFs, which are used for brick and mortar capital projects that improve our parks, schools, roads, and businesses — all of which enhance Chicago’s neighborhoods.”

    The Chicago Teachers Union has 10,000 active and retired members that would be affected by the mayor’s municipal pension proposal and has yet to reach a deal on teacher pensions. It has been calling for creative sources of revenue to solve pension and other budgetary problems.

    CTU staff coordinator Jackson Potter called the study’s findings “profound,” saying “it shows this was a manufactured crisis.”

    TIFs were intended to help truly poor neighborhoods that needed investments, he said, and the CTU members who are part of the city’s deal had low-paying jobs to begin with as lunch helpers, janitors and classroom aides.

    “The neighborhoods that receive the most TIF money need it the least,” Potter said. “The irony is the very people who live in those communities who were supposed to benefit from TIF dollars are the ones that are getting their pensions cut.”

     Study: “Putting Municipal Pension Costs in Context: Chicago”

    BY LAUREN FITZPATRICK Education Reporter April 3, 2014 8:34PM

    Email: [email protected]

    Twitter: @bylaurenfitz




    Detroit’s Orr Explains Bondholders’ 74% Recovery: Five Questions.

    Detroit agreed this week to pay some bondholders about 74 percent of the $388 million they’re owed, up from proposals of as little as 15 percent, as part of an effort to resolve the city’s record $18 billion bankruptcy.

    The deal, negotiated with three bond insurers, covers only unlimited-tax general-obligation debt. Detroit’s initial treatment of the securities threatened a $900 billion segment of the $3.7 trillion muni market that investors previously thought was among the most secure.

    The following is condensed from an interview on April 9 with Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr at Bloomberg’s New York headquarters:

    Q: Why do unlimited-tax general-obligation bondholders now get 74 percent instead of the 15 percent offered weeks ago?

    A: The reason why they were at 15 percent in the plan was because we were treating them as general unsecured creditors. As you might imagine, we were already in discussions with them about their interests and how they would be treated.

    Their revenue stream is UTGO. That’s a dedicated revenue stream, a millage that was created solely for them, and there’s an argument to be made by some that if we aren’t paying on their bonds, we can’t collect the millage.

    It’s not so much that their percentage has changed from 15 to 74, it’s that they’ve agreed to give us the equivalent of 26 percent of what they’re owed from a dedicated revenue stream. That’s the equivalent of $100 million.

    Q: That language is much different than last year. What made you change your view of the bonds’ security?

    A: There are pros and cons to whether or not the UTGO bond millage can be used by the city if we’re not paying the UTGO bondholders. There’s an argument that because that millage is a special dedicated revenue, despite us treating them as unsecured all this time, if you’re not paying the bondholders, you don’t get to collect the revenue. So it could all go away.

    Instead, the parties sat down and negotiated. It’s better for us to reach an agreement as far as what they’re willing to give the city as a percentage of their revenue in a negotiated solution that allows us to continue collecting the millage. We’re paying them a portion, but the city also benefits.

    Q: This is just one deal with one group. How close are you to reaching agreements with other creditors?

    A: We’d like to get everything we can get, including settlements with some of the other actives and retirees, in by this week or early next week.

    In the normal course, our deadlines are aggressive, but given that nothing’s going to change, this is more than enough time to get done what needs to get done. I hope today’s announcement incentivizes everybody to realize we’re working very hard to get some deals in. We hope to have additional announcements in the weeks, perhaps days, to come.

    Q: Standard & Poor’s downgraded bonds from the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department to CCC from BB-, citing a distressed exchange that would equate to a default. Has your plan for them changed?

    A: Our plan continues to treat them as secured, as they are. They have a specific security interest.

    We understand the ratings because any time we do something beyond the status quo of the existing instrument, it may constitute a technical default — if you try to change the terms, if you ask for a change in terms of the coupon rate.

    In a bankruptcy, the principal amount is 100 percent return. We’re not dealing with the principal now. We can ask, but they may say no.

    Q: How would you characterize your relationship with your neighboring communities?

    A: Historically, the level of cooperation, everybody has recognized could be worked on. I was hopeful in this process, perhaps we could achieve that. Some of the counties balked at the DWSD deal for a number of reasons, which I find unfortunate.

    I’m more than happy to continue talks. There are communications going back and forth. I still think for DWSD, an authority is the best choice, but we’re running out of time.

    By Brian Chappatta  Apr 10, 2014 9:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Brian Chappatta in New York at[email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Alan Goldstein




    Atlanta Stadium for Falcons Prompts Bond Fight.

    Home Depot Inc. co-founder Arthur Blank, having bought the Atlanta Falcons, is getting help from the city to build a $1.2 billion football stadium to replace a venue that a skeptic noted is barely older than Miley Cyrus.

    The billionaire said his ambition to bring another Super Bowl to town rides on replacing the Georgia Dome, which opened in 1992, with funds including $200 million in taxpayer money. Neighborhood critics say a city-adopted plan unfairly burdens residents of two predominantly black neighborhoods. Vine City and English Avenue are areas steeped in the city’s civil rights history, and where the Reverend Martin Luther King Jr. brought his family to live in 1967.

    The project calls for demolishing the city’s first black Baptist church, and turning the street named after King into a dead-end for stadium VIP parking.

    A group of community leaders, including three activists and a retired Baptist minister, won a court ruling in February allowing them to intervene in the city’s bond process. Yesterday, in state court in Atlanta, they argued against the city’s financing plan.

    Superior Court Judge Ural Glanville limited the arguments to the bonds and barred testimony about the stadium’s potential impact on the neighborhoods. He didn’t issue an immediate ruling.

    “It’s not that these are not important issues,” Glanville said at the start of a six-hour hearing. “It’s just that what I can consider in a bond validation hearing is limited.”

    Economically Obsolete

    Georgia law requires court approval before government general-obligation revenue bonds can be issued. The judge will weigh whether the bonds, backed by hotel taxes, are valid.

    “It’s not too hard to be skeptical about this, when you have a stadium only two months older than Miley Cyrus being declared economically obsolete,” said Victor Matheson, a professor and sports economist with the College of the Holy Cross, in Worcester,Massachusetts, referring to the 21-year-old singer. “This is the youngest stadium to be abandoned that I can think of in recent memory.”

    The group taking the city to court says that under the right circumstances, it doesn’t oppose a new home for the National Football League team. It says pledges made before the Georgia Dome opened weren’t kept.

    “We were promised back then that we would be made whole, and not a dime was available for poor folk,” William Cottrell, ex-pastor of the 125-year-old Beulah Baptist Church in Vine City, said of the city’s vow to invest millions of dollars into the neighborhood when the Georgia Dome was being built about 22 years ago. “We’re not going to let them do that this time without some problem.”

    Hotel Tax

    The residents’ legal argument hinges on the claim that extending the city’s hotel tax to repay the bonds unconstitutionally turns a general law, applicable statewide, into one governing a single project. The city says in court filings that the bonds are authorized by state law and the plan’s use of 39 percent of the hotel tax is appropriate.

    A neighborhood-impact study requested by the objectors is unnecessary, the city’s lawyers said March 27 in court papers.

    No Witnesses

    Attorneys for the city called no witnesses during yesterday’s hearing, telling Glanville that he could decide the case on the evidence presented in court filings. Glanville refused to allow lawyers for the residents to call witnesses from the community.

    “We were disappointed our witnesses were not allowed to show the human side of this,” Thelma Wyatt Moore, a retired state court judge who represents the challengers, said after the hearing.

    Glanville’s decision to exclude impact testimony could be grounds for appeal if he validates the bonds, Moore said.

    Douglass Selby, an attorney for the city, countered that the neighborhood activists had other avenues to challenge the stadium’s impact, including administrative appeals.

    “The law is very clear on what the bond validation process is for,” Selby said.

    The new stadium is expected to create more than 1,400 jobs and bring in $155 million in annual revenue, according to the city.

    Blank’s pursuit of a new stadium has been at least eight years in the making. He proposed a revised financial arrangement with the state’s stadium operator in 2006, citing the need to compete with other teams.

    Remodeling Job

    The ex-Home Depot chairman told the New York Times in 2012 that the Dome, then 20 years old and the site of Super Bowls in 1994 and 2000, wasn’t right for a remodeling job.

    Blank, like some other team owners seeking public funding, suggested he would go elsewhere, as did the Atlanta Braves baseball team, which is leaving for the city’s northern suburbs.

    In January 2013, in discussions with the City Council, Blank said he had been courted by Los Angeles business leaders about moving there, the Atlanta Business Chronicle reported.

    Less than two months later, Atlanta approved a financing deal to replace the Georgia Dome about two miles west of downtown.

    Blank’s wealth is an estimated $1.8 billion, according to Forbes magazine’s list of the richest Americans. He bought the Falcons in February 2002 for $545 million and owns the Georgia Force, an Arena Football League team.

    Big Events

    He has said the city needs a new stadium to attract a Major League Soccer team as well as big events, including the National Football League’s Super Bowl and soccer’s World Cup.

    The stadium bonds would be issued by the Atlanta Development Authority and repaid through the hotel tax. The City Council also agreed to dedicate hotel tax revenue beyond the bond payments to operating the new publicly owned stadium.

    That might generate an additional $900 million over 30 years, the neighborhood challengers said in court documents citing the bond filing. Although the stadium will be state-owned through the Georgia World Congress Center Authority, the Falcons will operate it and keep stadium revenue under a licensing agreement that requires the team to pay an annual rent of $2.5 million.

    “We have full confidence that our partners at the city, Invest Atlanta and the GWCCA will appropriately handle these challenges,” Kim Shreckengost, a spokeswoman for AMB Group LLC, the Falcons’ parent company, said in an e-mail, referring to the Georgia World Congress Center Authority.

    $15 Million

    The Arthur M. Blank Family Foundation has committed to investing $15 million to improve the quality of life in neighborhoods around the stadium in addition to $15 million from the city, she said.

    “We also hope to leverage additional public and private funds in our efforts,” she said.

    City Council President Ceasar Mitchell said he supports re-examining the financing after community groups called for reversing of votes of approval. He said he’ll support “any necessary” changes in the agreement.

    U.S. cities are on the hook for at least $10 billion of sports stadium bonds, with at least one-fourth for the NFL, according to data compiled by Bloomberg.

    The numbers are forcing Atlanta and other cities, including Tampa, Florida, and Oakland, California, to weigh the cost of subsidies and community opposition against the political and economic win of retaining professional sports teams that explicitly or implicitly threaten to leave town.

    Fearing Loss

    “When the fear is really losing the team altogether, people tend to buckle,” Matheson said.

    The stadium-plan opponents think they can reverse the city’s decision or delay the project indefinitely, forcing renegotiations, said John Woodham, an attorney who represents the neighbors with Moore. They will appeal if they lose Glanville’s ruling, he said.

    The stadium is to be built next to the Georgia Dome and completed in 2017.

    The plans for Martin Luther King Drive essentially isolates English Avenue and Vine City from the rest of downtown, Moore said.

    “This project in its concept and configuration is shoving out the community and turning its back on the community,” she said. “The community should share in the bounties that are being conferred on the Falcons. We have no opposition to a stadium under the right circumstances.”

    Vine City

    Settled in the 19th century by large landowners, the neighborhoods on the western edge of downtown Atlanta began with segregated subdivisions, schools and churches.

    Herman Cain, who sought the Republican nomination for president in 2012, went to school on English Avenue, according to the Vine City Health and Housing Ministry. The civil rights leader Julian Bond, the first president of the Southern Poverty Law Center, who also served seven years in the Georgia Legislature, also lived in the neighborhood.

    Bond’s son, Michael Julian Bond, an Atlanta City Council member, voted for the stadium plan.

    “We didn’t have any leverage to force them to agree to anything,” Bond said in a phone interview, referring to the team. “We can ill afford to lose the team.”

    The city did nothing wrong in its financing deal, Bond said.

    Groundbreaking on the new stadium is to take place in May, said Jennifer LeMaster, a spokeswoman for the World Congress Center Authority.

    Retractable Roof

    The eight-sided stadium will have 71,000 seats, about the same as the Georgia Dome, with a transparent retractable roof and upper concourse windows that can be opened to create the feel of an outdoor facility, according to plans unveiled in October.

    The center is overseeing construction of the stadium and is establishing new personal seat licenses to be marketed by the Falcons with the revenue contributed to the public-financing portion of the stadium costs, according to bond documents.

    The legal challenge won’t affect construction plans, LeMaster said. “The project is on schedule and substantive construction work is already under way,” she said.

    More than two decades after the Georgia Dome’s birth, the neighborhoods still need low-income housing, a parish nurse and a community school, said Cottrell, the ex-Vine City pastor. Jobs for local residents at the stadium would be a bonus, he said.

    Braves’ Move

    Atlanta approved the football stadium plan without extending similar support to Major League Baseball’s Braves, whose Turner Field was built for the 1996 Summer Olympics.

    The Braves in November announced plans to build a $672 million stadium in suburban Cobb County. The 42,000-seat venue will be paid for in part with $450 million in public funds, Reed said in November. The city was unwilling to use public money for a new stadium and wished the Braves well in their future home, the mayor said.

    The city couldn’t afford to finance two deals at the same time, Carlos Campos, a spokesman for the mayor, said in an e-mail.

    “It has nothing to do with choosing one team over the other, ” Campos said. “Cobb County offered the Braves more than we were willing to provide.”

    The case is Georgia v. Atlanta Development Authority, 2014-cv-242035, Superior Court, Fulton County (Atlanta).

    By Sophia Pearson and David Beasley  Apr 10, 2014 9:01 PM PT

     




    Parking Lots Transformed as U.S. Cities Seek More Revenue.

    After decades of copying sprawling suburbs by accommodating the automobile, U.S. cities are starting to tear up their slabs of asphalt.

    In Philadelphia, construction will begin by July on a 700-room hotel on a plot near City Hall where vehicles have parked since 1991. In Baltimore, an apartment tower may rise on a parking lot along the Inner Harbor.

    Offering developers tax incentives and zoning changes, officials are seeking to remove parking facilities in favor of projects that will draw more revenue, while making their communities friendlier to pedestrians as people eschew cars.

    “We want to create an environment where people want to walk in, want to bike in and want to take transit in,” said Beth Elliott, principal city planner in Minneapolis, which is pushing redevelopment to bolster use of mass transit. “And that is not a sea of surface parking lots.”

    Cities that have struggled to recover from the 18-month recession that ended in 2009 are gaining traction in their attempts to build revenue. This year, all but seven of 363 metropolitan areas will see economic gains, in contrast to 2013, when 97 had declines, according to a January report by the U.S. Conference of Mayors.

    ‘Lazy Asset’

    Communities are targeting parking facilities for transformation because they’re a “lazy asset,” said Gabe Klein, a senior visiting fellow at the Urban Land Institute in Washington.

    “From an economic standpoint, the cities are not getting the taxes that they should be,” said Klein, who has worked on transportation policies in Washington and Chicago.

    Parking lots are natural for development because there’s often no demolition involved and chances of running into environmental issues are lower.

    At the same time, Americans are driving less than they did eight years ago. From 2001 to 2009, the greatest decline was among people ages 16 to 34, according to a May report by the U.S. Public Interest Research Group,

    Minneapolis is encouraging the use of its light-rail system through zoning changes. Minnesota’s largest city has banned new surface lots downtown and isn’t forcing developers to create additional parking.

    That’s helped builders, because erecting garages is costly, Elliott said. Construction is expected this year on a 320-unit apartment complex on a surface parking lot that would connect to the enclosed Skyway System pedestrian bridge.

    In another downtown project, the Chicago-based parking company InterPark Holdings Inc. is negotiating with developers to build a hotel and shops by its garage adjacent to the Skyway.

    Empty Nesters

    In Baltimore, officials see empty nesters moving downtown without cars and fewer young people with drivers’ licenses, said Kirby Fowler, president of the Downtown Partnership of Baltimore, a non-profit funded by commercial property owners.

    The group is working with city zoning officials on proposed changes that may pass this year, such as barring parking garages as the main use on major streets and phasing out downtown surface lots, which he says “disrupts the urban fabric.”

    “When you have these large gaping holes between buildings, it doesn’t lend itself to a pleasant pedestrian experience,” Fowler said.

    Good Business

    InterPark is seeking to create more than just a garage on a surface lot in the Inner Harbor, said Chuck Murphy, senior vice president in acquisitions and development. He said the company is looking at proposals for a hotel, residences and shops, which would be better for the city — and for its business.

    “What we’re looking to do is to optimize the use of the parking facility to meet customer demand various parts of the day,” Murphy said.

    Incentives have been critical for the Inner Harbor proposals, said Courtenay Jenkins, senior director in the Baltimore office of Cushman & Wakefield, which is assisting InterPark’s search for a development partner.

    That site is eligible for tax credits, and the developer of an apartment tower on another Inner Harbor property can apply for a payment in lieu of taxes, said Fowler.

    Philadelphia’s $280 million hotel project received $33 million in tax-increment financing, in which the increase in tax receipts goes toward repaying debt that funds the development.

    Even parking facilities owned by municipalities are in demand. The parking authority of Allentown,Pennsylvania, last month agreed to sell a downtown lot to a partnership that would build an office and retail site with a nightclub, said executive director Tamara Dolan. Board members haven’t yet decided how to spend the $1.4 million from the sale, she said.

    “This particular project adds a new spin on the activity downtown,” she said.

    For Minneapolis, redeveloping the downtown lots is key to its future, said Elliott, the planner.

    “The more property investment, the more taxes we have to be able to make improvements in roads, in transit, in parks,” she said. “It’s more sustainable for our region if we don’t keep spreading out.”

    By Romy Varghese  Apr 10, 2014 7:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Romy Varghese in Philadelphia at [email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Stacie Sherman, Alan Goldstein




    Moody's: Moving Retirees to Exchanges Not Easy Option for Cities Looking to Lessen Healthcare Burden.

     New York, April 09, 2014 — Cities looking to lower their healthcare and benefit expenses by cutting benefits and encouraging retirees to enroll in the healthcare exchanges created by the Affordable Care Act (ACA) will face many challenges, according to a new report from Moody’s Investors Service.

    Citing the experience of Stockton, Chicago and Detroit, which recently cut or eliminated healthcare coverage for retirees, “Affordable Care Act Health Exchanges Will Not Bring Quick Budget Relief to US Cities” discusses the hurdles that may prevent other cities from using exchanges and other provisions of the ACA to reduce their growing healthcare benefits, also known as OPEB (other post-employment benefits).

    “Retiree healthcare costs represent a sizable and mostly unfunded liability for cities,” said Cristin Jacoby, Moody’s Assistant Vice President and Analyst. Stockton and Detroit, both bankrupt, and Chicago, which has the highest pension liability of any municipality Moody’s rates, have tried to lower their budgets by reducing retiree healthcare and pointing retirees to the ACA healthcare exchanges.

    “Retiree lawsuits in these cities have already challenged this move and could deter other cities from trying the same,” cautions Jacoby.

    It may also be politically risky for cities to push retirees toward the healthcare exchanges. Public opinion about the exchanges is low following their troubled rollout, and uncertainty regarding coverage and protection could create a backlash if cities cut or eliminate municipal benefits.

    “Given the slow economic rebound and stagnating household income, cities may find it is easier to cut other services or raise taxes rather than cut retiree healthcare benefits,” said Jacoby.

    For the few cities that ultimately default on their debt, fulfilling these healthcare liabilities may reduce bondholder recovery rates.

    “Affordable Care Act Will Not Bring Immediate Budget Relief to Cities” is available to Moody’s research subscribers athttps://www.moodys.com/research/Affordable-Care-Act-Health-Exchanges-Will-Not-Bring-Immediate-Budget–PBM_PBM167411.

    ***

    Global Credit Research – 09 Apr 2014

    NOTE TO JOURNALISTS ONLY: For more information, please call one of our global press information hotlines: New York +1-212-553-0376, London +44-20-7772-5456, Tokyo +813-5408-4110, Hong Kong +852-3758-1350, Sydney +61-2-9270-8141, Mexico City 001-888-779-5833, São Paulo 0800-891-2518, or Buenos Aires 0800-666-3506. You can also email us at [email protected] or visit our web site at www.moodys.com.

     

     

     

    Cristin Jacoby
    AVP – Analyst
    Credit Policy
    Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
    250 Greenwich Street
    New York, NY 10007
    U.S.A.
    JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
    SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

    Anne Van Praagh
    MD – Sovereign Risk
    Credit Policy
    JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
    SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653

    Releasing Office:
    Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.
    250 Greenwich Street
    New York, NY 10007
    U.S.A.
    JOURNALISTS: 212-553-0376
    SUBSCRIBERS: 212-553-1653




    Detroit Settlement A Breakthrough.

    WASHINGTON — Market participants said Detroit’s settlement with three bond insurers is a breakthrough in the city’s bankruptcy proceedings, even though it leaves questions about the city’s financial future unanswered and its impact on other locations remains unclear.

    The settlement announced Wednesday with Ambac Financial Group, National Public Finance Guarantee Inc., and Assured Guaranty, which together insure $388 million of the city’s unlimited-tax general obligation debt, calls for a 74% recovery. That is a large increase from the city’s 15% offer on March 31. More importantly, some market participants said, the deal may bring more of the involved parties to the settlement table.

    “It’s a breakthrough,” said Frank Shafroth, director of the State and Local Leadership Center at George Mason University. “If one of them makes a deal, it makes the rest of them sit up and take notice.”

    All three insurers said they would cover the full payments to their bondholders, making up what isn’t covered by the settlement. The deal calls for the Michigan Finance Authority to issue new bonds to refinance the outstanding debt on or before the city’s exit from bankruptcy. The new bonds would feature a lien on the city’s state aid as additional collateral, ensuring that the bonds are treated as secured in the future. Also on Wednesday, the insurers of the city’s pension obligation bonds announced they want the court to review several offers for the assets of the Detroit Art Institute, a controversial move that could provide as much as $2 billion of outside money to the city. Natalie Cohen, a managing director and muni market researcher at Wells Fargo, said Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr’s decision to recognize the secured status of the ULTGOs could induce others to settle.

    “This, plus the newly announced proposals for the Detroit Art Institute potentially will lead to additional settlements on the way to approval of a plan of adjustment,” Cohen said.

    Susan Collet, senior vice president for government relations with the Bond Dealers of America, said the BDA is pleased with the fact that the deal requires U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes to find that the ULTGOs are secured.

    “In comparison with the original deal, this should be a very welcome development,” Collet said.

    The settlement requires court approval, and observers noted that the deal with the three bond insurers fails to resolve solve other issues Detroit faces or answer market-wide questions about GO bond disclosure and the role of state governments in assisting distressed municipalities. The settlement doesn’t cover any of Detroit’s other debts, but would require the ULTGO’s to be treated more favorably than unsecured bonds.

    “In our view, this underscores the unpredictable nature of the negotiations for bondholders and issuers,” wrote Fitch Ratings analyst Amy Laskey.

    Others said it could be difficult to discern the effect of this development on the wider market.

    “Almost all civil litigation in this country ends with a settlement, without a final resolution of the claims and arguments made by the parties,” said Allen Robertson, president of the National Association of Bond Lawyers. “In light of that fact, the settlement between the City of Detroit and the insurers of its unlimited tax general obligation bonds (contingent upon confirmation of a plan) is unremarkable.

    “For the municipal market,” Robertson said, “the lack of a final resolution means that the questions raised by the Detroit bankruptcy almost certainly will continue to be debated and result in some changes in disclosure. Given the facts relating to Detroit and the settlement, however, it seems unclear whether states will feel compelled to make statutory changes to shore up the status of their general obligation bonds.”

    Shafroth said Detroit can’t be compared directly with other cities that have faced insolvency or that may face it in the future.

    “There are such unique factors here,” Shafroth said.

    Genevieve Nolan, the analyst in charge of Detroit for Moody’s Investors Service, said the deal would bring the recovery level up to the level the agency expected. She said Moody’s must now see whether the court upholds the legality of the settlement.

    “Obviously, this is a development we’re working on very closely right now,” Nolan said.

    Cohen published a commentary which concluded by urging investors to remember that nothing is yet final in these proceedings.

    “It’s not over until it’s over,” Cohen wrote. “Investors should keep in mind that the city’s proposals (and state’s) are just that: proposals. Thus far, Judge Steven Rhodes has proceeded quickly but thoughtfully in our view. Many objections to Orr’s March 31 plan were filed this week and Judge Rhodes scheduled a hearing for April 17 on the disclosure statement that the city is expected to send to creditors for approval in May. We would not be surprised if additional news comes out this week ahead of the hearing.”

    BY KYLE GLAZIER

    APR 10, 2014 2:27pm ET




    Detroit's New Bankruptcy Plan Proposes Lower Pension, Creditor Payouts.

    The City of Detroit on Monday proposed slightly lower payouts for some pensioners and unsecured bondholders as feverish negotiations continue in the largest municipal bankruptcy in U.S. history.

    In an amended bankruptcy restructuring plan filed electronically in federal bankruptcy court in Detroit, the city maintained its previous proposal to invest $1.5 billion over 10 years to improve services while delivering steep cuts to unsecured creditors, including retirees and debt holders.

    Among the biggest changes in the revised plan of adjustment and accompanying disclosure statement:

    — The city said police and fire retirees would get a 14% cut to their monthly pension checks if they reject the city’s restructuring plan. The original figure was a 10% cut a month ago.

    — The city proposed paying general obligation bondholders 15 cents on the dollar instead of 20 cents on the dollar.

    — The revised plan also includes a proposal for the elimination of the current board of trustees for the city’s general retiree pension fund and the police and fire retirement fund.

    — More information on how the city plans to claw back some of the bonus payments distributed to active workers’ retirement annuity accounts — bonuses generally known as the “13th check.”

    — Fresh details about the city’s reinvestment plans — including $78.7 million to hire civilian police employees so that officers can be redeployed, $25 million for a Department of Transportation security force and $90.6 million for software and servers to improve the city’s dilapidated IT systems.

    “The City continues to make progress with its creditors and retirees and hopes to reach agreement in the near term on a number of outstanding issues,” Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr said in a statement. “We believe that the Plan we have proposed, and continue to refine, is feasible and allows the City to reduce its staggering $18 billion in debt and live within its means. The Plan puts the focus back on providing essential public services to the City’s nearly 700,000 residents.”

    The city maintained its proposal of 26% cuts to monthly pension checks for general retirees if they vote in favor of the restructuring plan and 34% if they reject it. The city also maintained its proposal of 6% cuts to monthly pensions of police and fire retirees if they accept the restructuring plan.

    But the city acknowledged that its proposal to slash annual cost-of-living adjustments to pensions increases the overall benefit cut to retirees. The loss of COLA represents an 18% benefit cut for police and fire retirees and a 13% cut for general retirees.

    About 32,000 people are entitled to pension checks from the city, including about 22,000 retirees.

    Orr proposed a new structure for the General Retirement System and Police and Fire System pension boards, saying they both are underfunded in part because of alleged mismanagement and poor investment decisions. That move is generally viewed as necessary before Republican state legislators agree to vote in favor of providing $350 million toward the city’s restructuring.

    Tina Bassett, a spokeswoman for the city’s general retirement pension board, said she hadn’t reviewed the amended documents and couldn’t comment extensively on them.

    “We’re still negotiating in good faith, and those numbers may not be the same numbers you see at the end of the deal,” Bassett said.

    Bruce Babiarz, a spokesman for the police and fire pension board, also said the pension fund needed more time to review the amended plan of adjustment, but said the “POA,” or plan of adjustment, is still “DOA.”

    While the police and fire pension plan remains “committed to negotiating in good faith toward a consensual agreement,” Babiarz said, “pushing a POA with continued blanks is an affront to good-faith negotiations and the court-ordered mediation process.”

    He said he was restrained by confidentiality rules from commenting on negotiations, but said the PFRS has proposed options that would reduce or eliminate the need for pension cuts, ideas he said he hopes are addressed in private mediation talks moderated by U.S. District Chief Judge Gerald Rosen.

    Orr has argued that significant cuts are necessary to improve public safety and restore basic services for the city.

    But creditors, including major financial investors and the city’s retirees, have fiercely objected to the plan of adjustment, saying the cuts are too steep.

    In the new documents filed today, the city also included a proposed settlement with UBS and Bank of America Merrill Lynch, which would collectively receive $85 million to eliminate a $288-million financial obligation called swaps.

    U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes will determine the fate of Orr’s updated proposed restructuring plan. In a hearing currently scheduled for April 14, Rhodes will decide whether the disclosure statement contains enough information about the city’s plans.

    In a trial starting July 16, Rhodes will hear arguments and weigh evidence about whether the city’s restructuring plan is feasible.

    Creditors, including retirees, will get a chance to vote on the plan of adjustment. To implement the plan, the city must get a majority of creditors representing two-thirds of the city’s debt to vote yes. Alternatively, however, the city could pursue a forcible restructuring plan in a legal process called a “cram down,” which would allow Rhodes to implement debt cuts over the objections of creditors.

    The city said it plans to file additional amendments to the restructuring plan before April 14.

    In the new restructuring documents, the city said bonus payments paid to general employees’ annuity accounts between 2003 and 2013 were “imprudent and excessive” and should have been devoted to growing pension assets.

    The new restructuring plan does not estimate the amount of money lost to the GRS fund through these bonus credits, but the Free Press has previously reported that the “13th check” bonuses totaled close to $1 billion over time.

    To take back some of those excess interest credits, the annuity accounts of those workers will be recalculated to reflect the actual investment returns enjoyed by the general pension fund during those years, Orr proposed.

    Among the new documents filed today is one outlining terms of the “grand bargain,” a deal in which foundations, the State of Michigan and the DIA would collectively provide $816 million to reduce pension cuts and allow the museum to be transferred to an independent nonprofit.

    State lawmakers have yet to approve the funding, in part because retirees haven’t agreed to accept the conditional offer.

    Orr has said he wants to avoid selling art. But retirees would have to vote for the deal, thus giving up their right to sue the State of Michigan over pension cuts.

    While the largest foundation pledges have been previously reported — including $125 million from the Ford Foundation and $100 million from the Kresge Foundation — amounts from all local foundations were listed in the new restructuring documents. They include $25 million from the William Davidson Foundation; $10 million each from the Community Foundation for Southeast Michigan, Hudson-Webber Foundation, Fred A. and Barbara M. Erb Family Foundation and Charles Stewart Mott Foundation; and $6 million from the McGregor Fund.

    A combined $7.5 million from the Paul and Carol C. Schaap Foundation ($5 million) and Max M. and Marjorie S. Fisher Foundation ($2.5 million) will be credited against the DIA’s commitment to raise $100 million for the grand bargain, according to the new documents.

    The city also revealed today that it has been in contact with 41 companies or investors about the private management and operation of its water and sewer department. Of those, 16 have told the city they intend to respond by the April 7 deadline the city included in a request for information it issued earlier in March.

    If the city decides to accept a bid for the private management and operation of the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department it would scuttle plans to create regional authority that involves Oakland, Macomb and Wayne counties.

    The possibility of hiring a private company to operate or purchase the water and sewer system was not included in the first version of the documents.

    The city plans to review the responses it receives by April 7 and then ask qualified companies for more detailed bids by June 1.

    By Nathan Bomey, Matt Helms, Brent Snavely and Alisa Priddle

    BY  | APRIL 1, 2014

     

     




    Citi Top Muni Bond Underwriter in First-Quarter Amid Lagging Supply.

    (Reuters) – Citigroup was the top underwriter of U.S. municipal bonds in the first quarter of 2014 as total supply shrank to $60.4 billion, down 25.7 percent from the same period in 2013, Thomson Reuters reported on Tuesday.

    The investment bank underwrote 75 deals totaling $8.16 billion, according to the report. Bank of America Merrill Lynch (BAC.N) ranked second with 68 deals totaling $6.17 billion.

    Puerto Rico was the biggest issuer in the quarter with a $3.5 billion bond sale last month aimed at shoring up the commonwealth’s shaky finances. California ranked second with $1.8 billion of bonds.

    Insured bonds totaled $2.77 billion, up 28.4 percent from the first quarter of 2013. Assured Guaranty Municipal (AGO.N) and its subsidiary Municipal Assurance Corp held onto the top spot among insurers with 117 deals totaling $1.43 billion. Build America Mutual ranked second with 135 deals totaling $1.33 billion.

    Meanwhile, bonds backed by letters of credit plummeted to $402.8 million in the quarter, a 91.4 percent drop from the same period in 2013, Thomson Reuters reported. Royal Bank of Canada was the top provider, followed by the Bank of New York Mellon.




    Gross Joins Bond Investors in North Las Vegas Crosshairs.

    Nevada lawmakers are studying the unprecedented step of penalizing bondholders as North Las Vegas, the state’s fourth-largest city, faces insolvency.

    Once among the nation’s fastest-growing municipalities, the city located less than 10 miles from the famed Strip has seen its property taxes collapse 70 percent since 2009. Funds run by Bill Gross, co-founder of the world’s biggest bond manager, hold almost a fifth of the municipality’s $420 million in general obligations, data compiled by Bloomberg show. The bonds were cut to junk by Standard & Poor’s in March after a judge ordered the city to pay unionized workers raises withheld during a fiscal emergency declared two years ago.

    With no provisions for municipal bankruptcy in Nevada, lawmakers are considering ways to make investors share the pain of distressed municipalities. The approach takes a page from bankruptDetroit, where an emergency financial manager proposed paying some bondholders 15 cents on the dollar, and from the insolvent California city of Stockton, which offered real estate to satisfy creditors after missing debt payments.

    “Something’s going to have to give at some point,” said Marilyn Kirkpatrick, the Democratic speaker of the state assembly, who represents North Las Vegas, said in a telephone interview. “Somebody’s got to sacrifice, and I can tell you, the residents have been making a lot of sacrifices.”

    Rebound Struggle

    The third-fastest-growing U.S. city from 2000 to 2009, North Las Vegas is an example of a municipality that has struggled to rebound from the longest recession since the 1930s. Property values in the community of about 223,500 fell for four straight years beginning in 2009, according toits annual community report. Moody’s Investors Service has cut it 10 steps since 2011, making it the only city among the nation’s 100 most populous with a junk grade, excluding those in bankruptcy.

    The city has reduced its workforce nearly in half as property-tax collections sank to $7.6 million last year, from $25.1 million in 2009, according to its annual fiscal report. Facing a $31 million budget deficit, city council declared a fiscal emergency in 2012 to suspend provisions of union contracts including annual raises.

    Bond Financing

    While property values began to rebound last year, casinos sagged. From July through February, wagers at North Las Vegas casinos fell 2.5 percent from a year earlier, while bets statewide rose 0.9 percent, according to Nevada’s Gaming Control Board.

    Even as the local economy crashed, North Las Vegas, situated about 8 miles (13 kilometers) from the casinos of the Las Vegas Strip, spent $257 million on a water-reclamation plant and $130 million on a new city hall. The facilities, funded with bonds, opened in 2011.

    S&P was the last of the three biggest rating companies to cut the community to junk. It has been rated speculative grade by Moody’s since August 2012, and since July 2013 by Fitch Ratings.

    In January, Clark County District Court Judge Susan Johnson ruled that North Las Vegas had overreached by denying the raises and ordered it to pay about $16.2 million to workers including police and firefighters. City officials are negotiating with unions over how much to pay.

    Payments Made

    North Las Vegas has yet to miss a payment to bondholders, Mayor John Lee said in his ninth-floor office overlooking expanses of undeveloped desert and the Strip in the distance.

    The Democratic former state lawmaker said North Las Vegas’s plight demonstrates the lack of options for struggling municipalities in Nevada under state law. With Chapter 9 bankruptcy off the table, cities are left with the prospect of finances run by a receiver from the state Taxation Department.

    That has happened twice, in 2000 with the school district of eastern Nevada’s White Pine County, with 1,400 students; and in 2005 with White Pine County itself, population 10,000.

    North Las Vegas must submit a balanced budget proposal to the state Taxation Department by April 15, said Terry Rubald, the department’s deputy director. Failure to do so is among criteria for a state financial takeover, although that’s no guarantee, she said. The law governing state intervention doesn’t provide for reduced payments to bondholders.

    “This happening here definitely has elevated the issue,” said Lee, who has discussed the city’s options with Kirkpatrick and Republican Governor Brian Sandoval. “The legislature has a remedy that could help not only North Las Vegas but a lot of other cities in the state.”

    Concession Idea

    Lee and Kirkpatrick said their discussions focus on creating a law that, short of bankruptcy, could force concessions on bondholders of municipalities that meet certain criteria.

    Any discussion on changing Nevada law to force concessions on investors would be “premature,” as North Las Vegas hasn’t yet satisfied the state’s conditions for intervention, said Mac Bybee, a spokesman for Sandoval.

    Changes to Nevada law probably wouldn’t have broader implications for municipal debt as Nevada represents just $30 billion of the $3.7 trillion market, said Matt Fabian, managing director of Municipal Market Advisors in Concord, Massachusetts.

    The city’s debt includes about $119 million of federally taxable Build America Bonds maturing in June 2040, North Las Vegas’s longest-maturity debt, Bloomberg data show.

    Gross’s Funds

    About $83 million of the maturity is held in funds run by Gross, chief investment officer at Pacific Investment Management Co., according to the latest filings to Bloomberg. That represents 19 percent of the city’s general obligations.

    The company’s largest allocations of North Las Vegas bonds are in the $236 billion Pimco Total Return Fund (PTTRX) and the $6.4 billion Harbor Bond Fund (HABDX), which combined own about $57 million of the securities, Bloomberg data show.

    Mark Porterfield, a spokesman for Pimco in Newport Beach, California, said no one at the firm was available to comment on the bond holdings.

    The Build America debt traded last week for the first time in about two years. Yesterday, it changed hands at an average price of 77.5 cents on the dollar to yield 8.78 percent, or about 5.4 percentage points above Treasuries. It priced in May 2010 to yield about 2.3 percentage points above Treasuries.

    Van Eck Associates Corp., another bondholder, hasn’t been approached by the city or state on the debt, said Jim Colby, who helps manage $1.8 billion of munis as a senior strategist with the company in New York.

    Pressure’s On

    Given Detroit’s case and bankruptcies by California cities, “it doesn’t surprise me that’s the talk from lawmakers,” Colby said. Legislators probably want to “put the pressure on bondholders, and if bankruptcy isn’t an option, do something totally different to get out from under the obligation.”

    Market Vectors High Yield Muni Index ETF (HYD), which Colby helps manage, owns about $2 million of the city’s general obligations.

    Lee and leaders of North Las Vegas’s three public-safety unions oppose a state takeover of city finances, they said in separate interviews.

    Receivership would mean a potentially “lasting historic stigma for city and region,” Barclays Plc said in a Jan. 9 report commissioned by the city.

    State Improvement

    Nevada’s economy improved more than any other state’s from the fourth quarter of 2012 through the end of 2013, according to the Bloomberg Economic Evaluation of States. Nevada’s 8.5 percent jobless rate in February, while the lowest since 2008, was still third-highest among states, according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

    With a deadline looming for a budget proposal, North Las Vegas and its unions are attempting to agree on back pay and to free up money to balance the ledger. City council voted last month to lowerthe fund reserve to 6 percent from 8 percent, freeing $2 million toward a settlement on wages.

    “A receivership would kill the economy of the whole region,” Scott Sauer, a resident who has attended council meetings for close to a decade, said in an interview after a session last month. “North Las Vegas is one of the largest cities in the state. What does this say about the whole state?”

    By James Nash and Brian Chappatta  Mar 31, 2014 7:19 PM PT

    To contact the reporters on this story: James Nash in Los Angeles at [email protected]; Brian Chappatta in New York at [email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Mark Tannenbaum, Pete Young




    US CFTC Pledges Swaps Relief for Public Utilities.

    (Reuters) – The U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission plans to ease its new swaps rules to help public power utilities using swaps to hedge price risk, the head of the derivatives regulator said on Thursday.

    The agency will propose to make it easier for electricity and natural gas utilities to continue to use these products without incurring the cost that comes from tighter new swaps laws written after the financial crisis.

    “The Commission must continue to remain open to revisiting certain rules and making adjustments as necessary,” Acting Chairman Mark Wetjen said in a statement released during a public roundtable with members of the industry.

    The 2010 Dodd-Frank law contains a fundamental overhaul of the swaps market, which total $690 trillion globally, subjecting banks engaging in swaps with clients to tight capital, reporting and registration standards.

    The CFTC gives special protection to public utilities, forcing anyone trading more than $25 million in swaps with them to meet its rules, far lower than the $8 billion threshold for swap dealers doing business with other clients.

    But the utilities complained that had caused an exodus of companies providing swaps they use to hedge energy prices, ramping up their cost of business. On March 21, the CFTC said in a letter it would not enforce the rule.

    Wetjen said he would now offer a planned rule to address those concerns and amend the threshold.

    BY DOUWE MIEDEMA

    WASHINGTON, April 3 Thu Apr 3, 2014 5:47pm BST

    (Reporting by Douwe Miedema; Editing by Sofina Mirza-Reid)




    Pennsylvania Schools Shun Debt Amid Austerity Push: Muni Credit.

    Pennsylvania school districts are selling the least municipal debt in seven years as localities nationwide respond to calls for austerity even with yields close to generational lows.

    From urban cores such as Philadelphia to rural communities in Lancaster County, Pennsylvania school officials are holding off on construction projects as budgets are buffeted by rising costs and dwindling aid, while local tax receipts struggle to recover almost five years after the recession.

    The issuance drop in the Keystone State reflects an ebbing reliance on debt by U.S. localities amid voter antipathy to new projects, said John Donaldson, who helps manage $750 million in munis at Haverford Trust Co. At the same time, states facing their own fiscal strains are giving cities and towns less support, said Todd Sisson, senior analyst for tax-exempt fixed income at Wells Capital Management in CharlotteNorth Carolina.

    “The states are pushing the problem down to the local level,” said Sisson, whose company oversees $31 billion in munis. “They’re not rescuing local towns, and school districts fall into that bucket.”

    As the U.S. municipal market shrank in 2013 for the third straight year, Pennsylvania schools sold $2.8 billion of bonds, the lowest amount since at least 2006, data compiled by Bloomberg show. Nationally, schools offered about $54 billion, down almost 12 percent from the previous year.

    Scarcity Boost

    The scarcity may be helping the debt. Securities from school districts and universities have earned almost 4 percent this year, beating the 3.7 percent return for the entire $3.7 trillion municipal market, according to Bank of America Merrill Lynch indexes.

    The borrowing dropoff may harm Pennsylvania’s economy, said Dan Burton, manager of the mid-Atlantic region for RBC Capital Markets.

    “It has not only an effect on the local economy, but it has an effect on the quality of education,” said Burton, who has offices in Lancaster and Philadelphia. Without investment, “it makes it much harder to perform at a high level.”

    Crisis Mode

    In Philadelphia, the nation’s fifth-most populous city, schools are in crisis mode. The district of 130,000 students last borrowed money in 2012 — to keep schools open, not to invest in them. Officials warn of a drop of about 26 percent in federal and state grants in the year that begins in July from fiscal 2013, documents show.

    Fernando Gallard, a district spokesman, didn’t respond to requests for comment on bond plans andcapital investment.

    Officials elsewhere in the state say debt plans are on hold in part because Pennsylvania has stopped allowing new capital projects into a program that reimburses for part of the expenditures.

    Governor Tom Corbett, a Republican, has proposed that the moratorium, in effect since October 2012, should extend to June 2015, said Tim Eller, spokesman for the state Education Department. In the meantime, Pennsylvania has allocated $300 million this year for reimbursements, while 207 districts are due a combined $1.7 billion, according to Eller.

    The state is dealing with its own fiscal stress. Standard & Poor’s grades it AA, the third-highest level, though with a negative outlook, partly because of growing pension costs.

    Savings Redirected

    Jay Pagni, a Corbett spokesman, said the governor wants the legislature to pass changes that would deal with escalating retirement contributions for the state and school districts as well asPennsylvania’s unfunded pension liability.

    Savings “from pension reform could be used in other areas such as capital projects and classroom investment,” Pagni said.

    Schools face climbing pension payments as they are restricted from raising property taxes above state-mandated caps. The districts’ required pension contributions are set to rise to $1.3 billion for the year beginning in July, from $980 million this year, according to Pagni.

    Districts have cut programs and personnel to cope, said Jay Himes, executive director of the Harrisburg-based Pennsylvania Association of School Business Officials. Elementary and secondary schools employed 256,664 people as of 2012, down about 23,000 from 2010, according to the most recent data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

    Voters’ Choice

    “Districts aren’t spending any discretionary dollars because of the significant issues we have around state funding and our exploding pension payments,” Himes said. “It’s not a good time to be talking about building new schools when you’re laying off teachers.”

    Nor are voters eager to take on such projects. Of 16 ballot questions since 2006 on raising school taxes above state caps to pay for uses such as new bonds, only one has passed, according to the schools association.

    In May, voters in Clearfield and Clinton counties, northeast of Pittsburgh, defeated a referendum that would have raised revenue for the West Branch Area School District. The board wants to renovate its elementary school, built in 1974 when open educational spaces were popular, to put doors on classrooms, said Michelle Dutrow, the superintendent.

    “In this day and age, it presents a very significant safety issue should we have any sort of intruder event,” she said.

    ‘Budget Pressures’

    Officials in Solanco School District west of Philadelphia have been planning a project since 2008 to combine two middle schools in one campus and free up space for more elementary students, said business manager Tim Shrom.

    The combination of higher expenses, the state moratorium on the building program and the weak economic recovery has stymied the plan, he said. Income-tax receipts this year, while better than in 2010, may still be less than in 2008, and pension costs next year are slated to rise 26 percent from this year, he said.

    “There’s just way too much uncertainty to move forward,” Shrom said. “We have a lot of budget pressures that we’re sitting on.”

    By Romy Varghese  Apr 3, 2014 5:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Romy Varghese in Philadelphia at [email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Mark Tannenbaum, Mark Schoifet




    Moody's Requests Comments on Proposed Changes to Rating US Housing Finance Agencies.

    New York, April 02, 2014 — Moody’s Investors Service is seeking comments from market participants on proposed changes to its approach to assigning issuer ratings to US housing finance agencies (HFAs). The rating agency does not expect these changes, if adopted, to result in any issuer rating changes.

    “Request for Comment: US Housing Finance Agency Issuer Rating Methodology” describes the two proposed key changes to its current methodology: (1) introducing a scorecard and (2) incorporating a new rating factor entitled, “Risk Profile.”

    The scorecard would assess an HFA’s creditworthiness based on four key credit factors to which Moody’s assigns weights: (1) financial position, 40%; (2) loan portfolio, 20%; (3) risk profile, 20%; and (4) management and operating environment, 20%.

    “These scores round out our quantitative and qualitative analysis by including specific sector attributes,” says Omar Ouzidane, Moody’s Assistant Vice President and Analyst. “They allow us to further break out strengths and weaknesses that can have a significant effect on credit quality.”

    Moody’s also proposes assigning a Risk Profile for HFAs at each given rating level, assessing the HFA according to degree of risk, ranging from Low to Highest.

    “The Risk Profile will allow us to classify the risks that HFAs take on and assess their risk management capacity in a way that incorporates the underlying credit fundamentals in the sector,” adds Ouzidane.

    Moody’s invites market participants to provide feedback on the request for comment by 2 May 2014, by submitting their comments on the Request for Comment Page on www.moodys.com.

    “Request for Comment: US Housing Finance Agency Issuer Rating Methodology” is available at https://www.moodys.com/research/US-Housing-Finance-Agency-Issuer-Rating-Methodology–PBM_PBM163618.

     




    MBIA Muni Wraps Upgraded: BTIG Says Reuters Misses the Point.

    Bond insurer MBIA Inc. (NYSE:MBI)’s National Public Finance Guarantee Corp. recent upgrade to AA- from A by Standard & Poor’s has caused some discussion about how much of a difference there really is between the two ratings for a bond investor. A recent post from Cate Long on Reuter’s MuniLand concluded that the possibility of default is probably too low to merit bond insurance. While he doesn’t disagree with her reasoning, according to bond analyst Mark Palmer at BTIG Research, it’s not the impact on investors that really matters.

    The MuniLand post imagines an investor who already owns bonds (or is thinking of buying some) and then weighs the expected returns with and without buying insurance. AAA and AA bonds don’t really default (0.00% after 10 years according to Fitch), and A rated bonds only default 0.05% of the time after ten years, compared to 1.28% for BBB rated bonds. The A rated bonds that MBIA Inc. (NYSE:MBI) is now able to insure have such a minuscule default rate, that insuring them seems hard to justify.

    Muni bond insurance is normally bought by munis

    “The main problems with this analysis, in our view, are that it regards municipal bond insurance solely from the viewpoint of an investor,” writes Palmer in a March 24 report. “The primary purchasers of bond insurance are the issuers of municipal bonds – the municipalities themselves.”

    Municipalities, particularly those with weak finances and low credit ratings, benefit from insurer’s wraps by getting lower borrowing costs, and in some cases making access to capital markets feasible in the first place. The difference between a AA muni bond and an A rated muni bond is 69 basis points (4.72% versus 4.03% respectively). Even after the cost of the insurer’s wrap is taken into account, that savings represents money that can be invested back into the city.

    The S&P upgrade makes MBIA’s wraps more valuable

    Municipalities aren’t really thinking about the possibility of default when they buy insurance wraps, they are just trying to raise money efficiently. Looked at from this perspective, the upgrade is important for MBIA Inc. (NYSE:MBI) because it means they are able to offer their municipal clients a better product (a better insurance wrap with lower rates) than they could when rated A. MBIA will either be able to sell more muni bond wraps, sell them for a better price, or both – all of which is good for their shareholders.

    by 




    Puerto Rico to Detroit Buoyed by Insurance Comeback: Muni Credit.

    Buyers of debt issued by bankrupt Detroit or junk-rated Puerto Rico are finding it pays to have bond insurance. The backing is even more valuable after upgrades of units of Assured Guaranty Ltd. and MBIA Inc.

    Insured local debt beat the $3.7 trillion municipal market last year for the first time since 2007, before the companies lost their top credit grades during the financial crisis. Standard & Poor’s last week raised subsidiaries of Assured to AA, the third-highest level, and MBIA’s National Public Finance Guarantee Corp. to AA-, one step lower.

    The National increase alone lifted ratings on about $300 billion of bonds, according to research firm Municipal Market Advisors. The upgrades have an amplified effect on distressed issuers. Some uninsured Puerto Rico bonds fell over the past year at more than five times the pace of those backed by Assured. Detroit general obligations with insurance trade at 99 cents on the dollar, while those without it have fallen to about 20 cents, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

    “The insurance protects you from all the downside risk from an impending restructuring that may or may not happen” in Puerto Rico, said Robert DiMella, who oversees about $7.5 billion of local debt as co-head of MacKay Municipal Managers in Princeton, New Jersey. “It’s a very good way for investors to invest in Puerto Rico, and that’s what we’re doing.”

    Double Up

    The rating boost may help the insurers double their market share to 8 percent of issuance this year, S&P said in a report last week. The higher credit standing will make it easier for them to win business should borrowing costs rise and make the backstop more valuable to issuers, according to S&P. Muni yields remain near generational lows as bond sales have slumped.

    The consensus on Wall Street is that interest rates are poised to rise. Ten-year Treasury yields will climb to 3.34 percent in the fourth quarter from about 2.7 percent now, according to the median forecast of 70 analysts surveyed by Bloomberg.

    Insurers were largely stripped of their top ratings in 2008 amid losses on guarantees of subprime-mortgage-backed debt. Build America Mutual Assurance Co. entered the market in 2012 with S&P’s AA rating, becoming the first new insurer for local bonds since 2007. This year, about 4.8 percent of the debt had the protection, up from 3.2 percent in 2013, Bloomberg data show. Insurers once covered more than half the market.

    Credit Equalizer

    The backing had appeal for individual investors, who own about 60 percent of munis, because it gave AAA ratings regardless of the underlying credit. The focus has shifted in part to the insurers’ role in protecting investors in bankruptcy court after Chapter 9 filings by municipalities including Detroit, theCalifornia city of Stockton, and Jefferson County, Alabama.

    “Bond insurance represents a great value for the investor when you’re talking about the very stressed credits like Puerto Rico, or the uncertainty associated with Detroit,” said Patrick Early, chief muni analyst at Wells Fargo Advisors LLC in St. Louis. “Essentially you’re getting a AA at BBB levels.”

    Debt backed by units of Assured Guaranty probably trade with yields as much as 0.75 percentage point higher than uninsured securities from a AA municipality, DiMella said. Heading into this year, MacKay boosted holdings of insured bonds above the amount in the benchmark the firm tracks, he said. MacKay added insured Puerto Rico bonds, he said.

    Value Maintained

    Uninsured 10-year general obligations from the U.S. territory have declined over the past year at more than five times the pace of securities backed by Assured Guaranty (AGO) Municipal Corp.

    Puerto Rico general obligations with Assured’s protection and maturing in July 2024 traded March 24 at 98 cents on the dollar, the highest since August, data compiled by Bloomberg show. At this time last year it traded at about 102 cents on the dollar.

    By comparison, debt with the same maturity that doesn’t have insurance traded yesterday at an average of about 74 cents, a one-month low. A year ago, it changed hands at 99 cents.

    In Detroit, uninsured limited-tax general obligations due in April 2016 traded last week at 22 cents, while debt with identical maturities backed by Assured and National went for about 99 cents and 95 cents, respectively.

    Competitive Strength

    MBIA (MBI)’s new rating “will significantly enhance its financial flexibility,” Chief Executive Officer Jay Brown said in a March 18 statement. Dominic Frederico, CEO of Hamilton, Bermuda-based Assured, said in a separate statement the company was pleased S&P “recognized the strength of our competitive position.”

    A probable target for insured volume is 5 percent, according to a report this week from Municipal Market Advisors, based in Concord, Massachusetts. Business is limited by the fact that about 70 percent of insured bonds in 2013 came from five states: California, TexasPennsylvania, New York and Illinois.

    Issuers using the protection this year include Oyster Bay, New York, with an A- rating from S&P, and Henry Mayo Newhall Memorial Hospital in Valencia, California, with a BBB- grade.

    “There was definite value,” Bob Hudson, the hospital’s chief financial officer, said in an interview. “With Assured, we were able to issue without a debt-service reserve fund, and that, in combination with the interest reduction between BBB-and AA-, made it very favorable.”

    The $70 million tax-exempt deal in January included a portion maturing in October 2043 that yielded 5.3 percent. By comparison, the interest rate on benchmark 30-year hospital bonds rated BBB was5.85 percent.

    “You certainly have to sacrifice some yield, but the sacrifice you’re making today is going to be well worth it down the road” as yield spreads on the bond decline, DiMella said.

    By Brian Chappatta  Mar 26, 2014 5:00 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Brian Chappatta in New York at [email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Mark Tannenbaum, Justin Blum




    Moody's: Three risks reduce credit positives of Affordable Care Act for not-for-profit hospitals

    New York, March 27, 2014 — Three risks are emerging to counter benefits not-for-profit hospitals should realize from the Affordable Care Act’s reduction in the number of uninsured, says Moody’s Investors Service. These are higher deductibles on plans sold through the insurance exchanges that could translate into bad debt for hospitals; negative pressures on reimbursements that may arise when insurers cope with possible reduced profitability; and, from lower hospital reimbursement from participating in newer “narrow” healthcare networks.

    “After open enrollment for the ACA health insurance coverage ends on March 31, the credit implications, both positive and negative, will become clearer,” says Daniel Steingart, an Assistant Vice President and Analyst at Moody’s in the report, “US Healthcare Reform: Three Risks Reduce Credit Positives for Not-for-Profit Hospitals.”

    “Key for hospitals will not be the headline number of people purchasing insurance, but whether the ACA actually reduces the number of uninsured,” says Moody’s Steingart.

    An expected reduction in uninsured is the most positive aspect of the ACA for the hospitals, says Moody’s. The net benefit for hospitals has been eroded since the legislation was passed in 2010, first by the Supreme Court granting US states the option to not expand Medicaid insurance coverage in 2012, and now by the three emerging risks.

    First, Moody’s sees significant risk that people covered by the most popular insurance plans will be unable or unwilling to meet their deductibles. As a result, growth in insurance coverage will not necessarily translate into materially lower bad debt exposure for many hospitals, particularly for services where the deductible accounts for a substantial share of the negotiated reimbursement.

    “Today’s high deductibles are tomorrow’s bad debt,” says Moody’s Steingart.

    Second, if the insurers believe they are making little or no profit on plans, they will likely pressure hospitals to accept lower reimbursements or raise premiums, which could discourage people from buying insurance in 2015. The insurance industry’s profitability is a key factor in hospital reimbursement because insurance companies tie their negotiations with hospitals to their own expectations of profitability.

    Moody’s says insurance companies will begin pricing policies for 2015 in the next few months, and negotiations with hospitals will extend through the beginning of open enrollment in November.

    Finally, if narrow healthcare networks are successful, hospital reimbursements are likely to drop. In narrow networks, a group of hospitals, doctors, or other healthcare workers will negotiate lower reimbursement rates in return for the insurer’s using them, leading to higher patient volumes that compensate for lower reimbursements. Hospitals that do not join narrow networks could lose business, while those that join may not see the higher patient volumes that will make up for the lower reimbursements.

    For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report at https://www.moodys.com/research/US-Healthcare-Reform-Three-Risks-Reduce-Credit-Positives-for-Not–PBM_PBM166602.

    Global Credit Research – 27 Mar 2014




    Partnerships Unlock the Door to Progress in the Twin Cities: The Central Corridor Light Rail Project.

    This case study examines the strategy employed by the Twin Cities (Minneapolis and St. Paul, Minnesota) as they undertook a major transportation initiative – the Central Corridor light rail project, to connect their downtowns. The set of far reaching partnerships that have enabled this project, along with the leadership roles played by city officials, the philanthropic community, and the civic organizations all provide a template and examples that other cities might find instructive.

    The initial catalyst for the Central Corridor project was the desire to maximize opportunity for the region and to help move people between the job centers in the downtown areas of the Twin Cities, which would help the region to be more competitive. As the vision for the project evolved, city officials began to appreciate that providing mass transit along the Central Corridor could help revitalize the neighborhoods through which the light rail would pass, and make these communities more attractive and better places to live as a result of better transportation access.

    This project has helped orchestrate community redevelopment along the train route and created an environment intended to support mixed income communities and thriving local commerce along the line. The new light rail line, which is scheduled to open in mid-2014, will also provide cost effective transportation to connect residents to jobs in both cities and in the region, and in general strengthen the appeal of living in these communities. As the project falls into place, the communities surrounding the new line will have hundreds of new homes and stronger businesses, and brighter cultural and artistic installations along the major street.

    Read the entire case study »




    WSJ: Detroit Seeks Proposals to Privatize Its Water System.

    Bankrupt City Looks to Unload Assets as Talks With Suburbs Stall

    DETROIT—This bankrupt city is seeking proposals from private companies to run and potentially buy its regional water and sewer system as talks to lease it to the city’s suburbs have stalled.

    The move to at least partially privatize one of the nation’s largest water systems comes as the city considers unloading assets to finalize its debt-cutting plan, which is expected to be voted on by creditors this spring.

    “We need infrastructure for water,” Detroit Emergency Manager Kevyn Orr said Monday at a panel discussion in New York hosted by the Manhattan Institute for Policy Research, a conservative think tank.

    After a year in office, Mr. Orr has said an outright sale of Detroit’s water department, which serves nearly 40% of Michigan’s population, is unlikely. His preferred plan calls for leasing the water system to a new regional authority, which he said would bring in $47 million a year to the city for 40 years.

    But suburban leaders so far have balked at their potential share of future costs for system improvements and unpaid water bills. It is still possible the city-owned system could continue to be run as a municipal department from Detroit, said a person familiar with the matter.

    Privatizing water and sewer service in southeast Michigan could provide a test case for advocates who argue the private sector would bring greater efficiency and needed improvement to aging systems nationally. Opponents of such privatization efforts fear rate increases and question turning a public entity into a profit-making enterprise.

    About 85% of all U.S. water agencies are public despite a swell toward greater privatization in the 1990s and 2000s. The city of Atlanta in a 1999 deal privatized its water system but reversed course after cost-cutting led to customer complaints.

    “If Detroit does this, it will probably be the first really big public-private effort in the last 10 years,” said Peter Gleick, president of the Pacific Institute, a California environmental-research and advocacy group that studies water privatization and other issues.

    The Detroit Water and Sewerage Department provides about 600 million gallons of water a day to Detroit and 127 suburban communities in seven counties. It has nearly $1 billion in annual revenue.

    But like its city, the department has faced challenges. Until last year, it operated for decades under federal court oversight sparked by alleged violations under the Clean Water Act. A former department director pleaded guilty in 2012 to conspiracy as part of the corruption investigation into convicted ex-mayor Kwame Kilpatrick. Thousands of delinquent customers in Detroit who owe the department more than $100 million are being threatened with water shut-offs, according to city officials.

    The city’s 21-page request for proposals sent Friday to prospective buyers described a department that collects more in revenue than it spends. But it faces five-year capital-improvement projects to replace water mains and upgrade treatment plants and pumping stations that are expected to cost $1.4 billion.

    The system also had about $6 billion in debt as of March 15. In the event of a long-term lease or a sale, the city wants potential operators to come up with a way for the department to retire its debt if the transaction would cause the bond debt to lose tax-exempt status or end access to state financing. A potential operator also would have to wrestle with pension obligations for current and future department retirees, which the city estimates would require a payout of $675 million over 10 years.

    In the request for proposals, Mr. Orr wrote that the city would “consider responses that contemplate alternative transaction structures, such as a long-term lease and concession arrangement or sale.”

    The proposed privatization has some protection for ratepayers: An operator would have to cap rate increases at no more than 4% for the first 10 years.

    Traditional city services are being outsourced across Detroit. A quasipublic authority and a private management company run the city’s convention center. Another authority is also taking over the city’s public lighting from a city department. Last month, Detroit’s City Council privatized trash service in a bid to improve service but without expected cost savings.

    By

    MATTHEW DOLAN

    Write to Matthew Dolan at [email protected]




    WSJ: Pension Funds Join in Fee Pushback.

    Tired of paying large sums to invest in private-equity funds, a group of small and midsize pension plans has banded together to successfully bargain for lower fees.

    The deal is a sign of how some investors are trying to reclaim power from money managers and the first time such a consortium has won major concessions.

    Led by Girard Miller, chief investment officer of the $11 billion Orange County Employees Retirement System, six state and county pension funds have reached a tentative agreement to endorse the hiring of Pantheon Ventures, a New York firm, to invest between $300 million and $1 billion a year in various private-equity funds over the next few years.

    The group expects to pay management fees of between 0.26% and 0.55% of the money it invests, depending on how much is placed in funds. That compares with management fees that can be as much as 1% of committed capital to invest with a “fund of funds” like Pantheon. Such firms allocate money to private-equity funds on behalf of investors.

    The prospective fees are as much as 50% lower than Orange County and other smaller pension funds have been paying to access private-equity funds, according to the Orange County fund. It estimates that its savings could amount to $5 million annually. The pension funds also will avoid common fees like those based on Pantheon’s performance or on money that has been pledged but not yet invested.

    “The winning bid had lower fees” than the group had expected and provides access to more kinds of funds than anticipated, said Donald Pierce, chief investment officer of the $7.6 billion San Bernardino County Employees’ Retirement Association, a member of the group.

    The terms with Pantheon have to be approved by the boards of each pension fund. Orange County’s trustees approved the deal on Wednesday.

    “We are tremendously excited,” said Kevin Albert, a Pantheon managing director. “We are looking forward to getting to work.”

    Pension funds have moved into private equity and hedge funds to address shortfalls and deal with a rocky stock market. Despite recent gains from stockholdings, many plans remain underfunded and are looking at fee cuts to help close the gap.

    Historically, huge pension funds, such as the $284 billion California Public Employees’ Retirement System, or Calpers, have won concessions from private-equity and hedge-fund firms. But small and midsize pension plans wielded little bargaining power.

    “This is really the first time” a coalition like this has been successful, said David Fann, chief executive of alternative investment adviser TorreyCove Capital Partners, which advises public pension funds.

    The new group will still pay sizable fees. Pantheon allocates cash to private-equity funds that charge their own layers of fees, and the pension group isn’t getting any breaks on those, which can include a fee of as much as 20% of the fund’s gains.

    The Orange County system began a process in December to try to unite public pension funds, including several of California’s smaller systems, and solicit bids from firms.

    “We’ve tried to catapult the little guys onto the high-level playing field with the goliath pension plans,” Mr. Miller said.

    Mr. Miller, 63 years old, a former chief operating officer at mutual-fund company Janus Capital Group who spent years as a consultant to state and municipal governments, is the latest specialist in California to pressure private-equity firms to lower fees. Réal Desrochers, the head of private-equity investing for Calpers, has told buyout funds to cut fees if they want cash from the pension fund. Other big funds also have received fee discounts.

    There likely is more attention paid to Mr. Miller than to most other pension leaders. In 1994, Orange County filed for bankruptcy protection with roughly $2 billion of obligations, the largest municipal bankruptcy at the time. And, lately, Mr. Miller has become something of an evangelist for the cause of lower fees and is a frequent speaker around the country on the topic.

    “We sure as heck don’t need to layer another” set of fees on top of those charged by private-equity funds, he said.

    Mr. Miller said he may encourage similar consortia to push fees lower for real-estate and hedge-fund investments. The existing group also may expand to include more funds from around the country.

    “The process requires perseverance and lots of cat-herding,” Mr. Miller said. “There are many voices and many decision makers who are each the center of their own universe.”

    It isn’t clear how many similar groups can be developed, however.

    “It’s going to take a lot of energy since the marketing push is from the buyer and not the seller,” said Mr. Fann, of TorreyCove Capital Partners. “The challenge will be to make sure everybody finds common ground.”

    By

    GREGORY ZUCKERMAN And

    MICHAEL WURSTHORN




    GASB Declines to Delay Implementation Date of Pension Standards.

    Norwalk, CT, March 24, 2014—The Governmental Accounting Standards Board today voted unanimously not to delay the implementation date of GASB Statement No. 68, Accounting and Financial Reporting for Pensions. The requirements of Statement 68 are effective for periods beginning after June 15, 2014.

    The request to the Board for an indefinite delay in implementation date came from stakeholder groups that asserted that such a delay is necessary until related auditing procedures have been implemented for a sufficient period. The concern was expressed that governments in multiple-employer pension plans will receive a modified audit opinion on their financial statements in the interim.

    Other individuals, organizations, and stakeholder groups wrote to the Board requesting that the implementation date of Statement 68 not be changed. Some of these groups urged the GASB and other organizations to find a solution that does not involve a delay in implementation.

    “The Board agreed that the issues raised by its stakeholders warranted thoughtful consideration. In response, we undertook a significant effort to gather meaningful input as quickly as possible in order to address these concerns on a timely basis,” said GASB Chairman David A. Vaudt.

    “The GASB is committed to doing everything it can to assist governments, pension plans, and their auditors with the implementation of Statement 68, including working with stakeholder groups,” said Mr. Vaudt. “However, the Board does not believe that delaying implementation will benefit its stakeholders in general.”

    The Board’s decision was based on feedback received from its stakeholders, including officials from governments and pension plans, auditors, actuaries, and users of financial statements. Key factors considered included:




    S&P: Alternative Financing: Disclosure Is Critical To Credit Analysis In Public Finance.

    Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services continues to see U.S. public finance issuers using alternative financing products such as bank loans and direct-purchase debt. We have commented about the use of these products and the potential credit risks inherent in them (see “The Appeal of Alternative Financing Is Not Without Risk For Municipal Issuers,” published May 17, 2011 on RatingsDirect, and “Contingent Liquidity Risks In U.S. Public Finance Instruments: Methodology And Assumptions,” published March 5, 2012). We recognize there are benefits to some of the alternative financing products, such as direct-purchase bonds, that are being offered to municipal obligors. However, we believe it is important to highlight the risks of these new products, and reiterate the need for transparency when issuers incorporate these types of financing vehicles into their debt profile. (Watch the related CreditMatters TV segment titled, “Alternative Financing: Why Full Disclosure Is Crucial,” dated Feb. 27, 2014.)

    Overview

    • Standard & Poor’s analyzes an obligor’s comprehensive debt position, so exposure to alternative financing instruments should be disclosed to us, even if there is no legal requirement to do so.
    • Covenants which could lead to acceleration, create demands on liquidity, or cross-default other debt, could have credit implications.
    • The optimal time for disclosure is while alternative financing agreements are being planned and finalized, so that credit impacts can be assessed.
    • Failure to disclose, or delayed disclosure, could color our assessment of management and have negative rating implications.

    It is our understanding that use of direct-purchase bonds was initially generally limited to replacements of expiring letters of credit (LOCs) and standby bond purchase agreements (SBPAs) in support of variable-rate demand obligations (VRDO), typically placed with large national banks. Currently though, we are seeing variable- and fixed-rate direct-purchase bonds being used not just for variable rate structures but for new money needs as well as the refunding of existing fixed-rate debt. Additionally, banks of all sizes are offering the product. These obligations could contain terms that may be similar to VRDOs, however we consider the credit impact of an obligor’s portfolio holistically and analyze all risks introduced regardless of the financing vehicle. With greater use of these direct-purchase obligations and a more diverse group of banks entering into these types of financings, the terms and covenants within the agreements are less clearly defined and less uniform, creating, in our view, the potential for considerable credit risk exposure. Standard & Poor’s ratings are assigned and surveilled based on information provided to us by issuers, and so disclosure to Standard & Poor’s (and more broadly the lack of transparency in the capital marketplace) of the existence of these types of vehicles is critical. Of particular concern to us is the frequent absence of disclosure to us of these agreements’ existence and their terms, notwithstanding whether privately placed debt carries legal disclosure obligations. Standard & Poor’s believes that the optimal time for disclosure is while alternative financing agreements are being planned and finalized, so that credit impacts can be assessed.

    Standard & Poor’s has reviewed or rated 173 direct-loan deals totaling about $10.4 billion from 2011 through February of this year. Overall, we estimate that direct loans might account for as much as 20 percent of municipal issuance. Private placements or direct-purchase obligations can have substantial implications for the credit quality of an obligor’s capital market debt, irrespective of how large or small the alternative financings might be relative to the balance sheet. Implications can include, but are not limited to, acceleration and the potential for cross–default provisions between privately placed debt and capital market debt. Some documents contain events of default provisions or covenants that, in our view, favor the lender over existing capital market bondholders, and increase the potential for triggering the financing’s remedies. Combined with cross-default provisions, breached covenants and default events could accelerate not only the privately placed obligations, but also capital market debt, which could create a liquidity crisis for the issuer and potentially have multi-notch negative rating implications. Also, acceleration provisions that favor private lenders essentially subordinate the claims of an issuer’s capital market lenders relative to those of the private placement lender. Finally, even when the events of default contained in these documents might not have acceleration as a remedy, they could cause acceleration of other parity debt through either cross-default provisions or most favored nations clauses. The presence of such provisions could have negative implications for our ratings on an issuer’s capital market debt. Moreover, the presence of what are known as “most favored nation” clauses that incorporate by reference the terms of future agreements that the obligor may enter into can be particularly deleterious to credit quality because the events of default may change in unknown ways.

    We request comprehensive disclosure to Standard & Poor’s to facilitate review of these products’ latent demands on the obligor’s liquidity in order to assess the potential impact on both the issuer’s direct placement financings and its capital market debt. If in our view the likely demand on liquidity is high and available liquidity is inadequate to cover repayment risk, in general, we could consider a negative rating action or outlook change. We assess the relationship of the current rating to rating triggers in the covenants, cure periods, and the financing’s other specified terms that define default events. Standard & Poor’s does not believe that the potential absence of legal or regulatory disclosure requirements, or the fact that ratings are not being sought, eliminates the need for market transparency. So that ratings reflect, among other factors, the range of exposures that issuers’ liquidity faces, we request disclosure of the existence and terms of all instruments that could have a bearing on the issuer’s financial risk profile. And beyond liquidity considerations, disclosure to us of any debt obligations is important to assess an obligor’s overall liability and liquidity profile. Use of additional debt instruments has the potential to alter our view of an obligor’s debt burden. The extent to which management demonstrates an understanding of the risks that direct-purchase bonds and loans could present, and has plans or policies to mitigate them, plays an important role in our assessments of the credit quality implications of these types of financings.

    Two Types Of Repayment Risk

    In general, we believe that there are two primary types of repayment risk tied to VRDOs, alternative financing products, and other debt instruments. The first is risk that is predictable or likely to occur. We consider these risks predictable as the potential timeline for these events occurring is known. Therefore, management usually has adequate time to address payment obligations associated with such risks. These circumstances could include:

    The second is event-driven risk. This type of risk presents an analytical challenge because the circumstances that could require repayment or additional liquidity are uncertain. Payment obligations associated with event-driven risk that could require liquidity typically include VRDOs supported by LOCs and SBPAs, interest-rate swaps, bank debt that might come due as a result of covenant violations or events of default, third-party guarantees, and new market-based variable-rate products. Event-driven risks could also include:

    Ratings Incorporate Event-Driven Risk

    We believe that, in general, the lower an obligor’s credit rating the more likely it is that event-driven risk could occur. We also believe that the shorter the period identified to respond to the latent liquidity demands financing documents provide, the more likely it is that an obligor could have difficulty if triggering events occur. The longer the period for curing a default, the greater the opportunity for accessing capital markets, accessing less-liquid assets on the balance sheet, or making other financing arrangements to meet extraordinary liquidity demands. In the criteria article, “Contingent Liquidity Risks In U.S. Public Finance Instruments: Methodology and Assumptions,” we discuss the benefits of a longer cure period: “A longer time period between the triggering event and the date when the obligor must pay the resulting claim provides some protection against potential market disruptions. Because suddenness is frequently an attribute of contingent claims and because capital market access requires some planning and coordination, the criteria usually assume no ability to fund claims through capital market access within 180 days.”

    Some factors could necessitate extending the 180-day threshold, including:

    Conversely, the criteria allow for the assumption that some obligors may be able to gain market access in less than 180 days. Assuming that none of the conditions in the previous paragraph exist, obligor characteristics that may lead to this assumption are:

    Disclosure of privately placed debt is critical to the ratings process because where event-driven risk exists, we evaluate the likelihood of the issuer triggering acceleration, termination payment, or collateral posting requirements. We further assess management’s capacity to respond to these types of liquidity demands, whether through available balance sheet liquidity, capital market access, or lines of credit. If in our view the available liquidity is inadequate to cover repayment risk, in general, we could consider a negative rating action or outlook change.

    For obligors with a high degree of event-driven risk, our view as to the magnitude of these risks being realized over the near term will also likely inform our view of the obligor’s overall liquidity position and whether we include these risks in our traditional analysis of liquidity. It should be noted that, based on our observations, local governments (cities, counties, and school districts) frequently have lower levels of operating liquidity and more-seasonal cash flow patterns than other public finance and tax-exempt obligors.

    Information Needs

    Whether or not banks or municipal entities are required to disclose direct financing agreements’ covenants, we nevertheless believe it is critical, as part of our routine surveillance of obligors, to explore whether issuers have entered into any such agreements and to have management:

    We expect obligors to provide information on covenant thresholds, potential acceleration periods, and expiration dates of various liquidity facilities and/or bank loans and letters of credit. We also expect obligors to provide summary information on compliance with various covenants. If particular liabilities require potentially rapid repayment, we would expect obligors to demonstrate the steps they would take to meet repayment terms. Also, we will expect obligors to notify us of plans for using alternative financing products before entering into such agreements. Whereas the “Contingent Liquidity Risks In U.S. Public Finance Instruments: Methodology and Assumptions” extends the principles cited in this article to all U.S. public finance debt, sector specific criteria pieces discuss specific exposure risks in debt and liquidity sections or in discussions of financial policies.

    Standard & Poor’s also believes that the optimal time for disclosure to rating agencies and capital markets is while alternative financing agreements are being planned and finalized. Specifically, in regard to entities rated by Standard & Poor’s, we request that all documents associated with the transaction be shared, regardless of whether the financing is being rated by Standard & Poor’s. We believe that delayed disclosure of any financing does not serve the market well, particularly where the financing’s covenants could pressure liquidity, potentially leading to negative rating implications. Failure to disclose, or delayed disclosure, could color our assessment of management and have negative rating implications or lead to rating withdrawals due to what we regard as insufficient information having been disclosed to us.

    To facilitate the flow of information concerning these transactions, please send any alternative financing documents to [email protected].

     




    The Time May Have Arrived for Online Sales Tax Fairness.

    Partially driven by a devastating alternative, Congress appears closer than ever to passing an Internet sales tax bill.

    After a March 12 hearing of the House Judiciary Committee, Congress is mighty close to passing an Internet tax bill that would make it possible for states and localities to line their coffers with an estimated $23 billion a year in what are now uncollected sales taxes from online purchases.

    “It is looking really good,” says Max Behlke, manager for state-federal relations for the National Conference of State Legislatures (NCSL). “The last couple of years people have been saying, ‘This is the year, this is the year.’ But after last Wednesday’s hearing, it really does look like this is the year.”

    The Senate already passed a Marketplace Fairness Act by a bipartisan vote of 69-27 that would require Internet retailers and catalog companies to collect sales taxes, regardless of whether they have a physical presence in a state. The House has been more reluctant to act, but what has Behlke feeling optimistic is that 37 of 40 members of the House Judiciary Committee showed up for the hearing. “Not all were in support of a bill, but everyone agreed that this is not a new tax” and that, Behlke points out, is a major step forward.

    The hearings also showed that there could be worse things than no passage. One of those things is an approach to Internet tax collection, called “origin sourcing,” that drew a lot of discussion.

    With origin sourcing, instead of basing the Internet sales tax on where the customer resides, it would be based on where the online-only retailer calls home. A firm could base its “home jurisdiction” in the state where it has the most employees, the most physical assets or the one designated by the company as its principal place of business for federal tax purposes. In theory, an online retailer who claims one of the five no-sales-tax states as home headquarters would not have to collect sales taxes from its customers, wherever they may reside and wherever the goods may be delivered. For online-only sellers, changing locations to a no-sales-tax or low-sales-tax state would be fairly easy and could spawn interstate tax competition to lower sales tax rates.

    Howard Gleckman, a resident fellow at the Urban Institute, described the approach as a poison pill, “a cynical effort to exempt Internet sales from any tax under the guise of ‘fairness’ and ‘state sovereignty.'” If it somehow became law, he pointed out, “it could well be a recipe for the ultimate demise of sales taxes as a source of state revenues.”

    Others testifying at the hearing were blunter: Stephen Kranz, a tax partner in the law firm of McDermott, Will & Emery, called origin sourcing “the nuclear bomb version of tax competition.”

    The only good news about origin sourcing is that Utah Rep. Jason Chaffetz ended his questions to the witnesses with the comment that “origin sourcing is dead on arrival.” But the genie is out of the box. If no bill is passed this year, it could resurface again. “That’s always a possibility,” NCSL’s Behlke says. “It’s always discussed.”

    Meanwhile, a few states, taking note of the Senate bill, are making their own adjustments. Some Republican governors and their legislatures don’t want the perception that the size of government might grow from the windfall of additional sales tax revenue. Wisconsin and Ohio passed proactive measures that would cut state taxes when the federal e-fairness law is passed by Congress and signed by President Obama. If an e-fairness bill passes, for instance, Wisconsin’s law would automatically cut state income taxes for individuals, families and small businesses. “Since most small businesses pay their taxes through their personal filings, the state budget creates the ultimate win-win scenario of tax fairness and a tax cut,” says Scott Stenger of the Alliance of Wisconsin Retailers.

    The Idaho Legislature has a similar bill before it that would create a savings account where all additional revenue the state collects from federal e-fairness legislation would be directed to local tax relief, instead of being funneled into the general fund.

    These reactions to a possible e-fairness law by Republicans is another reason Behlke is positive about passage this year. As he notes, the issue is not going away: e-commerce is growing by double digits, states are losing money and small businesses continue to struggle. “Congress wants to deal with the issue sooner rather than later,” he says. “With presidential elections coming in 2016, Republicans want to get this issue off the table.”

    Every year Bloomberg BNA surveys state revenue officials to clarify their state’s approach to the gray areas of state tax law, and this year it looked at the question of nexus — physical location — in terms of sales taxes on services that cross state lines. The results of that survey will be published in its Survey of State Tax Departments due out April 25.

    Penelope Lemov  |  correspondent


    [email protected]  |




    Solving the Equation for Disruption to the U.S. Electric Power Industry - a New Deloitte Report.

    Deloitte Center for Energy Solutions
    Learn moreThe new math
    Solving the equation for disruption to the U.S. electric power industryImpending disruption to the traditional U.S. electric power industry business model has been the topic of much discussion and debate. Profound changes are not just inevitable; they are already occurring. The question is no longer if disruption will occur, but where and how fast.As the final installment of Deloitte’s series of papers on the future of the U.S. electric power industry, The new math: Solving the equation for disruption to the U.S. electric power industry explores how disruption could manifest itself across the industry.

    Read the report to find out:

    • What fundamental shift has already occurred in the electric industry’s license to do business?
    • Which of the 50 states are likely to experience the greatest pace of disruption, based on a model developed by Deloitte?
    • Who are the new market entrants and what role are they playing in the marketplace?
    • How can electric utilities, new market entrants and regulators enhance collaboration to smooth the transition to new ways of doing business?
    • What frameworks should electric companies consider as they create new business models to confront the challenges and seize the opportunities that lie ahead?

    Download the report to learn more about the rapidly changing U.S. electric power industry landscape.




    S&P: Federal Programs And Interest Rates Should Keep U.S. Municipal Housing Stable.

    Recent years have shown that interest rates play a far greater role in the municipal housing sector than does the strength of the economy, and such is the case in 2014, with the low-interest-rate environment likely to cap bond issuance despite decreasing unemployment and slightly increasing mortgage rates.

    Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services predicts that the 30-year fixed mortgage rate will average 4.6% and possibly reach 5.4%, but that even a rate in the high end of this range would result in diminished mortgage revenue bond (MRB) production compared with past years (see chart). (Watch the related CreditMatters TV segment titled, “U.S. Municipal Housing Looks Forward To Another Strong Year,” dated Feb. 19, 2014.)

    Overview

    • U.S. municipal housing should improve in 2014 along with the economy.
    • Interest rates will again play the biggest part, likely capping the sector’s bond issuance.
    • Housing finance agency performance remains strong.
    • Federal guarantees should be more reliable than federal appropriations for issuers.

    Chart 1  |  Download Chart Data

    image

    The U.S. federal government poses more headwinds for municipal housing issuers than do real estate markets although the thawing politics in Washington, D.C., appear to foster more stability than before. Tax reform, which gained some traction in early 2013, didn’t occur last year and may not progress in 2014. Budget cutbacks previously scheduled under sequestration could be reduced under the Ryan-Murray budget deal, which restores $65 billion in sequestration cuts over 2014 and 2015. Housing finance reform calls into question the federal government’s longstanding role in promoting housing affordability, but proposals for changing or eliminating Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac remain on hold. Despite a slightly more solid federal appropriation commitment to housing than under sequestration, municipal issuers with federal guarantees should fare better than those reliant on federal appropriations.

    Finally, Standard & Poor’s will implement revised criteria for unenhanced multifamily projects, federally subsidized projects, privatized military housing projects, and bonds backed by multifamily loan pools. The proposed criteria would affect no more than 450 rated issues, covering 160 discrete projects or programs. We anticipate that once applied, the revised criteria could result in our raising 5% of the issue ratings and lowering 10%.

    Standard & Poor’s baseline projection for the average unemployment rate is 6.9% in 2014 compared with 7.5% in 2013 and 8.1% in 2012. The increased income from employment translates to 2 million additional households, for a total of 123 million. Standard & Poor’s projects that the number of single-family housing starts will reach 810,000 in 2014 compared with 620,000 in 2013. Multifamily housing will likely grow at a similar pace, to 350,000 units in 2014 from 290,000 in 2013. We anticipate that these factors will reduce delinquencies in single-family loans and boost occupancy in multifamily properties.

    The municipal housing industry has always led a dual existence with regard to interest rates: As capital market borrowers they want to issue bonds with the lowest yield, but as mortgage financiers they need a sufficiently high loan rate to support their bonds. Unlike other tax-exempt entities, housing finance agencies (HFAs) and issuers of municipal housing bonds compete with the private sector to serve individuals. In the case of HFAs, the customers are typically low- to moderate-income first-time homebuyers, for whom HFAs can provide affordable mortgage rates and down payment assistance.

    The decline in mortgage rates has made the MRB model less viable. Bond rates can only go so low, so even though HFAs can issue debt at lower rates than they could 10 years ago, mortgage rates from lenders that are not tax-exempt are not much different from rates on loans financed through the municipal bond market. Thus, the difference between the rates on the bonds and the mortgages that would support them is often too thin to allow for a bond-financed loan.

    HFA Performance Remains Strong Despite Challenges

    HFA single-family indentures have retained high ratings in the aftermath of the housing downturn that accompanied the Great Recession. The main factors in the ratings — which are typically at least ‘AA’ — are the conservative profiles of the indentures, strong underwriting standards, traditional loan types, and substantial support from the U.S. federal government. (See “U.S. Public Finance Report Card: State Housing Finance Agencies’ Single-Family Programs Strengthen On Federal Support And Higher Equity,” published Dec. 19, 2013 on RatingsDirect.) Although rating changes have been rare, the indentures are building strength through higher equity and reserves, maintaining a manageable loan delinquency rate, and paying off some variable-rate debt.

    Performance of single-family indentures has contributed to HFA issuer credit ratings (ICRs) that have never been higher as a group: A record 83% of HFAs have ICRs of ‘AA-‘ or better compared with 75% before the real estate downturn. Equity-to-asset ratios are, likewise, at an all-time high, nonperforming asset ratios are improving, and almost all HFAs have positive net income. (See “U.S. Public Finance Report Card: U.S. Housing Finance Agency Financial Ratios And Ratings Improve During A Weak Economy,” published Oct. 9, 2013.) Much of the improvement is the result of management reactions to real estate and financial market disruption.

    Yet even in this area, activity by the federal government has had a dampening effect on HFAs. The federal response to the economic slowdown, namely the near-0% federal funds rate and quantitative easing, has resulted in lower investment returns and market mortgage rates too low to allow HFAs to operate within an MRB model (see chart). HFAs have shifted their origination platform to sales of U.S.-backed mortgage-backed securities (MBS) through the to-be-announced market. This maintains lending activity but without the loans and bonds associated with an MRB program. As a result, the balance sheets of HFAs shrink. As long as mortgage rates remain historically low, we anticipate that HFA balance sheets will continue to deteriorate.

    The Federal Government Affects Ratings In Several Ways

    The benefits of the federal government outweigh the negatives, even though the U.S. sovereign rating has been in play since 2011. The outlook on the rating no longer portends a negative rating action given that Standard & Poor’s revised the outlook to stable from negative on June 10, 2013. This affected 1,754 ratings that track the rating on the U.S. sovereign.

    Sectors with strong federal support

    Similarly, we anticipate that securitized multifamily housing will experience better outcomes, being that it benefits from stronger federal support. Debt issues with collateral in the form of MBS from Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and Ginnie Mae will match the rating on the U.S. sovereign, assuming no other elements of the transactions constrain the rating. Housing for the U.S. armed forces will maintain higher credit quality than much of the affordable multifamily market because of a consistent record of government appropriations to cover the collective housing costs of military personnel. The sector’s continuing strength largely reflects that the source of rental income is the Department of Defense’s basic allowance for housing (BAH), which has a strong record of congressional appropriation.

    HUD support

    The federal government’s commitment to other sectors is less certain. The U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is the main source of public funding for affordable housing, and, as an entity of the federal government, is bound to congressional budget decisions; its funding declined by 12% in 2008 to 2012. More recently, sequestration resulted in cuts of more than $900 million to the $18.9 billion in Section 8 housing choice vouchers and $470 million to the $9.3 billion project-based Section 8 vouchers.. However, the 2014 omnibus bill based on the Ryan-Murray plan funds housing choice vouchers at $19.2 billion and project-based vouchers at $9.9 billion — both increased from the original fiscal 2013 appropriation.

    Market Forces And New Criteria To Affect Unenhanced Multifamily Ratings

    Sectors with less federal support will see more financial stress. Declining or stable asking rents, which are subject to income restrictions, offset some of the benefits that affordable multifamily properties have, such as declining vacancy rates, relatively stable operating costs, and locations in low-cost markets. Without explicit federal guarantees, the ratings on these properties are much more subject to market forces. Occupancy ranges from 80% to 97% for some of the stronger properties in high-demand markets. Occupancy for subsidized housing programs, such as Section 8, is very strong: Physical occupancy averages 98%, and 88% of these housing projects have occupancy of more than 95%. But balancing rental increases with operating expenses will be a challenge. The 2% decrease in average expenses in project-based Section 8 transactions in 2013 is a positive sign, but may not signal a trend.

    The revised criteria that will go into effect this year apply to these security types. As mentioned above we anticipate taking no rating action on 85% of the issues, while perhaps raising ratings on 5% and lowering ratings on 10%.

    Public Housing Experiencing Stress

    Sequestration resulted in a 4.4% spending reduction in operating funds for public housing authorities (PHAs). In December 2013 we lowered the issuer credit rating to ‘A+’ from ‘AA-‘ on the Houston Housing Authority based on weaker financial performance related to lower federal funding. Also affected is capital fund financing program debt that PHAs issue and pay back with future grant appropriations. Because the stream of funding is not as certain as with BAH, we assume ongoing reductions in capital funding from the federal government, and to this point, reductions under sequestration have not been greater than what we anticipated.

    Future Of GSEs Remains Unclear

    Government-supported entity (GSE) reform poses a different risk to U.S. municipal issuers. The two main proposals for GSE reform (Corker-Warner in the U.S. Senate and PATH in the U.S. House of Representatives) increase down payment requirements to 5.0% compared with the 3.5% under many current affordable single-family loans that HFAs offer. Because many HFAs provide down payment assistance, the increased requirements could mean additional costs to the HFAs when they make up the difference. The additional costs could, in turn, decrease HFAs’ participation in the affordable housing market, thus limiting availability.

    In 2012, affordable single- and multifamily housing loans accounted for $267 billion of the GSE loan production. Corker-Warner would assess a fee of five to 10 basis points on all loans to establish trust funds that would be available for housing and other purposes. Management estimates the fees generated for the trust funds at less than $1 billion annually. This figure is substantially lower than the current affordable housing support that the GSEs provide and could significantly reduce the activity of HFAs and other municipal issuers, in our view, cutting housing opportunities — both ownership and rental — for many working- and middle-class households. Although the level of commitment wouldn’t affect existing issues, a large reduction in the federal government’s affordable-housing footprint could have tremendous implications.

    Conclusion

    The municipal housing sector should continue its stable performance in 2014. As the year begins, we anticipate that a more predictable federal environment in terms of legislation and fiscal policy will provide a more solid foundation than in past years. In 2013, for instance, the federal government shut down for 16 days, Congress considered changing the municipal bond interest tax exemption and the mortgage interest tax deduction, and sequestration led to significant cuts to public housing funding. None of those variables is in play at this time. Reform of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac remains a topic of discussion, but in even more muted tones than last year, as these entities are so profitable that they are on the verge of paying the U.S. Treasury more than the $187 billion they received from the federal bailout.

    With a more settled federal situation, securities that rely on federal support should experience more stability. Indeed, the more than 1,700 issues with ratings matching the U.S. sovereign rating now have stable outlooks instead of the negative outlooks they carried from August 2011 to June 2013. We anticipate that issues without direct support of the U.S. government will continue to perform much as they have in the past. HFA ICRs should remain stable: In the past three months, we revised the outlooks to stable from negative on ICRs for California HFA and Utah Housing Corp. HFA single-family programs have more equity than ever as a whole, which should keep our ratings on them at least ‘AA’ in almost all cases. Bonds with less reliable and less predictable revenue streams will continue to experience more rating movement, especially those with limited or no federal support.

    Download Table

    2014-2015 Industry Economic Outlook for U.S. Public Finance Housing
    –Forecast/Scenarios– –Actual–
    Downside Baseline Upside
    2014 2015 2014 2015 2014 2015 2013
    Macroeconomic indicators
    30-year fixed mortgage rate (%) 4.09 4.41 4.63 4.98 5.40 6.49 3.96
    10-year Treasury note yield (%) 2.00 2.41 3.03 3.30 4.18 4.85 2.32
    Unemployment rate (%) 7.59 7.68 6.47 5.82 6.05 5.00 7.45
    Real GDP (% change) 0.58 1.84 2.77 3.25 4.13 4.01 1.68
    Total nonfarm payrolls (% change) 0.75 0.78 1.76 2.03 2.46 2.58 1.64
    Consumer Price Index (% change) 0.80 1.95 1.44 1.77 2.13 1.61 1.44
    Households (mil.) 122.84 124.20 123.10 124.72 123.29 125.02 121.41
    Median single-family existing-home price (000s $) 194.80 190.37 198.71 198.47 202.09 200.72 195.57
    Median new-home sale prices (000s $) 261.67 254.38 265.77 266.02 263.72 252.29 264.53
    Existing single-family home sales (mil. units) 4.42 4.70 4.70 5.12 5.22 5.28 4.52
    Single-family housing starts (mil. units) 0.56 0.74 0.82 1.05 0.90 1.19 0.62
    Multifamily housing starts (mil. units) 0.26 0.33 0.35 0.43 0.36 0.49 0.29
    Federal government spending (3.0) 0.1 (1.1) 0.0 (0.6) 0.9 (4.6)
    Note: Standard & Poor’s U.S. Economic team’s forecasts are constructed using the Global Insight model of the U.S. economy. Forecasts are from “U.S. Economic Forecast: Two Economies Diverged in A Wood,” published Dec. 5, 2013 on RatingsDirect.
    Primary Credit Analyst: Lawrence R Witte, CFA, San Francisco (1) 415-371-5037;
    [email protected]
    Secondary Contact: Mikiyon W Alexander, New York (1) 212-438-2083;
    [email protected]



    Phoenix Votes to Keep 'Spiking' Police Pensions.

    The Phoenix Police Pension Board voted 4-1 Wednesday to let stand three controversial policies that allow public-safety officers to “spike” their retirement benefits at an additional cost to taxpayers.

    The vote allows police officers to count uniform allowances as compensation and lets them cash in unused sick and vacation leave at the end of their careers to increase their salaries.

    Those practices artificially inflate an employee’s ending pay, which is a key factor in determining pension benefits. When ending pay is spiked, annual pension benefits are higher.

    The policies have allowed a handful of high-ranking Phoenix public-safety retirees to become millionaires because they have significantly enhanced their annual and lump-sum retirement benefits under a program known as the Deferred Retirement Option Plan, or DROP.

    The board was forced to rule on the policies because it is a defendant in a lawsuit in which three Phoenix residents allege the pension-spiking practices are illegal. The board’s decision is expected to keep in place similar policies for firefighters, who also are allowed to spike their pensions.

    View Full Story from the Arizona Republic




    Detroit Seeking Municipal Finance Expert to Assess Bankruptcy Exit Plan.

    Call it the job posting of the year in municipal finance.

    Detroit bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes is seeking an expert witness to assess the feasibility of the city’s proposed restructuring plan.

    Whomever gets the job is poised to become one of the most influential players in Detroit’s bankruptcy.

    Cue a rush of resumes.

    The judge Monday asked the city and creditors to respond to his proposal to hire an outside expert to assess the viability of Detroit emergency manager Kevyn Orr’s proposed plan of adjustment.

    Rhodes proposed an impartial expert with an expertise in municipal finance, a “demonstrable interest in and concern for” Detroit’s future and no conflicts of interest.

    The person could become a star witness in the high-profile mid-July trial over whether the city’s restructuring is fair and equitable, a proceeding called a “plan confirmation hearing.”

    “All interested parties are ordered to show cause why the Court should not appoint one or more expert witnesses to provide a report and to give testimony regarding the feasibility of the City’s plan of adjustment and the reasonableness of the City’s assumptions regarding its revenues, expenses and plan payments,” Rhodes said in written order.

    Separately, Rhodes also ordered Detroit to hand over additional information on how it plans to spend $120 million in fresh debt from Barclays.

    Rhodes previously scheduled an April 2 hearing to decide whether to allow Detroit to borrow the cash from the London-based bank in a deal that was renegotiated after a previous bankruptcy financing transaction collapsed.

    He said he wants the city to disclose all the terms of the new deal, including fees and any provisions that would affect the interest rate. And he ordered Detroit to detail exactly how it plans to spend the money on so-called “quality of life” improvement projects.

    Orr spokesman Bill Nowling told the Free Press recently that the city would use the money to invest in services.

    In January, the judge approved a first version of the $120 million loan, but the deal had to be renegotiated and re-approved after Rhodes rejected a debt settlement deal with two different banks that was tied to the Barclays transaction.

    Meanwhile, Rhodes signaled that he wants to hire an expert in municipal finance who will “exercise fair, unbiased and independent judgment” to deliver a report and testify on Orr’s plan of adjustment.

    If he can’t find a single qualified witness to assess the entire plan, he could appoint multiple witnesses to cover various issues in the plan of adjustment.

    The city would pay for the expert and the expert’s staff.

    The city and creditors will have a chance to a file comments on the proposal before Rhodes decides whether to authorize it.

    By Nathan Bomey

    BY  | MARCH 25, 2014

    (c)2014 the Detroit Free Press




    Local Officials Get Info on "Public Bank" Concept.

    WILKES-BARRE —Describing it as an “end run” around big banks and big government that could reduce the cost of floating municipal bonds while returning money to the county’s general fund, Mike Krauss extolled the virtues of establishing a “public bank” during a presentation to about 30 representatives of area governments and municipalities Monday morning.

    Krauss, a director of the Public Banking Institute, said governments facing tight budgets currently have four options: “Cut services, layoffs, raising taxes or taking on more debt service. Those are the tools. We need another tool.”A public bank would be set up through a state bank charter to pool financial resources of governments and public money, using those assets in partnership with local banks that, on their own, cannot compete with the large, multi-national banks, Krauss explained.

    Initial gains would be low as the bank starts up, but would grow over five or six years to the point of substantial return on investment for the sponsoring government. Krauss said a state public bank in North Dakota, in existence for 95 years, gets a returns of 17 to 25 percent some years.

    In this case, Krauss was talking about the possibility of a Luzerne County public bank, an idea initially floated by Luzerne County Council Vice Chairman Edward Brominski. Brominski said he set up and paid for the breakfast and presentation at Genetti’s Best Western Hotel and Conference Center to provide information to interested parties.

    Krauss said the largest banks have the most clout and can offer bigger loans and lower rates than smaller banks, but that loans have become a small part of their business, choking off credit.

    Local banks, on the other hand, may be more willing to loan money but often have lower limits on how much they can provide, and higher interest rates. A public bank leverages public money to help local banks compete.

    “It’s a partnership bank,” Krauss said. “There are no branches, no tellers, no ATMs, no real estate, none of those expenses.

    “Let’s say you own a car dealership and you want to expand,” Krauss said. “You go to a local bank and say ‘I need $10 million,’ They say ‘our limit is $5 million’. The dealer goes to a bigger bank. That’s how big banks take their share. In North Dakota, the local bank says lets go see if the public bank will cover the rest.”

    Similarly, Krauss said, a local bank may only be able to offer a loan with interest at 6 percent, but partnered with a public bank it may drop the rate dramatically.

    The public bank could influence the cost of government borrowing, usually done by floating municipal bonds. “The potential impact on your bond debt is phenomenal,” Krauss said. The public bank can bid on the bond, driving down the cost. He cited a California bridge that required a $6 billion loan plus almost as much interest. “Had they banked it themselves, they could have taken maybe 30 percent off that.”

    And a public bank can respond more quickly with disaster relief, Krauss said, citing a major fire in a North Dakota City. “The state bank put up $100 million before (the Federal Emergency Management Agency) was even on the ground.

    Forming a public bank would require gathering interested banks and stakeholders to determine its mission, Krauss said, noting that in North Dakota the goal recently has been to fund development of high tech businesses. He said Philadelphia is contemplating a public bank, and one possible goal would be to offer low-cost mortgages for the development of some 40,000 vacant properties the city is dealing with.

    Governance of the bank would also be important, with a goal of limited political input, Krauss said. The North Dakota bank has a board of bankers and business officials appointed by three elected officials. The board then chooses a director who hires any necessary staff.

    After the meeting Walt McRee, another director of the Pennsylvania Public Bank Project, said that system creates multiple firewalls between politicians and bank operations.

    Krauss said transparency is essential to a public bank, but also said it is built into the concept, in part because it is a public bank subject to more scrutiny than large private banks. Partnering with local banks also means risk assessments of any loan are done by two separate parties: The public bank and the local bank.

    Most attendees stayed around to ask further questions after the presentation. Hazleton Mayor Joe Yannuzzi said the idea sounded promising but that it would involve a lot of work. “It’s worth exploring further,” he said, a sentiment echoed by Luzerne County Councilman and former Luzerne County Commissioner Stephen A. Urban.

    March 24. 2014 2:03PM



    Lipper Winners Answer the Muni Bond Riddle.

    (Reuters) – One could forgive municipal bond investors for being confused. While the average muni bond was down 2.6 percent in 2013, making it one of the worst-performing bond sectors this year, munis are already up 3.1 percent through March 19, making it one of the best.

    Many of the conditions that existed last year continue today. Muni investors are still worried about the outcomes of the financial struggles of Detroit and Puerto Rico. And there is still persistent fear of rising interest rates decimating bond values. (Bond prices move inversely to rates.)

    So what gives?

    Reuters asked a number of 2014 U.S. Lipper Fund Awards’ winners for answers.

    While Detroit’s bankruptcy played a role last year, manager Peter Hayes of BlackRock Strategic Municipal Opportunities Fund , a winner of the 2014 U.S. Lipper Fund Awards, says the spike in interest rates that occurred last May did most of the damage.

    From May 1 through the end of July, the 10-year U.S. Treasury bond yield rose from 1.66 percent to almost 3 percent as investors panicked about the Federal Reserve bank scaling back its bond-buying program.

    While investor concerns about rising rates persist, Hayes says bonds are now priced more appropriately.

    “When yields were very low in 2011 and 2012, investors began to take on too much risk, buying high-yield bonds and bonds with long durations,” Hayes says.

    But now, you can get a 3.35 percent tax-free yield on a 10-year A-rated muni compared to just 2.78 percent on a taxable 10-year Treasury bond. And you can get up to 3 percentage points extra if you’re willing to buy regular high-yield municipals, and even more than that for the truly distressed plays in Detroit or Puerto Rico.

    Aside from the added yield, driving the comeback is a shortage of muni bond supply, where there is a 30 percent decline in new issuance this year, Hayes says. Add to that the fact that income tax rates on the wealthy went from 35 percent to 39.6 percent – or 43.4 percent if you include the new 3.8 percent Medicare tax on the ultra-rich – and you’ve got the makings of a rally.

    Arguably the best values in the muni sector are now in high-yield bonds. To take full advantage of the sector, Hayes tweaked his fund’s investment strategy and changed its name this January from the BlackRock Intermediate Municipal Fund to its current Strategic Municipal Opportunities.

    This has given him greater latitude to buy high-yield bonds, the exposure for which he’s doubled from 7 to 14 percent this year. And he can play offense or defense with the maturities of the bonds he owns depending on which way he thinks rates are going. (Long-term bonds are more sensitive to rates than short-term bonds.)

    Most of the other 2014 U.S. Lipper Fund Award Winners are also fans of high-yield debt.

    “Despite the headlines about Detroit and Puerto Rico, default rates in the high-yield municipal bond market have stayed very low,” says Troy Willis, co-manager of the Oppenheimer Rochester AMT-Free Municipal Fund.

    Indeed, Willis sees the negative press about Puerto Rico as an opportunity. His fund has a 10.2-percent Puerto Rico weighting.

    “We are the largest institutional holder of Puerto Rico bonds,” Willis says. “We don’t think it will default like Detroit.”

    Detroit’s population declined by 60 percent in the last 40 years while Puerto Rico’s has grown 2.2 percent, increasing the number of people who can pay taxes to cover its muni bond debt, Willis says.

    NEW 401(k)PLAN

    Also, the island commonwealth recently shifted its pension plan for government employees to a more affordable 401(k) retirement plan and increased the age at which existing pensioners can receive their benefits. That’s bad for employees but good for Puerto Rico’s budget. Its deficit has been shrinking from $3.3 billion on June 30, 2009, to an estimated $650 million by June 30, 2104, according to Willis.

    The yields on Puerto Rico debt are extraordinary in a low-rate environment.

    “I can find Puerto Rico Electric Power Authority munis yielding 10 percent tax-free,” says manager Michael Walls of Ivy Municipal High Income, another Lipper winner and Puerto Rico fan.

    That translates to a 16.6 percent tax-adjusted yield for those in the highest 39.6 percent bracket. General obligation bonds issued by the Puerto Rican government currently yield upwards of 8 percent – or 13.2 percent on a tax-adjusted basis.

    Still, not every Lipper winner is buying the Puerto Rico story.

    Even if some newly issued 2-year Puerto Rico bonds yield 10 percent, the average recovery rate on defaulted municipal bonds for investors is only 60 cents on every dollar invested, says Chris Ryon, co-manager of the Thornburg Limited Term Municipal Fund.

    “You could make 20 percent but lose 40 in two years,” he says. “Not such a good deal.”

    Of this year’s muni winners, Ryon’s fund is probably the most conservative strategically. Ryon only holds high-quality investment-grade bonds rated BBB or better. He also keeps the maturities of his bonds less than 10 years so that the fund is less sensitive to interest rates.

    He thinks the best values can be found in bonds within the 7- to 10-year maturity range.

    He likes 10-year AA-rated bonds from Rhode Island which has “a great Treasurer,” pension spending that’s under control and bond yields of 3.2 percent – about 0.70 percentage point higher than the average AA-rated bond.

    BlackRock’s Hayes favors B-rated municipal airport bonds in New Jersey issued by companies such as United Continental Holdings or US Airways. These yield in excess of 5 percent – or 8.3 percent tax adjusted. Maybe that’s not at Puerto Rico levels but it beats the 2.78 percent you’ll get on a 10-year Treasury note any day.

    By Lewis Braham

    Fri Mar 21, 2014 12:01am EDT

    (Editing by Lauren Young andBernadette Baum)




    Bill Would Exempt Water PABs from State Volume Caps.

    A bill introduced in the House of Representatives last week would amend the IRS Code to exempt water and wastewater infrastructure projects from the Private Activity Bond volume cap. H.R. 4237, titled The Sustainable Water Infrastructure Act of 2014, was introduced on March 13, 2014, by Reps. John Duncan, Jr. (R-TN) and Bill Pascrell, Jr. (D-NJ) and referred to the House Committee on Ways and Means.

    A press release issued by Rep. Duncan, Jr. states that “raising the PAB cap on water infrastructure projects would leverage $50 billion in private capital investment, create 1.4 million jobs, and add $101.5 billion in tax revenue to federal, state and local governments.” The legislation is supported by the National League of Cities, Sustainable Water Infrastructure Coalition, and other groups.

    The text of the bill can be seen here.




    Mayors Rally to Defend Block Grant Funding.

    Even though Obama proposes cuts, mayors are asking Congress not to touch Community Development Block Grant funding (which, unlike most federal funding, flows directly to cities).

    When a Vietnam veteran took a fall that left him paralyzed, the city of Pembroke Pines, Fla., gave him money to help make his house wheelchair accessible. Akron, Ohio, used funds to demolish blighted homes abandoned during the Great Recession. And money also helped the township of Piscataway, N.J.,to rebuilt local parks damaged by Hurricane Irene in 2011 and Superstorm Sandy a year later.

    The funding source for all these projects is the federal Community Development Block Grant (CDBG) program. Mayors gathered in Washington, D.C. this month to protest proposed spending cuts to the program proposed in next year’s federal budget.

    Founded in 1974, CDBGs were aimed at lifting up the poor and restoring community to the nation’s inner cities. Proposed by President Richard Nixon’s administration, the program was aimed at reducing the bureaucracy of the social welfare program of the previous administration by giving money directly to the cities. Mayors are asking Congress to keep the current $3 billion funding level.

    Cities love the program because it provides a rare, direct pipeline to federal government money, although some CDBG funding is directed to states to distribute. (A total of 1,209 local governments and states receive annual CDBG funding on a formula basis based on poverty and population, according to HUD.) Cities use the money for many things, most of them falling under the vast umbrella of economic development, housing or social services. “It’s one of the very few, federally direct funds that doesn’t go through the state house or the counties and they take the administrative costs off of us and we’re left with the crumbs,” said Piscataway Mayor Brian Wahler at a press conference hosted by the U.S. Conference of Mayors.

    But critics of the program say its flexible structure makes it more vulnerable to misuse. Steven Malanga, a senior fellow at the conservative-leaning Manhattan Institute, noted the program was “almost immediately” abused by self-serving politicians – in the 1980s, a HUD investigation found that members of Congress were using the program to funnel money to qestionable projects.

    “Often ignoring the most distressed communities, local pols channeled the grants into their pet projects, including tennis courts and parks in affluent areas, purchases of CB radios and other perks for senior-citizen centers, and new roads and other infrastructure improvements in thriving neighborhoods,” Malanga wrote in hiscritique, published in the City Journal. “Officials claimed that this spending would provide employment to the poor, though there was never any evidence of that.”

    But the mayors this month said a few bad apples were spoiling the bunch – the vast majority of CDBG money is spent helping those who need it. Wahler said New Jersey communities devastated by the hurricanes in recent years have been able to rebuild some spaces quickly largely because CDBG funding is more accessible than the reimbursement program run by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA).

    “To some extent, FEMA’s like a black hole sometimes,” he said. “I’m not knocking FEMA, but depending on who the case worker is in the area, what part of the country they’re coming from, everybody has a different spin on what FEMA can and can’t do. So this is program is the path of least resistance to accomplish something that had to get done anyway.”

    Cities have already dealt with major cutbacks in CDBG funding. In the last decade, the total federal disbursement to cities and states has fallen 30 percent to $3.03 billion this year. Obama, who has said the funding should be more targeted so it is not as prone to misuse, is proposing cutting funding in fiscal year 2015 to $2.8 billion. In Akron, Mayor Don Plusquellic said CDBG funding has fallen by nearly half over the course of about 25 years from $11 million to $5.7 million. His staff estimates that, had funding stayed flat, it would be the equivalent of $20 million today, or roughly 10 percent of the city’s general fund budget.

    “I’m going to take a shot at my own president – he is wrong,” Plusquellic said. “He is dead wrong to cut this program to try to appease the right wing who want to cut out all support and all partnership with local government.”

    BY  | MARCH 18, 2014




    Wisconsin Utilizes Delayed Draw Term Loan.

    That’s some fancy financing, Bob.

    The latest municipal issuer brief from Municipal Market Advisors highlights a unique move by the state of Wisconsin designed to avoid the expected increase in interest rates in the coming year or so. Rather than waiting until next year to go to the municipal market and refinance a certain set of bonds, the state got a $278 million loan secured directly from a bank. In doing so, Wisconsin locks in today’s interest rates and can pay off bondholders next year with the proceeds.

    MMA notes that this type of refinancing tool, called a delayed draw term loan, may be something more issuers do to take advantage of today’s rates before they rise. But, because of its complexity and disclosure requirements, this will likely only appeal to large municipalities or states that are very accustomed to issuing bonds.




    Boulder Council Approves Use of Negotiated Bond Sales for Open Space.

    The Boulder City Council voted 6-3 late Tuesday to authorize the city manager to use negotiated bond sales rather than competitive bond sales when the city next sells open space bonds.

    This will be the first time the city has used the negotiated bond sale process since Boulder voters approved a charter amendment in November that allows for such sales. That charter amendment passed with 75 percent of the vote.Previously, the city charter required competitive bond sales.

    The charter amendment was sold to voters based on the idea that a new municipal utility without a track record— financial or otherwise — might see higher interest rates and relatively little interest in its revenue bonds if the utility had to sell them on the open market. A negotiated bond sale process would allow the city to “tell the story” behind the bonds and line up environmentally conscious investors in advance of the sale.

    A negotiated bond sale process also makes it easier for local investors to buy municipal bonds.

    Boulder Finance Director Bob Eichem said he gets calls from interested local investors every time the city sells open space bonds, but with a competitive process, bonds are usually bought first by large institutional investors.

    Council members Lisa Morzel, George Karakehian and Andrew Shoemaker voted no. They said negotiated bonds might make sense for a new bond like the municipal utility, but the city’s open space bonds have a good rating and traditionally get good rates on the market.

    “I totally get it with respect to municipalization where you’re telling a story,” Shoemaker said. “But the people in a position to buy bonds are wealthier people, and I don’t see giving an opportunity to more well-off people at the possible expense of not getting the best interest rate.”

    Eichem said more than 80 percent of municipal bonds nationwide are sold through a negotiated process, and the question of which process gets the best interest rates is hotly debated.

    Public finance experts interviewed by the Camera before the charter amendment vote said negotiated bond sales are generally overused, but would probably be appropriate for the municipal utility.

    Councilman Tim Plass said using them with the open space bonds gives the city a chance to “test the waters” and understand the process better before selling bonds for a municipal utility.

    By Erica Meltzer Camera Staff Writer

    POSTED:   03/18/2014 11:11:23 PM MDT



    Arizona's Pension Trust Sued After Refusing to Disclose Subpoena.

    Judicial Watch, a non-profit watchdog that promotes transparency, has sued the Arizona Public Safety Personnel Retirement System after the trust refused to release a copy of a federal grand-jury subpoena that is part of a criminal investigation into the pension system.

    “When government agencies, politicians and bureaucrats don’t want to turn over documents like the law requires, it’s safe to make the assumption that they have something to hide,” said Tom Fitton, president of the Washington, D.C.-based group.

    The suit, filed late last week in Maricopa County Superior Court, alleges the pension system violated the Arizona Public Records Law by “improperly withholding and failing to provide access to the requested record.” The system asserted the subpoena was not a public record, the lawsuit says.

    View Full Story from The Arizona Republic

    MARCH 18, 2014




    Rhode Island's Winding Road to Serious Pension Reform.

    If all the parties approve it, a recent agreement will preserve most of the benefits of a sweeping reform law.

    More than two years after the passage of landmark state legislation, Rhode Island’s pension-reform saga may finally be coming to an end. When governments wait too long to address looming pension troubles, they often end up boxed in by the need to save money on one side and prohibitions against diminishing current employees’ pensions on the other. But in this case, the final product has been worth the wait.

    The pension-reform legislation was enacted in November 2011. Public-employee unions filed a lawsuit challenging it the following year. That December, a state Superior Court judge ordered the sides into talks brokered by a federal mediator. The recent agreement reached by outgoing Gov. Lincoln Chaffee, state Treasurer Gina Raimondo (who is running for governor) and the unions is fair and preserves most of the savings provided by the 2011 legislation.

    The law provided that retirees would get cost of living adjustments (COLAs) just once every five years until the state pension fund has 80 percent of the money it needs to fund projected expenditures. It raised the retirement age for most state employees to the age at which they can begin to collect Social Security. And it scaled back the traditional defined-benefit portion of the pension plan while adding a defined-contribution element that requires all but public-safety employees to contribute 5 percent of salary to an individual retirement account, matched by a 1 percent employer contribution.

    Under the settlement, individuals who retired before June 30, 2012, would get a one-time 2 percent COLA. Going forward, COLAs would be awarded every fourth year (instead of every fifth under the original legislation) until state pensions are 80 percent funded. And COLAs would be calculated using a new formula based on both inflation and the pension fund’s investment returns.

    Another change from the 2011 law is that employees with 20-plus years of service would move out of the hybrid 401(k)-style pension plan and back into a traditional one, where the amount those workers contribute to the pension fund would increase. In some cases, the minimum retirement age would be lowered and benefits would accrue more quickly.

    The deal still has to be approved by retirees, current state workers and the legislature, and they should approve it without delay. If not for reform, Rhode Island’s unfunded liability would stand at an estimated $8.9 billion. Under the 2011 law, unfunded liability fell to $4.8 billion, and the settlement would increase it only to $5.05 billion.

    Had the lawsuit continued, there is always the chance that the public-employee unions would have prevailed, a result that the Providence Journal editorialized would have been a “catastrophe” from which there would be “little hope of recovery in our lifetimes.”

    Credit rating agencies seem to agree. Moody’s noted that the deal only modestly reduces the savings from reform and said that settling the lawsuit removes a lingering source of fiscal uncertainty. It termed the agreement “credit positive,” which means it would help the state maintain or improve its bond rating.

    Rhode Island is only the latest state or local government to discover just how thorny it gets if you wait too long before moving to fix public-employee pension problems. But in the end the state and its employees and retirees were lucky. Even though it took more than two years, it seems likely that the Ocean State will indeed avert a catastrophe.

    BY  | MARCH 5, 2014



    SEC Said Examining Hidden Electronic Bond Trading Prices.

    The practice of dealers showing clients different prices for the same securities on electronic bond-trading platforms is drawing the scrutiny of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, which is concerned that smaller investors are being penalized.

    SEC regulators want to understand why brokers sometimes block their rivals and clients from seeing some of their prices for municipal, corporate and other bonds, according to a person with direct knowledge of the inquiry. They’re examining whether being able to turn quotes on and off allows market manipulation, and whether smaller buyers are given worse prices, the person said.

    The probe underscores the growing concern that the infrastructure of the U.S. bond market hasn’t kept pace with a 23 percent expansion in the past six years, with much of the trading still conducted through telephone conversations and e-mails. The SEC is separately looking into the way the biggest banks allocate corporate-bond offerings and whether they give preferential treatment to certain clients.

    “There’s a club-within-a-club sort of atmosphere people started to get very concerned about,” said Robert Smith, chief investment officer at Austin, Texas-based Sage Advisory Services Ltd., which oversees about $10.5 billion. “In essence, you could start to see two different prices for the same security.”

    The inquiry into alternative trading systems has focused on those that cater to individual investors as well as dealers trading among themselves, according to the person, who asked not to be identified because the examination isn’t public.

    Increased Trading

    The probe is an attempt to get more information, rather than build a case for an enforcement action, and is being conducted by the Office of Compliance Inspections and Examinations wing of the SEC, according to the person familiar with the matter.

    Even if alternative trading systems “don’t account for a majority of the trading, they can be a source of information, and there’s the potential for filters to be used in a manner that would distort the market,” Kevin Goodman, national associate director of the broker-dealer examination program at the division, said in a telephone interview.

    U.S. investment firms predict that 30 percent of corporate-bond trading will occur electronically by 2015, up from 14 percent of investment-grade notes in 2012, according to an August 2013 report by Greenwich Associates and McKinsey & Co. As much as 50 percent of municipal trades already may occur electronically, according to a comment letter to the SEC last year from trade-system operator TMC Bonds LLC.

    Promoting Transparency

    “We want to understand how we can promote more transparency” and how electronic trading is “either contributing or not contributing to transparency,” said Goodman, who declined to confirm the existence of any examinations.

    The SEC has contacted providers including Tradeweb Markets LLC and TMC Bonds, seeking information about the systems they manage that allow dealers to buy and sell debt to one another and to investors, according to two people with direct knowledge of the matter who asked not to be identified because the conversations were private.

    Bloomberg LP, the parent of Bloomberg News, competes with Tradeweb in some businesses, including bond trading with institutional investors. Bloomberg’s trading platforms aren’t geared toward individual clients.

    Blocking Rivals

    There are reasons some electronic systems enable bond dealers to block rivals from seeing their price quotes, such as if they have found a firm consistently fails to stand by its offers or provides off-market values, said Thomas Vales, chief executive officer of TMC Bonds in New York, who confirmed he’d discussed the issue with the SEC.

    Clayton McGratty, a Tradeweb spokesman, declined to comment.

    Banks have increasingly turned to electronic systems to sell bonds on behalf of their clients as a way of aggregating a greater number of bids. That’s become more appealing as it’s become more expensive for dealers to use their own money to make markets because of higher regulatory capital requirements.

    “There’s a lot of interest in the market given the way it’s grown,” the SEC’s Goodman said.

    New Issues

    Rules issued in 2010 by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision and the Dodd-Frank Act passed by Congress prompted Wall Street dealers to cut their inventories of corporate securities by 76 percent from the 2007 peak through last March, when the Federal Reserve changed the way it reported the data.

    At the same time, the size of the U.S. bond market has swelled to $39.9 trillion from $33.6 trillion in 2008 as the Fed held borrowing costs near zero and bought trillions of dollars of Treasuries and mortgage debt, according to data from the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association.

    While the amount of debt outstanding has soared, trading volumes have failed to keep pace, prompting investors to hold onto notes rather than trade more actively and risk not being able to get the securities back. The scarcity of available bonds has led to increased demand from buyers for a slice of new corporate issues.

    SEC Priorities

    Regulators have been seeking more information about how the biggest banks decide to distribute the new bonds. Goldman Sachs Group Inc.’s annual filing last month added “allocations of and trading in fixed-income securities” to a list of activities at the New York-based firm that are subject to open regulatory scrutiny.

    One of the SEC’s priorities this year is to evaluate “factors that may impact the quality of execution in the fixed-income market,” including market structure and the use of alternative trading systems, it said in a January statement.

    “In the wake of the credit crisis, investors have obviously had a greater focus on fixed income,” said Will Rhode, director of fixed-income research at Tabb Group LLC. “There’s a question of how retail investors access this market.”

    By Lisa Abramowicz  Mar 21, 2014 7:31 AM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Lisa Abramowicz in New York at[email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Shannon D. Harrington at[email protected] Caroline Salas Gage




    California Passage of Tax Measures Growing, Analyst Says.

    California voters are approving tax increases and bond measures more frequently because of a lower bar for passage, rather than growing support for the issues, the state’s Legislative Analyst’s Office said.

    Almost two-thirds of tax measures won passage in 2012, compared with fewer than half in 1998, the office said yesterday in a report. Voters granted 80 percent of bond measures in 2012, compared with 58 percent in 1998, the independent fiscal agency said.

    California municipalities have limited ability to boost revenue. They can’t impose higher taxes without going to voters, and the state caps real-estate levies to 1 percent of a property’s most-recent sales price. The collapse of the housing market eroded tax dollars for many cities in the wake of the recession and left many grappling with mounting pension and retiree health-care costs.

    The change wasn’t due to “an increase in voter support for taxes, because the average percent of electors voting yes for tax measures was fairly flat during this period,” according to the report.

    The report found that voters were presented with fewer so-called special taxes, such as those levied on property, which require two-thirds approval, and instead were offered more general tax measures, which aren’t dedicated to a specific purpose and require only a simple majority for passage.

    The increase in bond approvals followed a change in state law that reduced the voter-approval threshold for school facility bonds from two-thirds to 55 percent, the report said.

    By Alison Vekshin  Mar 20, 2014 7:05 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Alison Vekshin in San Francisco at [email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Pete Young, Michael Shepard




    Wisconsin Lured by Debt Paydown Readies Asset Sales: Muni Credit.

    Wisconsin may sell heating plants and land to pay down debt. Thirty-two North Carolina cities are deciding whether to unload stakes in power stations. Philadelphia wants to cash in on its gas works to bolster its pension fund.

    Almost five years after the longest recession since the 1930s, U.S. states and localities are wringing money from their assets as officials seek alternatives to tax increases and spending cuts for constituents weary of shouldering those burdens.

    “Cities are looking at some tough choices, particularly regarding pensions, which was a big issue for Philadelphia,” said Naomi Richman, a managing director in New York at Moody’s Investors Service. “If you have an asset that you can find a way to monetize, that might be a more attractive option.”

    Even as an expanding economy fuels a fiscal turnaround for states and cities, officials have limited resources to meet the costs of pensions, health care and public works. They’re also reluctant to borrow. The municipal-bond market has been contracting since 2010 as localities pare sales of debt to finance projects, according to the Federal Reserve.

    Deals Done

    Municipalities have already closed deals. Allentown, Pennsylvania, leased its water and sewer services last year for an upfront payment covering pensions. The Pennsylvania capital of Harrisburg leased its parking system and sold its incinerator in December to satisfy creditors and return to solvency. Indianapolis leased its parking system in 2010.

    With municipal-debt yields close to five-decade lows, local governments will find demand for the assets, said John Loffredo, co-head of Princeton, New Jersey-based MacKay Municipal Managers.

    “You have good revenue streams in a low interest-rate environment that makes these assets very attractive to private investors,” said Loffredo, whose firm oversees $7.5 billion of munis. “Politically you lose control, but professional management is a better process for a lot of cities and towns, especially if it helps bring in assets to offset other liabilities on the balance sheets.”

    Wisconsin’s List

    In Wisconsin, officials are compiling a list of state properties to sell, including heating plants, said Stephanie Marquis, a spokeswoman for the Department of Administration. Changing federal environmental regulations have increased the risk of operating aging facilities, she said.

    “This is the time to explore the potential for selling these plants to an entity that can better mitigate these risks through economies of scale and scope, while still providing reliable, economic energy,” Marquis said in an e-mail.

    Officials may also entertain offers for land around a state complex in Madison, she said.

    Proceeds would go toward retiring bonds, she said. Wisconsin has $13.7 billion in debt as of June, a financial statement shows.

    Debt of Wisconsin issuers has gained 3.1 percent this year, trailing the broader $3.7 trillion municipal market’s 3.4 percent advance, according to S&P Dow Jones Indices. The state outperformed the rest of the market in 2013.

    In eastern North Carolina, the burden for some cities is electricity rates. Following the energy crisis of the 1970s, 32 cities and towns bought shares of power plants to ensure their supply, through a non-profit called North Carolina Eastern Municipal Power Agency. As a result, they assumed some of the debt of the plants, which totals $1.87 billion.

    Debt’s Effect

    Duke Energy Progress (DUK) is negotiating to buy the stakes, said Jeff Brooks, a company spokesman. The utility is a unit of Charlotte-based Duke Energy Corp., which serves 7.2 million U.S. customers.

    The process could take 12 to 24 months, said Rebecca Agner, a spokeswoman for the Raleigh-based authority. All the municipalities must agree to sell.

    Selling power assets could reduce rates by settling the debt that drives them higher, said Tony Sears, the city manager of Kinston. Residents’ bills are 26 percent more than neighbors across the municipal line.

    “It’s about finding financial relief for our customers,” said Sears. “That’s the driving force.”

    Philly Evidence

    Demand for such deals was evident in UIL Holdings Corp. (UIL)’s $1.86 billion offer this month for Philadelphia’s Gas Works, the nation’s largest municipally owned gas utility. The sale must be approved by city council and state regulators.

    After paying obligations, the city would have at least $420 million to deposit into the pension fund. That would boost its funding level to 77 percent by 2030, from 48 percent now, said Kirk Dorn, a senior director at Ceisler Media, a public-relations firm hired by Philadelphia.

    For UIL, based in New HavenConnecticut, the deal would add to cash flow and give it customers near the booming Marcellus and Utica gas-shale formations, Chief Executive Officer James Torgerson told analysts on March 3.

    Few local governments have such assets to dispose of, said Paul Mansour, head of municipal research at Hartford, Connecticut-based Conning.

    “The critical factor is that there’s not that many facilities that you can lose or sell that make a big enough difference,” said Mansour, whose company oversees about $9 billion of munis.

    Chicago Ripple

    Public officials have also balked at such deals after Chicago in 2008 agreed to a 75-year parking-meter lease for an upfront sum amounting to about a 10th of the potential profit.

    The perception of that deal “has slowed a lot of people down” from similar moves, Stephanie Miner, mayor of Syracuse, New York, said in an interview.

    Harrisburg is one city that studied the Chicago transaction. William B. Lynch, Harrisburg’s former state-named receiver, said its parking lease gives a share of the profits.

    Paul Dabbar, managing director of global mergers and acquisitions at JPMorgan Chase & Co., Philadelphia’s broker on the sale of its gas works, said publicly traded utilities are interested in municipal systems offering stable, regulated cash payments. The increase in infrastructure funds investing in such assets is also fueling demand, he said.

    “It will continue as long as the current situation for the average municipal and state entity exists in terms of their fiscal situation, as well as if the cost of capital and availability of infrastructure capital continues to be robust,” New York-based Dabbar said of the interest in public systems.

    “We don’t see that changing to the negative on either one of those drivers anytime soon.”

    By Romy Varghese  Mar 20, 2014 5:01 PM PT

    To contact the reporter on this story: Romy Varghese in Philadelphia at [email protected]

    To contact the editors responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]Mark Tannenbaum, Alan Goldstein




    Bond Insurer Seeks to Challenge Detroit Suit.

    Financial Guarantee Insurance Accuses City of Revising Facts Behind Original Deal

    DETROIT—A bond insurer on Monday sought to intervene in a federal lawsuit filed by the bankrupt city of Detroit to nullify an agreement to pay $1.4 billion in pension-related debt.”The City’s Complaint is baseless, particularly in light of the contractual obligations the City has acknowledged and complied with over the last nine years,” attorneys for Financial Guarantee Insurance Co. wrote in court filings Monday.

    If the legal challenge is successful, it could set back, if not derail, an aggressive schedule pushed by the city and approved by U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes to resolve the case as soon as this summer. Detroit became the largest city in U.S. history to file for Chapter 9 municipal bankruptcy protection in July, with an estimated $18 billion in long-term obligations.

    The city recently filed its debt-cutting plan and Judge Rhodes tentatively scheduled court hearings on the plan starting in mid-July. In January, after months of fruitless negotiations, the city sued service corporations and city-created trusts over the pension-related debt amassed in the mid-2000s, citing possible fraud in the original agreements.

    In Monday’s filing, Financial Guaranty argued that the original deal between the city and so-called service corporations provided a financial reprieve for the cash-poor city and was a “good bargain” because its pension payments were much smaller than they would have been without any agreement.

    Insurers, including FGIC, could be on the hook for a massive payout for debtholders if the city’s suit is successful. The bond insurer accused the city of turning a “crooked eye to history” for revising the facts behind the original agreement and falsely claiming it was “the innocent victim of fraud,” court papers said.

    FGIC warned that the city’s “opportunism and revisionist history have broad repercussions, not the least of which being the impact on the funded status of the City’s Retirement Systems,” which could benefit them unjustly. Any disproportionate windfall for the city’s roughly 23,000 city retirees could threaten the city’s ability to get its debt-cutting plan approved with the consent of other creditors and the court, according to the insurer.

    By

    MATTHEW DOLAN

    CONNECT

    March 18, 2014 12:24 a.m. ET



    Bond Insurer Files Suit Against Detroit in Setback for Bankruptcy Plan.

    A bond insurer on Monday struck a blow against Detroit’s proposal to exit bankruptcy, arguing in a new lawsuit that Detroit’s approach would illegally discriminate against the city’s third-biggest group of creditors — the investors who provided $1.4 billion for its workers’ pensions nearly a decade ago.

    Those investors bought “certificates of participation,” which were the first securities Detroit defaulted on as it prepared to file for bankruptcy last summer. The city now contends that the 2005 borrowing was a “sham transaction” and is proposing to give the investors who bought into it one of the lowest recovery rates in its bankruptcy.

    The insurer, the Financial Guaranty Insurance Company, said in its lawsuit that Detroit “seeks to turn a crooked eye to history.” It said the city had benefited greatly from the transaction but was now pretending to be “the innocent victim of fraud perpetrated on a grand scale.”

    The new lawsuit could have far-reaching consequences. It might lead to a bigger recovery for the investors who hold the certificates and smaller losses for Financial Guaranty and another insurer, Syncora, which insured them. But it might also lead to a fight to claw back the $1.4 billion from the city pension system, which would throw a wrench into Detroit’s efforts to cushion its workers and retirees from some of the pain as it attempts to resolve its outsized debts.

    The retirees, current and future, make up Detroit’s biggest and second-biggest unsecured creditors, first as participants in the city’s retiree health plan, which is entirely unfunded, and second as participants of its pension plan, which is partly funded. (They are secured creditors to the extent the benefits are funded.) Although they are in the same general creditor class as the insurers, they stand to receive significantly better recoveries under Detroit’s proposal to exit bankruptcy, called the plan of adjustment.

    “The city’s opportunism and revisionist history have broad repercussions, not the least of which being the impact on the funded status of the city’s retirement systems,” Financial Guaranty said in its suit. It said the municipal pension system would “be subject to claims of unjust enrichment” if Detroit pursued its plan of debt adjustment unchanged.

    “This, in turn, raises significant questions about the city’s future, including the feasibility of its existing, proposed Chapter 9 plan,” the insurer said.

    The suit, filed in United States Bankruptcy Court for the Eastern District of Michigan, responds primarily to a lawsuit that Detroit itself filed in late January, when it first argued that its 2005 pension transaction was a sham. Detroit said that it already had as much debt as it was legally allowed to carry in 2005 and therefore structured the borrowing in a needlessly complicated way to circumvent the ceiling. Detroit added that it embarked on the transaction “at the prompting of investment banks that would profit handsomely from the transaction.”

    In its suit, Detroit argued that the borrowing should be considered “void ab initio,” meaning it should be treated as if it never happened, and that none of the obligations it created are enforceable.

    When it issued its plan of adjustment, Detroit built upon the idea that the 2005 transaction was null and void: It said that the investors who bought the certificates of participation had no valid claim in the bankruptcy. But to bring about a settlement more quickly, Detroit said it was willing to accept 40 percent of the certificate holders’ claims if they would vote in favor of the overall plan of adjustment. If Detroit is able to persuade one impaired creditor to vote in favor of its plan of adjustment, it can try to have the judge overseeing the case, Steven W. Rhodes of United States Bankruptcy Court for the Eastern District of Michigan, impose the plan on everybody else.

    Financial Guaranty’s lawsuit challenges the notion that the 2005 borrowing was illegal. The insurer says that it was concerned about Detroit’s total indebtedness when it was first approached to insure the certificates, so it sought legal opinions from the city, the city’s financial advisers and even the state government. All of them told the insurer that the transaction was legal, binding and enforceable and that it would not put Detroit in violation of its legal debt limit.

    Financial Guaranty is asking Judge Rhodes to dismiss Detroit’s case against the 2005 transaction and to bar Detroit from contending that the 2005 debt was invalid and does not have to be repaid. It also says its bankruptcy claim should be honored in full.

    Moreover, Financial Guaranty argues that if Judge Rhodes disagrees and ultimately finds that the 2005 borrowing was illegal, then he should also issue a ruling that Detroit fraudulently induced the insurer to issue a policy and that Detroit and its pension system were unjustly enriched.

    “The retirement systems should disgorge all amounts or benefits that they received as a result of the pension funding transactions,” the lawsuit said. It says the money should be used to make restitution to all of the certificate holders and insurers.

    In addition to the certificates of participation, the borrowing gave rise to some derivatives contracts, called interest-rate swaps, but Detroit has continued to pay those, even though it has defaulted on the related debt certificates. Its counterparties on the swaps are UBS and Bank of America.

    The swap contracts are written in a way that makes them almost impossible to terminate without paying large fees to the counterparties. Detroit has already made several proposals to pay its way out of the swaps, but its initial proposals — first to pay the banks about $230 million, and then $165 million — were rejected by Judge Rhodes. He said that was too much money for a bankrupt city to pay.

    In rejecting Detroit’s proposal to pay the two banks $165 million, Judge Rhodes said that Detroit had a habit of coming to hasty financial decisions that cost its residents too much, and ordered the city and the banks to go back and negotiate a lower termination fee. He also said he had doubts about the legality of the 2005 transaction, and thought that if Detroit were to sue, its lawsuit might succeed.

    Although Judge Rhodes did not give the city specific instructions for such a lawsuit, the city soon filed one, apparently for use as leverage in its negotiations with the two banks.

    Detroit and the two banks have agreed on a new total swap termination fee of about $85 million. The banks have also said they would vote in favor of Detroit’s overall plan of adjustment if those terms are approved. They are now waiting to see whether Judge Rhodes accepts this approach.

    By MARY WILLIAMS WALSH



    NYT: Determining the Markup on Municipal Bonds.

    Most of the market news you hear tends to be about stocks, but bonds are just as useful a tool for most investment portfolios. One type in particular, the municipal, or “muni” bond, remains very popular. These bonds are issued by local governments, they’re often tax-exempt and they can be relatively low risk. But muni bonds come with a catch: You may be entering a dark and dangerous world when you go through the process of buying one.

    Part of that world includes what the industry refers to as a markup. In the simplest terms, when brokers sell muni bonds to clients, they have the option of charging the client more than the original price. It’s the equivalent of buying at wholesale and selling at retail, and it’s not that much different from what you see when you walk into the grocery store. The problem is that it’s almost impossible to determine the markup, and it can vary from transaction to transaction.

    The price you pay for the bond, including the markup, has a direct impact on the return you’ll earn as the owner of the bond. While markups are common, it isn’t always clear how much they tend to be. A recent Wall Street Journal story tried to shed some light on this and found that “individual investors trading $100,000 in bonds of a municipality, such as Washington State, in December paid brokers an average ‘spread’ [or markup] of 1.73 percent, or $1,730.” Given that these bonds don’t generate huge returns, the markup could potentially absorb an entire year’s interest.

    I saw the sales process firsthand when I worked for a large brokerage firm in the mid-1990s. During training, I often asked grizzled veterans what advice they had for a rookie. I was particularly curious about how we were supposed to decide which bonds to buy for a client’s portfolio.

    The answer I got more than once was something like, “Go to the list of bonds we keep in inventory and see which one pays you the most.” So instead of seeing which bond would be best for the client, I was supposed to figure out which one had the highest markup and would deliver the highest compensation for me and the firm. I could actually adjust my commission up or down without the client really having a clue.

    There were limits to how much I could charge without raising eyebrows, but the federal rules only required that markups be “fair and reasonable,” whatever that means. I couldn’t find any other guidelines to help me decide what to charge one client versus another.

    I also discovered that most prospective clients didn’t know the markup existed. They said “their guy” didn’t charge them anything to buy bonds. To hear these clients tell it, the brokerage industry was suddenly filled with nonprofits. Even if people had known about the markup issue, they had no way of verifying what they were told. The bond market was (and is) that opaque.

    Most of the people I’ve worked with in the industry since then have managed this conflict by being transparent. They’ve told clients what they get paid and agree on what everyone thinks is fair, but the process is still filled with conflicts. Like Warren Buffett said, “Never ask your barber if you need a haircut.” It’s pretty clear who the answer will favor.

    Based on what I’ve just outlined, it might be tempting to swear off muni bonds. But instead of never buying a muni again, I suggest you shine some light on the subject. Now that you know markups exist, you can start a conversation with your broker or adviser. Start by asking questions that help you understand what and how you’re paying for a transaction or advice.

    You can go a step further and ask, “Did your firm mark up this bond before you sold it to me?” Again, it’s about transparency, not right or wrong. You need to be in on the discussion about what’s fair and reasonable. We all understand that conflicts exist, but we need to make sure they’re out in the open.

    Transparent advisers will have no problem with specific, pointed questions, and asking them gives you the chance to level the playing field a bit. For now, the world of muni bonds may still be opaque, but it’s your money, and you have the right to know where it goes.




    Determining the Markup on Municipal Bonds.

    Most of the market news you hear tends to be about stocks, but bonds are just as useful a tool for most investment portfolios. One type in particular, the municipal, or “muni” bond, remains very popular. These bonds are issued by local governments, they’re often tax-exempt and they can be relatively low risk. But muni bonds come with a catch: You may be entering a dark and dangerous world when you go through the process of buying one.
    Part of that world includes what the industry refers to as a markup. In the simplest terms, when brokers sell muni bonds to clients, they have the option of charging the client more than the original price. It’s the equivalent of buying at wholesale and selling at retail, and it’s not that much different from what you see when you walk into the grocery store. The problem is that it’s almost impossible to determine the markup, and it can vary from transaction to transaction.

    The price you pay for the bond, including the markup, has a direct impact on the return you’ll earn as the owner of the bond. While markups are common, it isn’t always clear how much they tend to be. A recent Wall Street Journal story tried to shed some light on this and found that “individual investors trading $100,000 in bonds of a municipality, such as Washington State, in December paid brokers an average ‘spread’ [or markup] of 1.73 percent, or $1,730.” Given that these bonds don’t generate huge returns, the markup could potentially absorb an entire year’s interest.
    I saw the sales process firsthand when I worked for a large brokerage firm in the mid-1990s. During training, I often asked grizzled veterans what advice they had for a rookie. I was particularly curious about how we were supposed to decide which bonds to buy for a client’s portfolio.

    The answer I got more than once was something like, “Go to the list of bonds we keep in inventory and see which one pays you the most.” So instead of seeing which bond would be best for the client, I was supposed to figure out which one had the highest markup and would deliver the highest compensation for me and the firm. I could actually adjust my commission up or down without the client really having a clue.

    There were limits to how much I could charge without raising eyebrows, but the federal rules only required that markups be “fair and reasonable,” whatever that means. I couldn’t find any other guidelines to help me decide what to charge one client versus another.

    I also discovered that most prospective clients didn’t know the markup existed. They said “their guy” didn’t charge them anything to buy bonds. To hear these clients tell it, the brokerage industry was suddenly filled with nonprofits. Even if people had known about the markup issue, they had no way of verifying what they were told. The bond market was (and is) that opaque.

    Most of the people I’ve worked with in the industry since then have managed this conflict by being transparent. They’ve told clients what they get paid and agree on what everyone thinks is fair, but the process is still filled with conflicts. Like Warren Buffett said, “Never ask your barber if you need a haircut.” It’s pretty clear who the answer will favor.

    Based on what I’ve just outlined, it might be tempting to swear off muni bonds. But instead of never buying a muni again, I suggest you shine some light on the subject. Now that you know markups exist, you can start a conversation with your broker or adviser. Start by asking questions that help you understand what and how you’re paying for a transaction or advice.

    By  




    WSJ: Massachusetts Streamlines Bond Sales for Smaller Investors.

    Massachusetts is making it easier for individual investors to buy new municipal bonds.

    In a move being billed as the first of its kind in the $3.7 trillion municipal-bond market, the commonwealth will begin selling bonds to mom-and-pop buyers for up to two weeks each month. Massachusetts hopes the new sales program, which it calls MassDirect Notes, will increase demand for its debt and lower its borrowing costs.The move comes amid repeated calls from federal regulators to put individual investors, who often buy municipal bonds because the interest is typically exempt from income taxes, on a more level playing field with large institutional buyers, like pension funds, insurance companies or even hedge funds.Some investors have complained that bankers allocate more bonds to larger accounts during bond sales, which can lead to more profit if the new bonds rise in price after trading begins. In a $3.5 billion Puerto Rico bond sale this week, which saw bond prices rise when trading began, some fund managers said they received only between 10% and 50% of their orders. The Securities and Exchange Commission recently asked some banks for information about how they allocate bonds among buyers during corporate bond sales.

    Rob Williams, director of fixed income at Charles Schwab & Co., said individual investors are now paying more attention to the financial health of municipalities. Investors can no longer count on bond insurers to guarantee repayment of municipal debt, given that the firms were downgraded in the aftermath of the financial crisis. Recent economic troubles in places like Puerto Rico and Detroit have also spooked some buyers.

    “Retail investors want to know what they’re buying,” Mr. Williams said, noting that Schwab recently extended an agreement with J.P. Morgan Chase JPM -1.08% & Co. that gives its retail customers access to new bonds underwritten by the bank. “They want to have access, and they want to make sure they’re getting the best deal.”

    Usually, municipalities might sell bonds only a few times a year, and bonds are typically only available to be bought by individual investors during a one-day-long period. But under the Massachusetts program, set to begin on Monday, the bonds will be sold on a rolling basis, meaning investors can place orders for the debt over an entire week. The weeklong sales could take place twice each month, with bonds of different maturities being sold each week.

    Massachusetts said it is modeling its program after TreasuryDirect, which allows individual investors to buy U.S. Treasury securities online directly from the government. Officials also took inspiration from companies like Duke Energy Corp. and General Electric Co., which run similar programs that allow individual investors to buy corporate debt directly from the firms, also on a rolling basis.

    Mom-and-pop investors looking for new Massachusetts debt still will have to go through their investment adviser. Orders will be placed through TMC Bonds, an online-trading platform, which has been retained by Citigroup Inc., the bank underwriting the debt.

    The bonds will be sold on a first-come, first-serve basis, eliminating any uncertainty over the allocation process, with same-day order confirmation, unlike a traditional municipal-bond sale, in which it might take several days. The minimum order size will be $5,000 and the maximum order size will be $500,000.

    During the sale, the state will post prices on the bonds daily to its website and to Twitter, and will also adjust the prices based on market conditions, which it hopes will help it save money. Massachusetts’ borrowing costs are already relatively low compared with the municipal market, in part because it has the second-highest rating available, double-A-plus. In the past, about 30% to 40% of its new bonds were sold to individual investors.

    To kick off the program, the state has scheduled $250 million of sales in the next five months. Treasurer Steven Grossman declined to give an estimate for how much it could ultimately sell, or save, through the program, saying officials would have a better idea over the next few months. The new sale format “is going to create a far more 21st-century customer experience than ever before,” Mr. Grossman said. “I think we’re really trying to create a win-win: Make it easy for customers to do business with us and give the [state] an opportunity to potentially save money.”

    Jay Lebed, vice president at Boston Investment Advisers, which oversees about $100 million for individual investors, said his firm would be watching to see how the new program unfolds. He said his firm doesn’t buy many new bonds, in part because clients don’t always have money available when bonds are being sold and because there are good deals to be had in the secondary market.

    “Historically, the bond market hasn’t been particularly efficient, so things that make it more efficient and allow for more direct investing in the long run can be beneficial,” Mr. Lebed said.

    By

    MIKE CHERNEY
    Updated March 13, 2014 6:51 p.m. ET

    —Andrew Ackerman contributed to this article.

    Write to Mike Cherney at [email protected]




    WSJ: How Retail Bond Investors Can Get Info the Pros Won't Share.

    When Robert Kane sold his cyber-security business ten years ago, he wanted to put some of his new cash in municipal bonds. He went looking for an online resource to analyze potential investments, but “there was just nothing out there,” he says.

    So he built his own.

    Mr. Kane’s website, Bondview.com, now provides free bond-value estimates and portfolio monitoring alerts tailored to retail investors. Along with individuals, he says that White House officials, the SEC and major banks like Morgan StanleyMS -0.48% also use the site.

    Sites like Bondview are helping meet a challenge facing retail bond investors. Individuals own the lion’s share of municipal bonds, but they still struggle to get basic information on securities they want to trade, and pay higher commissions as a result.

    The websites are increasing in popularity in part because most brokers won’t disclose to retail clients the prevailing bids and asks on even the most-liquid municipal bonds. And the quality and quantity of financial reporting by municipal borrowers remains spotty, making it hard for non-professional bond buyers to discern the financial health of bonds they own.

    Also helping to level the playing field: MuniAxis Lebenthal LLC, the first electronic auction platform for municipal bonds, which opened in December and has since facilitated 1,700 trades worth $70 million. Like an eBay for bonds, MuniAxis lets users see all bonds offered as well as outstanding bids. But for now, it’s only available to fund managers and financial advisers who advise individual investors.

    “What we’re doing is trying to give full information to all participants at the same time,” says Charlie Moore, chief executive at Muniaxis. Eventually he plans to open the trading site to retail investors directly, but that will require regulatory clearance, Mr. Moore says.

    The Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board, one of three regulators supervising the municipal market, maintains an online history of trading prices, but few retail investors know the database exists or how to use it to vet dealer quotes. The self-regulatory organization overhauled its website in January to make it more user-friendly and is in the planning stages of a new platform to show investors quotes and prices in real time, an MSRB spokeswoman said.

    To help provide more information about the credit quality of bond issuers, the MSRB website also warehouses financial reports by municipal borrowers, but trawling through the reports to vet investments is difficult, in part because reporting is not standardized.

    Individual investors are turning to the budding online offerings to help make their trades.

    Peter Eisner, a retired lawyer in Tucson, Ariz. says he uses Bondview to “get analysis as to what is a fair price that helps me decide whether to buy a bond.” He uses the time he saves through the website to practice his twin passions, whitewater kayaking and sculpture. “That’s why Bondview is of value to me, it’s a great way to get a quick view of my portfolio and to check out new bonds.”




    Moody's: Detroit GO Litigation Unlikely to Have National Legal Implications for GO Debt.

    New York, March 11, 2014 — The bankruptcy litigation surrounding Detroit’s general obligation bonds is unlikely to have a broad legal impact on the meaning of the GO pledges in bonds nationwide, says Moody’s Investors Service in a new report. Moody’s notes the Detroit parties may reach a settlement, the outcome of the Detroit litigation is unclear, and any bankruptcy court ruling would not be binding in other jurisdictions.

    “Definitive statements about how Detroit’s treatment of GOs would reshape the municipal finance landscape are premature,” says Analyst Dan Seymour in the report “All GO Pledges Are Not Created Equal: Detroit Case Unlikely to Set National Precedent.”

    Under dispute is whether Detroit’s unlimited tax GO debt is secured or unsecured, a key distinction in the federal Bankruptcy Code. The city wants to treat all its GO debt as unsecured, proposing a 20% recovery for GO bondholders that is significantly lower than the historical average on defaulted GO debt.

    The parties can still reach a settlement with terms that depart from the city’s proposal. Whether Detroit wins or loses the case, it would probably be appealed.

    “The ultimate treatment of Detroit’s GO pledge, once litigated, could turn out quite differently from what the city proposed,” says Moody’s Seymour.

    Regardless of the outcome, the Detroit case will not provide broad clarity on the meaning of the GO pledge for three reasons: GO pledges vary widely across the US, few governments test their GO pledges because so few ever become distressed, and if there is a ruling unfavorable to bondholders, it will not be binding in other jurisdictions. Fundamental economic and financial strength, as Moody’s discusses in its recently published GO rating methodology, will remain the primary drivers of municipal credit.

    The Detroit case, however, is likely to guide the interpretation of GO debt for Michigan local governments in bankruptcy, an important outcome given the large number of distressed local governments in the state. The outcome will probably influence court cases outside Michigan as well, given the infrequency of litigation about GO debt.

    It will also likely affect issuer and investor behavior inside and outside Michigan.

    For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report at:

    https://www.moodys.com/research/All-GO-Pledges-Are-Not-Created-Equal-Detroit-Case-Unlikely–PBM_PBM165551.




    BDA Commentary: A Wrong-Headed Approach to Addressing the Nation's Infrastructure Needs.

    BDA’s CEO Michael Nicholas writes a commentary in The Bond Buyer regarding the latest tax policies in Washington.

    March 12 – “One of these things does not belong” is a catchy slogan — and it comes to mind when looking at the latest tax policy ideas coming from Washington. The proposal by House Ways and Means Committee Chairman Dave Camp, R-Mich., puts a 10% surtax on tax-exempt bond interest for high-earners, throwing municipal bonds into the mix with other tax deductions and exemptions on which these earners would be taxed. One week later, the Administration — despite a large, united, multi-year effort from local elected officials, municipal market professionals and citizens to explain the dangers of tarnishing the tax exemption — repeated its call for a 28% limit on the exemption in its latest budget proposal. Simply put, both of these proposals throw apples and oranges together into a blender to reach a pre-determined budget or revenue target.

    But one of these things does not belong in the blender: the municipal bond tax exemption. The exemption is not a result of the growth of a tax code designed to induce or reduce certain behaviors. Rather, it is the foundation for the flow of capital in a $3.7 trillion dollar market required to efficiently finance the nation’s infrastructure. Additionally, the exemption is part of the nation’s original, 100-year old tax code, formalizing a doctrine of reciprocal tax immunity. America is defined by the reservation of state sovereign rights under the 10th Amendment to the Constitution. Accordingly it was determined that the state and local governments would not tax the federal government, and the federal government would not tax state and local governments. State and local decision makers would be afforded local control, and tax-exempt bonds would form the basis for raising capital.

    Not all deductions and exemptions are created equally. It is clear to the State and local governments that issue municipal bonds and other industry participants that subjecting these bonds to income tax, whether in whole or in part, will increase interest rates paid by the State and local government borrowers-a partially tax-exempt bond is simply not as valuable as a tax-exempt bond. Unlike the other deductions and exemptions, in this case the tax impact is on the governmental borrowers, not the high the higher earners. Undermining the municipal tax exemption translates to increased costs to build roads, schools and bridges, airports, ports and affordable housing. Both the Camp surtax and the Administration’s 28% limit would increase infrastructure costs by at least 15% — at a time that new and improved infrastructure needs, by all accounts, are not being met. In fact, the American Society of Civil Engineers has given the U.S. a D+ on the condition and performance of aging public infrastructure, and estimates the investment needed by 2020 at $3.6 trillion. An increase in infrastructure costs would simply lead to less infrastructure investment, hastening this decline.

    Every citizen will pay more, whether in terms of higher local taxes to make up for increased borrowing costs or failing infrastructure that reduces the nation’s competitiveness. Municipal bond investors in all tax brackets will either demand higher interest rates on tax-exempt bonds or abandon tax-exempt bonds as an investment vehicle.

    Policymakers have acknowledged this need for greater spending on infrastructure, but rather than focusing on preserving the “bread and butter” of the municipal bond market, they have recently turned to a discussion of infrastructure banks to address the nation’s needs. But to put these new bureaucracies that would result in perspective, past experience shows these federal creations can’t even begin to cover a fraction of a $3.6 trillion need that touches highly diverse priorities.

    The U.S. simply cannot afford to bear the burden of undercutting tax-exempt municipal bonds — the lifeblood of infrastructure and capital improvement financing — at a time that basic infrastructure needs are not being met.

    In 2012, the Bond Dealers of America united with state and local governments to develop information for policymakers regarding the municipal bond market and the purpose and role of its tax exemption, helping form a coalition known as Municipal Bonds for America. Led by Columbia, South Carolina Mayor Steve Benjamin, the coalition is working continuously to ensure policymakers know the power and value of tax-exempt municipal bonds. Recent proposals show the work of this group is only beginning, and I would offer that for municipal market professionals and local elected officials looking to engage on this issue, membership is free and growing, and you can sign on — and sign a petition to preserve the tax-exempt status of municipal bonds — visiting www.munibondsforamerica.org.

    I encourage the municipal bond community to work together to ensure that tax-exempt municipal bonds — a long-standing, vast, effective and efficient marketplace — is not treated just like every other tax code deduction or exemption.

    Mike Nicholas is the chief executive officer of Bond Dealers of America.

     



    Let’s Agree to Disagree.

    The three main credit agencies have all released new reports or evaluations about Chicago’s credit-worthiness. While they all say the city’s massive pension liability is a big concern, they arrive at different conclusions about the city’s actual rating. To quote a Sound of Music song (points for knowing which one), let’s start at the very beginning:

    During the last week of February, Fitch assigned an A- rating, the lowest level of the A-rating tier, to Chicago’s upcoming General Obligation (GO) $388 million bond issuance. The outlook for the financial health of these bonds was negative, Fitch said. The ratings agency cited a “lack of meaningful solutions to both the near- and long-term burdens associated with the city’s underfunded pension plans” as a key rating driver.

    A few days later that same week, Standard & Poor’s weighed in on the city. In a report titled “Will Chicago Suffer Detroit’s fate?” S&P said its A+ rating on Chicago’s GO debt (two steps higher than Fitch’s) “reflects our view of its overall solid credit quality, with support from a strong local economy.” The report did note that Chicago and Detroit (which is rated D, the lowest level possible), shared an inability to afford their growing liabilities. It noted in 2012, debt service as a percent of total governmental fund expenditures was 12 percent in Chicago and 14 percent in Detroit. (There. obligatory Detroit reference accomplished.)

    Finally, last week, Moody’s announced it rated Chicago’s upcoming GO debt issuance Baa1 – just two steps above junk bond status. The report says the city’s unfunded pension liabilities “threaten the city’s fiscal solvency absent major revenue and other budgetary adjustments adopted in the near term and sustained for years to come.”

    For the backstory on why ratings agencies don’t agree with each other much these days, check out this explainer via Governing’s Finance 101 series.

    Liz Farmer |
    [email protected] @LizFarmerTweets




    Rate Risk Makes Banks Keep Powder Dry.

    SNL Report: State and muni holdings keep rising

    As long-term interest rates have risen and erased many gains in bond portfolios, banks have maintained large balances of excess liquidity on their balance sheets.

    Climb from the cellar began last year

    Long-term interest rates rose off historical lows in 2013, beginning in the spring, and continued to move higher to close the year at levels not seen since the summer of 2011.

    Banks saw unrealized gains in their investment portfolios wash away as the yield on the 10-year Treasury rose more than 125 basis points in 2013, closing the year at 3.04%, compared to 1.78% at the end of 2012. The sizable uptick in long-term rates during 2013, not surprisingly, put pressure on a variety of bonds.

    “For the first time since 2009, the total return of the overall Treasury bond markets was negative; the story for other types of bonds, including investment-grade corporate and municipal bonds, was also negative, though to varying degrees,” Janney Montgomery Scott wrote in commentary reviewing 2013.

    The negative return on many bonds was not lost on banks.

    Banks continued to rely on securities for income in 2013 as deposit growth once again outstripped loan growth, leaving banks flush with excess liquidity on their balance sheets. In 2013, deposits among U.S. banks and thrifts grew 3.49% from year-earlier levels, while loans climbed 2.62% from the prior-year period. That dynamic has been relatively consistent over the last few years and sent banks’ loan-to-deposit ratios to 70.53% by year-end, down 59 basis points from the close of 2012 and well below pre-crisis levels.

    The excess liquidity on bank balance sheets has weighed on net interest margins. Banks have deployed some of that liquidity into their investment portfolios but have been cautious to put too much money to work given the expectation that rates could rise further, perhaps materially, from current levels.

    Banks grew their investment portfolios modestly in 2013 relative to the size of their balance sheets, building those portfolios to 21.03% of assets, on a median basis, at the end of 2013, up from 20.34% a year earlier. Loans, meanwhile, comprised 62.57% of banks’ assets, on a median basis, up from 61.21% a year earlier, but virtually flat with the close of 2011.

    The allocation in banks’ investment portfolios did not waver that much over the last year, with institutions again opting for large concentrations of residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS), government and agency securities, and municipal bonds.

    http://www.ababj.com/images/Dev_SNL/021414_RevenueInc.jpgFor a larger version, click on the image.

    http://www.ababj.com/images/Dev_SNL/021414_NetGains.jpgFor a larger version, click on the image.

    Munis have their attractions

    Banks maintained significant exposures to the municipal bond market even after witnessing the pressure munis faced in the late spring and early summer of 2013, when investors pulled billions of dollars from municipal bond funds. Seeking higher yields, banks bought into the pressure on muni bonds in the second quarter and allocation toward the muni market continued throughout the year, building their exposure to the muni market to $291.86 billion, or 23.52% of their securities portfolios, on a median basis, from $284.05 billion, or 23.15% of their portfolios at the end of the third quarter, according to SNL data.

    http://www.ababj.com/images/Dev_SNL/021414__MunicipalSec.jpgFor a larger version, click on the image.

    http://www.ababj.com/images/Dev_SNL/021414_BTLoans.jpgFor a larger version, click on the image.

    Cullen/Frost Bankers Inc. is one bank that remains committed to deploying funds in the muni market. The San Antonio-based bank still holds substantial levels of cash and has made it clear that it would prefer to deploy those funds by making loans, but Cullen/Frost CFO Phillip Green noted on the company’s 2013 fourth-quarter earnings call that it simply cannot sit on all the liquidity.

    “We’d like to see loans be the place where we do it, but they’re not going to grow that fast and we’re going to need to continue to do investing in the market, and the place we see to continue to do investing is municipals,” Green said on the call, according to the transcript.

    The industry as a whole, though, continued to invest in other asset classes and virtually held its exposure to government securities—securities issued by the Treasury, government agencies and government-sponsored agencies—fairly steady even as that market faced sell-offs late in the second quarter and then again late in 2013.

    Government securities equated to 22.34% of banks’ investment portfolios, on a median basis, at the end of the fourth quarter, nearly flat with 22.36% in the prior quarter, but up from 20.53% a year earlier. The level is still well below the composition levels witnessed in 2009-2010.

    http://www.ababj.com/images/Dev_SNL/021414_GovtSecurities.jpgFor a larger version, click on the image.

    Banks have modestly reduced the size of RMBS balances in their portfolios over the last year. RMBS could experience more significant price movements in a rising rate environment due to negative convexity from extension risk, or the risk that investors will hold below-market rate securities for longer periods of time since prepayment speeds will slow when rates rise.

    The industry has decreased its exposure to RMBS, albeit only slightly. Banks reported RMBS balances of $1.512 trillion at the end of the fourth quarter, or 50.35% of securities, compared to $1.515 trillion, or 51.20%, at the end of the third quarter, and $1.574 trillion, or 52.27%, a year earlier, according to SNL data.

    Revamping the investment portfolio

    Some banks have taken more extensive actions to capitalize on higher rates and have repositioned their investment portfolios.

    For instance, Central Pacific Financial Corp. CFO Denis Isono said on the company’s fourth-quarter earnings call that it executed a bond swap where it sold lower-yielding agency debt and agency MBS and reallocated funds into higher-yielding non-agency CMBS and RMBS, corporate bonds and agency MBS. As a result of the moves, as well as slower premium amortization on MBS in the period, the taxable equivalent yield on Central Pacific’s investment portfolio rose to 2.43% to 2.18% in the third quarter, he said.

    Banks will likely contemplate whether to alter their investment decisions as they prepare for rates to rise further. Long-term interest rates have fallen more than 30 basis points from the levels witnessed at the end of 2013, even as the Federal Reserve has continued to taper its asset purchases in the markets. Janney Montgomery Scott noted in its 2013 review that the Federal Reserve was primarily responsible for the increase in rates last year, but it is much harder to argue that the end of its bond-buying program will have as much of an impact on interest rates in the coming year.

    Janney wrote in the report:

    “For one, policymakers have been very clear in telegraphing their plans, which has allowed the markets to ‘price in’ the end of Fed bond-buying. For another, there’s very low probability that the Fed will change its policy of holding short-term interest rates near zero, at least not in 2014.”

    The Fed’s purchasing power in the Treasury market might not be the only market player to consider, and where rates move in the future might ultimately depend on many other factors, including net foreign purchases of Treasuries, according to Robert Albertson, principal and chief strategist at Sandler O’Neill. Albertson noted in a late January report titled, “Tapering Everywhere,” that the Fed is declining its purchases of Treasuriess just as the amount of net new Treasury debt slated for auctions is likely to shrink due to declines in the budget deficit.

    The real “wild card,” however, will be foreign demand for Treasuries, Albertson said.

    During the four-year period between 2009 and 2012, the strategist noted that the Fed’s net purchases averaged $25 billion per month, or 23% of demand, while net foreign buying averaged $48 billion per month, or 48% of demand, during the same time period. Net foreign purchases have already fallen by $33 billion from those levels, he said, leaving questions about whether domestic retail and institutional buyers can pick up the slack, even if the dollar volume of Treasury auctions decline.

    “This seems unlikely without additional yield as investors continue to flee bonds for equities, ironically a shift the Fed intended,” Albertson wrote.

    Still, not everyone fears a dire scenario. The Janney team predicted that rate risks in bond markets in the coming year are likely to be somewhat lower than they were in 2013.

    “Why?” Janney asked. “The simple answer is that rates are higher to start 2014 than they were to start 2013.”

    March 14, 2014

    By Harish Mali and Nathan Stovall, SNL Financial staff writers




    Muni Bond Fund Rebound Appears to Have Legs.

    After an abysmal year in 2013, municipal bonds are back — and may offer positive returns for some time to come.

    Through March 11, the S&P municipal bond index is up 3.01%, a sharp departure from last year, when the index lost 2.55%, making 2013 only the fourth year of negative returns in the past 25, according to Jim Grabovac, senior portfolio manager at McDonnell Investment Management.

    In response to the performance turnaround, investors are warming up to the asset class. After 10 straight months of net outflows in municipal bond funds totaling more $57 billion in 2013, more than $2 billion in net inflows poured back into the funds through Feb. 28, according to data from Morningstar Inc.

    Muni funds’ performance revival has been spurred by falling interest rates throughout the fixed-income market, along with higher taxes and subsiding fears over Detroit’s and Puerto Rico’s dicey finances, analysts say. Meanwhile, the biggest threat — looming rate hikes in the aftermath of the Federal Reserve‘s tapering — isn’t expected to weigh too heavily on prices in the near future.

    At the heart of much of 2013’s weak performance was the Federal Reserve. Rumors that the central bank would begin tapering in September caused jitters throughout the fixed-income market, putting downward pressure on municipal bond prices, said Steven Pikelny, an analyst at Morningstar Inc.

    The decline was further exacerbated by Detroit’s bankruptcy, as well as diminishing investor confidence in Puerto Rico. In October, yields on the island’s bonds jumped to as high as 10%. This accelerated outflows and put a big dent in the municipal funds market, Mr. Pikelny said.

    “The Puerto Rican municipal bond index fell about 20% for the year,” Mr. Pikelny said. “Since the island makes up a pretty big chunk of the muni universe, a drop like that could mean a 1% loss for a municipal bond fund.”

    This year’s turnaround has been aided by the broader fixed-income market, Mr. Grabovac said.

    “If you look at the broader picture, there was volatility in emerging markets that triggered a flight to quality, including muni bonds,” Mr. Grabovac said. “The bad weather throughout much of the country [and resultant weak jobs reports] also dampened fears of a faster Fed taper,” he said.

    In addition, municipal bonds, which are exempt from income tax, received a boost from 2013’s tax hikes, including the increase in the top marginal income tax rate and the 3.8% net investment income tax, Mr. Grabovac said.

    “This was overwhelmed in 2013 by sentiment from tapering fears,” Mr. Grabovac said. “Now that we are approaching tax season, there seems to be a heightened interest in after-tax income.”

    The final source of falling yields may be less sustainable: municipals have been in tight supply. The supply crunch started in 2013 as high rates dissuaded many municipalities from refinancing debt, Mr. Grabovac explained.

    But now supply is normalizing, Mr. Colby said. Puerto Rico just sold $3.5 billion worth of bonds, California just sold about $1.6 billion, and Chicago just struck a deal for roughly $700 million. The question is whether demand is healthy enough to absorb these additional sales without a drop in price, he said.

    In the long term, the biggest influence on municipal bond prices remains the Federal Reserve. With a lot of slack left in the labor market, and the Fed still pumping out billions of dollars of liquidity each month, few analysts expect a spike in interest rates anytime soon. Meanwhile, there are plenty of reasons for organic demand to keep municipal bond prices afloat.

    “If you look at the objective of a portfolio, municipals offer good after tax income with potentially no correlation to the equity market,” Mr. Grabovac said. “That makes them a pretty good diversifier.”

    By Carl O’Donnell

    Mar 13, 2014 @ 12:01 am (Updated 3:25 pm) EST




    Detroit's Retiree Committee to Be Protected from Lawsuits in Bankruptcy Case.

    Lawyers for the City of Detroit and a retiree committee have reached an agreement to protect committee members from potential lawsuits from retirees unhappy with pension cuts, lawyers said Tuesday,

    At a bankruptcy hearing last Wednesday, a lawyer for the nine-member retiree committee asked U.S. bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes to force Detroit to pay for a $602,000 insurance policy to cover legal costs for committee members if any of the 23,500 retirees sue the members individually. Rhodes had questioned the price, which the city must cover because it is responsible for the committee’s expenses, and noted the money might be better spent improving emergency services for the city.

    On Tuesday, retiree committee lawyer Carole Neville announced an agreement has been reached but did not want to reveal terms of the settlement during the hearing.

    Lawyer Heather Lennox, who represents the city, confirmed there is an agreement that protects the committee.

    Committee members have a degree of legal protection because lawsuits against court-appointed trustees or creditor committees require permission from the court that appointed them.

    The brief hearing Tuesday also was convened to hear arguments about proposed voting procedures for the plan of adjustment designed to restructure Detroit’s debt. Few lawyers for creditors attended, and there were no legal squabbles over class rights or standings.

    The City of Detroit will be mailing packages to about 170,000 individual creditors eligible to vote on acceptance of the plan.

    Retirees and creditors of record on April 14 will be entitled to vote, and there is a June 26 hearing on any disputes.

    Individual bondholders and retirees have until June 30 to object to the plan, and a hearing on accepting the plan is scheduled to start July 16. Rhodes rejected a request to extend some dates.

    Lennox said keeping some of the deadlines will help ballot counters, who already face the task of counting votes from almost 400 classes of claims in this bankruptcy case.

    A 197-page document filed with the court Feb. 28 outlines who is eligible to vote and how that will be done in an effort to streamline the process as much as possible.

    The city filed for Chapter 9 bankruptcy protection in July, claiming debts and project long-term liabilities of $18 billion. It is the largest municipal bankruptcy in U.S. history.

    BY MCCLATCHY NEWS | MARCH 13, 2014

    By Alisa Priddle

    (c)2014 the Detroit Free Press




    Chicago Credits Outreach for Strong Showing on GO Issue.

    CHICAGO – Chicago drew dozens of new investors to a general obligation bond sale this week that was more than doubled after it sized up the market’s demand.

    That strong demand pared the expected interest rate penalty Chicago faced on its $880 million GO sale, but it still paid a steep price for its blemished credit.

    Wednesday’s pricing marked the city’s first GO outing since two, rare, triple-notch downgrades last year. Moody’s Investors Service stung the city anew last week when it dropped the GO rating one more level to Baa1 citing the city’s pension funding strains. Fitch Ratings rates Chicago GOs A-minus and Standard & Poor’s rates them A-plus. All three assign a negative outlook.

    Buoyed by strong early indications from investors who have faced a paltry muni primary all year, the city bolstered its sale from an original $400 million to $655 million last week and then $790 million earlier this week. Wells Fargo Securities ran the books.

    In addition to strong investor interest, the belief that rates are headed up amid positive economic news and concerns that world events could fuel a flight to quality contributed to the city’s sizing decisions in recent days, Chicago Chief Financial Officer Lois Scott said Thursday.

    The city originally planned to issue mostly refunding bonds this week, to be followed by a new-money deal in the spring with a separate team, and then possibly another late in the year.

    In the end, the city to opted to fold all of its GO borrowing needs for the year into the one deal and the size settled at $883 million on Wednesday. The deal included a $432.6 million tax-exempt series and a $450.8 million taxable coupon. The taxable pricing was moved up by a day.

    “We saw several other issuers accelerate their deals and their size and it seemed the opportune time to get in. The conditions seemed prime,” Scott said.

    The city reached out to investors individually and through a “roadshow” presentation in recent weeks highlighting its economic strengths and fiscal strides, in contrast to a pension funding mess Scott acknowledged is severe.

    “The city and its financial team did a tremendous amount of work to make sure that investors understood our disclosure information and responded to questions,” said Scott, who was hired by Mayor Rahm Emanuel after his 2011 election. “It really showed to us how much credit work institutional investors are doing on their own.”

    The city expected from indications this week good demand but was surprised by the $3.6 billion of orders it received. The tax-exempt series was five times oversubscribed and the taxable four times. Orders came from at least 80 institutions of which 50 were new. The new investors were money managers and other institutions and not hedge funds, Scott added.

    The city also saw the return of some investor names that have shunned city debt in both the primary and secondary.

    “It shows how hard Wells Fargo and the syndicate worked to not only reach out to their primary accounts but others,” Scott said.

    During course of the pricing Wednesday, the city said spreads narrowed by five to 10 basis points across the pricing scale. The 10-year maturity in the city’s tax-exempt series paid a yield of 3.95%, a spread of about 145 basis points to the Municipal Market Data’s benchmark on top-rated municipals.

    The city’s tax-exempt long bond maturing in 2036 paid a yield of 5.18%, 161 basis points over MMD. The city’s 30-year taxable coupon ended at 265 basis points over Treasuries. Earlier indications suggested the city could see a spread of 280 basis points on the taxable piece, according to market participants.

    Matt Posner, a managing director at Municipal Market Advisors, said the deal was surprising in that it did not initially come at the concession some had expected given the roughly 25 basis point penalty seen in secondary trades after the latest Moody’s downgrade.

    “I think institutional participants understand why Moody’s had to downgrade the city after it changed its criteria to give more weight to pensions but they recognize the strong fundamentals of the city’s GO credit,” Posner said. “It also still offers a pretty high yield.”

    The yields clearly displayed the sharp toll of the downgrades. In the city’s last deal in May 2012 its 10-year maturity priced at 84 basis points over MMD and a 22-year maturity comparable to the 2036 bond in the new deal priced at 89 basis points over MMD. Its 30-year taxable bond priced 252.6 basis points over Treasuries, according to Thomson Reuters data.

    “Our spreads are higher than they were but we were able to narrow them” in the deal, Scott said. “But we think the strength of the orders certainly sends a significant message that the investment community thinks we are on the right path.”

    The city carved out three maturities for retail buyers but saw just limited interest as most Illinois paper does not offer an exemption from state income taxes. The city received bids from Build America Mutual Assurance Co. and Assured Guaranty Municipal Corp. and Assured coverage was provided on one maturity. A total of $15.2 million in orders went to retail.

    Under the structure, principal repayment does not begin until 2018 in keeping with past city GO sales. The delayed principal repayment contributes to a slow debt amortization schedule that’s considered a negative credit factor.

    The deal included $237 million of new money proceeds to fund the city’s 2014 capital needs. It took out $295 million of commercial paper including a portion that financed the city’s 2013 needs. Proceeds also will cover legal judgments against Chicago last year, refund debt for savings, and support an ongoing deferral of the city’s debt service schedule by pushing some maturities out, another negative noted by analysts.

    The city opted to tap the CP program -which provides liquidity and serves as a short term financing vehicle – instead of a long-term bond sale last year as rates headed upward in the latter half of the year and it faced a stream of negative credit action. Scott estimated the use of CP in the near-term saved the city about $10 million on interest costs. The city recently doubled its CP authorization to $1 billion.

    In the city’s roadshow, Scott declared: “The city of Chicago credit is strong and getting stronger.” The city’s ratings, which all carry a negative outlook, arguably belie that statement.

    Scott said Thursday the statement was meant to reflect the city’s positive economic news, and not necessarily a rating agency assessment.

    The roadshow highlights the city’s structural budget improvement through cost savings and ending the use of reserves seen under the prior Richard Daley administration. The city has put $30 million back into its long term reserve pot that holds $635 million.

    It also highlights the city’s overhaul of retiree healthcare subsidies, its home rule status and flexibility on taxes to “address of financial challenges” and momentum in the General Assembly to tackle local pension reforms after overhauling the state system in December.

    Scott also stresses that the city leadership has a strong command of its fiscal issues and a “plan to address our legacy liabilities” which includes its $19 billion of unfunded pension obligations and an $8 billion debt load.

    But the city has been taken to task by the rating agencies and public policy groups for not offering an independent plan to address its liabilities or the looming $600 million spike in its contributions to its police and fire funds that will be required next year absent state action. The city has floated plans to overhaul pension benefits and contributions and phase in the payment spike, but has no backup plan should state lawmakers fail to act.

    “Overall we have a strong economy and a strong credit and pensions are the outlier in an otherwise favorable credit environment,” Scott said at the close of the roadshow.

    Moody’s warned in its most recent downgrade report that the sheer size of the city’s pension obligations threatens Chicago’s “fiscal solvency” absent action on reforms and a long term infusion of funding.

    Loop Capital Markets LLC which was slated to be bookrunner on the now cancelled second city GO sale, was added as a co-senior manager on the Wednesday sale. William Blair & Co. Inc., BMO Capital Markets, and Cabrera Capital Markets LLC also served as co-senior managers. The city will give the firms on the cancelled second deal consideration for other transactions anticipated this year such as its water and sewer revenue bond sales, Scott said.

    BY YVETTE SHIELDS
    MAR 13, 2014 4:42pm ET



    Safeguard for Michigan Bond Market Up in Air.

    The experts call it “the Detroit penalty.”

    That’s the extra cost Michigan municipalities face when selling new debt now that Detroit is trying to make investors holding its bonds eat a loss of 80 cents on the dollar.

    How expensive can it get?

    The authority that runs Cobo Center plans to sell $315 million in bonds this fall to refinance old debt. When Cobo’s financial advisers added up the numbers, they estimated the authority could pay a combined “Michigan penalty” and a “Detroit penalty” that could raise the interest rate by as much as a full percentage point.

    Over 25 years, that higher rate would cost the authority about $56 million that would otherwise flow to each of the state’s 83 counties.

    Michigan could stave off higher bond rates by passing legislation similar to laws in Rhode Island, California and a handful of other states that protect bond investors. But even with the threat of higher rates, both state Treasurer Kevin Clinton and Gov. Rick Snyder say there’s no need to erect a legal firewall to keep the state’s other cities, townships and authorities from being hit with higher bond rates.

    Behind the bond market’s pique is the feeling that the city wants to stiff holders of its unlimited tax general obligation bonds. General obligation bonds are an integral part of financing any city or municipal authority that needs to raise a large lump sum to build schools, fix sewers or buy buses. These bonds are paid from city taxes, which, if the city falls short, can by hiked until there’s enough money to make the payments — that’s the unlimited part.

    In the past, a city in trouble would either refinance general obligation bonds or, in the rare event of a municipal bankruptcy, treat the bonds as secured debt, giving the bond investors first shot at whatever assets were available. Since the Great Depression, the average recovery on such bonds has been 75 percent, not the 20 percent Detroit proposes. After that, pensioners, or their widows, would join other unsecured creditors who, in many cases, received nothing.

    In Detroit’s case, the governor’s appointed emergency manager wants to put pensioners first and hand bondholders a huge loss.

    “You have to recognize that you’re going to need to borrow again,” said James Spiotto, managing director of the bond consultancy Chapman Strategic Advisors in Chicago. “If you take the short-term view and say, ‘I’m going to stomp on bondholders so I can pay others,’ what you wind up doing is costing yourself more in the long term.”

    A spokeswoman for Snyder said she’s not aware of any discussion about such legislation.

    “We acknowledge the questions and potential concerns out there, but believe that Detroit is an incredibly unique situation,” spokeswoman Sara Wurfel said in an email. “We have strong confidence in the amount and type of sound, smart investments to be made in Michigan and our local communities across the region and state.”

    Anthony Minghine, associate executive director of the Michigan Municipal League, said he’s heard the suggestion that the state pass legislation securing general obligation bonds, but that it hasn’t picked up support in the state Capitol.

    “Some of the bond community is hyper-focused on protecting the creditors, which is understandable, but I have not heard that being talked about in Lansing,” Minghine said.

    When Detroit’s bankruptcy was announced, “I know the market kind of hiccuped, but from everything I’ve seen it seems like it’s settled down,” Minghine said.

    The hiccups included Saginaw County postponing an August bond issue after Detroit declared bankruptcy, then paying more to issue those bonds in January. Despite a top credit rating, Troy paid half a point to a full point more for bonds it issued in September, while Genessee County paid 1 percent more, according to Bloomberg News.

    Even the state took a hit, with two-year general obligation bonds going at a 20 percent premium in November, according to Bloomberg.

    Nonetheless, “It is important to note that municipalities and the state have successfully completed a number of transactions, some of which received exceptional interest rates,” Treasury spokesman Terry Stanton said in a statement to The Detroit News. “Michigan is home to some 650 local communities which are rated by the credit agencies, and only a scant few are not considered investment grade.”

    Some Michigan bonds aren’t suffering — the ones that are guaranteed to be paid off. The credit agency Standard & Poor’s just reaffirmed its high-quality rating on a batch of Detroit state aid bonds. There’s little to no risk to investors because the money is guaranteed by the state.

    But without such guarantees for general obligation bonds, any sense that the market has gotten over the shock of Detroit’s bankruptcy filing could come undone if bankruptcy Judge Steven Rhodes OKs the city’s plan to slash millions of dollars of value from its general obligation bonds.

    “If this is approved, issuers in Michigan and in other states that don’t have protection for general-obligation bonds could see their borrowing costs rise,” said Lisa Washburn of Municipal Market Advisors, a Concord, Mass., municipal bond consultant.

    That’s part of what’s fueling fears that bond rates will rise for Cobo Center. The worst case scenario is an interest rate that’s a full percentage point higher, although Patrick Bero, chief executive officer of the Detroit Regional Convention Facility Authority that runs Cobo, thinks he can make a strong case to investors and keep the damage to just a quarter of a point or less.

    But as Detroit and its bondholders continue to wrestle in court, what happens between now and September is anyone’s guess.

    Washburn and other bond analysts say the way to wipe out the doubts and fears dogging bonds from Michigan is simple: Get the state Legislature to pass a law stating that general obligation municipal bonds are protected as property liens in a bankruptcy.

    That’s what happened when Central Falls, R.I., fell into bankruptcy in 2010. After the city of 19,376 filed for Chapter 9 protection, the Rhode Island assembly moved to protect all the state’s bonds, including those in Central Falls, explained Rosemary Booth Gallogly, director of the state’s Department of Revenue.

    “Even as small as Central Falls is in the state, we were concerned about the impact of contagion on other municipalities and the rates they’d have to pay,” Gallogly said. Once a law was signed creating a statutory lien for state bonds in 2011, “We did not see a negative impact for other municipalities,” she added.

    The bottom line was that the Central Falls bonds were paid off at 100 cents on the dollar and other cities — even those in trouble — haven’t seen any increases on their bond rates, Spiotto noted.

    “Rhode Island has not suffered,” Spiotto said. “Actually, I think they’ve gotten some benefit in access and cost that they wouldn’t have gotten otherwise. When Providence had problems, they still had access to the market at a reasonable cost.”

    For now, the market is taking a wait-and-see attitude about bond rates in Michigan, at least until the bankruptcy judge rules and the inevitable chain of suits and appeals wend their way through court to reveal the bottom-line hit for Detroit bondholders. Until then, fears of the “Detroit penalty” will continue to play out, Spiotto warned.

    “Some states are already saying ‘We’re different than Detroit, we have a statutory lien and you should have no fear,’ ” Spiotto said. “You really want your state to be able to claim the lowest borrowing cost, not the highest.”

    Brian J. O’Connor
    Detroit News Finance Edito
    [email protected]
    (313) 222-2145

    From The Detroit News: http://www.detroitnews.com/article/20140311/BIZ/303110020#ixzz2vs1sphjo




    When Pension Pain Signals Bigger Ills: Three Symptoms to Look For.

    In my last post , I shared my views on why pension reform is gaining traction in states throughout the country, and why this is generally good news for muni investors. While we do not believe pension problems threaten to harm state and local finances to the point of breaking the municipal bond market (a view shared by the Center for Retirement Research at Boston College ), they are a source of financial pain in some locales. And in rare cases, overly burdensome pension liabilities, when combined with a generally weak credit profile, may be reason to avoid investing in the municipal debt of certain issuers.

    So how do we spot pension tension? To identify the potential trouble spots, we ask ourselves three questions:

    Detroit is a clear example of a weak credit profile and severe pension pain. The ratings agencies had downgraded Detroit to junk status a few years before its Chapter 9 filing. Pittsburgh, in contrast, also had a large pension problem, but a relatively stronger credit profile. The Pennsylvania city was able to initiate pension reform and ultimately avoided Chapter 9. Pittsburgh now has a better funded ratio, a stronger economy, and was upgraded by the agencies in 2013.

    Ratings: An Rx for Change?

    Notably, the ratings agencies are being much more proactive in downgrading municipalities and states that are not taking action to address their pension problem. They are acknowledging that states have a significant long-term liability to plan for, which could potentially impair their ability to repay current debt. (I talk about it in my recent Point of View .) And they are grading states and cities accordingly. This is good news for municipal bond investors. Clarity is always a benefit (albeit not a substitute for thorough credit research ).

    So what’s the upshot for muni investors? Pensions are a long-term liability, but a pressing concern for some already weak municipal issuers. More so than ever, ratings agencies and market spreads are factoring in a state’s pension status. Where the burden is outsized, the agencies are taking notice and penalizing inaction by issuing rating downgrades. And that has been the impetus for pension reforms which, ultimately, should help bolster states’ long-term fiscal health and contribute to the underlying strength of the municipal market.

    By BlackRock, March 10, 2014, 12:36:36 PM

    Peter Hayes, Managing Director, is head of BlackRock’s Municipal Bonds Group and a regular contributor to The Blog.

    Read more.




    Bad Fiscal Reputation Hikes Rates on Illinois Bonds-Study.

    (Reuters) – Illinois is paying an extra premium in the U.S. municipal bond market because of its poor fiscal reputation, according to a study released on Monday.

    The state’s general obligation bonds fetch higher yields in secondary market trading than other states as festering fiscal problems, including a big backlog of unpaid bills, have given Illinois the lowest credit ratings among U.S. states.

    Illinois’ GO bonds due in 10 years yielded 120 basis points over Municipal Market Data’s benchmark triple-A yield scale in the week ended Feb. 28. Illinois has the widest so-called credit spread after Puerto Rico among major muni debt issuers tracked by MMD, a unit of Thomson Reuters.

    But an analysis by the Fiscal Futures Project at the University of Illinois’ Institute of Government and Public Affairs found that even after controlling for different credit ratings and fiscal, economic and financial factors between Illinois and other states that sold GO bonds between 2005 and 2010, the yields on Illinois bonds were still higher.

    “These findings suggest the presence of a reputational risk premium on Illinois debt that is in excess of the risk premium associated with the state’s actual default risk,” the analysis said.

    The premium for Illinois was 21 basis points for bonds due in five years, 12 basis points in 10 years and 7 basis points in 20 years, according to the analysis. It added that the premium’s present value cost “could be well over $80 million” on the more than $10.4 billion of GO bonds Illinois sold between 2005 and 2010.

    Martin Luby, an assistant professor at DePaul University’s School of Public Service who co-wrote the study, noted that Illinois’ fiscal standing deteriorated after 2010 as the state failed to address its huge unfunded public pension liability, prompting downgrades from the credit ratings agencies.

    “We think this risk premium is a conservative estimate,” he added.

    In December, the state finally enacted comprehensive pension reforms aimed at easing a $100 billion pension funding shortfall.

    However, state workers, retirees and labor unions have filed five lawsuits challenging the law on state constitutional grounds.

    As the muni market waits to see if the law will be upheld by state courts, Illinois must also deal with income tax rate hikes enacted in 2011 that will partially expire halfway through the state’s next fiscal year.

    A rollback in the rates would cut revenue by an estimated $1.4 billion in fiscal 2015.




    S&P: Despite Higher Delinquency Rates, Ratings On U.S. Housing Finance Agencies Aren't Likely To Suffer.

    In third-quarter 2013, the quarter for which the latest data is available, the gap in delinquencies between U.S. housing finance agencies’ (HFA) single-family whole-loan mortgages and comparable prime state portfolios we rate widened significantly. HFA loan delinquency rose to 7.48% of the total balance (compared with 7.06% a quarter earlier), and state loan delinquency declined slightly to 5.23% from 5.26% in second-quarter 2013. The 1.8 percentage point jump to a 2.25 percentage-point gap created the largest discrepancy we have recorded. However, the higher HFA delinquency rate is almost entirely due to greater loan delinquencies from the New Jersey Housing and Mortgage Finance Agency and the Pennsylvania Housing Finance Agency, which now have the two highest delinquency rates in our survey.




    GASB Toolkit Helps State and Local Governments Implement New Pension Standards.

    March 11, 2014—The Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB) has released a new online pension implementation toolkit. The toolkit is designed to help preparers, auditors, and users of state and local government financial reports understand and apply the revised pension accounting and financial reporting standards that the GASB approved in June 2012. The toolkit is available at no cost at the GASB website.

     

     




    Muni Bond Costs Hit Investors in Wallet.

    Investors Pay Twice as Much for Municipal Debt as for Corporate Bonds

    Investors who put cash into municipal bonds—a widely popular strategy for those seeking safe, tax-free bets—are paying about twice as much in trading commissions as they would for corporate bonds, according to a study for The Wall Street Journal.

    Regulators largely bypassed municipal debt as they transformed much of Wall Street over the past 20 years, but are studying it more closely now.

    Individuals are the biggest participants in the $3.7 trillion industry, which provides funding for states, cities, hospitals and school districts across the country.

    A study of 53,000 municipal and corporate bonds by S&P Dow Jones Indices for The Journal shows how much more investors are trading for the municipal assets.

    Individual investors trading $100,000 in bonds of a municipality, such as Washington state, in December paid brokers an average “spread” of 1.73%, or $1,730. That compares with 0.87%, or $870, paid on a comparable corporate bond, such as one issued by General Electric Capital Corp., the data show.

    More
    How Retail Investors Can Get Info Pros Won’t Share
    Brokers of stocks and corporate bonds must disclose market pricing and give individuals “best execution” on trades, ensuring they receive the best prices possible. In the municipal-bond industry, those protections are absent, allowing brokers to pocket higher spreads by buying the bonds low and selling them high.

    Individual investors, especially retirees, have long been attracted to municipal debt as a relatively safe investment whose interest payments aren’t taxed. They own 45% of all municipal bonds directly and another 28% through mutual funds, amounting to a combined $2.7 trillion, according to data from the Federal Reserve.

    The market is supervised by several regulators and structured differently than the stock and corporate-debt markets, and regulation of muni-bond trading has been slow to evolve.

    “I think we can do more here for retail investors,” said Michael Piwowar, one of five commissioners on the Securities and Exchange Commission, in an interview. “We spend an awful lot of time on the equities side of the market where spreads are counted in pennies—and in the ‘muni’ market, spreads are counted in dollars.”

    Brokerages say that municipal bonds cost more to trade because they change hands far less frequently and in smaller amounts than do other securities. They have warned that regulatory changes could hurt activity in the municipal market.

    The SEC held hearings on the issue in 2010 and 2011 and proposed changes in a 2012 report, but they haven’t been implemented.

    Investors bought and sold $183 billion of municipal bonds last year in trades of $100,000 or less, in line with recent years, according to data from the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board.

    One of those investors was Jack Leonard, a 67-year-old resident of Ipswich, Mass., who on July 23 sold bonds promising a 5% annual interest payment from his home state in two lots of $100,000 each.

    The broker buying the bonds told Mr. Leonard the best price he could get was about $1,030 per bond, or $206,000.

    The following day, a broker sold the same amount of 5% bonds to investors for $1,060 a bond, or $212,000, according to an online history of trading prices maintained by the MSRB. The difference of $6,000 in the two transactions is equal to 3% of the bonds’ value.

    It wasn’t possible to verify that both trades involved Mr. Leonard’s bonds from the MSRB database, which doesn’t identify trade participants. But in July, MSRB records show brokers collectively sold $1 million in Massachusetts bonds to investors at a 3% average markup from the prices they paid for them, amounting to $30,000 in profits.

    “That’s a lot of money, and the real question is: Why are they allowed to do it?” said Mr. Leonard.

    Mike Becker, a retired options trader in Boca Raton, Fla., said he has grown frustrated trying to get his broker at the Merrill Lynch unit of Bank of America to tell him the best bid being offered for the Florida state bonds he wants to sell and has petitioned the SEC to pass rules giving “the public a fairer shake.” Josh Ritchie for The Wall Street Journal
    The SEC oversees the MSRB, which sets rules for the industry, and the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, which enforces them. Oversight coordination has been poor at times because the market is supervised by three regulators rather than one and the issue has had a low priority in Washington, said Hester Peirce, a former SEC staff attorney who is now a research fellow at George Mason University in Arlington, Va. “I think it’s going to be under more scrutiny” going forward, she said, referring to Mr. Piwowar’s push and recent proposals by the MSRB.

    MSRB Executive Director Lynnette Kelly said the board “is working closely with the SEC to address market structure issues in a realistic time frame.” John Nester, a spokesman for the SEC, said his group and others “work cooperatively on issues affecting the municipal securities market.” Staff from Finra and the MSRB meet frequently “to ensure and sustain this collaborative approach,” a Finra spokesman said.

    Proposed changes face opposition from brokers, which fund both the MSRB and Finra. Firms such as Charles Schwab & Co. and Wells Fargo Advisors LLC have lobbied against some changes.

    “The devil is always in the details when it comes to new regulations, but we commend the MSRB for bringing this issue forward and urge them to continue this important effort,” said Jeff Brown, senior vice president of legislative and regulatory affairs at Schwab. Wells Fargo declined to comment.

    Meanwhile, the lack of pricing information gives mom-and-pop investors little leverage to negotiate.

    “I don’t know what the market is, because they won’t show me,” said Mike Becker, a retired options trader. The 70-year-old Boca Raton, Fla., resident said he has grown frustrated trying to get his broker at the Merrill Lynch unit of Bank of America Corp. to tell him the best bid being offered for the Florida state bonds he wants to sell and has petitioned the SEC to pass rules giving “the public a fairer shake.”

    “We have policies and procedures in place that adhere to MSRB guidelines as they pertain to fair pricing,” a Merrill spokeswoman said.

    The MSRB proposed a municipal-bond best-execution rule last week that it hopes to enact this year or next and is working on a digital pricing platform, a person familiar with the matter said.

    MSRB Chairman Dan Heimowitz, a banker at RBC Capital Markets Corp., said he is working to balance necessary changes against the risk that a rushed overhaul could spur brokers to quit the market, making it harder for individuals to trade. “That is why we go slowly and methodically, but we haven’t given up on this by any means,” he said.

    Mr. Piwowar, a former economist who studied trading costs in corporate and municipal bonds, is pushing for fixes he hopes the SEC can enact this year, like requiring brokers to give clients more price information ahead of potential trades. He said stock and corporate-bond brokers also complained that similar reforms would stifle trading when it was imposed on their markets, “but in fact, all the evidence suggests the opposite.”

    Peter Coffin, a municipal-bond manager for wealthy individuals at Boston-based Breckenridge Capital Advisors, said it is about time the muni market got an overhaul. “You think of how the retail industry has gone from the local grocery store to Wal-Mart to Amazon,” he said. By contrast, he said, “In municipal bonds, we’re still shopping at the local grocery store.”

    By MATT WIRZ
    March 10, 2014 7:44 p.m. ET
    Write to Matt Wirz at [email protected]




    BDA Analysis of White House Budget Proposal.

    Today President Obama has released his $3.9 trillion FY2015 budget proposal.  The President’s plan in totality does not have a path forward in Congress, but serves as a key platform for Democratic principles heading into the mid-term elections. As in previous budgets, this release underscores the priority of income inequality, which is addressed through several proposed changes to the tax code. A detailed summary of Treasury Department provisions, known as the “Green Book,” is available.

    Based upon our very preliminary review of these two documents, we wanted to call your attention to budget provisions of interest to the municipal market. The budget proposal would:

    Other items that will generate attention include proposals to:




    GFOA Board-Approved Best Practices - February 28, 2014.

    Below are summaries of the best practices recently approved by the GFOA’s Executive Board and listed by the committee in which they originated.

    Committee on Governmental Budgeting and Fiscal Policy

    Committee on Accounting, Auditing and Financial Reporting

    Committee on Retirement and Benefits Administration

    Committee on Governmental Debt Management

    Committee on Treasury and Investment Management

    Links to the full text here:

    http://www.gfoa.org/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=2963




    Bloomberg: Moody's Seeks Comments on Approach to Rating Rental-Home Bonds.

    Moody’s Investors Service is asking for comments on a proposed methodology for rating bonds backed by U.S. rental homes, after assigning top grades to a portion of the market’s first deal last year.

    The document released today reflects Moody’s plan to create a formal outline of its approach to rating the debt, which it has previously explained in reports and statements, Thomas Lemmon, a spokesman, said by telephone. When ranking a type of securities before creating an official methodology, the firm offers more information on its views as it rates individual deals, he said.

    For the initial securities, the New York-based company’s assessment of the transaction’s “ultimate ability to repay investors was based on the liquidation value of the homes under a heavily stressed scenario,” Moody’s said today in an e-mailed statement.

    Competitor Standard & Poor’s said Feb. 27 that rental-home securities haven’t met the criteria for its top AAA rankings, following a similar statement by Fitch Ratings in November. Moody’s, Kroll Bond Rating Agency and Morningstar Inc. assigned top grades to 58 percent of the bonds in the $479.1 million offering in November by Blackstone Group LP’s Invitation Homes, the only of its type so far.

    Moody’s said today in its request for comment that when grading such deals it plans to focus “on two sources of cash flows that are available to repay the loan: the rental income that the underlying properties will generate, and the proceeds from the sale of the underlying properties.”

    Its analysis of the income and legal issues is derived from its process for ranking commercial-mortgage bonds, while its approach for residential securities informs how it assesses property valuations, Moody’s said.

    To contact the reporter on this story: Jody Shenn in New York at [email protected]

    To contact the editor responsible for this story: Shannon D. Harrington at [email protected]




    Moody's: U.S. State and Local Governments Increasingly Rely on Medicare to Lower OPEB Costs.

    New York, March 06, 2014 — The availability of federal Medicare coverage for a growing number of state and municipal retirees is helping these governments achieve significant savings on their retiree health care costs by reducing “other post-retirement benefits,” or OPEB, liabilities, says Moody’s Investors Service in a new report.

    “Even small reductions in the cost of health benefits for Medicare-eligible retirees can have considerable positive impact on future costs, because savings compound over retirees’ growing lifetimes,” says Marcia Van Wagner, a Moody’s Vice President and Senior Analyst in the report, “US Municipal Governments Can Leverage Federal Medicare to Lower Costs.”

    “Governments have already begun to trim OPEB costs and are likely to continue this trend given the growing population of retirees age 65 and over eligible for baseline health coverage offered by the federal program,” says Van Wagner.

    In addition to demographic shifts, two factors will drive the portion of government retirees who are over 65. First, governments have been raising retirement ages. Second, the portion of those ineligible for Medicare will shrink because participation in Medicare has been mandatory for state and local government employees since 1986.

    Initiatives to trim the costs of benefits to Medicare-eligible retirees include cost-shifting, such as requiring increased co-payments or premium contributions for supplemental benefits, as well as initiatives to reduce the growth of health costs more directly.

    Moody’s says the portion of retirees eligible for Medicare tends to be smaller for local governments than states because more municipal retirees are firemen and policemen, who tend to retire before they become eligible for Medicare at age 65.

    “This difference demonstrates that Medicare-based reforms will provide greater long-run cost savings in some jurisdictions than in others,” says Van Wagner.

    Some governments have significantly reduced OPEB liabilities by requiring employees to pay a greater share of supplemental health insurance costs and reducing prescription drug costs. For example Aaa-rated Maryland reduced its OPEB liability to $9.4 billion from $16.1 billion in 2010 through a 2011 change that requires retirees to enroll in Medicare Part D (prescription drug coverage) starting in 2020, in addition to increased prescription drug copayments, retiree premium payments, and out-of-pocket maximums.

    The Affordable Care Act offers governments a way to reduce pharmaceutical costs through its Medicare Part D employer group waiver plan, which provides subsidies and also allows employers to take advantage of manufacturers’ discounts. For example, New York State reduced its OPEB liability 9%, in part due to implementing such a plan.

    Unfunded OPEB liabilities reported by state governments total more than $530 billion, an amount comparable to their total net tax-supported debt, says Moody’s.

    For more information, Moody’s research subscribers can access this report here.




    Chicago's Credit Rating Takes Major Hit Over Unfunded Pensions.

    Chicago’s financial standing took a hit Tuesday when a major bond rating agency once again downgraded the city’s credit worthiness because of a huge government worker pension shortfall and the overall amount of money it owes.

    Moody’s Investor Service rated the city’s upcoming $388 million bond issuance at Baa1, down from A3, a level set last year after an unusual triple downgrade. The new rating is still investment grade, but puts the city on a lower tier. Moody’s also gave the city a “negative outlook.”

    The move could end up costing Mayor Rahm Emanuel’s administration more to borrow money. Two other major agencies earlier had maintained their existing Chicago debt ratings for the upcoming city bond issue, but Moody’s move could raise interest rates if it reduces investor confidence in the city’s ability to make the required repayments.

    The rating “reflects the city’s massive and growing unfunded pension liabilities, which threaten the city’s fiscal solvency absent major revenue and other budgetary adjustments adopted in the near term and sustained for years to come,” the new rating report stated. “The size of Chicago’s unfunded pension liabilities makes it an extreme outlier.”

    Moody’s concluded Chicago has the highest level of unfunded pension debt “of any rated U.S. local government.” Even if Emanuel secures changes to pension obligations that he seeks from the General Assembly, the city may still not contribute enough money to pension systems to restore their health because of practical and political considerations, the report concluded.

    “As such, the city’s financial operations will remain structurally imbalanced,” the report stated. It also noted the city’s high levels of debt, as documented in the Tribune’s “Broken Bonds” series.

    The Emanuel administration said the move underscored the need for pension changes during the General Assembly’s spring session.

    View Full Story from the Chicago Tribune.




    Muni Market Shrinks; Bank Muni Holdings Rise.

    WASHINGTON — The total amount of outstanding municipal securities in the market fell almost 1.2% to $3.67 trillion last year from 2012, while munis held by banks jumped 14.68% to $416.4 billion over the same period, according to the Federal Reserve’s latest Flow of Funds report released Thursday.

    The drop in outstanding munis “is consistent with the trend over the last several years” and shows that new money issues are not keeping up with refundings and redemptions, said Michael Decker, managing director and co-head of munis at the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association.

    But while the level of outstanding munis for 2013 has fallen to about what it was in 2009, banks have almost doubled their muni holdings over that same period. They held only $224.3 billion of munis in 2009.

    “That’s a very notable trend,” said Decker. “Banks are much more relevant to the muni market. They are buying new issues to a much larger degree. They’re really filling the gap for short-term and variable rate products that is left from the shrinking variable rate demand obligation market and auction-rate securities market, what’s left of it.”

    The financial crisis basically killed the ARS market and made VRDOs less attractive because of higher costs and the risks associated with renewing liquidity facilities and the possibility the liquidity provider could be downgraded. Costs have come down. But short-term floating rate notes provide the same benefits but are less complex. Issuers have been selling them and banks have been buying.

    Banks also “have a lot of cash and they’re looking for investment opportunities,” Decker said. “Their cost of funding is very, very low, which means the tax hit associated with buying munis is low.”

    Decker said he sees banks continuing to increase their muni holdings in the near-term.

    The outstanding munis of state and local governments and nonprofit organizations were down, 1.3% and 5.5%, respectively, this year from last. But the outstanding munis of nonfinancial corporate businesses were up 1.85% to $518.5 billion this year, according to the report.

    Retail investor and other household sector holdings of munis fell to $1.62 trillion last year from $1.65 trillion in 2012. The household sector is a catch-all category that mostly made up of retail investors but also includes some domestic hedge funds, private equity funds and personal trusts, a Federal Reserve spokesman said.

    Property-casualty insurance company muni holdings rose 1.43% to $332.3 billion last year from 2012 while life insurance company holdings of munis increased 2.82% to $135.1 billion.

    Money market fund holdings of munis fell 8.4% to $308.3 billion at the end of the year from the previous year, while mutual fund holdings were down 2.6% of munis to $610.9 billion. The outflows were mostly driven by sustained low yields and investors looking for yield elsewhere, although it is possible that the financial and bond-related problems of Detroit and Puerto Rico could have had some small effect, Decker said.

    BY LYNN HUME

    MAR 6, 2014 4:18pm ET




    CBO Testimony on Public-Private Partnerships for Highway Projects.

    The United States has a network of over 4 million miles of public roads. That system has faced increasing demands over time: The number of vehicle miles traveled (both passenger and commercial) rose from approximately 700 billion in 1960 to just under 3 trillion in 2012 (see the figure below). In 2012, the federal government and state and local governments spent about $155 billion (in 2013 dollars) to build, operate, and maintain roads. (This testimony adopts the practice of the Federal Highway Administration in using the words “highway” and “road” synonymously.) Almost all of those infrastructure projects were undertaken using a traditional approach in which a state or local government assumes most of the responsibility for carrying out a project and bears most of its risks, such as the possibility of cost overruns, delays in the construction schedule, and, in the case of toll roads, shortfalls in the road’s revenues.

    Some observers assert that an alternative approach, using a public-private partnership, could increase the money available for highway projects and complete the work more quickly or at a lower cost than is possible through the traditional method. Specifically, such a partnership could secure financing for a project through private sources that might require more accountability and could assign greater responsibility to private firms for carrying out the work. For example, a private business might take on the responsibility for specific tasks, such as operations and maintenance, and their accompanying risks.

    This testimony addresses the potential role of the private sector in two aspects of carrying out highway projects: the financing of projects and the provision (that is, the design, construction, operation, and maintenance) of highways. In particular, CBO concludes the following:

    Private financing will increase the availability of funds for highway construction only in cases in which states or localities have chosen to restrict their spending by imposing legal constraints or budgetary limits on themselves. The reason is that revenues from the users of roads and from taxpayers are the ultimate source of money for highways, regardless of the financing mechanism chosen.

    The cost of financing a highway project privately is roughly equal to the cost of financing it publicly after factoring in the costs associated with the risk of losses from the project, which taxpayers ultimately bear, and the financial transfers made by the federal government to states and localities. Any remaining difference between the cost of public versus private financing for a project will stem from the effects of incentives and conditions established in the contracts that govern public-private partnerships.

    On the basis of evidence from a small number of -studies, it appears that such partnerships have built highways slightly less expensively and slightly more quickly, compared with the traditional public-sector approach. The relative scarcity of data on public-private partnerships for highway projects, however, and the uncertainty surrounding the results from the available studies make it difficult to apply their -conclusions definitively to other such projects.

    Read complete document:

    http://www.cbo.gov/sites/default/files/cbofiles/attachments/45157-PublicPrivatePartnerships.pdf




    Largest LBO Puts Energy Future-Backed Bonds at Risk: Muni Credit.

    OppenheimerFunds Inc. and Nuveen Asset Management LLC lead municipal-bond investors that may see as much as $1 billion of combined holdings wiped out as Energy Future Holdings Corp. teeters on the brink of bankruptcy.

    The Texas utility, previously known as TXU Corp., borrowed through three river-management agencies more than a decade ago to pay for pollution control equipment. The company was bought in 2007 in the largest leveraged buyout in history, which added debt to its balance sheet and bumped holders of its munis below other creditors in payment priority. The owner of Texas’s biggest electricity provider has struggled as natural-gas prices sank, and some of the bonds have lost 97 percent of their value.

    “It could get pretty ugly,” said Triet Nguyen, managing partner with Axios Advisors LLC, a research firm in Lake Forest, Illinois, who predicts nearly total losses for holders of Energy Future-backed munis. “They don’t rank very high in the capital structure.”

    The muni obligations are part of the $45.6 billion of debt that the Dallas-based company is trying to restructure after losses in 10 of the past 11 quarters. Warren Buffett, chairman of Berkshire Hathaway Inc., said the utility will “almost certainly” file for bankruptcy this year, unless natural-gas prices soar and raise the cost of electricity. Berkshire suffered an $873 million pretax loss on Energy Future corporate debt and exited the holding last year, Buffett said March 1.

    Largest Holders

    OppenheimerFunds, Nuveen and Federated Investors (FII) Inc. were the largest institutional holders of Energy Future munis, with about $240 million combined, according to the most recent company filings to Bloomberg. About $400 million was held by mutual funds and banks.

    The positions may have changed since the release of the filings, some of which date to 2012. Some of the debt, including holdings of Federated Municipal Obligations Fund (MFCXX), is backed by letters of credit from Citigroup Inc. that expire Sept. 1. The letters give bondholders a backstop.

    Kathleen Cardoza, spokeswoman for Chicago-based Nuveen, didn’t respond to a request for comment. Kaitlyn Downing at OppenheimerFunds in New York declined to comment, as did Scott Helfman, a spokesman for New York-based Citigroup, and Allan Koenig of Energy Future in Dallas.

    Meghan McAndrew, a spokeswoman for Pittsburgh-based Federated Investors, confirmed that debt the company owned is backed by a letter of credit.

    Safety Record

    Local-government bonds are typically safer than corporate securities. The default rate for munis graded by Moody’s Investors Service averaged 0.03 percent for the five years through 2012, according to the firm. Company-bond default rates averaged 1.3 percent in 2012, according to Moody’s.

    The potential for losses on Energy Future munis shows the risk of the segment of the $3.7 trillion municipal market where companies borrow through local authorities.

    Such securities, called industrial-revenue bonds, have produced about 9 percent of muni defaults since 2009, fourth behind land-secured debt, multifamily housing and retirement projects, said Matt Fabian, an analyst with Concord, Massachusetts-based Municipal Market Advisors.

    Standing Back

    Richard Larkin, director of credit analysis at Iselin, New Jersey-based Herbert J. Sims & Co., said he soured on munis backed by the utility as the company took on debt and its management structure changed.

    “It was a good, well-run utility” before the changes, he said. “After 2008, I wouldn’t touch it with a 20-foot pole.”

    Standard & Poor’s predicted in October that investors wouldn’t recover any money on the utility’s unsecured and subordinated bonds, while Moody’s predicted in a September report that holders of unsecured debt would see “very low recoveries.”

    Prices of the bonds have come close to reflecting that expectation. Bonds sold through the Brazos River Authority and maturing in October 2038 traded at about 2.7 cents on the dollar on Feb. 12, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

    The munis were sold through local agencies, including the Brazos agency, and authorities for the Sabine and Trinity rivers.

    Peak Purchase

    The buyout of TXU in 2007 for $48 billion came at the peak of the private-equity boom that ended a year later with the financial crisis.

    Energy Future may become the biggest failure of a private equity-backed company since Chrysler Group LLC in 2009.

    Auditors may raise doubts about the company’s ability to remain a going concern at the end of this month. Such a qualification would constitute a default under terms of the company’s secured debt, Fitch Ratings analysts Shalini Mahajan and Philip Smyth wrote in a December note.

    Energy Future assumed muni debt that TXU had taken on early in the decade.

    The buyout — led by KKR & Co. (KKR), TPG Capital and Goldman Sachs Capital Partners — was a bet that natural gas prices would rise, allowing the company to charge more for electricity. Instead, they have have fallen 67 percent from their 2008 peak amid the development of hydraulic fracturing.

    To contact the reporter on this story: Darrell Preston in Dallas at [email protected]

    To contact the editor responsible for this story: Stephen Merelman at [email protected]






    Copyright © 2024 Bond Case Briefs | bondcasebriefs.com